SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Order Management
Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved.
Order to Cash Lifecycle
Bank
ReconciliationInvoice
Pick
Release
Book
Receipt
Enter
Receivables
Ship
Confirm
Order Management
AutoInvoice
Cash Management
Shipping Execution
Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved.
Objectives
After completing this module, you should be able to:
• Use some of the important Oracle Order Management flows:
– Order to Cash Lifecycle with Standard Items
– Order to Cash Lifecycle with PTO Items
– Drop Shipments
– Back-to-Back Orders
– Sales Agreements
– Order to Cash Lifecycle with Customer Acceptance
Profile Option For New Responsibility
TP:INV Transaction processing mode
Profile Option Name Site Application Responsibility
AP: Use Invoice Batch Controls No
AR: Allow Update Of Existing Sales Credits Yes
AR: Cash - Allow Actions Yes
AR: Keep or Replace Existing Profile Amounts Keep
AR: Mask Bank Account Numbers
Mask - First Four Digits
Visible
AR: Use Statement, Dunning, and Late Charges Site Profiles No
Default Country United States
GL: Data Access Set Vision Operations (USA)
HZ: Change Party Name Yes
INV: Item Master Flexfield System Items
OE: Item Validation Organization Vision Operations
QP: Item Validation Organization Vision Operations
Service: Default Operating Unit
HR: Security Profile Vision Corporation
HR:User Type HR with Payroll User
MO: Default Operating Unit
MO: Operating Unit
MO: Security Profile Vision Corporation
GL Ledger Name Vision Operations (USA)
INV:Override Neg for Backflush No
Run Request == Replicate Seed Data
System Administrator> Requests
https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?_afrLoop=356715836428752&parent=DOCUMENT&sou
rceId=1101666.1&id=1067402.1&_afrWindowMode=0&_adf.ctrl-state=qwj6ljmuz_131
How to Setup a Remit-To Address in Release 12 Oracle Receivables (Doc ID 1101666.1)
https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?_afrLoop=190500665481489&parent=DOCUMENT&sou
rceId=1101855.1&id=1101666.1&_afrWindowMode=0&_adf.ctrl-state=k0mvht6dq_170
Order Management Setup Stapes
1- Creating a User and Assigning Responsibilities
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a user and assign responsibilities to the user
Login
1. Login to the database.
User Name: operations
Password: welcome
2. Select the System Administrator responsibility.
3. Create a User. (N) Security > User > Define
Enter the following information:
a. User: <your chosen login name>
b. Password: <any pwd of your choice; you need to type it twice>
c. Password Expiration: select None
d. Effective Dates: enter dates
4. (M) File > Save.
5. Assign the following responsibilities to your user using (T) Direct Responsibilities:
Responsibility Security Group
Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA) Standard
Inventory, Vision Operations (USA) Standard
Receivables Manager Standard
System Administrator Standard
Purchasing Super User,Vision Operations Standard
CRM Administrator, Vision Enterprises Standard
Oracle Pricing Manager,Global Standard
6. (I) Save.
7. Log out of the operations username and login again using your newly created account. You will be prompted to change
your password.
Note: You can use this account for subsequent logins.
8. Once you have logged in again, select the System Administrator responsibility again and navigate to (N) Security >
Responsibility > Define.
9. Query for the Order Management Super User Vision Operations USA responsibility (F11 and Ctrl-F11).
10. Please ensure that the appropriate menu (shown below) ADS_OM_SUPERMENU is assigned to the OM Super User
responsibility.
11. Save your work and close the Responsibilities window.
Guided Demonstration – Setting Up MOAC
Notes: Enter the following enterprise structure: Top Org with 2 Operating Units. Both Operating Units have an
Inventory Org each.
Responsibility: HRMS Management
(N) > HRMS Manager > Work Structures > Location
1. Enter the following details for some new locations:
 Scope: Global
 Name: enter a name starting with your intials (e.g. SH-OrgLocation)
 Description: any description
 (T) Address Details
2. Address flexfield – enter the following:
 Address Line 1: 301 Patriots Road
 City: San Diego
 State: CA
 Zip Code: 92130
 County: San Diego
 Country: United States
3. (B) OK
4. (N) Inventory > Setup > Organizations > Organizations
5. Click (B) New in the Find window and in the Organizations window, enter the location (SH-OrgLocation) that you
created in the previous steps.
6. (T) Shipping Details:
 Enter a Contact
 The Ship-To Location should default as your location name
 Ensure that the following boxes are checked:
o Ship-To Site
o Bill-To Site
o Receiving Site
o Internal Site
o Office Site
7. (M) Save.
8. Similarly, create locations for your other orgs: OU1, OU2, InvOrg1, InvOrg2. Select the Global button for determining
the scope of the location. Possible names that you could use for the locations:
 SH-OU1-Location
 SH-OU2-Location
 SH-InvOrg1-Location
 SH-InvOrg2-Location
9. (N) > HRMS Manager > Work Structures > Organization > Description
10. A Find window pops up prompting you to search for an org. Click (B) New to create a new org.
11. Create the following orgs in the Organization window one by one. Leave the Type field blank and enter the effective
dates for the org.
Org Name Location Internal or External Organization Classification
SH-TOP SH-OrgLocation Internal GRE/Legal Entity
SH-OU1 SH-OU1-Location Internal Operating Unit
SH-OU2 SH-OU2-Location Internal Operating Unit
SH-InvOrg1 SH-InvOrg1-Location Internal Inventory Organization
SH-InvOrg2 SH-InvOrg2-Location Internal Inventory Organization
When You Define OU Additional Information
When You Define Inventory Organization
12. When you save your work, you will be prompted with a flexfield screen to display more information. Accept all defaults
and enter USA for Legislation and USD for Currency.
13. (N) > HRMS Manager > Work Structures > Organization > Hierarchy
14. Enter a hierarchy for your organization structure.
15. In the Name field enter a Name for your hierarchy.
16. Save your work
17. Enter a Version Number and Start Date for the new hierarchy.
Save Your Work
18. Using F11 and Ctrl-F11, query for your top organization in the Organization region > Name field. Please note that if
your organization classification is a Business Group it will not appear in this search result list.
19. In the Subordinates sub-region, enter the operating units and click the Down arrow key to enter a subordinate (Inventory
Org) for each operating unit.
20. Save your work and exit the window.
21. (N) > HRMS Manager > Security > Profile
22. Enter a Name and a Business Group.
Business Group = Vision Corporation
Name = SH-Security Profile
23. Select the Security Type as Secure organizations by organization hierarchy and/or organization list.
24. Enter your Organization Hierarchy name (you created it in the steps above).
25. Check the Include Top Organization box and the Exclude Business Groups box.
26. Enter Operating Unit in the Classification field and enter the name of your operating unit. You need to do this for both
operating units that you have created.
27. Save your work.
28. Run the Security List Maintenance concurrent program. (M) View > Requests > Security List Maintenance with the
following parameters:
 Generate Lists For: All Security Profiles or One Named Security Profile
29. Responsibility: System Administrator
30. (N) > Profile > System
31. When you have created the security profile, you can assign the value to the MO: Security Profile option at the
responsibility level. You can select the same security profile for multiple responsibilities.
32. Assign a default operating unit to the profile option MO: Default Operating Unit. (N) > Profile > System.
33. Run the Setup Validation Report to check if the setup steps have been performed successfully.
Order Management Setup Validation Report (XML)
Define Inventory Parameter For Inventory Organization
Inventory : Setup-> Organizations -> Organization
Item MasterOrganization
You define items in one organization. To distinguish it from others, we call it the Item Master organization .Other organizations (child organizations)
refer to the Item Master for item definition. After you define an item in the Item Master, you can assign it to any number of other organizations.
There is no functional or technical difference between theItem Master organization and other organizations. However, for simplicity, Oracle recommends
that you limit theItem Master to just an item definition organization.
Oracle also recommends that you do not define multiple item masters. This can make item definition and maintenance confusing. In addition, multipleitem
masters are distinct entities, with no relationship to each other. You cannot associate items in one item master organization with another item master
organization. You cannot copy items across item
master organizations.
To create the item master:
1. Use theOrganization window to create theorganization you want to use as the Item Master.
2. Use theOrganization Parameters window to specify that organization as the Item Master. This is also where you assign child organizations to the Item
Master. Theitem master organization uses itself as the Item Master.
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
You can define and updatedefault inventory and costing parameters for your current organization in the following areas:
1. Inventory Parameters
2. Costing Information
3. Other Account Parameters
4. Revision, Lot, Serial, LPN Parameters
5. ATP, Pick, Item–Sourcing Parameters
6. Defining Inter–Organization Information
7. Defining Warehouse Parameters
1. Enter an organization code for which you want to set up the organization parameter.
2. Select an Item Masterorganization. Oracle Inventory only defines items in the Item Master organization of the organization from which you
enter the Items window.
3. Select a workday calendar. This is required when Oracle Master Scheduling/MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning is installed.
4. Optionally, select a demand class. Demand classes segregate scheduled demand and production into groups, allowing you to track and
consume thosegroups independently. Oracle Master Scheduling/MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning uses this demand class during forecast
consumption, and shipment and production relief.
5. In the Move Order Timeout Periodfield, enter the number of days a move order requisition can wait for approval.
The workflow approvalprocess sends a notification to the item planner when a move order requisition requires approval.
After the first timeout period, if the recipient has not approved or rejected theorder, a reminder notice is sent. After the second timeout period, the
order is automatically approved or rejected, depending on whether you select Approveautomatically or Reject automatically in the MoveOrder
Timeout Action field. If you want to bypass themove order approvalprocess and automatically approvemove order requisitions, enter 0 days in
the MoveOrder Timeout Period field and select Approveautomatically in the MoveOrder Timeout Action field.
6. Select a move order timeout action
Approve automatically: After the second timeout period, move order requisitions are automatically approved. Select this option and set the Move
Order Timeout Period to 0 if you want to bypass themove order approvalprocess and automatically approvemove order requisitions.
Reject automatically: After the second timeout period, move order requisitions are automatically rejected.
7. Select a locatorcontrol option:
None: Inventory transactions within this organization do not require locator information.
Prespecified only: Inventory transactions within this organization require a valid, predefined locator for each item.
Dynamic entry allowed: Inventory transactions within this organization require a locator for each item. You can choose a valid, predefined locator,
or define a locator dynamically at thetime of transaction.
Determined at subinventory level: Inventory transactions use locator control information that you define at the subinventory level.
 Indicate whether to allownegative balances. Determines whether inventory transactions can drive the inventory balance of an item negative.
Attention: If insufficient quantity on hand exists in a supply subinventory to satisfy backflush demand, Oracle Work in Process forces the supply
subinventory balance negative, ignoring this option setting.
 Auto delete allocation at Move Order cancellation
 Indicate whether this organization is an Oracle Warehouse Management enabled organization. You can use WMS features such as LPNs, task
management, warehouse execution rules and cost
groups in this organization. Locator control must be enabled in order to enable WMS. Once this has been enabled and transactions have been
entered in this organization, this box cannot be unchecked.
 Indicate whether this organization is enabled for Quality inspection.
 Indicate whether this organization is an Oracle Enterprise Asset Management enabled Organization.
 Enter a total load weight and unit of measure for this organization.
 Enter a total volume and unit of measure for this organization.
8 . Select a Default On-handMaterial Status tracking option. This step is optional.
Attention:You cannot updatethis field for existing organizations. To enable this field, you must submit the Activate Onhand Level Material Status
Tracking concurrent program.
9. Indicate whether locator aliases must be unique across the organization.
1. Costing Organization
2. Costing Method
3. Transferto GL Indicate whether all transactions are posted in detail to thegeneral ledger.
Caution: Transferring detail transaction distributions to the general ledger increases general ledger posting times due to the number of records created.
4. Reverse Encumbrance Indicate whether to reverse encumbrance entry upon receipt in inventory.
You normally select this option if you use encumbrances with Oracle Purchasing.
5. Optionally, enter a Cost Cutoff Date
If you leave this field blank, all available transactions will be costed as usual. If you enter a date, all transactions prior to this date will be costed. All
transactions on or later than this date will not be costed.
For inter–organization transfers, a standard costing, receiving organization will not cost a receipt if the sending organization did not already cost the
transaction.
The default time is the first instant of the date. You can optionally choose another time.
The standard cost updateprocess can be performed on thecost cutoff date. You can restart cost processing by changing the cutoff date to blank, or a future
date.
6. Default Material Subelement
For standard costing, select a material sub–element that this organization uses as a default when you define item costs. For average costing, the default
material sub–element you select can be used for cost collection when Project Cost Collection Enabled is set.
7. Material Over headSubelement
Optionally, select a Default Material Overhead Sub–Element from the list of values. During the Supply Chain Rollup process, when costs are merged from
another organization, markup and shippingcosts will use this value.
The supply chain cost rollup will complete successfully, regardless of whether this field is populated. If the Cost Rollup identifies an organization with a
default material overhead sub–element not set up, a corresponding warning message will be printed in the log file.
8. Default Cost Group
Indicate thedefault cost group for the organization. This will default into theDefault Cost Group field for each subinventory. If theWMS cost group rules
engine fails to find a cost group, this cost group will be used.
9. Valuation Accounts
You choose a default valuation account when you define organization parameters. Under standard costing, theseaccounts are defaulted when you define
subinventories and can be overridden. Under average costing, these accounts (except for Expense) are used for subinventory transactions and cannot be
updated. For a detailed discussion of cost
elements.
Material An asset account that tracks material cost. For average costing, this account holds your inventory
and intransit values. Once you performtransactions, you cannot change this account.
Material OverheadAn asset account that tracks material overhead cost.
Resource An asset account that tracks resource cost.
Overhead An asset account that tracks resource and outsideprocessing overheads.
Outside processing An asset account that tracks outside processing cost.
Expense Theexpense account used when tracking a non–asset item.
Enter The Following Valuation Account
Account Type Account
Material 01-000-1410-0000-000
Material Overhead 01-000-1420-0000-000
Resource 01-000-1440-0000-000
Overhead 01-000-1430-0000-000
Outside processing 01-000-1450-0000-000
Expense 01-520-7530-0000-000
Revision, Lot, Serial, LPN Parameters
Enter a starting revision to be thedefault for each new item.
Lot Number
1. Select an option for lot number uniqueness.
Across items: Enforce unique lot numbers for items across all organizations.
None: Unique lot numbers are not required.
2. Select an option for lot number generation.
User–defined: Enter user–defined lot numbers when you receive items.
At organization level: Define the starting prefix and lot number information for items using the values you enter in thePrefix, Zero Pad Suffix, and Total
Length fields. When you receive items, this information is used to automatically generate lot numbers for your items.
At item level: Define thestarting lot number prefix and thestarting lot number when you define theitem. This information is used to generate a lot number
for the item when it is received.
3. Indicate whether to add zeroes to right–justify the numeric portion of lot numbers (Zero Pad Suffix).
4. Optionally, select an alphanumeric lot number prefix to use for system–generated lot numbers when generation is at the organization level.
5. Optionally, define the maximum length for lot numbers. If you use Oracle Work in Process and you set theWIP parameter to default the lot number based
on inventory rules, then WIP validates thelength of the lot number against the length you define in this field.
Serial Number
1. Select an option for serial number uniqueness.
Within inventory items: Enforce unique serial numbers for inventory items.
Within organization: Enforce unique serial numbers within the current organization.
Across organizations: Enforce unique serial numbers throughout all organizations.
2. Select an option for serial number generation.
At organization level: Define the starting prefix and serial number information for items using the information you enter in the following fields of this
window.
At item level: Define thestarting serial number prefix and the starting serial number when you define the item.
3. Optionally, select an alphanumeric serial number prefix to use for system–generated serial numbers when generation is at theorganization level.
4. Optionally, enter a starting serial number to use for system–generated serial numbers.
If serial number generation is at the organization level you must enter a starting serial number.
5. Indicate whether the systemwill suggest serial numbers as part of the move order line allocating process. If you do not select this option, you must
manually enter theserial numbers in order to transact the move order.
ATP, Pick, Item–Sourcing Parameters
Select a default ATP rule.
ATP rules define the options used to calculate the quantity of an item.
If you are using Oracle Order Management, the default is the ATP rule for the Master organization.
Picking Defaults
Select a default picking rule.
Picking rules define the priority that order management functions use to pick items.
Notes:This rule will not be employed in a WMSenabled organization. TheWMS picking rules will be used.
Enter a default subinventory picking order.
This value indicates the priority with which you pick items from a subinventory, relative to another subinventory, in which a given item resides.
The value you enter here displays as thedefault when you define a subinventory.
Enter a default locator picking order.
This value indicates the priority with which you pick items from a locator, relative to another locator, where a given item resides. Thevalue you enter here
displays as the default when you define a locator.
Check thePick Confirmation Requiredbox if you want your pickers to manually pick confirm. If you do not check the box, pick confirmation will occur
automatically.
Item-Sourcing Default
Select a source type for item replenishment.
Inventory:Replenish items internally from another subinventory in the same organization or another organization.
Supplier: Replenish items externally, from a supplier you specify in Oracle Purchasing.
None: No default source for item replenishment.
Select the organization usedto replenish items.
You must enter a value in this field if you selected Inventory in the Typefield.
Select the subinventory usedto replenish items.
You must enter a value in this field if you selected your current organization in the Organization field. You cannot enter a value in this field if you selected
Supplier in the Typefield.
Other Account
Encumbrance: An expense account used to recognize thereservation of funds when a purchaseorder is approved.
Inventory A/P Accrual : Theliability account that represents all inventory purchaseorder receipts not matched in Accounts Payable, such as the uninvoiced
receipts account.
Purchase Price Variance : Thevariance account used to record differences between purchaseorder price and standard cost. This account is not used with
the average cost method.
Invoice Price Variance : Thevariance account used to record differences between purchaseorder price and invoice price. This account is used by Accounts
Payable to record invoice price variance.
Cost of Goods Sold: Theprofit and loss (income statement) account that tracks the default cost of goods sold account.
Sales: Theprofit and loss (income statement) account that tracks thedefault revenue account.
Project Clearance Account: When performing miscellaneous issues to capital projects, theproject clearance account is used to post thedistributions.
Average Cost Variance: Under average costing with negative quantity balances, this account represents theinventory valuation error caused by issuing
your inventory before your receipts.
Cost Variance Will Appear when you Issue Value from inventory greater than current inventory value
Note: For standard costing, only the Purchase Price Variance, Inventory A/P Accrual, Invoice Price Variance, Expense, Sales and Cost of Goods Sold
accounts are required. Theother accounts are used as defaults to speed your set up.
Note: For average costing, only theMaterial, Average Cost Variance, Inventory A/P Accrual, Invoice Price Variance, Expense, Sales and Cost of Goods Sold
accounts are required. Theother accounts are used as defaults or are not required.
Enter The Following Other Account Information:
Account Type Account
Purchase Price Variance 01-520-5210-0000-000
Invoice Price Variance 01-520-5220-0000-000
Inventory AP Accrual 01-000-2220-0000-000
Encumbrance
Sales 01-520-4110-0000-000
Cost of Goods Sold 01-450-5110-0000-000
Deferred COGS Account 01-450-5110-0000-000
Cost Variance Account 01-000-1410-0000-000
Repeat This Steps Fro To Organization SH 1 And SH 2
Organization Access
Receiving Options
Account Type Account
Receiving Inventory Account 01-000-1410-0000-000
Clearing Account 01-000-1410-0000-000
Subinventories
Subinventories are unique physicalor logical separations of material inventory, such as raw inventory, finished goods, or defective material. All material
within an organization resides in a subinventory. There are two types of subinventories within Warehouse Management, storage and receiving.
Storage subinventories are intermediate or final put away locations for material. Material that resides in a storage subinventory app ears in on hand quantity,
and is tracked by thesystem. Thesystemcan book orders against, and use manufacturing processes on material that resides in a storage subinventory. You
must define at least one storage subinventory for your implementation.
Receiving subinventories. Optionally, you can create receiving subinventories to track material in the receiving area. You use receiving
subinventories when you want to track thematerial as soon as it enters thewarehouse before an operator puts it away. Receiving subinventories enable
managers to see where the material resides as soon as it enters the warehouse. Material located in a receiving subinventory does not appear in on hand
quantity, and thesystemcannot reserve the material.
An operator can also only specify a receiving subinventory if they are using a mobile device to receive the material.
Note: Operators cannot transfer material from a storage subinventory to a receiving subinventory.
All material within an organization is held in a subinventory therefore, you must define at least one subinventory.
Table : MTL_SECONDARY_INVENTORIES
Header
1. Enter a unique alphanumeric name.
2. Indicate thematerial status of this subinventory, which controls the enabled transactions for all material in this subinventory. The status is not overridden
by the status of any locator, lot or serial, within this subinventory. The statuses of thoseobjects will be considered when determining transactions that are not
enabled. This field is
used if you have Oracle Warehouse Management installed.
3. Indicate thedefault cost group for this subinventory. If the cost group assignment rules fail to identify a cost group for newly received material, this cost
group will be assigned. This cost group will remain with the material, even through subinventory transfers, until you perform a cost group change transaction.
This feature is available if you have Oracle Warehouse Management installed, and you are working with a WMS enabled organization.
4. Select the subinventory typefromthedrop down list. Theavailable choices are as follows:
Storage: Designates the subinventory as a Storage subinventory.
Receiving: Designates thesubinventory as a receiving subinventory, and links it to a receiving location. This subinventory typeis used only for receiving
material. Material in this typeof subinventory cannot be on–hand, or reserved.
Null: No subinventory designation
Parameters
Following are the important parameters that we must define
1. Quantity trackedIndicate whether each transaction for this subinventory updates thequantity on hand for the subinventory (Quantity Tracked).
If you leave this option unchecked, on–hand balances are not maintained and you cannot check or updatethe Asset Inventory, Include in ATP, Reservable, or
Nettable options. You can updatethis value only if there is no on–hand quantity, no pending transaction, or no uncosted transaction for the subinventory.
2. Asset Subinventory:Indicate whether to maintain thevalue of this subinventory on the balance sheet (Asset Subinventory). You can updatethis value
only if there is no on–hand quantity for the subinventory.
3. Include in ATP: Indicate whether to include items in this subinventory in ATP calculations.
4. Depreciable: Indicate whether to designate items in this subinventory as depreciable.
This data is needed to support depreciableand location information in the Subinventory Setup from the Oracle Network Logistics product.
5. Allow Reservation: Indicate whether to include this subinventory when you perform available–to–reserve calculations.
6 Nettable: Indicate whether theplanning process uses the on–hand balance of thesesubinventory items as available inventory (Nettable).
7. LPN Controlled: Indicate if material may be packed into an LPN in thesubinventory. If this is unchecked, all LPNs transacted into this subinventory will
be automatically unpacked, and LPNs cannot be packed into this subinventory. This feature is available if you have Oracle Warehouse Management
installed, and you are working with a WMS enabled organization
8. Select a type of locator control.
You can select an option only if you selected locator control as Determined at subinventory level in the Locator Control field in the Organization Parameters
window. You can only updatethis option if there is no on–hand quantity for the subinventory.
None: Inventory transactions within this subinventory do not require locator information.
Prespecified: Inventory transactions within this subinventory require you to enter a valid predefined locator for each item.
Dynamicentry: Inventory transactions within this subinventory require you to enter a locator for each item. You may choose a valid predefined locator, or
define a locator dynamically at thetime of transaction.
Item level: Inventory transactions uselocator control information that you define at the item level.
9. Optionally, enter an inactive date for thesubinventory.
10. Enter a location for the subinventory. If the Subinventory typeis Receiving, this field is mandatory.
Lead times
Optionally, enter pre–processing, processing, and post–processinglead times for items in this subinventory.
These lead times are used when you use min–max planning at the subinventory level.
Sourcing
Inventory:Replenish items internally, from another organization.
Supplier: Replenish items externally, from a supplier you specify in Oracle Purchasing.
Subinventory: Replenish items internally, from another subinventory in the same inventory organization.Navigate to the Subinventories Summary folder
window. Choose New. The Subinventories window appears.
subinventory account information
Enter the general ledger accounts. The default accounts are thosedefined for the organization in the Organization Parameters window. If y ou are using
average costing, you may enter thevaluation accounts, but they are not used. Average costing uses only the Expense and Encumbrance accounts. If you use
standard costing, and Oracle Bills of Material is installed, all asset accounts are required. If you use standard costing, and Oracle Bills of Materialis not
installed, you are only required to enter the Materialand MaterialOverhead accounts.
Define Subinventory ForOrg SH1
Subinventory Code Description Status Type Locator Control Quantity Tracked
SH FGI Finished Goods Inventory Active Storage Item Level Selected
SH Stage Stage Active Storage Dynamic Entry Selected
SH Main Main Stores Active Storage Dynamic Entry Selected
Setting OM System Parameters
Define a territory in Oracle Order Management
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to define a territory in Oracle Order Management
Login
Login to the database using the User Name and Password supplied by your instructor.
Choose Responsibility
Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility is selected.
Define a Territory
(N) Receivables> Transactions > AutoInvoice > Territories
1. Name: XX-Territory.
2. Description: Territory for XX.
3. Flexfield (list of values):
 Area:APAC
 Country: Your choice
 Region: Your choice
4. Active: Enable
5. Effective Dates:
 Start: Today’s date
 End: Leave blank
6. Save.
Setting OM System Parameters
Parameters in the Oracle Order Management Parameters window can be functionally grouped,and you can define controls as easily as
defining profile options.
OM System Parameters allows you to define new parameters and setting up the values for the parameters using different sources like SQL
and constant values.
This is step five of the Order Management Setup Steps, page 2-3.
Defining Parameters
Create and define parameters using the following attributes:
• Parameter Code: Unique code for the new parameter
• Name: Name of the parameter
• Description: Description of the parameter
• Category: Category the parameter belongs to. The category is controlled using the lookup type "OM_PARAMETER_CATEGORY." To
create a new category, add the lookup code in the lookup type "OM_PARAMETER_CATEGORY" and then enter that lookup type in your
parameter definition window.
• Value Set: Value Set associated as the source of values.The possible value sets can have validation types of NONE or TABLE. For seeded
parameters please make sure that you use a value set that begins with "ONT."
• Open Orders Check: Provides a control to allow or restrict changes to the parameter value once it is set for a given operating unit.
• Enabled: Controls the availability of the parameter. For seeded parameters this field is active for internal users.
• Seeded: Indicates whether the parameter is seeded or user-defined. This is only active for internal users.
To define Order Management system parameters:
1. Navigate to the Define OM System Parameters window. Order Management >
Setup > SystemParameters > Define
Warning:You cannot have any open orders when performing updates to Order Management Parameters.
If open orders are found, a warning message displays. Select the OK button to ignore the Warning or select the Cancel button to not commit
changes.
2. Enter a unique code in the Parameter Code field.
3. Enter a name for the parameter in the Name field.
4. Enter a description of the parameter in the Description field.
5. Select the category from the Category field that the parameter belongs to.
This is controlled with a lookup. To create a new category,add the lookup code in the lookup type "OM_PARAMETER_CATEGORY" and
then enter that lookup type in the parameter definition window.
6. In the Value Set field, enter a value set associated as the source of values.
The possible value sets can have validation types of NONE or TABLE. For seeded parameters, use a value set that begins with "ONT."
7. Select a value from the Open Orders Check field. This provides a control to allow or restrict changes to the parameter value once it is set
for a given operating unit.
Available options are Allow, Give error, or Give warning.
8. When the Enabled box is selected the parameter is available to use. For seeded parameters this field is active only for internal users.
9. The Seeded check box indicates if the parameter is a seeded parameter or a user defined parameter. This is active only for internal users.
10. Save your changes and click OK. To cancel without saving any changes,click
Cancel.
Setting Parameter Values
You can set up parameter values at the operating unit level by specifying following
attributes:
• Operating Unit: Select the operating unit from the available list of values for which parameter values are to be set.
• Category: Select the category. On selection all the parameters for the selected category display.
• Show All: Check this to see all the parameters of all the categories.
• Parameter: Displays the name of the parameter for the selected category.
• Value: Parameter value of the parameter. This field shows a list of values based on value set attached with the parameter definition.
• Description: Displays description of the parameter currently selected.
Note: If Multi-Org Access Control is enabled, you can manage System Parameter values across all Operating Units accessible to you via your
MO: Security Profile.
To set up Order Management system parameter values:
1. Navigate to the Define OM System Parameters window. Order Management >
Setup > System Parameters > Values
2. Select the operating unit from the available list of values.
The Operating Unit field displays yourdefault Operating Unit, however you can pick a different one from the list of values to manage
parameters in it.
3. The Category field identifies the category to which the parameter belongs.
The available parameters and their currently selected values display.
Select the Show All check box to display all the parameters for all categories.
4. In the value field next to the parameter you want to set,select a value.
The Value field displays a list of values available for each respective parameter.
The Description field describes the currently selected parameter.
5. Save your changes and click OK. To cancel without saving any changes,click Cancel.
Generic Parameters
Audit Trail
The audit trail parameter is used in order to capture audit history at either order entry or booking.
You can select either Disable, Enable when Order is Entered or Enable when Order is Booked.
The default is Null - Disabled. When the default is set, then you can also capture cancellation history of entered orders. Previously, the
processing constraint used to maintain a history of cancellations of orders when Require Reason action was selected.
Customer Relationships
The default value is Single Customer.
Customer Relationship Parameter Setting Examples
The table below lists sample customers, their sites and business purposes.
Sample Customers, Sites, and Business Purpose
Customer Site Bill-to Ship-to Deliver-to
A X Yes Yes Yes
B Y Yes No No
B Z No Yes Yes
C W Yes Yes Yes
The table below lists the relationships that exist between these sample customers.
The data within the table will be used to describe how each of the profile option settings controlthe list of values for available for order data
fields when placing an order.
RelationshipsBetween Sample Customers
Customer RelatedTo
Customer
Bill To Relationship
Flag
ShipTo
RelationshipFlag
A None
B A Yes Yes
C None
If the parameter for Customer Relationships is set to Single, using the data within the second table, when placing an order for Customer A:
• The eligible Bill To, Ship To, and Deliver To location is Customer A, Site X If the parameter for Customer Relationships is set to Related
Customers, using the data within the second table, when placing an order for Customer A:
• The eligible Ship To and Deliver To locations are Customer A, Site X and Customer B, Site Z
• The eligible Bill To locations are Customer A, Site X and Customer B, Site Y If the parameter for Customer Relationships is set to All
Customers, when placing an order for Customer A:
• The eligible Ship To, and Deliver To locations are all customers and all of their ship-to sites and deliver-to sites respectively, within the first
table.
• The eligible Bill To locations are all customers and all of their Bill To sites within the first table.
Item Validation Organization
In Order Management, the Item Validation Organization parameter indicates the Oracle Manufacturing organization against which items
are validated. Organization is synonymous with warehouse in Order Management. You set the Item Validation
Organization parameter in the Parameters window, and can only set the value to the operating unit associated with your current sign on
responsibility. You must also define all transactable items in this organization.
Note: Before setting this parameter, you should first setup values for:
HR: Security Profile
HR: Business Group profile options.Valid inventory master organizations will be available based on values of HRMS profile settings.
Invoicing Parameters
Over Shipment Invoice Basis
This parameter determines whether to invoice the ordered quantity or the shipped quantity for an over shipment.
This parameter can be overridden for the parameter specific to customers or customer sites by setting a value in the Customer window.
Default value is Shipped.
Receivables (AR) Required Steps For Order Management
The objective of this document is to provide step by step instructions on the setups required in Receivables (AR) in order for you
to create simple transactions.
If You Have Oracle Support Account You Can See That In URL:
https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?_afrLoop=356715836428752&parent=DOCUMENT&sourceId=110
1666.1&id=1067402.1&_afrWindowMode=0&_adf.ctrl-state=qwj6ljmuz_131
1. Define Common Accounts Receivable Configuration
Common Accounts configuration pertains to the Accounting Flexfield setup.
This is done in the General Ledger (GL) application. The assumption of this case study is that you have already
defined your accounting flexfield segments, and can create and complete manual transactions using the Transaction
Workbench.
If you need more information on how to set up your Accounting Flexfield, refer to the Oracle General Ledger
Implementation Guide, page 1-33.
Manage Receivables System Options
Realized Gains Account 01-740-7830-0000-000
Realized Losses Account 01-740-7840-0000-000
Tax Account 01-000-2520-0000-000
Unallocated Revenue Account
Cross Currency Rounding Account 01-740-7826-0000-000
Header Rounding Account 01-740-7827-0000-000
The settings in System Options that impact AutoInvoice are in the Trans and Customers tab.
The following screenshot shows recommended settings for fields in the 'AutoInvoice' Section.
Also highlighted is the Grouping rule we defined earlier.
Log file message level = 10 provides the most detailed debug messages, and is useful when you are debugging or
troubleshooting.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Setup > System > System Options
To see how to Manage Receivable System Options, please refer to Note 1068052.1, How To Manage Receivables
System Options For AutoInvoice.
Additional information on the Tuning Segments, refer to the Oracle Receivables User's Guide, page 2-210.
14. Manage Receivables Accounting Periods
Open or close periods in your accounting calendar to control the recording of accounting information for these
periods. Since the objective of AutoInvoice is to create new transactions, the goal is to have these transactions impact
open GL periods.
Ensure that the GL_DATE value you provide in the next task is within an open period.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Control > Accounting > Open/Close periods
To see how to Manage Receivable Accounting Periods, please refer to Note 1069057.1, How To Manage Receivables
Accounting Periods.
2. Manage Receivables Descriptive Flexfields
Oracle Receivables uses the transaction flexfields to uniquely identify each transaction line that is imported though
AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice is capable of using information from four types of transaction flexfields:
 Line Transaction Flexfield
 Link-to Transaction Flexfield
 Reference Transaction Flexfield
 Invoice Transaction Flexfield
More details on each of these types is available in Note 1068344.1, Setting Up Receivables Descriptive Flexfields.
For this case study, you need to setup a Line Transaction Flexfield as shown below.
Click on the segments button to create the following rows. The values in the field Column are not shown completely,
they are INTERFACE_LINE_ATTRIBUTE1 and INTERFACE_LINE_ATTRIBUTE2 respectively.
3. Manage Receivables Profile Options
Several Profile options impact the behavior of AutoInvoice.
Please refer to Note 1069294.1, Setting Up System Profile Options For AutoInvoice for details.
4. Manage Transaction Types
The data you insert into the interface table will be associated to a particular transaction type.
Create an invoice transaction type which will be used when we insert data into the Interface table.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Setup > Transactions > Transaction Types
Name Account
Receivable Account 01-000-1210-0000-000
Revenue Account 01-000-4504-0000-000
Unbilled Receivable Account 01-000-1210-0000-000
Clearing Account 01-000-1222-0000-000
Tax Account 01-000-2510-0000-000
Freight Account 01-000-7220-0000-000
Unearned Revenue Acct. 01-000-1210-0000-000
Note:If you also want to run a test case to import a Credit memo, create a Credit Memo transaction type as shown
below, otherwise you don't need to create a Credit Memo transaction type.
To see more details on how to create new transaction types, please refer to Note 1067797.1, Setting Up Transaction
Types In Receivables.
Please note that if you want to use the AutoAccounting functionality (next task), and some of the segments of the
Account are sourced from the transaction type, then you must define GL accounts in the Accounts tab.
5. Manage AutoAccounting Rules
AutoAccounting enables you to create default accounts for revenue, receivable, freight, tax, unearned revenue,
unbilled receivable, late charges, bills receivables accounts, and AutoInvoice clearing (suspense) accounts.
In the following screen, the source for the third segment is 'Transaction Types'. When the default accounting is
generated for the Receivable account, the accounting flexfield will pull the third segment from the Receivables
account defined for the transaction type. If we cross-reference this to the screenshot from the previous task, the value
for the third segment is 1210, coming from 01-000-1210-0000-000 defined for Receivables account.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Setup > Transactions > AutoAccounting
During AutoInvoice, you are interfacing data with the intention of creating complete transactions automatically.
Hence, you are advised to complete the setup for AutoAccounting so that AutoInvoice can determine the GL accounts
to use for your interfaced transactions, and process them completely without errors and without the need for manual
intervention.
To see how to manage and setup AutoAccounting, please refer to Note 1069052.1, Setting Up AutoAccounting Rules
In Receivables.
6. Manage AutoInvoice Line Ordering Rules
If you want the data in your interface table to be created in a particular sort order, define Line Ordering Rules.
The following screenshot shows a Line Ordering Rule, that references the same fields we used in the Line transaction
flexfield defined in Task 2 above.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Setup > Transactions > AutoInvoice > Line Ordering Rules
To see how to manage and setup AutoInvoice Line Ordering Rules, please refer to Note 1067965.1, How to Manage
Line Ordering When Using Autoinvoice To Import.
7. Manage AutoInvoice Grouping Rules
Grouping rules specify attributes that must be identical for lines to be created as one transaction. Grouping rules
always include the mandatory attributes, and to this is added optional attributes that you define in your grouping rule.
The following screenshot shows a Grouping Rule that uses the Line Ordering Rule defined in Task 6 above.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Setup > Transactions > AutoInvoice > Grouping Rules
To see how to manage and setup AutoInvoice Grouping Rules, please refer to Note 1067993.1, How To Use
Grouping Rules With AutoInvoice.
8. Manage Receivables Payment Terms
Payment terms let you define the due date to be calculated for transactions. When you interface data, it
is mandatory to provide either a TERM_ID or a TERM_NAME in the RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL table
(depending on how you have set up your transaction batch source). Although there is a defaulting mechanism for
payment term when entering transactions manually in the form, this is defaulting is not available during AutoInvoice,
because it would significantly slow down the performance of the process.
The following screenshot shows a Payment term we will use in our interface data.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Setup > Transactions > Payment Terms
To see how to manage and setup Payment Terms, please refer to Note 1069049.1, How To Define Transaction
Payment Terms In Receivables.
9. Manage Transaction Sources
Batch sources define default information such as transaction type and automatic numbering.
There are two types available: Manual and Imported.
AutoInvoice requires a batch of type Imported.
The following screenshot shows a Transaction source we will use to interface data via AutoInvoice.
Highlighted below is the transaction type we created earlier, here we are associating it to this Imported Batch Source.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Setup > Transactions > Sources
Following screenshots show the sub-tab for the Transaction Sources form:
The AutoInvoice Options tab highlights the Grouping rule created earlier. The setup indicates this batch will group
data as specified in this grouping rule.
The following screenshots show the rest of the sub-tabs of this form, including Customer, Accounting, Salescredit and
other information. You need to define whether the data you will interface provides the Value or the ID so that
AutoInvoice can validate the data.
Customer Information tab:
Accounting Information tab:
Other Information tab:
Sales Credit Validation tab:
To see how to manage and setup Transaction Sources, please refer to Note 1068008.1, Creating Transaction Sources
Used For AutoInvoice.
10. Manage Receipt Classes and Methods
To default a payment method to the transactions you interface via AutoInvoice, you need to define a Receipt Class
and Method for your transaction to use.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Setup > Receipts > Receipt Classes
To see how to manage and setup Receipt Classes and Methods, please refer to Note 1071284.1, Setting Up Receipt
Class And Method For AutoInvoice.
11. Manage Receivables Customer Profile Classes
Oracle Receivables provides a profile class DEFAULT.
If necessary, you can define different customer profile classes to categorize your customers.
You can associate Customer Profile classes to customer records you create later.
By using a profile class you default certain attributes/fields into the customer records to make customer maintenance
more efficient.
The following screenshot defines a new customer profile class, to which we associate the Payment Term from Task
8 and the grouping rule from Task 7.
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation: Customers > Profile Classes
To see how to manage and setup Customer Profile Classes, please refer to Note 1071218.1, How To Define Customer
Profile Classes For AutoInvoice.
Remit-To Address Setup
1. Setting Up a Remit-To Address
Define remit-to addresses to let your customers know where to send payment for their invoices.
Receivables uses the addresses that you define in the Remit To Addresses window to provide default remit-to
information when you enter transactions.
Note: Receivables does not provide default remit-to information when you enter credit memos.
A. Define System Options and Profile Options
Responsibility:Receivables Manager
Navigation:Setup > System > System Options
Select the Miscellaneous Tab and enter values for the following:
If you check the Print Remit-To Address box in the System Options window, Receivables prints the remit-to address that you
define here on your dunning letters and statements. The width and height (in characters) of your customer's remit-to address in
your printed dunning letters is 8 characters (height) by 30 characters (width)
Responsibility:System Administrator
Navigation: Profile > System
You can only enter information in the alternate name field when defining a Remit-to Address if the profile option
AR: Customers - Enter Alternate Fields is Yes.
Receivables also uses the alternate name to sort customer names in certain reports if the profile option AR: Sort Customer
Reports by Alternate Fields is Yes.
B. Navigate to the Remit-To Address Form
Responsibility: Receivables Manager
Navigation:Setup > Print > Remit To Address > Create Remit-To Address
C. Select the Country
Default: Country defaults from the System Options Window
Impact: If you have implemented flexible address formats and the country you enter has an address style assigned to it,
Receivables opens a window in which you can enter address information in the style most appropriate for that country.
Notice in the screenshot below, we change the country to Canada and the "Province" field is now displayed.
d. Enter an Alternate Name
Enter an Alternate Name for this address (optional). This field is used in some reports. See step 1a for more information.
The 'Alternate Address Name' is not rendered by default in Release 12. Users can use Forms Personalization to personalize the
address block by setting the Render flag to True for Alternate Address Name field. See Bug BUG:8571973
e. Enter a remit-to Address
Note: The release 12 Receivables Implementation Guide incorrectly refers to an obsolete PostalCode field on the Receivables
System Options. This setup is no longer used in Release 12. Internal Documentation Bug 9715200 will correct this in a future
version of the manual.
Verify that your Remit-To address is associated with the proper Operating Unit
Once you have completed the address,select "Apply"
f. Re-Query the Remit-To Address
After you apply and save you will be returned ot the Remit-To Address search window. Enter the country name and select Go.
g. Identify the Customer Addresses that will use this Remit-To
Select the radio button next to the address created in step 1e and then select "Create"
Optionally Enter a State and/or range of Postal Codes for each country. You can define multiple assignments for a remit-to
address that has the same country or state, but different postal code ranges.
In the example below we first created a range that covers the western United States.
Next we created a range for the same Remit-To address that covers the entire country of Canada.
In this scenario one address could be used for all remittance in both areas.
1st Range:
2nd Range:
After adding both ranges the Remit-To will show as follows:
2. Assigning a Default Remit-To Address
Define default remit-to addresses to ensure that:
 Receivables is able to provide a default remit-to address when you enter transactions
 AutoInvoice will not reject invoices because it is not able to determine a remit-to address
You can only have one default remit-to address for each country or Country + State combination.
In the example from step 1g, the address is the Default Remit-To address for Canada.
If we wished to also make this the default Remit-To address for the United States we could create a third combination
and fill in only the country of United States.
Note: It is a best practice to set up a default remit-to address even if you do not anticipate requiring this value. If for example
you have a default remit-to for the United States,you can also define alternate remit-to address to be used with different zip-code
ranges which take priority over the default due to their more granular definitions.
3. Troubleshooting
Refer to Note 1101855.1 Troubleshooting Receivables Remit To Address Errors
Perform Oracle Inventory Setup
Perform all setup steps required for Oracle Inventory,then perform the following.
• Set up internal locations for Human Resources for your Inventory Organizations
• Map inventory organizations to internal locations
Organizations
Define at least one of the following:
• Item validation organization
• Organization as inventory source for internal orders
• Organization for receiving purposes,if you use drop ship orders Your item validation organization can be the same as your inventory source
or your logical receiving organization, but you cannot use one organization for all three purposes.
Note: If you change the location of your organization, after delivery details have been created, then the new location will not take effect as the
ship from location until new transactions are created.
Each delivery detail needs to be updated with the new location if the ship from location needs to be changed on current deliv eries.
Pick Confirmation
The Pick Confirmation Required check box affects the behavior of the picking process in
Shipping Execution. Navigate: Oracle Shipping > Set up > Organization Parameters >
ATP, Picking, Item- Sourcing tab.
If the Pick Confirmation Required check box is selected, then the systemrequires you to navigate to Inventory forms or Pick Confirm using a
mobile device to perform a manual pick confirmation of the move order that was generated as a result of the Pick Release process.
The pick confirmation process acknowledges the transfer of the item being picked from its source location to the default staging location.
If the Pick Confirmation Required check box is deselected (the default) for new installs, the systemperforms the pick confirmation process
automatically based on sourcing rules set up in Oracle Inventory.
Organization Parameters Window - ATP, Pick, Item-Sourcing Tab
Staging Subinventory
Create at least one staging subinventory for each organization. Move orders record the movement of pick released material to staging
subinventories.Staging subinventories should be Reservable .
Defining Shipping Document Sets
You can group related shipping documents and other reports in a set that can be printed at pick release or ship confirm. You can include a
variety of shipping documents in a set such as a Bill of Lading and Packing Slip Report and determine the print sequence.
Shipping Execution provides three pre-defined (seeded) document sets:
• All Pick Release documents: You can set the default Pick Release Document Set in the Pick Release tab of the Shipping Parameters window
• Ship Confirm documents: You can set the default in the Document Set field of the ship confirm window
• Pack Slip only (at ship confirm): You can set the default in the Document Set field of the ship confirm window
Note: You can create additional document sets based on your business needs.
To define document sets:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Document Sets window.
Shipping DocumentSets Window
2. Enter a Name and Description for the new document set.
3. Select the Usage for the document set:
• Pick Release: For printing at pick release
• Ship Confirm: For printing at ship confirm
4. Optionally, enter the Effective Dates for the document set.
5. The default Printing Method is parallel. This submits the reports for printing separately, each with a different request ID.
If one of the reports in the document set fails to print, the otherreports will print.
6. Enter a Sequence number.
7. Select Shipping Execution as the Application.
8. Select the Report Name to be included in the document set.
Selecting a report with PDF Output enables you to select a layout template.
If you select a report without PDF Output,then the Layout Template field is not updatable.
9. If you selected a report with PDF Output, then use the list of vales to select a Layout Template for your report.
Oracle XML Publisher enables you to extend various Oracle Shipping Execution reports to suit your business needs.
The following list represents those seeded Oracle Shipping Execution report layout templates within Oracle XML Publisher:
• Bill of Lading
• Commercial Invoice
• Mailing Label
• MasterBill of Lading
• Packing Slip
• Pick Slip
• Vehicle Load Sheet Summary
10. Enter the number of Copies that you want.
If number of copies for a document is specified in the document set form, then copy count is used.If it is not specified (that is, it is null),
then the profile option Concurrent: Report Copies is used.
If the profile option Concurrent: Report Copies is also null, then 1 copy is printed.
11. Save your work.
To Edit document sets:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Document Sets window.
2. Query an existing document set.
3. Edit the existing Effective Dates, Sequence of documents,or documents contained within the document set.
4. Save your work.
Defining Pick Slip Grouping Rules
You can create grouping rules to organize how picking lines for released sales orders are grouped on to pick slips.
For example, if you select Delivery as a grouping criteria, all picking lines for the same delivery are grouped togetheron a pick slip.
If there are multiple deliveries, multiple pick slips are created.
You can also define yourgrouping criteria further by selecting additional grouping attributes.
For example, if you select Delivery and Carrier as grouping criteria, picking lines for the same delivery and carrier are grouped togetheron a
pick slip.
Defining Release Sequence Rules
You can define release sequence rules to specify the order in which eligible picking lines are allocated to Inventory during pick release.
You can release the picking lines by:
• Order number
• Outstanding Invoice Value
• Scheduled Date
• Departure Date
• Shipment Priority
You can assign a priority level to one or more attributes with 1 being the highest priority and 5 being the lowest.
You can also define whether you want the picking lines released in ascending or descending order.
For example, if you select the Ascending button for Order, picking lines are released by ascending order number--Order 1 is released first,
then Order 2, Order 3, and so on.
If the Descending button is selected,the picking lines are released by descending Order number from highest to lowest --Order 4 is released
first, then Order 3, Order 2, and Order 1.
Note: You can define either the Outstanding Invoice Value attribute or the Order attribute for the release sequence rule, but you c annot select
both for the same rule. No two attributes can be given the same priority.
You can edit existing release sequence rules, but you cannot change the name of an existing release sequence rule.
To define release sequence rules:
1. Navigate to the Release Sequence Rules window.
Release Sequence Rules Window
2. In the Rule field, enter a name for your rule.
3. Enter a Description.
4. Enter the Effective Dates for the rule.
5. Within the Release Priority region, specify a Priority (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 where 1 is the highest priority and 5 is the lowest) for one or all of the
following attributes:
• Order Number: Releases picking lines based on order number.
If you define a priority for the Order Number attribute, you cannot define a priority for the Outstanding Invoice Value attribute.
• Outstanding Invoice Value: Releases picking lines based on the outstanding invoice value.
If you define a priority for the Outstanding Invoice Value attribute, you cannot define a priority for the Order Number attribute.
• Scheduled Date: Releases picking lines based on scheduled date.
• Departure Date: Releases picking lines based on departure date.
• Shipment Priority: Releases picking lines based on shipment priority.
6. Select the Ascending orDescending toggle next to each attribute.
If you select the Ascending toggle next to the Scheduled Date attribute, for example, the picking lines with the earliest Scheduled Date are
released first.
If you select the Descending toggle, the picking lines with the most recent Scheduled Date are released last.
7. Save your work.
Defining Release Rules
Define the order in which picking lines are allocated to inventory.
You can create default pick release rules that are applied at pick release in the Release Sales Orders window.
Each rule can be set up with its own set of unique pick release parameters depending on the pick release criteria required.
When pick release is run, the pick release is performed based on the parameters set up in the selected pick release rule.
For example, you can create a specific rule that pick releases only backordered lines.
Note: Although you can also enter the pick release criteria at pick release time without creating a rule, creating a rule is more efficient if you
frequently run the same pick release.
Also, note that it is required when releasing using SRS or when using the Auto Pick Pack and Ship features.
To define release rules:
1. Navigate to the Release Rules window.
Release Rules Window - Order Tab
2. Enter a Rule name and the Effective dates.
Within the Order tab, select one or more of the following criteria for your query.
Select only the criteria that you want for the pick release:
3. Select the Orders and Order Types that you want included in the pick release:
• Unreleased: The rule is applied to unreleased lines.
• All: The rule applies to all lines not pick released.
• Backordered: The rule applies only to backordered lines.
4. Enter the Order Number.
5. Select the Ship Set.
6. Optionally, select the Prior Reservations Only check box if you only want to pick release already reserved quantity for lines.
This is allowed only for the allocation method of Inventory Only.
7. Select the Destination Type:
• Region
• Zone
• Ship-To Location
8. Select the Customer and the Ship-To location for the customer.
9. Within the Item region select a Category Set, Category, and Item Number
10. Select the range of Scheduled Ship Dates and/or Requested Dates.
You can indicate whether you want the systemto look at the scheduled ship date or the requested date.
You can then enter the number of days in the past or future, as well as the time, relative to current systemdate that you want included in
the release criteria.
This means that it is possible to set up a desired release window in terms of number of days rather than only static dates.
If your organization has a calendar assigned,then the release rule will honornon-working days (for example, Saturday, Sunday)to select
delivery lines for pick release.
If the rule shown were applied to Organization V1 and that Organization has Saturday and Sunday as non-working days on their
organization calendar, then the following would occur:
If pick release is run on Thursday,the delivery lines for Thursday,Friday, Monday, and Tuesday (systemdate + 3 working days) are
selected for pick release.
A negative value may be used in the Days field to include past dates which enables backordered lines to be considered for pick release.
Alternatively, you can create a pick release rule using static dates by selecting the options Start On and End On in the Scheduled Ship
Dates region and the Requested Dates region.
Release Rules Window - Shipping Tab
11. Select the Ship Method to pick release by a certain ship method.
12. Select the Shipment Priority, and Ship From location.
13. Enable the Include Assigned Lines box if you want to include assigned lines in the pick release.
14. Select a Document Set to be printed during pick release.
15. Select a Release Sequence Rule if required.
16. From the list of values, select either Yes or No to Autocreate Deliveries.
17. If you selected Yes to Autocreate Deliveries, then in the Autocreate Delivery Criteria field select either Across Orders or Within an Order.
18. Select either Yes or No in the Auto Pick Confirm field. Auto pick confirm is not allowed for the allocation method of Cross Dock.
19. From the AutopackDeliveries list of values, select No if you do not want to utilize autopacking, select Yes to enable autopacking, or
select Auto Pack Masterif you want to utilize autopacking the item into its primary container and additionally automatically packing the
primary container into a defined master container.
You must setup container-item relationships to support the functionality for auto pack or auto pack master.
See: Oracle Inventory User's Guide.
20. Select a Ship Confirm Rule, if you want to utilize auto ship confirming.
21. Select Yes or No to Append Deliveries (consolidate delivery lines.)
Note: The appending limit must be defined as a value otherthan Do Not Append in the Shipping Parameters window before you can
append deliveries within a release rule.
Additional prerequisites for setting Append Deliveries flag include:
• Oracle Transportation Planning is not installed
• Organization must be specified
• Autocreate Delivery Criteria must be Across Orders
• Autocreate Delivery must be Yes
• Auto Pick Confirm must be No
Release Rules Window - Inventory Tab
22. Select the Warehouse (organization code) and default Pick Slip Grouping Rule for grouping the pick slips.
23. Optionally, enter a specific Subinventory for your rule.
This value determines which lines are considered for picking based on the subinventory name assigned to the sales order line.
24. If Oracle Project Manufacturing is installed, specify a Project and Task for your rule.
25. If Oracle Warehouse Management is installed, then you can select an Allocation Method to be used:
• Inventory Only: (Default) If you select this allocation method, then pick release allocates inventory materials only.
• Cross Dock Only: If you select this allocation method, then pick release allocates cross docking materials only.
• Prioritize Inventory: If you select this allocation method, then pick release checks for inventory availability before all othersources,
then allocates material from othersources if needed.
• Prioritize Cross Dock: If you select this allocation method, then pick release checks for material available for cross docking from all
other sources otherthan Inventory, then allocates materials from Inventory if needed.
The Allocation Method field cannot be updated unless Oracle Warehouse Management is installed.
See: Oracle Warehouse Management User's Guide and Oracle Warehouse Management Implementation Guide for more information.
26. If Oracle Warehouse Management is installed and if you selected Cross Dock Only or Prioritize Cross Dock in the Allocation Method,
then select a Cross Dock Criteria.
Enables a rule to be named, which limits the cross docking criteria. This field is disabled if the organization is not WMS Enabled, or the
Allocation Method is Inventory Only.
See: Oracle Warehouse Management User's Guide and Oracle Warehouse Management Implementation Guide for more information.
27. Select Auto Allocate if you want to allocate the order lines automatically at pick release.
If Auto Allocate is selected, order lines are automatically allocated and reserved.
If not selected,you must allocate the lines and create reservations using the Inventory Transact Move Orders window.
28. Select either Yes or No to Enable Plan Tasks if Oracle Warehouse Management is installed and you choose to utilize the Plan Tasks
feature.
29. Enter a Task Priority.
30. In the Pick From region, select the Subinventory and Locator of the default picking location.
Pick From Subinventory determines where the line items are picked/allocated from.
31. In the Default Stage region, select the Subinventory and Locator of the default staging area.
32. Save your work.
Shipping Parameters
You define the default values for basic shipping information such as units of measurement, pick release rules, weight and volume
calculations, and delivery grouping rules.
Shipping parameters are organization specific.
The parameters are arranged into the following tabbed regions in the Shipping Parameters window:
• General: You can define the shipping weight and volume unit of measure classes, criteria for calculating percent fill basis like weight,
volume, or quantity, and shipping events at which export compliance screening will be performed.
(Screening is only applicable if Oracle Shipping Execution is integrated with a third party ITM partner application).
• Pick Release: You can define Release Sequence rules and Pick Slip Grouping rules, limiting the number of lines in the pick slip, printing
behavior, document set to be printed at pick release, default staging subinventory,locator,and decision points to autocreate delivery, auto
allocation, enforcing ship sets and ship models, and task planning at the time of pick release.
• Shipping Transaction: You can define document sets to be printed at the time of ship confirm, ship confirm rule, auto-pack options,goods
dispatched (COGS) account and whether to enforce packing in containers.
• Delivery: You can define the attributes forming the basis of delivery grouping for the organization.
You can also specify if delivery grouping is limited to lines within the same sales order or across orders. For consolidation of deliveries, you
specify the event at which appending will stop for the appending of delivery lines to the delivery stops.
• Transportation: If Oracle Transportation Execution is installed, you specify whether or not to Apply Routing Rules automatically, define
Freight Payment and Audit related parameters, and define Freight Rating parameters.
Defining Shipping Parameters
On the General tab, you define general Shipping Execution parameters such as weight and volume unit of measure (UOM) class parameters,
criteria for percent fill basis calculations, International Trade Management (ITM) screening generation, and Oracle Workflow settings.
To define shipping parameters:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Parameters window.
Shipping Parameters Window - General Tab
2. Select the General tab.
3. Select the default Weight UOM Class from the valid UOM classes.
4. Select the Volume UOM Class from the valid UOM classes.
Note: The seeded values shown in the UOM class are created in Oracle Inventory.
5. Select the default unit of measure for the Percent Fill Basis of a container.
You can select Weight, Volume, or Quantity.
Percent Fill Basis is used to determine if containers have met their minimum fill percentage requirements.
If you select Weight or Volume, the calculation uses the item and container physical attributes in Oracle Inventory.
If you select Quantity, the calculation uses the Container Load Relationship details to determine the maximum number of items that will
fit into the container.
6. In the Export Compliance Screening field, select one of the following: (Requires ITM Partnership Integration)
• Not Required: Use this option if ITM Partner Integration is not used
• At Delivery Creation: Use this option if Export Compliance Screening is to be enforced when the delivery is created
• At Ship Confirm: Use this option if Export Compliance Screening is to be enforced at ship confirm
• At Delivery Creation and Ship Confirm: Use this option if Export Compliance Screening is to be enforced when the delivery is created and
at ship confirm
7. Enable Workflows by selecting whether you want Delivery workflows or None of the workflows enabled. Specific tasks and output are
enabled through the use of customized business objects.For example, the workflow can be configured so that specific users receive a
notification email when an overship or backorder occurs.
8. Depending on yourbusiness needs,select the Raise Business Events check box.
Business events are optional. Individual Business Events can be enabled via the Business Events definition window.
See: Shipping Execution Workflows and Oracle Workflow User's Guide.
9. Save your work.
Defining Pick Release Parameters
You can define default picking criteria that is used at pick release. You can also select the default settings for auto-detailing and auto-creating
deliveries.
To define pick release parameters:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Parameters window.
Shipping Parameters Window - Pick Release Tab
2. Select the Pick Release tab.
3. Select the Release Sequence Rule.
During pick release, this rule determines the order in which delivery lines are allocated to inventory.
It appears as the default release sequence rule in the Release Sales Order window.
Note: It is recommended that you select the most frequently used release sequence rule; although it becomes the default, you can change it
any time you launch pick release.
4. Select the Pick Slip Grouping Rule.
This rule dictates how the released delivery lines are grouped on pick slips and how the pick slip number is generated by pick release.
It appears as the default pick slip grouping rule in the Release Sales Order form.
Note: It is recommended that you select the most frequently used pick slip grouping rule; although it becomes the default, you can change it
any time you launch pick release.
5. From the Print Pick Slip list of values, select when you want the pick slips printed.
• If you select At the End, pick slips will be generated when the pick release process has completed.
• If you select Immediate, you specify the number of lines per pick slip.
Wheneverthis threshold is reached, a pick slip document is submitted for printing. Every time the threshold is reached, another pick slip
document will be submitted for printing. This continues until all lines meeting the release criteria for a batch have been pick released. For
example, if there are 20 customdefined lines, all pick slips belonging to these 20 lines are printed in a single pick slip report. The number of
pick slips printed depends on the pick slip grouping rule and the customdefined lines. This choice has more impact on systemresources.
6. Enter the Number of Pick Slip Lines to print on each pick slip.
If Print Pick Slip is Immediate, enter the maximum Number of Pick Slip Lines to print on each pick slip.
For example, if Number of Pick Slip Lines is 25 and pick release selects 40 lines, it prints two pick slips, one with 25 lines and the other with
15 lines.
7. Select the Default Pick Release Document set to be printed at pick release.
8. Select the Default Stage Subinventory.
The process of Pick Confirmation transfers move orders to this staging subinventory.The list of values displays all subinventories in the
organization. Staging subinventories should be reservable.
9. Select the Default Stage Locator.
Move orders move material to this locator. The list of values displays all locators in the Default Stage Subinventory.
10. Select the Autocreate Deliveries option to specify yourpreference for delivery creation. You can override this preference at pick release
execution.
• Selected: Pick release automatically creates deliveries based on the delivery grouping rules and assigns delivery lines to them.
When pick releasing, the Autocreate Deliveries check box in the pick release form defaults to this parameter setting if you enter a warehouse.
If you do not enter a warehouse, pick release uses this parameter setting from the organization of the warehouse on each sales order line.
• Cleared: Pick release does not automatically create deliveries.
Note: There are six descriptive flex field defaulting types supported when auto-creating deliveries:
SQL Statement (Not having references to:$FLEX$.<VALUE_SET_NAME> and:block.field),Constant, Current Date, Current Time, Previous
Segment, and Profile Option value.
11. Select Auto Allocate to automatically allocate delivery lines at pick release.
• Selected: Pick release creates move orders and automatically allocates them.
• Cleared: Pick release creates move orders.
You must manually allocate the order lines using the Inventory Transact Move Orders window.
12. Select Enforce Ship Sets and Ship Models to enforce that all lines in the Ship Set or Ship Model are released together.
• If you do not select the Enforce Ship Sets and Ship Model's check box, delivery lines for ship sets and ship models are not validated during
picking even if the ship set is specified on order lines.
Note: Depending on your business needs,you must set up the Enforce Ship Sets and Ship Models parameter for each warehouse.
• If you select the Enforce Ship Sets and Ship Models check box, delivery lines for ship sets and ship models are validated during picking.
All order lines in ship sets are either released completely or auto-backordered during pick release.
If any portion is not available, then all lines in the entire ship set are backordered.
When you create the order, you must specify if you want to retain (or not retain) the ship set for the back-ordered lines.
You can do this in the Sales Order window in Order Management.
Note: Ship sets for non-transactable delivery lines are validated during ship confirm.
However, a ship set for non-transactable delivery lines is not validated during pick release because the item(s) are not picked from inventory.
13. Select Plan Tasks if Oracle Warehouse Management is enabled within your organization.
See: Oracle Warehouse Management User's Guide.
Defining Shipping Transaction Parameters
You can define parameters for yourshipping transactions such as default ship confirm document set, ship confirm rule, auto -pack options,
goods dispatched account and whetherto enforce packing into containers.
To define shipping transaction parameters:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Parameters window.
Shipping Parameters Window - Shipping Transaction Tab
2. Select the Shipping Transaction tab.
3. Select the Default Ship Confirm Document Set that prints as part of the ship confirm process.
The list of values displays the valid delivery document sets.See: Defining Shipping Document Sets .
4. Select a Ship Confirm Rule that your organization will use as a default for auto ship confirming.
Note: If you want to define a default ship confirm rule, then you must select Ship All as your option when you define your ship confirm rules
in the Ship Confirm window.
5. Select your AutopackOptions. From the list of values, select either No, Yes, or AutopackMaster.
• No: Autopack will not be enabled
• Yes: Autopackwill be enabled and delivery line items will be systematically packed into LPNs based on container-item relationships
• AutopackMaster: Autopackwill be enabled and delivery line items will be systematically packed into LPNs based on container-item
relationships and the container will then be packed into another container, such as a freight container for transport.
You can autopack delivery lines for a delivery into LPNs (containers).
When you autopacka delivery, the delivery lines are grouped togetherby shared attributes such as the Ship To location, and are packed into
LPNs based on the delivery grouping rules.
Once a delivery is packed, the delivery line information cannot be changed until you unpackthe delivery.
The weight and volume is calculated at ship confirm automatically.
6. Select a default Goods Dispatched Account.
Use the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) account for this organization.
The sales order issue transaction uses this account if the Oracle Order Management workflow cannot determine one.
7. Select a value for Enforce Packing in Containers:
• If you select Yes, ship confirm displays a warning when confirming a delivery or trip with unpacked delivery line items.
You can bypass the warning and complete the shipment.
• If you select No, ship confirm does not display the warning.
8. Save your work.
Defining Delivery Parameters
Delivery parameters enable you to define how to group delivery lines for a delivery.
The mandatory default attributes are Ship From Location and Ship To Location;
however, you can select additional optional grouping parameters that include:
• Customer
• Freight Terms
• FOB Code
• Intermediate Ship To location
• Ship Method
The delivery attributes determine how delivery lines are grouped into deliveries when auto-creating deliveries.
For example, if the grouping attribute Customer is selected,the delivery lines are grouped into deliveries by customer: for example, deliveries
for Customer A are grouped into Delivery A, deliveries for Customer B are grouped into Delivery B.
You can select more than one grouping attribute to refine your grouping criteria further: for example, if you select Customer and Ship
Method as grouping criteria, delivery lines with the same customer and carrier criteria are grouped into deliveries.
If each optional grouping attribute is checked, the delivery's corresponding field cannot be updated if delivery lines are assigned to the
delivery. This ensures that the delivery lines' grouping criteria is not broken by a different attribute value:
for example, if someone tries to select a different ship method.
If each optional grouping attribute is unchecked,its field in the delivery record can be updated until the ship confirm stage.
For example, if you want to change the Ship Method in the delivery and do not need to enforce it as a grouping attribute, you can deselect
Ship Method.
Do not change these options if you have deliveries that are not ship confirmed.
To define delivery parameters:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Parameters window.
Shipping Parameters Window - Delivery Tab
2. Select the Delivery tab.
3. Choose the attributes for grouping the delivery lines.
4. Optionally, select Autocreate Delivery Criteria if you enabled the Autocreate Delivery option on the Pick Release tab.
• Select Within An Order to autocreate deliveries whose lines all belong to the same sales order and match on the Delivery Grouping
Attributes.
• Select Across Orders to autocreate deliveries across orders.
All selected delivery lines that match on the Delivery Grouping Attributes are eligible to appear on one delivery.
5. Select an Appending Limit.
The appending limit enables you to indicate the point at which you want to stop the systemfrom adding lines to a delivery (the point that ends
the ability to merge deliveries).
You must set the appending limit to a value other than Do Not Append in order to use the Append Deliveries option within Release Rules and
the Process Deliveries SRS. The Appending Limits include:
• Do Not Append
• Start of Staging
• End of Staging
• Start of Packing (Oracle WMS enabled organizations only)
• Start of Shipping (Oracle WMS enabled organizations only)
6. Save your work.
Ship Confirm Rule
(N) Shipping > Setup > Ship Confirm Rules
You use the Ship Confirm Rules window to define the Ship Confirm Rules based on your business needs.
Within the Ship Confirm Rules window, there are several options,which are covered next.
Ship Confirm Rule Ship Options
The Ship Options region of the Ship Confirm Rules window enables you to specify the default action to take when ship confirming.
It also enables you to choose what to do when the Action is Ship Entered Quantities and the quantities are unspecified.
The following describes the default actions:
• Action:
- Ship Entered Quantities: This action enables you to ship the quantities entered at ship confirm time.
- Ship All: This action enables you to ship all lines, regardless of the actual quantity. Ship All is required if you choose t o use a
default ship confirm rule.
- Backorder All: This actions enables you to backorder all lines, regardless of the quantity.
- Cycle Count All: This action enables you to cycle count all line items, regardless of the quantity.
• Unspecified Quantities (only available when the Action is Ship Entered Quantities):
- Ship: Ship confirms the quantity of items specified in the Shipped Quantity field and treats blank values as full quantity (shipped
quantity = requested quantity).
- Backorder: Ship confirms the quantity of items specified in the Shipped Quantity field and treats blank quantities as full
backorders (backorder quantity = requested quantity).
- Stage: Leaves the unspecified delivery line quantity as staged and removes it from the delivery.
Note: If a non-zero Stage Quantity exists on a line, it is split from the line and unassigned from the delivery.
If the Create Delivery for Staged Quantities is enabled, all staged delivery lines are grouped togetherin a new delivery.
Cycle Count: Ship confirms the quantity of items specified in the Shipped Quantity field, treats blank quantities as full backorders
(backorder quantity = requested quantity),and transfers the backorder reservation to cycle counting.
Calculating Available to Promise (ATP)
Oracle Order Management enables you to advise your customers when items will be available based on current on-hand inventory plus the
expected incoming supply and outgoing demand. Calculating ATP requires as input the item, the order quantity,the order quant ity unit of
measure and the request date.
In general the userwill enter the item and order quantity on every order line. The request date and order quantity unit of measure may be
defaulted or manually entered.
ATP may be calculated for a single line, a group of lines, or a complete order. The results for a single line are displayed in a single column in
a small window. The results for multi-line ATP are displayed in a table. In both formats, the following information is displayed:
• Warehouse:Either the warehouse on the order line or, if the warehouse on the order line was blank, the best warehouse as selected by the
sourcing rules.
• Request Date Qty: The quantity that is available on the requested date
• Available: The order quantity, if ATP was successful.The available quantity,which will be less than the order quantity,if ATP was not
successful.
• On-hand Qty: The quantity that is currently in the warehouse.
• Qty Reservable: The on-hand quantity minus the quantity that is already reserved to other sources ofdemand.
• Request Date: The date on the order line.
• Available date: The date that the ordered quantity will be available.
It could be the request date if the order quantity is available on the request date, or it might be a future date when the order quantity will be
available
• Error Message:Any error that occurred in calculating ATP.
For example, if the Check ATP flag for the item is not selected then this field will display ATP not applicable.
• Substitute Item: If the requested item is not available and the requested quantity for a defined substitute is available, the substitute itemwill
be displayed. An additional tab, showing the availability of the substitute item, is also displayed.displayed for single items.
A multi-line window displays availability information for sets and models.
Clicking the Global Availability button located at the bottom of the Availability window opens the ATP window that has the list of
warehouses where the item is enabled.
You can select the warehouses for which you want to see the availability, and the systemwill return the availability in all the selected
warehouses.
The ATP Details window can also be opened from the Availability window by pressing the ATP Details Button. The ATP Details window
displays how the results were derived.
ATP is calculated automatically during scheduling, and may be calculated manually by clicking Availability on the Line Items tab of the
Sales Order window.
There are several steps required for ATP calculations.
If you are using ASCP, supply/demand is set up at the plan level. See the Oracle ASCP Implementation Manual.
Global Order Promising will only use the infinite time fence specified on the ATP rule.
If you are not using ASCP, ATP rules must be defined to determine the sources of supply and demand which are included in the calculation.
The ATP rules must be associated with items and/orinventory organizations. Also, the data collection program must be run.
There is a requirement for ATP calculations to be very fast; some customer service representatives will need to give this information to
customers on the phone.
However, considering all the possible sources of supply and demand for an ATP calculation can be very complex. Therefore, a c oncurrent
process known as data collection must be run to summarize the supply and demand picture.
This program is part of the Oracle Advanced Planning and Scheduling application.
The ATP calculation is then performed on the summary tables.
For details about setting up ATP rules and running the data collection program, see the setup section of this document.
Guided Demonstration - Creating an ATP Rule
Responsibility: Inventory, Vision Operations USA
1. Navigate to the ATP Rules window.
 (N) Inventory Setup > Rules > Available to Promise
2. Enter the following information:
Name: ATP_Backward
Description: ATP Backward consumption
Backward Selected
Past Due Days Demand: 10
Infinite Supply: User-defined time fence
Aggregate Order Promising Time Fence: User Defined
3. Select the following Demand Sources:
Sales Orders
Internal Orders
Discrete WIP
Repetitive WIP
4. Select the following Supply Sources:
Discrete WIP
Repetitive WIP
Internal Reqs
Supplier Reqa
Purchase Orders
On-hand Available
Interorg Transfers
5. (M) File > Save
6. (M) File > Close Form
Guided Demonstration – Creating a Salesperson
Responsibility: CRM Administrator
Find Employee Number
(B) Search
(B) Start Import
(B) Save Resource
(B) Details
Responsibility: Order ManagementSuper User, Vision Operations (USA)
Find an Employee
1. (N) Order Management > Setup > Sales > Salespersons
2. Within the Find Resources window, Resource region, enter the following in the Name field: Ahmed Elshayeb,
(B) Find. Ahmed Elshayeb, employee number 10242 is displayed in the Resource Search Results window.
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Oracle Pricing
Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved.
Overview of Pricing in the Order to Cash Process
Bank
Reconciliation
Invoice
Pick
Release
Book
Orders
Receiving
payment
Enter and
Price Orders
Receivables
Ship
Confirm
Order Management
AutoInvoice
Cash Management
Shipping Execution
Pricing
(F&SC)
Practice - Creating a Price List
Overview
Adding items to a price list is a prerequisite for pricing items in a sales order. In this practice,you will create a new price list
(header) and then add price list lines that define the items and their list prices.
Price lists relate a selling price to a product. Price lists consist of price list lines, pricing attributes, and a secondary price list and
include information such as the price list name, effective dates,currency, rounding factor, and shipping defaults such as freight
terms and freight carrier.
You may default a price list based on any one of the following:
• An agreement
• The sold-to organization
• The ship-to organization
• The bill-to organization
• Order type
You can create multiple price lists. Alternatively, you may enter a specific price list on the order header or at the order line level.
For each price list, you can also assign a secondary price list, which the pricing engine searches when it cannot find an item on
the primary list. Only one secondary price list will be searched for each primary list.
Creating General Information for the Price List
Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations
Change Profile Option : QP: Item Validation Organization = Your Master Organization = SH MST
1. Navigate to the Price Lists window.
 (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup
2. Enter the following price list header information:
Name = SH-Price List 1 (XX is a unique identifier)
Active = Selected
Description = Base price list
Currency = USD
Round To = -2 (defaults)
Effective Dates = Use today’s date for start date. Leave end date blank.
Freight Terms/Freight Carrier = Leave blank
Payment Terms = 30 Net
3. (B) Save.
Creating Price List Lines
4. Enter the first price list line using the following data:
In the Product region:
Product Context = Item
Product Attribute = Item Number
Product Value = XX-Palm Pilot
Product Description = Defaults
UOM = EA (Each)
Primary UOM = Deselected
Line Type = Price List Line
Application Method = Unit Price
Value = $700
Start Date = Current date
Precedence = Defaults
5. Add the following items, one item at a time, to the price list.
Product Context Product Attribute Product Value UOM Primary UOM Value
Item Item Number XX-Pager Ea. Deselected $700
Item Item Number XX- Phone Ea. Deselected $500
Item Item Number XX-Phone Card Ea. Deselected $100
Item Item Number AS54888 Ea. Deselected $1599
Item Item Number AS92888 Ea. Deselected $2300
6. (I) Save.
Practice - Copying a Price List
Overview
You can quickly create a new price list by copying an existing price list. Only active price list lines (those with an effective end
date later than the current date) can be copied. In this practice you will copy your existing price list named XX-Price List 1.
Copying a Price List
Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations
1. Navigate to the Copy Price List window.
 (N) Oracle Management Super User > Pricing > Price Lists > Copy Price List
2. Enter the following Copy From information:
Price List = XX-Price List 1
Retain Effective Dates = Selected
3. Enter the following information in the Copy To region:
Price List = SH-Price List 2
Description = Adjusted by 10%
Global check box = Selected
4. Submit the request
5. Confirm that the request completed normally.
 (M) View > Requests
6. Repeat the preceding steps to copy the following price list from XX-Price List 1:
Copy To: Price List Name Description
SH-Price List 2 Manually updating a price list.
7. Query your XX-Price Lists to confirm that they were copied successfully.
Practice - Adjusting a Price List
Overview
You can quickly adjust list prices (such as a 10 percent increase) for selected items or all items on a price list using the Adjust
Price List window. In this practice, you will increase all prices on XX-Price List 2 by 10 percent.
Adjusting a Price List
Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations
1. Navigate to the Adjust Price List window.
 (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Adjust Price List
2. Enter the following information:
Price List = SH-Price List 2
Adjust By = Percent
Value = 10
3. (B) Submit.
4. Verify that the request completed normally.
 (M) View > Requests
5. Query your XX-Price List 2 to confirm that the prices were adjusted successfully.
 (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Practice - Adding an Item Category to a Price List
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to add an item category to a price list.
Creating a Price List
Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations
1. Navigate to the Price Lists window.
 (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup
2. Enter the following information in the price list header using (all remaining information defaults in):
Name = SH-Price List 4
Description = Accessories price list.
Round To = -2 (defaults from multicurrency list)
Effective Date = Today’s Date
3. (I) Save.
Adding an Item Category to a Price List
4. Navigate to the Add Items to Price List window.
 (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Add Items to Price List
5. Enter the following data:
Price List = SH-Price List 4
Item Category Set = Inv.Items
Item Category = ELECTRONIC.ACCESSORY
Item Status = Active
Set List Price Equal to Cost From check box = Selected
Inventory Organization = SH1
6. (B) Submit.
7. Record the Request ID number: __________.
8. Review the request status to ensure the concurrent request completed successfully.
 (M) View > Requests
9. Find your price list SH-Price List 4.
 (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup
 (I) Find > SH-Price List 4
10. Verify that many items have been added to your price list, including the item cost from M1 inventory organization.
Practice - Setting Up Transaction Types
Define Order Management transaction types to classify sales documents.
As an example, for each order type, you can assign a default price list, defaulting rules, order lines, return lines, line types,workflow
assignments,payment terms, and freight terms.
This is step twenty-two of the Order Management Setup Steps, page 2-3.
Note: You must first define any OM Line Transaction Types so that they can be assigned when defining your OM Order transaction types.
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to set up a transaction type with associated line type and assign the workflow process.
 Create a line transaction type for the order lines
 Create an order transaction type for the order header
 Assign line flows
 Create a document sequence
 Assign the document sequence to the order type
Creating a Line Transaction Type
Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
1. Navigate to the Transaction Types window:
 (N) Setup > Transaction Types > Define
2. Create a new transaction type by entering the following information:
Operating Unit = Vision Operations
Transaction Type = SH-StandardLine
Description = Standard Line Transaction Type
Sales Document Type = Sales Order
Order Category = Order
Transaction Type Code = Line
Effective Dates – From = Today’s date
3. (I) Save.
4. Create a new transaction type by entering the following information:
Operating Unit = Vision Operations
Transaction Type = SH-StandardReturn
Description = Standard Return Line
Sales Document Type = Sales Order
Order Category = Return
Transaction Type Code = Line
Effective Dates – From = Today’s date
Creating an Order Transaction Type for the Order Header
4. (I) New. Create the order header transaction type.
Operating Unit = Vision Operations
Transaction Type = SH-Mixed
Description = Mixed Order Transaction Type
Sales Document Type = Sales Order
In the Sales Document Type field, select Sales Agreement or Sales Order from the list of values (for Quotes,
Returns and Releases,choose Sales Order).
Order Category = Mixed
Transaction Type Code = ORDER
Fulfillment Flow = Order Flow - Generic
. Note: Selecting a fulfillment flow assigns the workflow to the order header when the sales order is created. This
enables you to save the sales order.
Effective Dates – From = Today’s date
5. (T) Main.
Default Return Line Type = SH-StandardReturn
Default Order Line Type = SH-StandardLine
6. (T) Shipping.
Shipping Method = DHL
Freight Terms = Prepaid
7. (T) Finance.
Accounting Rule = Immediate
Invoice Source = ORDER ENTRY
Receivable Transaction Type = Inv-Hdwre-East
COGS Account = 01-740-7610-0000-000
Currency = USD
8. (B) Assign Line Flows. Enter the following information:
Order Type = SH-StandardOrder
Line Type = SH-StandardLine , SH-StandardReturn
Process Name = Line Flow - Generic
Start Date = Today’s date
Order Type = SH-StandardOrder
Line Type = SH-StandardReturn
Process Name = Line Flow - Return with Receipt Only, No Credit
Start Date = Today’s date
9. (B) OK. Exit the Transaction Types window.
Tax Calculation
You can calculate tax by selecting a Tax Date to base yourtax rates on, choosing the tax, the tax schedule,requested,promise, and system
dates.You cannot set a value for the Tax Date field within the Sales Order window, but you can decide to change or update th e existing
seeded Defaulting Rule for Tax Date.
Tax calculation in Order Management can occur at one of the following events:
• Entry
• Booking
• Invoicing
Tax calculation for the above events can only be controlled at the order level (not at the order line level).
You specify when to calculate the tax for an entire order when you create Order Types within the Order Management Transaction Types
window.
The default value for Tax Calculation Event Code is null.
Null Tax Calculation Event is same as Entry.
For payment verification purposes (to include tax in the total authorized amount), specify Entry or Booking as your Tax Event.
Note: The Copy Order functionality does not copy tax amounts; tax is recalculated for the new order.
For return orders (referenced or non-referenced returns), tax calculation occurs at the tax event defined for the associated Order Management
transaction type.
To calculate tax at any time, select Calculate Tax from the Actions button menu within the Sales Order or Order Organizer windows.
Tax amounts are displayed:
• Within the Sales Orders window, Main Tab. This is value is the current total order tax
• Within the Sales Orders Lines window, Pricing tab.
This tax value is for each taxable order line Additionally, tax is always recalculated when tax-dependent attributes change on the order line.
Tax Calculation at Entry
With tax calculation at Entry, tax is calculated as each order line is entered. This tax calculation is used,for example, in businesses that
requires the userperforming order entry to view the total of the order, including tax, so it can be quoted to a customer.
To include tax in Commitment Applied Amount, set the tax event to Entry.
Tax Calculation at Booking
When tax calculation occurs at Booking, tax is calculated on each of the booked order lines. This tax calculation option is u sed,for example,
in business that require tax visibility for booked orders, but who want to increase order entry input times by not calculating tax at ent ry.
Tax Calculation at Invoicing
When tax calculation occurs at Invoicing, no tax calculations will occur within Order Management. Tax calculation will occur in Oracle
Receivables when the order or order line is invoiced.
For maximum performance, set the Tax Event as Invoicing.
Inclusive Taxes
When you create yourtax codes,you can specify that the taxes are inclusive taxes (the tax amounts are already included in the price of the
item).
When the Tax Engine is called to calculate taxes, it will return inclusive taxes as well as exclusive taxes.
Any inclusive taxes returned are not added to the extended amount of the order line or displayed within the Tax column of an order line.
Order Management displays the estimated tax amount based on the tax date on the order line. However, inclusive taxes are disp layed when
you View Tax Details from the Action button menu within the Sales Orders Lines window.
You can perform a credit check including or excluding the estimated tax amount.
Practice - Viewing Tax Setups
Overview
In this practice you will learn how view tax setups in Oracle Order Management
Tasks
1. Navigate to the Transaction Types window in Order Management.
2. Find the tax related fields and determine the tax events.
(N) Order Management > Setup > Transaction Types > Define
7. (T) Finance
8. Navigate to the Receivables Transaction Type field and use the list of values to view the applicable options.
9. Navigate to the Tax Event field and use the list of values to view the applicable options.
Define Document Sequences for Order Numbering
Order Management uses AOL Document Sequence functionality for order numbering.
This is step eleven of the Order Management Setup You can define document sequences that automatically generate numbers for y our sales
documents as you enter them. You can define a single document sequence to assign unique consecutive numbers to all yours ales documents,
or you can define multiple document sequences that are assigned to different order types.In the latter case,an order or ret urn is uniquely
identified by its type and its number, since sales documents of different types may share numbers.
Note. Sales document numbers cannot contain alphabetic characters.
Gapless Order Number Source
Many countries have legal and audit requirements for order numbers to be contiguous.
You can set up a document sequence as gapless through the Define Documents Sequences window.
You can set up a gapless sequence for quotes,sales orders and Sales Agreements.
In addition, Order Management prevents deletion of orders that have been numbered using the gapless numbering sequence.
The application uses locks to ensure gapless numbering.
If you are using gapless sequences,please save yourchanges frequently to minimize lock contention issues.
Note: Transactions may be gapless,however if all quotes do not become orders, the order numbers will not appear gapless.
Manual Order Numbers
Order Management enables you to enter the order numbers for certain types of orders.
You can define a document sequence as manual and assign it to a desired order type.
This order type can be used on orders that you want to manually enter order numbers.
When an order number is specified for such an order, Order Management validates that it is unique for a given order type.
Prerequisites
• Set the profile option Sequential Numbering to Partially Used at the Order Management Application level.
• Set your document sequences to Automatic, Gapless, or Manual.
To define document sequences for order numbering:
1. Navigate to the Document Sequences window. Order Management > Setup >Documents > Define.
Order Management Document Sequences Window
2. You can define the sequence to be Automatic, Gapless or Manual.
• Automatic: The systemautomatically increment document numbers.
Automatic sequences do not guarantee contiguous numbering.
• Gapless: The systemguarantees that the numbers returned are contiguous.
• Manual: The user must specify a unique document number.
For all types ofnumbering, Order Management validates that the number specified by you is unique for a given order type.
For more information on AOL Document Sequences,
see the Oracle Applications System Administrator'sGuide - Configuration,Document Sequences.
3. Enter a name for the document sequence.Specify Oracle Order Management as the Application.
4. Enter a starting number.
5. Optionally, enter effective dates for the document sequence.
6. Save your work.
Note: When sales document Types are defined, a corresponding Document Sequence Category will automatically be created for order types
and not for line types.The category created has the same name as the order type.
You must navigate to the AOL Assign Document Sequence window to assign a sequence to the newly created category.
If the Document Descriptive Flexfield is enabled, you need to specify the governing ledger.
The Document Method code should be left blank.
Creating a Document Sequence and Assigning It to the Transaction Type
Now you will create a document sequence for the transaction type and then assign the document sequence to the transaction
type.
10. Navigate to the Document Sequences window.
 (N) Setup > Documents > Define
11. Enter the following information in the window:
Name = SH-STD-Order
Application = Order Management
Effective From = Today’s date
Type = Automatic
Initial Value = 1
12. (I) Save. Exit the window.
13. Navigate to the Sequence Assignments window.
 (N) Setup > Documents > Assign
14. (T) Document. Enter the following information:
Application = Order Management
Category = SH-Mixed
Ledger = Vision Operations (USA)
15. (T) Assignment. Enter the following information:
Start Date = Today’s date
Sequence = SH-STD-Order
16. (I) Save and exit the window.
17. Enter a sales order with the Order Type = SH-Mixed.
The order number will be 1 and the line type will be defaulted to SH-StandardLine.
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Practice - Creating a Customer
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a customer in Oracle Order Management
Tasks
3. Define a new customer named XX-Big City with two sites:
 Bill to address: 102 N. LaSalle, Cook County, Chicago, Illinois, 60610
 Deliver to address: 487 Beverly, San Mateo County, Palo Alto, California, 94301
Create a Customer
SELECT PROFILE_CLASS_ID,CURRENCY_CODE,min_fc_balance_percent,min_fc_balance_overdue_type,aa.*
FROM hz_cust_prof_class_amts aa
WHERE 1=1
and PROFILE_CLASS_ID=0
and CURRENCY_CODE='EGP'
and min_fc_balance_percent IS NOT NULL
AND min_fc_balance_overdue_type IS NULL;
(N) Order Management > Customers > Standard
10. (B) Create.
11. Organization Name: SH-Big City. Leave Alias, D-U-N-S Number,URL, and Context Value.
12. Account Description: Enter a description for your customer.
13. Profile Class: Default.
14. Account Type: External. Leave all other fields, in the Account Information region, blank.
15. Country: United States.
16. Address Line 1: 102 N. LaSalle.
17. City: Chicago.
18. County: Cook
19. State: Illinois.
20. Postal Code: 60610. Leave all other fields, in the Account Site Address region, blank.
21. In the Business Purpose region, set Purpose to Bill To and check the Primary check box.
22. (B) Save And Add Detail.
23. (B) Create Site.
24. In the Business Purpose region, set Purpose to Deliver To and leave the Primary check box unchecked.
25. (B) Apply.
Guided Demonstration – Defining Freight Carriers
A freight carrier is a commercial company that transports shipments to and from customers, suppliers, and internal organizations.
You must set up each carrier's information as a party in Oracle Shipping Execution before shipping goods; you should assign a carrier to each
delivery. You also must associate a general ledger account with each carrier to collect associated costs.
Before you set up the carriers:
• Collect general information about each carrier
• Determine the types of services that your carriers offer and that you use
Responsibility: Order ManagementSuper User, Vision Operations (USA)
(N) Shipping > Setup > Freight Carriers, Cost Types > Freight Carriers
1. (N) Shipping > Setup > Freight Carriers,Cost Types > Freight Carriers
2. Enter the following information:
Name: SH-Freight
Short Name: SH-F
3. Enter the following in the Services tab
Service Level: Select a Service Level from the LOV
Mode: Select the mode of transport from the LOV
4. (B) Organization Assignments
5. Select Assigned check box for the Organization SH 1 and click Done.
Select Assigned to assign the ship method to the organization(s) that use it.
You can assign the ship method to more than one organization.
Note: If you want to assign the ship method to all of your organizations, click Assign All to have all organizations' Assigned field selected.If
you want to begin again with yourassignments,click Unassign All to have all organizations' Assigned field cleared.
6. (M) File > Save.
Defining Freight Costs
You can define allowable freight costs and suggested amounts for shipments.
These amounts are applied at ship confirm or once a delivery line is planned.
You can add multiple freight costs to a shipment from the list of allowable freight cost types that you define.
Note: If necessary,you can override the freight costs and suggested freight amounts at ship confirm.
You can also define multiple freight costs for a specific freight cost type.
For example, if you want to track different types of insurance,you can create different insurance costs underthe insurance freight cost type
such as liability insurance or shipping insurance.
When you add freight costs at ship confirmation for a foreign currency order, you can use either yourfunctional currency or the order's
foreign currency.
If you use yourfunctional currency, the freight charges are converted to the order currency through Oracle Receivables.
Note: You should define all your freight costs in yourfunctional currency for uniformity.
You can then modify the currency to match the order, and modify the amount on the Confirm Shipments window, as necessary.
Prerequisites
• Define yourFreight Cost Type Lookups.
• To pass freight costs to Order Management and Accounts Receivable so that the customer is invoiced
(for example, freight terms = Prepay and Add), then a pricing modifier and pricing formula are required.
To define freight costs:
1. Navigate to the Freight Cost Types window.
1. (N) Shipping > Setup > Freight Carriers,Cost Types > Freight Cost Types
Freight Cost Types Window
2. Enter a Name for the freight cost.
3. Select the Type of freight cost.
4. Select a Currency for the freight cost.
5. Enter the Amount for the freight cost.
You can change this amount during ship confirmation. You can enter 0 as the amount.
6. Optionally, enter Effective dates for the freight cost.
7. Save your work.
Practice - Setting Up a Defaulting Rule
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to set up a defaulting sourcing rule for the Freight Terms attribute for your customer XX-Big
City Electronics.
You will then create a sales order to observe how the sourcing rule provides a defaulting value for Freight Terms on the Sales
Orders window.
In Oracle Order Management,defaulting sourcing rules enable you to automatically default attribute values into sales order
entities:
 Sales order entities include groups of related attributes such as Order or Line.
 Attributes are the individual fields within a particular entity, such as Warehouse, Ship To Location, or
Agreement.
Note: Changes to defaulting rules take effect for any new orders that use the modified defaulting rules when you open the
Sales Order Header or Lines windows or if you update an attribute (field) on an order.
Setting Up a Defaulting Condition Template
Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
1. Navigate to the Defaulting Setup – Entity Attributes window.
 (N) Order Management > Setup > Rules > Defaulting
2. (I) Find.
3. Select entity = Order Header.
4. (B) OK.
5. (B) Defaulting Condition Templates. The Defaulting Condition Validation Templates window appears.
Note: In the header region, ensure the following values are selected for the Application and Entity values (if you do not see
these values, do a query to find them):
Application = Order Management
Entity = Order Header
6. (I) New (place cursor in the Validation Templates region).
7. Enter a new validation template:
Condition Name = SH-Freight Terms for SH-Big City Electronics
Description = Used for Freight Terms for Customer XX-Big City Electronics
8. In the Validation Rules region, create two validation rules for the template you added:
--- Group # Attribute Validation Operation Value String
Rule # 1 105 Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
Rule # 2 106 Currency = USD
9. (I) Save.
10. Close the Defaulting Condition Validation Template window.
Setting Up a Defaulting Sourcing Rule for the Freight Terms Attribute
11. Navigate to the Defaulting Setup – Entity Attributes window.
12. Select Attribute = Freight Terms.
13. (B) Defaulting Rules. The Attribute Defaulting Rules window appears.
14. On the Defaulting Conditions region, select a defaulting condition for the Freight Terms attribute (use the defaulting
condition template you created in previous steps):
Precedence = 3
Defaulting Condition = XX-Freight Terms for XX-Big City Electronics
Enabled = Selected
15. On the Default Sourcing Rules region, create a default sourcing rule for the Freight Terms attribute.
The sourcing rule defines what Freight Terms value is displayed when the defaulting conditions are met:
Sequence = 501 (or similar 3-digit value if you cannot use 501)
Source Type = Constant Value
Default Source/Value = To Be Determined
16. (M) Tools > Generate Defaulting Handler Package. This program generates the defaulting rules for the attribute.
17. (I) Save.
Viewing the Freight Terms Attribute in the Sales Order Window
18. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
 (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders
19. (T) Order Information, (T) Main:
20. Enter a sales order for the following customer:
Customer = XX-Big City*
Order Type = Mixed
Currency = USD*
Note: *These conditions are required for the Freight Terms rule to be applied.
21. (T) Order Information, (T) Others.
22. On the Freight Terms field, confirm that the defaulting freight term value is To Be Determined. If so,then the default rule
was applied successfully.
Disabling the Defaulting Condition SH-Freight Terms for SH-Big City Electronics for the Freight Terms Attribute
23. Navigate to the Defaulting Setup – Entity Attributes window.
24. Select Attribute = Freight Terms.
25. (B) Defaulting Rules. The Attribute Defaulting Rules window appears.
26. Select the Defaulting Condition = XX-Freight Terms for XX-Big City Electronics
Enabled = Deselected
Note: If the Enabled check box for the defaulting condition is not selected,the defaulting condition is disabled and the rules
and condition associated with this condition are not used in default rule processing.
27. (M) Tools > Generate Defaulting Handler Package.
28. (I) Save.
Viewing the Freight Terms Attribute in the Sales Order Window
29. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
 (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders
30. (T) Order Information, (T) Main.
31. Enter a sales order for the following customer:
Customer = XX-Big City*
Order Type = Mixed
Currency = USD*
Note: *These conditions are required to see if the Freight Terms rule you created has been disabled successfully.
32. (T) Order Information, (T) Others.
33. In the Freight Terms field, notice that the default Freight Terms value is now Prepaid and not To Be Determined. This
means that you have successfully disabled the Freight Terms sourcing condition, and a different rule was applied to derive
the Freight Terms value.
Practice - Creating a Discount Modifier Using Qualifiers
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to create a discount modifier to apply a 5% discount.
You will then create a sales order and see the discount applied automatically.
Creating a Discount Modifier
Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations
QP: Allow Buckets For Manual Modifiers
Default Value: No
This profile option enables you to define buckets for manual line or group of line level modifiers.
Yes: Enables you to define buckets for manual line or group of line level modifiers.
No: You cannot define buckets for manual line or group of line level modifiers.
1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.
2. (T) Main:
Modifier Type = Discount List
Number = SH-Discount 1
Active = Deselected (to start)
Automatic = Selected
Name = SH-Discount 1
Version =1
Start Date = Today’s date
Description = 4
3. (B) List Qualifiers. Enter the following qualifiers:
Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Operator Value From
Customer Customer Name = Global Communications
Modifier List Price List = SH-Price List 4
4. (B) OK.
This action applies the qualifier to the modifier and modifier lines defined in the Modifiers Summary tab.
5. (T) Modifiers Summary tab:
Modifier
Number
Modifier
Level
Modifier
Type
Start/ Finish
Dates
Pricing Phase Incompatibility Level Bucket
1 Line Discount Optional 10 – List Line Adjustment (blank) 1
6. (T) Discounts/Charges:
Application Method = Percent
Value = 5
7. A discount of 5% will be applied for all products ordered, but only when:
 Customer is Global Communications, and
 Price list for the order is SH-Price List 4
8. Return to the header of the modifier and select the Active check box.
9. (I) Save.
Creating a Sales Order Using a Discount Modifier
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations
10. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
 (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders
11. (T) Order Information, (T) Main:
Customer = Global Communications. Required sales order header information defaults from your customer setup.
Order Type = Mixed
Price List = SH-Price List 4
12. (T) Line Items:
Ordered Item = DD-00010-0040-01
Qty = 10
13. (I) Save. Note the order number 66399.
14. (B) Actions > View Adjustments.
15. (T) Adjustments. Note that the 5% modifier discount has been applied.
Manual Apply
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved.
Freight and Special Charge List Modifier
Add freight charges that are applied to the sales order total
Order Total > $500
10%
Freight
Charge
Order Total < $500
20%
Freight
Charge
Practice - Creating a Freight and Special Charge List Modifier
Overview
In this practice, you create a Freight and Special Charge List modifier using formulas, modifiers, and qualifiers. In
this exercise you will define:
 Two Special Charge Formulas
 A Modifier List with four line modifiers that determine how to use the formulas
 List and line qualifiers to determine eligibility
Note:For freight charge modifiers, you can apply freight charges corresponding to ONLY ONE Charge name (such as
"Freight Costs") even if severalcharge names qualify.
Assumptions
 Oracle Order Management Super User responsibility
 You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or test instance at
your site on which to complete this practice.
Note: Oracle Advanced Pricing screenshots are shown in the Solution section of this practice. If you are running Basic
Pricing, the pricing system software components restrict exposure of advanced features in the pricing windows. Therefore,
the screenshots may differ from the pricing windows in the Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or
test instance you use at your site to complete this practice.
Defining the First Formula
Responsibility = Oracle Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
1. Navigate to the Pricing Formulas window.
 (N) Pricing > Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup
2. Enter the following:
Name = SH-Freight
Description = Dollar Amount x Constant .01
Formula = 1*2
Formula Type Pricing Attribute Context Pricing Attribute Component Step
Pricing Attribute Volume Item Amount N/A 1
Numeric Constant N/A N/A .01 2
3. (I) Save.
Defining the Second Formula
4. Enter the next formula
Name = SH-Handling
Description = Item Quantity x Constant .05
Formula = 1*2
5. Formula Lines region:
Formula Type Pricing Attribute Context Pricing Attribute Component Step
Pricing Attribute Volume Item Quantity N/A 1
Numeric Constant N/A N/A .05 2
6. (I) Save.
7. Run Build Formula Package
8. Build Attribute Mapping Rules
Defining a Freight and Special Charge List Modifier
Note:For freight charge modifiers, you can apply freight charges of one Charge Name (such as "Freight Costs") only once even
if more number of charges qualifies.
7. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.
 (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup
8. (T) Main. Enter the following:
Type = Freight and Special charge List
Number = SH-Freight and Handling
Active = Deselected (to start)
Automatic = Selected
Name = SH-Freight and Handling
Version = 1
Start Date = Default
Currency =Defaults
Description = Enter a meaningful description
9. (B) List Qualifiers.
Grouping Number Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Precedence Operator Value From
1 Modifier List Price List Defaults = SH-Price List 1
1 Order Order Type Defaults = Mixed
10. (B) OK.
11. (T) Main, (T) Modifiers Summary.
Modifier Number Level Modifier Type Start/End Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket
Freight1 Line Freight/Special Charge Optional Selected 50 (Line Charges) 1
12. (T) Discounts/Charges.
Charge Name Formula Application Method Value
Freight Costs SH-Freight Lumpsum (blank)
13. (B) Line Qualifiers:
Grouping
Number
Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Precedence Operator Value From Value
To
1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000
14. (B) OK.
15. (T) Modifiers Summary to create a new modifier line:
Modifier Number Level Modifier Type Start/End
Dates
Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket
Freight2 Order Freight/Special Charge Optional Selected 70 (Charges:
Header/All Lines)
(Blank)
16. (T) Discounts/Charges.
Charge Name Application Method Value
Freight Costs Lumpsum 100
17. (B) Line Qualifier.
Grouping
Number
Qualifier
Context
Qualifier
Attribute Precedence Operator
Value
From
Value To
1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000.99
18. (B) OK.
19. (T) Modifiers Summary. Create a new modifier line
Modifier Number Level Modifier Type Start/End Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket
Handling1 Line Freight/Special Charge Optional Selected 50 (Line Charges) 1
20. (T) Discounts/Charges.
Charge Name Formula Application Method Value
Handling Costs SH-Handling Lumpsum Blank
21. (B) Line Qualifier and create a Line Level Qualifier.
Grouping Number Qualifier Context Qualifier
Attribute
Precedence Operator Value From Value To
1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000.99
22. (B) OK.
23. (T) Modifiers Summary. Create a new modifier line:
Modifier
Number
Level Modifier Type Start/End Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket
Handling2 Order Freight/Special Charge Optional Selected 70 (Charges: Header/All
Lines)
(blank)
24. (T) Discounts/Charges.
Charge Name Application Method Value
Handling Costs Lumpsum 50
25. (B) Line Qualifier. Create a Line Level Qualifier:
Grouping Number Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Precedence Operator Value From Value To
1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 10001 9999999
26. (B) OK.
27. (T) Main tab.
28. Select the Active check box.
29. (I) Save your work.
Creating a Sales Order Using the Freight and Special Charge Modifier
Responsibility = Oracle Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
30. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
 (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders
31. (T) Order Information, (T) Main
Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
Order Type = Mixed
Required Header information defaults from your customer setup
Price List = XX-Price List 1
32. (T) Line Items
Ordered Item = DD-00010-0040-01
Quantity =10
33. (I) Save your work and note the order number 66402.
34. (B) Actions > Charges and Freight Costs to view your charges.
35. Close the window.
36. (T) Order Information.
37. (B) Actions > Charges.
38. Close the Charges window.
39. Increase the quantity ordered (such as quantity 20) of the order line so that the ordered amount exceeds $1,000.
40. (I) Save.
41. (B) Actions > Charges and Freight Costs. There should be no changes provided that the Order Total is above $1,000.
42. Close the window.
43. (T) Order Information tab.
44. (B) Actions > Charges.
There should be a line for Freight Costs of $750 and a line for Handling Costs of $100 (provided the Order Total is greater
than $1,000).
45. Save your work.
Discount Per Item And Quantity
For any 10 compact discs purchased by Jan 2016, the customer receives two Currency Discount
1. Create a modifier.
Modifier Type: Discount
Modifier Level: Line
End Date: 31 Jan 2016
Product Attribute: Item Number
Product Attribute Value: DD-00010-0040-01
Volume Type: Item Quantity
Break Type: Recurring
Value From: 10
Application Method: Lumpsum
Value: 2
Test Scenario
Explain New Selling Price
Quantity List Price Extended Amount Lump sum NEW Selling Price
100 20 2000 (100/10)=10 ---- (10*2)=20 (2000-20)/100=19.8
Line 2
Explain New Selling Price
Quantity List Price Extended Amount Lump sum NEW Selling Price
20 25 500 (20/5)=4---(4*2)=8 (500-8)/20=24.6
Discount for Third Unit
Customers who buy two bottles of shampoo receive one Currency unit off of the third bottle of shampoo.
1. Create a modifier.
Modifier Type: Discount
Modifier Level: Line
Product Attribute: Item Number
Product Attribute Value: DD-00030-0110-01
Volume Type: Item Quantity
Break Type: Recurring
UOM: Each
Value From: 3
Application Method: Lumpsum
Value: 1
Test Scenario
.
Explain New Selling Price
Quantity List Price Extended Amount Lump sum NEW Selling Price
100 30 3000 (100/3)=33---(33*1)=33 (3000-33)/100=29.67
Price Break
Scenario 1
All employees in Company ABC's mobile phone plan receive per minute discounts based on minutes used, as follows:
Minutes Discount Per Minute ($USD)
0-120 0.05
120-240 0.10
240-420 0.12
> 420 0.15
A customer who uses 150 minutes receives the following discounts:
- $ 0.05 per minute discount on 120 minutes
- $ 0.10 per minute discount on 30 minutes
1. Create a modifier.
Modifier Type: Price Break Header
Modifier Level: Line
- Product Attribute: Item Number
- Product Attribute Value: Minutes
- Volume Type: Item Quantity
- Break Type: Range
- Adjustment Type: Discount
2. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the price break modifier.
- Grouping Number: 1
- Qualifier Context: Customer
- Qualifier Attribute: Customer Name
- Operator: =
- Value From: Global Communications
3. In the Price Break Lines region, enter the break lines.
Value From Value To Application Method Value
0 120 Amount .05
120 240 Amount .10
240 420 Amount .12
420 Amount .15
Test Price Break Scenario 1
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Sales Order Change Management
Processing Constraints
Overview
Processing Constraints enable you to control changes to sales documents in Oracle Order Management.
This chapter describes the Processing Constraints framework in detail.
Introduction
Processing constraints are rules that control who can change what and when they can change it.
Processing constraints can prevent certain changes,but can also be set up to perform actions based on those changes.
They can define actions that can result from these changes,such as requiring a reason for the change,triggering an action in Audit Trail or
Versioning, or raising an Integration Event.
With processing constraints, you can control:
• Who can make changes based on responsibility.
A constraint (rule) may apply to all responsibilities, to only a list of constrained responsibilities or to all except a list of authorized
responsibilities.
• More than just what can be updated.The following operations can be controlled:
Create, update, delete, cancel, and split all at the entity level. For example, given a set of conditions you may not want to allow a userto
create a new order line.
You can also control the update operation down to the attribute level.
For example, given a set of conditions,you could choose to allow update to the warehouse field of an order line but not to the price list field.
• Changes to entities. An entity roughly corresponds to a table or window.
The entities you can control in Order Management are:
• Order Header
• Order Line
• Order Sales Credit
• Line Sales Credit
• Order Price Adjustment
• Line Price Adjustment
• Order Payment
• Line Payment
• Sales Agreement Header
• Sales Agreement Line
• Changes based on a group of conditions.
The conditions must be collectively true for the constraint to fire or prevent the changes.
The conditions may be based on either the state of a workflow activity (where the entity is in the flow) or a value in a table.
A condition may also be based on a customAPI, which means that you can call your own PL/SQL code to evaluate the condition.
Multiple conditions can be combined using either AND logic (all the conditions must be true) or OR logic (at least one of the conditions must
be true.)
A custommessage can display when an attempt is made to violate a constraint.
This chapter details the differences between Processing Constraints and the functionality in Order Entry that it replaced - Security Rules.
It describes in detail the implications of selected values in the following forms:
Processing Constraints, Validation Templates and Record Sets.Finally, set up for processing constraints is demonstrated using the following
business examples:
• No one can change the customer purchase order at the line level;
your company requires that one sales order can relate to only one customer purchase order.
• No one can add a line to an order after any of the lines on the order have been invoice interfaced.
• A reason is required to cancel an order line after it has been booked.
• Only the Customer Service Manager can change the discount percentage on an order line after the line has been shipped.
• Require all return orders, identified by order type = Return, to be shipped to a central returns processing facility.
Constraints for drop ship functionality enable you to control changes within the drop ship flow between Oracle Order Management and
Oracle Purchasing. See Processing Constraints,page 10-1 for details on these constraints.
Versioning in Order Management uses constraints to enable automatic versioning.
You can use validation templates for example to drive versioning by transaction type as a condition.
By using the processing constraints and workflow activity, you can increment the version and determine the statuses available to version,
which give you complete flexibility setting up versioning. See: Versioning, page 10-21
Background
Security Rules provide functionality to control changes to orders.
However, they have certain limitations both in the philosophy and in implementation.
In Order Management there is a processing constraints framework usable by other products.
This framework provides to you the ability to:
• Control changes based on who is trying to make them (by responsibility)
• Define constraining conditions based on the state of related objects (for example, define a constraint on a line based on the state of the
order)
• Control changes based on the value of a field - see Validation Templates section below
• Call customPL/SQL code to determine whether a condition is true
• Constrain operations at any point in the process flow. In prior releases you could only control operations for certain hardcoded cycle
actions.
Terminology
Processing Constraints are very powerful and setting them up is not difficult; however, knowledge of the following terms is helpful:
Entity
A group of related attributes that roughly correspond to a table or a window in Order Management.
The entities that can be managed using processing constraints are Order Header, Order Line, Order Price Adjustment, Line Price Adjustment,
Order Sales Credit, Line Sales Credit, Order Payment, Line Payment, Sales Agreement Header, and Sales Agreement Line.
Entities correspond to 'objects' in the old security rules.
Attribute
A field or column that belongs to an entity.
For example, the ordered unit of measure is an attribute of the Order Line entity.
Attributes correspond to fields in the old security rules.
Operation
An action that you can take on an entity. The operations that can be controlled by processing constraints are Create, Update, Delete, Cancel
and Split.
Processing Constraints Framework
A generic facility that will enable you to define processing constraints forapplication entities and attributes.
It includes the set of APIs that will enable you to query the existence of any constraint against the operations you wish to perform on that
entity or its attributes.
Seeded constraints have the System box checked and cannot be modified.
Validation Template
Names a condition and defines the semantics of how to validate that condition.
These validation templates can be used in the processing constraints framework to specify the conditions for a given constraint.
Record Set
A record set is a set of records that are bound by some common attribute values (for example all lines on an order).
In the processing constraints framework, when you define constraining conditions, you may specify a record set to be validated for a given
condition as defined by its validation template.
Scope
Given a record set and a condition, the scope (Any/All) defines how the validation should be performed on records of the record set."All"
requires the validation to be TRUE for every record in the set."Any" requires the validation to be TRUE for at least one record in the set.
Conditions
The test(s)which must be passed for a constraint to be active. For example, a condition for a constraint might be that the order is booked.
Defining Processing Constraints
Processing Constraints Window ConditionsTab
Navigate to the Processing Constraints window.
Order Management > Setup > Rules > Security > Processing Constraints.
Note that the window is divided into several regions.
The top region has fields for the Application and the Entity.
Any one of the OM entities are the valid values for the entity field.
This is used for querying—you cannot create new entities.
When you query an entity you will see all the constraints defined against that entity.
Constraints
The Constraints region is where most of the details of a processing constraint are defined.
The region enables you to view the seeded constraints,view, or update the constraints that were created for your company.
You can create new constraints,but you cannot change the seeded constraints with the systemcheck box marked.
Operation Field
The Operation field can have the values of Create, Update, and Delete for any of the entities, Cancel for Order Header and Order Line entities
only, and Split for the Order Line Entity only.
Attribute Field
The Attribute field can only be used if the operation selected is UPDATE.
You may enter a value here, and the constraint will only apply to that field.
For instance you may define a constraint that affects only the warehouse field on the order line.
If the Attribute field is left blank the constraint will be in effect for all the attributes of the entity.
For instance,you may define a constraint which prevents updates to any of the fields of an order line.
Please note that only when constrainable attributes are updated, processing constraints execute.
All attributes are not constrainable, therefore processing constraints will not execute for such attributes,even though the operation selected is
UPDATE.
Action Field
The Action field allows you to select the action to be taken if the constraining conditions are met.
Note: There is no unique Require Reason action; it must be used in conjunction with Versioning or Audit.
Processing Constraints Window with User Action Menu Displayed
The combination of Actions that can be selected are:
• Generate Version, Require Reason and Raise Integration Event
• Generate Version and Require Reason
• Generate Version
• Require Reason, History and Raise Integration Event
• Require Reason and Require History
• Require History
• Raise Integration Event
Actions of Require Reason and Require Reasons and Require History for audit history are supported only for the UPDATE operation.
Constraints are evaluated in the following order (Only one constraint may take effect for a change):
• User Action
• Not Allowed.
• Generate Version, Require Reason and Raise Integration Event. This activates automatic versioning.
• Generate Version and Require Reason. This activates automatic versioning.
• Generate Version. This activates automatic versioning.
• Require Reason, History, and Raise Integration Event. This activates Audit Trail to capture changes.
• Require Reason and Require History. This activates Audit Trail to capture changes.
• Require History. This activates Audit Trail to capture changes.
• Raise Integration Event. This can be used with versioning.
During implementation any action which includes "Raise Integration Event" may be selected.This event is presently used by XML
processing and can be used by any other product.
Actions that Require Reason take precedence over actions that do not.
Example
Assume that both versioning and audit constraints apply to update of price list. Only version is captured as it takes precedence and audit
history is not available for this update.
However, if audit constraint is on a different attribute like update of payment term and you change the payment term and price list, both
version and audit history are captured.
Applies To Field
The Applies To field is used to define whether the constraint is applicable in the
Negotiation or Fulfillment transaction phase.If the field is blank, then it is applicable to
both phases.
Enabled Field
The Enabled field indicates whether the current Constraint is active.
This allows constraints to be temporarily disabled if necessary.
System Changes Field
Use the SystemChanges field to indicate if systemchanges are allowed even if the constraining conditions are met.
The systemchanges here refer to an attribute initially getting a default value or being re-defaulted when a source attribute changes.
This is applicable only for attribute or field level UPDATE operations.
The possible values are:
• Never after Insert: System changes are allowed to this field only if the entity has not yet been saved to the database.
This is the default value.
• Always: Systemchanges are always allowed on the attribute
User Changes Field
Use the User Changes field to indicate when the user performing the operation is
constrained.This is applicable only for attribute or field level UPDATE operations.
The possible values are:
• Never after Insert: You can change this field only if the entity has not yet been saved to the database.This is the default value.
• Always: You can never enter a value for this attribute, even if the entity (for
example an order) is being created for the first time.
System Field
The System Field indicates if a constraint included with the OM systemis user updateable.System constraints help prevent data integrity
problems and cannot be updated.Any operation, field, action, or list of responsibilities attached to these constraints cannot be modified.
However, additional validation conditions can be included as long as they do not have the same group number.
Enabled Field
The Enabled field indicates whether the current Condition is active.
This allows conditions to be temporarily disabled if necessary.
Note that if all conditions are disabled and the constraint itself is not disabled, the constraint always applies for that change.
Care must be taken to ensure that the disabling of conditions does not introduce problems in the business flow.
The bottomsection of the window has two tabbed regions - the Conditions region and the Applicable to region.
Conditions
The Conditions region allows you to define the condition(s) that must be true for the constraint to fire. Unless the group of conditions are
true, the constraint will not be active.
Group Number Field
The Group Number field determines whether AND or OR logic is used to combine conditions.For conditions that should togetherevaluate to
TRUE (AND conditions), enter the same group number. Define OR conditions by using different numbers.
Scope Field
The Scope field is evaluated with the Record Set field to determine if the condition is true.
The possible values are:
• ANY: If the record set on this validation condition can select multiple records, then this condition should be TRUE for AT LEAST ONE of
the records. For example you can evaluate a condition against any line on an order: If ANY line on the order is canceled.
• ALL: If the record set on this validation condition can select multiple records, then this condition should be TRUE for ALL the records. For
example you can evaluate a condition against all lines on an order: If ALL lines on the order are canceled.
Validation Entity
The Validation Entity is the one for which the condition is evaluated.
The validation entity can be the constrained entity (displayed in the Entity region) or any related entity.
For example, the constrained entity could be an order line and the constraint could be evaluated based on characteristics of the validation
entity order header.
Select the Record Set and based on the selected scope,the conditions will be evaluated for any or all of the records in the set.
An example of a seeded Record Set is a ship set.
You may define additional record sets as needed.
Note: If the validation entity on the condition is different from the constrained entity, then only the record set based on the primary key
for the validation entity will be available in the LOV Check the NOT Box to create a NOT condition.
For example if the condition is Booked, checking this flag will evaluate the condition NOT Booked.
System Field
The System field is checked for the conditions that were included with the OM system and are not userupdateable.
You cannot define new AND conditions with the same group number as a systemcondition.
User Message Field
The User Message field displays when an attempt is made to violate a constraint.The message is specific not just to the constraint but also to
the specific condition that was violated. For example, you can create a user message that states:"line has been booked."
If the constraint is set up to prevent any update to the item field on the order line if the line had been booked, the complete error message
displayed at run time is: "You are not allowed to update the item; line has been booked."
The following screen shows the Processing Constraints window again, this time with the Applicable To tab selected. Use this tab to define the
responsibilities the constraint applies to.
Processing Constraints Window, ApplicableTab
If the button for All Responsibilities is selected, then the constraint will apply to all users.
No one will be able to perform the constrained action. All seeded constraints are applicable to all responsibilities.
If you select the Authorized Responsibilities button,then only the responsibilities that you list will be allowed to perform the action.
All other users will be stopped from performing the action by the constraint.
If you select the Constrained Responsibilities button,then all users except for the responsibilities defined will be able to perform the action.
The users that you list will be stopped from performing the action by the constraint.
There are two other forms that are used in setting up processing constraints.
These are the Validation Templates window and the Record Sets window.
The validation templates and record sets you create, as well as the seeded ones can be used in the Processing Constraints window as described
above.
Note: After updating constraints and/orconditions,close and reopen the sales document windows for the updated constraints to apply
correctly.
Guided Demonstration - Setting Up a Processing Constraint
In this demonstration, you will learn how to set up a processing constraint that prevents a sales order header from being updated
when the order is booked or when there are order lines created.
Processing constraints control who can change what and when they can change it.
Processing constraints can prevent certain changes,but also can perform actions based on those changes such as requiring a
reason for the change, triggering an action in Audit Trail or Versioning, or raising an Integration Event.
Responsibility: Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations
1. (N) Order Management > Setup > Rules> Security > Processing Constraints
2. Query in the top of the window (To query, press CNTRL + F11):
Application = Order Management
Entity = Order Header
3. Create a new line on the Constraints region:
Operation = Update
Attribute = Order Type
User Action = Not Allowed. This means the constrained operation cannot be performed.
Leave System Changes and User Changes fields blank.
Enabled check box = Selected
4. Create a new line on the Conditions tab:
Group Number = 101
Scope = Any
Validation Entity = Order Header
Record Set = Order. The record set corresponds to the entities to which the constraints process should apply the
condition.
For example, if you enter the order line record set Line, the condition is evaluated against the order line in
question. If you enter the order line record set Order, the condition is evaluated against any or all (depending on
the scope) lines of the order in question.
NOT check box = Deselected
Validation Template = Booked
Enabled check box = Selected
User Message = The order is booked.
5. Create a second line on the Conditions tab:
Group Number = 102
Scope = Any
Validation Entity = Order Header
Record Set = Order
NOT check box = Deselected
Validation Template = Lines Exist
User Message = The order has lines.
Applying the Processing Constraint to a Sales Order (Constraint Based on Booked Orders)
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations
6. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
7. Enter the sales order header using the following information (all remaining information defaults in):
Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
Order Type = Order Only
8. In the Line Items tab, enter the following line items:
Ordered Item Quantity
XX- Phone 3
XX-Palm Pilot 5
9. Save the sales order.
10. Book the order.
11. On the Order Information tab, Main subtab, change the order type:
Order Type = Drop Shipment
12. Save your work.
Note: If the processing constraint condition has been applied successfully, a Message box alerts you that you cannot update
the Order Type because the order is in Booked status.
Applying the Processing Constraint to a Sales Order (Constraint Based on Existing Lines)
Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations
13. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
14. Enter the sales order header using the following information (all remaining information defaults in):
Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
Order Type = Order Only
15. In the Line Items tab, enter the following line items:
Ordered Item Quantity
XX- Phone 2
16. Save your work.
17. On the Order Information tab, Main subtab, change the order type:
Order Type = Bill Only
18. Save your work.
Note: You should not be able to save your changes because the second processing constraint condition does not allow you
to update the Order Type for orders with existing order lines.
Roles and Users
Shipping Execution provides data access controls called roles that control users'access to the Actions list and Tools menu in the Shipping
Transactions form and the Quick Ship window. Roles also control ship confirm error and warning messages for breaking ship set s,missing
inventory controls, and breaking proportionality of ship model complete. Roles are assigned to users using grants that control access to view
or edit specific shipping data or actions.
This is useful, for example, if you want to assign a grant to inexperienced users that provides view-only access or assign grants that prevent
unwanted actions such as unintentionalpick releases across multiple organizations.
Note: Roles provide data access controls for the Shipping Transactions form and the Quick Ship window. If you want to restrict user access to
other windows like the Pick Release or setup windows, you can edit the Shipping menus in Shipping Administration.
For each role, select the following data access controls that control Edit and View access to shipping entities:
• Data Access Edit enables you to edit and view the data
• Data Access View enables you to browse the data
• Data Access None prevents you from editing and browsing data and performing actions
A role can provide either view-only, edit-only, or a combination of view and edit access depending on how you setup the role. You can create
customized roles by defining the access controls you want.
During the setup for each role, you enable or disable actions by selecting or deselecting the check box next to each action.
Note: If no data access control is selected, the user cannot edit or view the selected action.
Note: Ship confirm error and warning message configuration, on the Message tab,does not use data access.
After you have defined a role you can assign it to a userthrough a grant. A grant defines both the user's role and related information about the
grant including the date, and the organization(s) to which the grant applies.
The systemadministrator or super useris responsible for defining roles and assigning the grants to users.
Defining a New Role
Shipping Execution enables you to define new roles by selecting the data access controls that you want. You can define a new role by:
• Copying an existing role: An existing role can be copied to create a new role.
The copied role has the same data access privileges of the original, but if desired, these privileges can be edited for the new role. Save the
new role with a different name than the original.
• Manually defining a new role: You can create a new role in the Shipping Execution Role Definition window by selecting the data access
controls to trips, stops,lines, and deliveries. Save the new role with a unique name.
After you have created the new role you can assign it by grant to a user.
Note: In an environment that does not have Oracle Transportation Execution installed, five privileges related to Oracle Transportation
Execution are grayed out in the Shipping Execution Role Definition window.
The following privileges are strictly related to Oracle Transportation Execution, and therefore, do not apply if this application is not licensed:
Send Outbound Message,Select Carrier, Get Freight Costs,Cancel Ship Method, and View Message History.
To define a new role:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Execution Role Definition window.
Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window
2. Enter the Name of the role.
3. Enter a Description for the role.
4. In the Trips tab, in the Data Access field, select:
• Edit to provide edit access for the trip records
• View to provide view-only access for the trip records
• None to disable access and actions
5. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform.
Note: As a shortcut,choose the Disable Actions button to disable all the actions or the Enable Actions button to enable all the actions.
6. Select the Stops tab.
Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window - Stops Tab
7. In the Data Access field, select:
• Edit to provide edit access to the stop records
• View to provide view-only access to the stop records
• None to provide no access to the stop records
8. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform.
Note: As a shortcut,choose the Disable Actions button to disable all the actions or the Enable Actions button to enable all the ac tions.
9. Select the Deliveries tab.
Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window - Deliveries Tab
10. In the Data Access field, select:
• Edit to provide edit access to the delivery records
• View to provide view-only access to the delivery records
• None to provide no access to the delivery records
11. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform.
Note: Use the Actions View Message History, Send Outbound Message,Select Carrier, Get Freight Costs,and Cancel Ship Method if you
have Oracle Transportation Execution installed.
Note: As a shortcut,choose the Disable Actions button to disable all the actions or the Enable Actions button to enable all the ac tions.
12. Select the Lines/LPNs tab.
Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window - Lines/LPNs Tab
13. In the Data Access field, select:
• Edit to provide edit access to the lines/LPNs records
• View to provide view-only access to the lines/LPNs records
• None to provide no access to the lines/LPNs records
Note: The delivery records also include delivery legs and packing slips.
14. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform.
Note: As a shortcut,choose the Disable Actions button to disable all the actions or the Enable Actions button to enable all the ac tions.
15. Select the General tab.
Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window - General Tab
16. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform.
17. Select the Message tab.
The Message tab enables you to configure ship confirm messages for Breaking Proportionality of Ship Model Complete, Breaking Ship Sets,
and Missing Inventory
Controls. See: Message Configuration in the Shipping Execution chapter of the Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual.
18. From the Activity list of values, select Ship Confirm.
19. For each Message,select either Error or Warning depending on your business needs.
Note: The SystemDefaults are Warning for each Message.
20. Save your work.
Copying an Existing Role
Copying a role is useful for creating a new role based on the privileges of an exiting role.
Because copying automatically duplicates the original role, it saves you time from manually entering all the control privileg es of the original.
You can edit the privileges of the copied role, save the role with a new name, and assign it to users.
To copy an existing role:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Execution Role Definition window.
2. Find the role that you want to copy.
3. Click New Record to create a new record.
4. From the Edit menu, select Duplicate—Record Above to create a new role based on the privileges of the original.
5. Save the new role.
Granting a Role to a User
You can grant a user a role in one organization or all organizations for a period of time.
The role is assigned to a userby a grant. The grant is specific to a particular user and defines the role(s) assigned to the user, the organization
where the grant is effective, the start date and optionally, an end date.
More than one grant can be assigned if the user requires different access controls to more than one organization.
The start and end dates for grants can overlap.
For example, if a user requires full-access privileges to three organizations and view-only access to a fourth, the user must be assigned four
grants—one for each respective organization (three full-access and one view-only grant).
However, if only one grant is assigned,that grant becomes the default grant for the user.
In addition, the grant has the following requirements:
• A grant may or may not have one inventory organization selected.
• Many grants can be assigned for each role.
• A user can have one or more grants.If the userdoes not have any grant (expired, effective, or future), the default is view-only access to all
organizations. If the user has grants,the user's access is controlled by the effective grants. If there are overlapping gran ts in the same
organization or an intersection of grant date ranges,the union of grant privileges controls the user's access.
• A grant cannot be designated as the default grant. A role can be assigned to a userthat spans all organizations instead of g ranting a unique
grant per organization. If an organization is not specified, the grant is applicable to all organizations.
Warehouse Organization
A grant can have one or all inventory organizations. If an organization is not specified, the grant is applicable to all organizations.
For example, you can use grants to prevent a shipping clerk from assigning freight costs or planning a delivery in one or all organizations.
Note: Use caution when creating grants for all organizations (when no specific organization is selected). For example, if a userhas a grant to
view all organizations and a grant to perform actions on one organization, the union of these grants will enable the userto perform actions in
all organizations.
Changing Organizations in the Shipping Transactions Form
If a user's effective grants are single organization, the user can select an organization when opening the Shipping Transactions form or from
the Tools menu—Choose Organization. If all effective grants are in the same organization, the Shipping
Transactions form defaults to that organization.
Effective Dates for a Grant
Optionally, in the Start and End Date fields, you can enter a start and end date for the grant to assign it for a specific period. For example, you
can assign temporary employees a grant that is effective for the duration of their assignment. The date status for a grant can be endless,future
or expired:
• Endless: If you enter a start date but no end date, the grant is effective for an indefinite period.
• Future: You can specify start and end dates for a grant so that the grant is effective only between those dates.For example, a temporary
employee can be assigned a role that is effective for the duration of his/her contract.
The start date can be a current or future date. You cannot back-date the date: for example, you cannot enter a start date of yesterday.
• Expired: When the end date of the grant expires, the usercannot perform the job duties unless assigned a new grant by the system
administrator.
Note: If the userhas expired and future grants but no effective grants, the user has no access to the Shipping Transactions form. If required,
you can leave a gap between an expired grant and a future grant: for example, one grant can expire in June and another can begin in August.
To grant a role to a user:
1. Navigate to the Shipping Execution Grants window.
Shipping Execution Grants Window
2. In the User field, select the user's name.
3. In the Role field, select the role that you want assigned to the user.
Note: To view the available privileges for a selected role, click Edit Role to display the Shipping Execution Role Definition windo w.
4. In the Org field, select the organization to which the grant is assigned (optional).
A user can be assigned only role per warehouse (organization). However, you can assign a different role to a different wareho use.
5. In the Start Date field, enter the date that you want the role to start.
6. In the End Date field, enter the date that you want the role to end. If you do not want the role to end, leave the field blan k.
Once the grant is saved,only the end date can be updated.However, the date cannot be updated once it has expired.
7. Save your work to activate the role.
Guided Demonstration – Shipping Transactions Form
Responsibility: Order ManagementSuper User, Vision Operations (USA)
Querying using Query Manager
1. (N) Shipping > Transactions
2. Search for region
Lines (B) - Select
3. (T) Lines
Line Status: Not Shipped
4. Saved Query region
Name: SH-Notshipped
Description: Not Shipped Lines
Saved Query?:Select. This makes the query public to all users
5. (B) Find. All lines which are not shipped are displayed in the Shipping Transaction Form
Shipping TransactionForm
9. Click on the Vertical Splitter on the left of the Shipping Transaction Form to view the Query details.
10. Click on the Vertical Splitter on the right of the Shipping Transaction Form to view the Packing Calculator.
Guided Demonstration – Quick Ship Window
Responsibility: Order ManagementSuper User, Vision Operations (USA)
WSH: Quick Ship Default View = Delivery Confirm
(N) Shipping > Quick Ship
Changing Quick Ship View
1. (N) Shipping > Quick Ship
2. (M) Tools > Change View to toggle between the two Quick Ship views. The two Quick Ship views are as follows:
Delivery Confirm View
Trip Confirm View
Finding Deliveries
3. Ensure that you are in the Delivery Confirm View.
4. You can find the deliveries in the Quick Ship window using any one the following methods:
Enter the delivery in the Name field and click Tab
Click on Name LOV to find for a delivery.
Click on the Find icon to find the delivery using Find Deliveries window. In the Find Deliveries window, you can
find the delivery based on the search criteria you enter.
Using Folder Option
5. To hide the Number of LPNs field. Click on the field. You can hide a field using any one of the following option
(M) Folder > Hide Field.
Right click on the field, select Folders option on the popmenu, and click Hide Field.
6. To show a field, you can use anyone of the following methods:
(M) Folder > Show Field. Select a field, which you want to display from the LOV.
Right click on any field, select Folders option on the popmenu and click Show field. Select a field, which you want to
display from the LOV.
7. To change the position of a field in the Quick Ship window, you can use anyone of the following methods.
 Click on the field to be moved. Click (M) Folder and click on Move Right, Move Left, Move Up, and Move
Down to move to respective position.
 Right click on the field to be moved. Select the Folders option in the popment, and click on Move Right,
Move Left, Move Up, and Move Down to move to respective position.
Creating New Folder
8. (M) Folder > New
9. Enter XX-Folder in the Folder field.
10. Select the Show Additional Delivery to display the Additional tab.
11. Select the Show Trip Information to display the Trip tab
12. (M) File > Save.
Practice - Order to Cash Cycle with Standard Items
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to create orders with a standard item. Please note that you will be completing an
order to cash cycle with a standard item using all the seeded data available in the environment. Examples of seeded
data are: Order Type, Customer, Price List, Item, etc.
Tasks
Create an order to cash lifecycle
1. Create an order.
2. Save and book the order.
3. Pick release the order.
4. Ship confirm the order.
5. Use AutoInvoice to create an invoice for the order.
Create an order
1. Navigate to the Quick Sales Orders window:
2. (N) Orders,Returns > Quick Sales Orders
3. Create an order for Computer Service and Rental:
 Customer: Advanced Network Devices ( )
 Order Type: SH-Mixed
4. Verify the following on the Main tab and Others tab (if the field is not visible on the window, you can folder-enable it):
 Operating Unit = should be Vision Operations
 Shipping Method: DHL
 Warehouse: SH1
 Price List: SH-Price List 1
 Ship To and Bill To Address should default depending on the Customer Name/Number field value
5. Enter Order Line Information:
 Ordered Item: DD-00100-0105-01 , DD-00020-0110-01
 Qty: 10
 Shipping Method: DHL
6. Save your work. The Status on the line should display as Entered.
7. Book the Order using (B) Book Order.
8. Note: Click (M) Tools > Workflow Status to see the status of the flow. Click (B) View Diagram on the Workflow Status
HTML page to see the order processes and activities. A green line around an activity (represented by a box) indicates
that the activity is in progress. Close the Workflow Status window to return to the Quick Sales Orders window.
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Pick Release the order
9. (N) Shipping > Release Sales Orders
10. Enter the order number in the Order Number field.
11. The Customer and Order Type fields get populated based on the Order Number field value.
12. Click (T) Inventory. Set Auto Allocate to Yes. (From Release Rule)
13. Click (T) Shipping. Set Auto Pick Confirm and Autocreate Delivery to Yes.
14. Click (B) Execute Now to pick release and pick confirm the order.
Ship Confirmation
15. Open the Shipping > Shipping Transactions window.
16. The Query Manager window opens. Enter your order number in the fields From Order Number and To Order
Number. Select no value in the Line Status field.
17. Click Find to find your order.
18. The Shipping Transactions window opens to display your order details with the statuses.
The Order Line Status Backordered Because No On Hand In Inventory Shipping Organization Mack Miscellaneous
Receipt For Items You Want Shipped
Pick Release again
The Line Status Is Ready To Release You Must Go To Inventory To Transact Move Order
Find SO Number
Cause #1:
The rules are not yet visible though they are created. This could be because they are not enabled, or because the
"Generate All Rules" concurrent program (WMSGRULE) was not run.
SOLUTION
For Cause #1:
Sometimes the enabled flag on the rule or association is not checked. Other times the Rules were not generated.
1. Review each Picking Rule defined in Inventory > Setup > Rules > Picking Rules.
2. Ensure each rule is enabled.
3. Press the associations and ensure that each association is enabled.
4. Run the "Generate All Rules" concurrent program (WMSGRULE).
Note: If your responsibility does not have this, you could add it to your responsibility using System Administrator > Security >
Responsibility > Define. Query your responsibility and see what your request set is. Then choose System Administrator >
Security > Responsibility > Request, query your request group name, add a row for the program "Generate All Rules".
19. Click on the Delivery, Path by Stop and Path by Trip tabs. The delivery and trip should have been autocreated.
If not, use the Actions LOV to Auto-Create Deliveries, Auto-Create Trip.
20. Navigate to the (T) Delivery tab. Click (B) Ship Confirm.
select trigger_name,status,owner from dba_triggers
where trigger_name like '%ADS_WSH_DELIVERY_DET_TRG1%';
alter trigger ADS_WSH_DELIVERY_DET_TRG1 disable;
21. Accept all other defaults. Click (B) Ok.
22. You will get a message that the delivery was successfully confirmed. Click Ok and close the Shipping
Transactions window.
Verifying Status
23. Open the Quick Sales Orders window to check the status of your order. It should display as Shipped.
24. Click (M) Tools > Workflow Status to see the current status of your order. Click (B) View Diagram to see the
diagrammatic representation of the order flow. When a workflow activity (represented by a box) is enclosed
with a green line, it implies that the activity is in progress.
Viewing the Shipping Details from the Quick Sales Orders window
25. Click (B) Actions > Additional Line Information to view the delivery and trip information and status.
Order Header Main Tab Line Status Additional Line Information
Booked Shipped Delivery Status = Closed
Picked Status = Shipped
Trip Status = Closed
Interfacing to Receivables using the Workflow Background Process concurrent program
26. From the Quick Sales Orders window, navigate to (M) View > Requests. Click (B) Submit a New Request
(single request) and select the concurrent request Workflow Background Process. Enter the following as
parameters:
 Parameters window:
 Item Type: OM Order Line
 Process Deferred: Yes
 Process Timeout: No
27. Click Submit to process your request. You will get a request ID that you can track in the Find Requests
window. Click Find to see your request processed. It should complete as Normal.
28. Return to the Quick Sales Orders window. Query for your order by using the F11 key. Enter your order
number and use the Ctrl-F11 keys to get the query results. Though your order status still displays as Booked,
the line status should show up as Closed.
Shipping Transition Form Line Status
Run AutoInvoice
29. Navigate to (N) Receivables > Interfaces > AutoInvoice. Click (B) Submit a New Request and then select a
single request when prompted. The concurrent programs window opens to enable you to run AutoInvoice.
30. In the Name field select the AutoInvoice Master Program and enter the following parameters when the
parameters window pops up:
 Parameters for AutoInvoice:
 Organization: All
 Invoice Source: ORDER ENTRY
 Date: your current date
 (Low) Sales Order Number: Look for your sales order number in the LOV and select it
 (High) Sales Order Number: Look for your sales order number in the LOV and select it
31. Click Ok and return to the main window. Click Submit to run AutoInvoice. You will be given a request ID,
which you can use to track the status of your request. It should complete as normal.
Viewing your Invoice details
32. (N) Quick Order Organizer. Enter your order number and click (B) Find. When your order appears in the
result list, click (B) Actions > Additional Order Information > (T) Invoices / Credit Memos.
33. Click (B) Invoice Details to view the invoice that has been autocreated from your order.
Receivables, Vision Operations (USA)
Practice - Customizing the Quick Sales Orders Window
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to customize the Quick Sales Orders window.
 Open the Quick Sales Orders window
 Use the Folder Tool
 Enable Diagnostics
 Personalize the Quick Sales Orders window
 Tasks
 1. Login to the database with the login and password that you created in the previous practice.
 2. Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA).
 3. Create a folder at the header and line level using the Folder tool.
 4. Enable Diagnostics.
 5. Personalize the Quick Sales Orders window.
Choose Responsibility
1. Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility is selected.
Customize the Quick Sales Orders window
2. (N) > Orders,Returns > Quick Sales Orders
3. Place your cursor on any of the header fields and then select (M) Folder > New or (I) Folder Tools > (I) New.
4. The following window opens:
5. Enter the following:
 Folder - a name for the header level folder, replacing XX with your initials.
 Autoquery – Never
 Open as default – selected
 Public – selected
 Others tab (Others box) – selected
 Configure Buttons block – you need to display the Actions button in the window, so select the Display box of
the Actions entry in the Action Name column
 Click OK to save and return to the Quick Sales Orders window
 Verify the following: your new folder name, Others tab, Actions button – should be visible on the window
6. Place your cursor at a line level field and re-open the Quick Sales Orders window: (M) Folder > New or (I) Folder
Tools > (I) New.
Note: Enter the order type and customer name in the header so that you can navigate to the lines region.
7. Enter the following:
 Folder – enter the folder name, replacing XX with your initials
 Autoquery – Never
 Open as default – selected
 Public – selected
 Line Tabs block – select all the tabbed regions that you wish to see in the window
 Line Details (Regions) – select all the regions that you wish to use in the window (these are accessible by
clicking on the icon at the bottom right of the window – this expands to show the details of the selected
region)
8. Save your work and return to the Quick Sales Orders window.
9. Verify the following: your new folder name, all tabs in the Lines block, Regions – should be visible on the window.
Personalize the windowusing Forms Personalization
10. With the Quick Sales Orders window open, navigate to the Personalizations window: (M) Help > Diagnostics >
Custom Code > Personalize
11. If there are seeded Personalizations already in the window, do not modify them.
12. Enter a short description in the Description column, “Workflow Status menu”. Select the Level as Function and select
the Enabled box.
13. (T) Condition: Select the Trigger Event as WHEN-NEW-FORM-INSTANCE with a processing mode of BOTH.
14. (T) Actions: Enter the following:
a. Seq: 1
b. Type: Menu
c. Description: wf menu
d. Language: All
e. Enabled box: selected
15. Menu Entry: SPECIAL2:
16. Menu Label: Workflow Status
17. (B) Validate.
18. (B) Apply Now.
19. Close the Personalizations form and return to the Quick Sales Orders window.
20. Close the Quick Sales Orders window and reopen it. Check if the Workflow Status menu option is now available in the
Tools menu.
Use the Specials Menus to add some menu option to your Quick Sales Order window. The list is below:
Function Special Menu #
Find Customer SPECIAL1
Workflow Status SPECIAL2
Price Debug SPECIAL3
AutoSchedule SPECIAL4
User Sets SPECIAL5
Purge SPECIAL6
Show Line Details SPECIAL7
Item Search SPECIAL8
Quick Customer Entry SPECIAL9
Debug SPECIAL10
Apply Holds SPECIAL11
Mass Change SPECIAL12
Schedule SPECIAL14
Audit SPECIAL15
Scheduling in the Sales Orders
Scheduling Activity
The Schedule function can be performed anywhere in a process flow according to yourbusiness needs.If you want to setup sche duling to run
automatically, you can set it as a synchronous function within the workflow process so it will happen automatically. The profile option OM:
Autoschedule should be set to Yes.
Or the user can schedule manually directly from the sales orders window. See Scheduling for details on scheduling setup.
Practice - Using Scheduling in the Sales Orders Window
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to schedule an order both manually and automatically. Your customer XX-Big City
Electronics wants to order 15 units of item XX-Phone, 45 days from today’s date.
Assumptions
 Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations responsibility
 Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.
 You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or test instance at
your site on which to complete this practice.
 You have set the following profile option:
OM: AutoSchedule = No
 You have set the following system parameter. Setup-> System Parameters -> Values
Reservation Time Fence = 30
* The Time Fence Reservations are performed automatically whenever a line is scheduled and the schedule date is
within the reservation time fence.
For example, suppose the today's date is November 25th. An order line is scheduled for December 1st, which is 6
days away. If the reservation time fence is 10, the line will be reserved because 6 < 10. If the reservation time fence is
2, the line will not be reserved because 6 > 2. If the reservation time fence is NULL,then lines will not be
automatically reserved. The reservation time fence is set using the system parameter Reservation Time Fence.
Reservations Time Fence is affected by the scheduling parameters,Allow Partials.
If you want the reservation time fence to reserve as much as possible, even though full supply is not available, set the
scheduling parameter to allow partials.
Creating a Sales Order
Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations
1. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.
 (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders
2. (T) Order Information, (T) Main:
Customer = XX-Big City Electronics
Order Type = Mixed
Price List = Corporate
3. (T) Line Items, (T) Main:
Ordered Item = DD-00010-0040-01
Qty = 100
Request Date = Today’s Date + 45 days
Line Type = Standard (Header Invoicing)
Checking Item Availability
4. Select the order line for item DD-00010-0040-01.
5. (B) Availability. In the Availability window, confirm that the item quantity you want is available.
If the available quantity is sufficient, you can continue to the scheduling task.
Scheduling the Order Line
6. (M) Tools > Scheduling > Schedule.
7. (B) OK.
8. (T) Line Items, (T) Shipping.
Note: Notice that the schedule ship date has been set to the request date.
Reserving the Order Line
9. From the Tools menu, select Scheduling > Reserve.
Check The On-hand Item Status Before And After Reservation
Item Code = DD-00010-0040-01
10. Click OK.
11. On the Shipping tab note that the Qty Reserved field shows the reserved quantity.
12. (I) Save.
Using the Auto Scheduling Feature
13. (M) Tools > Auto Schedule (Ensure Auto Schedule is selected)
14. (I) New:
Item = XX-Phone Card
Qty = 2
15. (I) Save.
16. (T) Line Items, (T) Shipping.
Notice that the Qty Reserved field has been automatically entered for item XX-Phone Card.
Sales Quotes in Oracle Order Management.
NegotiationinOrder Management
Overview
Order Management provides an end to end solution for processing a simple Quote through the negotiation process and automating the
transition of the document to fulfillment.
This process reduces administration expenses, and increases productivity in an environment geared for rapid response to the customer base.
A quote can pass through various stages from its initial preparation to fulfillment (as a Sales or Sales Agreement).
These stages include preparation of a draft; negotiation with the customer; internal and external business approvals; versioning based on
customer feedback and conversion to an order or archival as an unsuccessfulorunused quote.Negotiation in Order Management provides a
seamless flow from a quote status through to firm order. Negotiation:
 Prepares and publishes quotes for assisted selling of products and services to customers and business partners.
 Creates and manage quotes as a negotiation tool and transition the quote to a firm order acting as a single point of entry in to Order
Management.
 Allows quick entry of order lines with a minimum of data entry. Quoting processes the quote and submits to Oracle Order
Management a firm order complete with approvals (Internal/External). Relevant information captured by the quote flows th rough to
the order.
You can use quoting to:
 Create, modify and select quotes.
 Configure Complex Products.
 Manually adjust quote prices.
 Perform real time global availability checks.
 Calculate taxes
 Assign sales Credits
 Convert quotes to orders.
 Support E-Business requirements.
 Reduce administration expenses and increase productivity.
Oracle Order Management includes a workflow phase to support the activities that typically occur within a negotiation process ,such as
internal approval and customer acceptance.This allows you to create and manage quotes during the negotiation phase and t ransition the quote
to a firm order. Features include:
 A separate menu option for entering Quotes
 Date Expiration
 Pricing and Availability queries
 Copy support
 Defaulting of attributes that can affect a quote
 Display of Related Items, such as up-sell, cross-sell or substitute items, and their price and availability
 Integration with Pricing
 Integration with TCA
 Minimal data entry that can be processed through to Oracle Order Management as a firm order complete with approvals
(Internal/External). Relevant information captured by the quote flows through to the order.
 Change Management using Processing Constraints and versioning
 Automated Process definition—workflows can be defined and extended.
 Visibility through the Order Information Portal
Miscellaneous
Both Quotes and SAs use the same seeded Negotiation workflows.
After Customer Acceptance,Quotes transition to a sales order and Sales Agreements become Active.
SAs do not capture an Offer Expiration date and therefore do not leverage this functionality in the Negotiation flow.
Unsupported Features
The functionality supported with Quotes is similar to the level of support for Sales Orders. There are a few Sales Order feat ures that are not
available during the negotiation phase of a transaction including:
 Holds
 Scheduling
 Copy a return from a quote.
 Independent line flows
 Cancellations – progress to LOST Status
 Ship and Arrival Sets
 Commitments
 Quotes for returns or Internal Sales Orders
 Sales Agreements - Can specify sales agreement reference on a quote but released quantity and released amount on a sales
agreement are updated only when a quote is converted to an order
Setup
Transaction Type
To create a Transaction Type
1. Set up the transaction type.See Transaction Types for generic setup instructions.
Note : that when the transaction type contains both a fulfilment and negotiation phase there are some additional implementation
considerations associated with set up.
These impact when and how document numbers are generated by document sequencing.
On the transaction type set up form there is a check box for retain Document Number.
When an order type is created two categories are created.
Depending upon the value of Retain Document Number the following steps need to be taken.
SH Qut To So
2. If you want to keep the document number from the quote when the transaction moves to fulfilment, use the category appended with
“TTXXX-Quote” when creating and assigning document sequencing.
3. If you need to generate a new document number for the transaction in the fulfilment phase,two document sequences need to be set
up:
o One for fulfilment, using the category with no appending text “TTXXX”
o One for the category appended with “-Quote”.
If this is not set up correctly then the document will not transition to fulfilment because the document cannot be assigned a
Sales Order Number.
NOTE: Retain Document Number check box applies only to transaction types with Sales Document Type of Sales Ord er.
Sales Agreements have only one document number, Sales Agreement Number, associated with the transaction irrespective
of whether agreement is in negotiation or fulfillment phase.
4. Then optionally assign a default transaction phase.
The transaction phase defaults to either Negotiation or Fulfillment based on Order Management defaulting rules when the quick
sales or standard sales order form is opened. The transaction phase always defaults to Negotiation independent of the default ing
rules when the form is opened through the Quotes menu option. If the transaction phase defaults to Negotiation, only the transaction
types that also have a negotiation workflow associated with it are displayed.
In the absence of a default, the fulfillment phase is automatically populated by the system.
Note: The transaction phase can be changed up to the point of saving the transaction or before lines are entered.Once the trans action
is saved or lines are entered,the transaction phase cannot be changed and the transaction phase field is non-updatable.
You can set the transaction phase directly on the sales document; the transaction phase determines where in the workflow the transaction
starts.Using a single transaction type you can choose to begin the transaction process in either phase if both fulfillment and negotiation
workflow assignments exist on that transaction type.
Note: While Sales Orders lines are assigned a line type through which the transaction is processed,quotes and SAs do not use line types and
follow a header flow only.
Transaction type designed for use with Sales documents For example in addition to header and line block data:
SA uses the following settings on the transaction types:
Document numbering
Flow assignments
Layout and contract templates.
Transaction phase
Quotes use:
Retain document number
Header flow assignment
Transaction phase
Layout and contract templates.
Workflows
Quotes and Sales Agreements leverage the flexibility of Workflow to manage the quote life cycle. There are two phases for workflow:
Negotiation and Fulfillment. Workflow flexibility allows you to tailor your Negotiation and Fulfillment phases to your specific processes.
You can choose one of the following generic seeded header-level negotiation flows, these flows can be associated to transaction types for
both Sales Orders and Sales Agreements. Both can be converted to an order. Quotes can be converted to sales orders in either the Entered or
Booked status (if the booking activity is synchronous).The seeded workflows are as follows:
 Negotiation Flow - Simple :This workflow does not require any approvals nor customer acceptance.However the quote can either
expire or get lost if it does not progress to being converted to an order.
 Negotiation Flow—Generic: Simple negotiation flow, without approval. Prepares quote document, get customer final acceptance,
convert quote to the Sales Order.
 Negotiation Flow—Generic with Approval: Flow with Approval. Prepare quote document, get management approval, get
customer final acceptance,and convert the quote to an order.
In support of a quote the following Status types are predefined:
 Draft
 Pending Internal Approval
 Lost
 Pending Customer Acceptance
 Draft Submitted
 Internal Approved
 Customer Accepted
 Offer Expired - This status does not apply to Sales Agreements.
 Draft - Customer Accepted
 Draft - Customer Rejected
Seededworkflow that incorporates Internal Approval and customer acceptance
After a quote has been put together, it can be submitted for approval. The relevant documents can be routed to various people in
the organization, including people from Sales, Business Practice,Legal, or Finance, for review.
The list of approvers is defined at the Transaction Type level.
The document must be approved by each participant in the list before the transaction is eligible to move forward in the
workflow. If the approver fails to respond within the time limit, the system will re-send the notification. If the approver again
fails to respond, the system will either send the notification to the next approver (if the current approver is not the last approver),
or reject the notification based on the system parameter setup.
The Approver List can be accessed two ways:
1. From the Transaction Type setup window: (N) > Orders, Returns > Setup > Transaction Type > Define. Select the
Approvals button to bring up the Approver List.
2. Navigate directly to the window: (N) > Orders,Returns > Setup > Transaction Type > Approvals.
If an approver is deleted from the list the notifications still need to be processed.
If an approver is added to the list and any transaction is pending approval they will receive a notification.
The user will receive a notification and must approve or reject.
Practice Quotes Functionality.
Topics that I will cover here are
1. Setup
2. Defaulting Rule & Generation of Defaulting Rule (When Required).
3. Profile setup.
4. Transaction Type.
Data Flow from Quotes to OM Order.
Oracle Quotes offers limited capability to create Quotes and Progress it through the Negotiation phase and finally creates Sales Order .
In case your Organization has complex / advance quoting needs you should Implement Oracle Sales Quoting.
One of advantage of Sales Quoting is that it enhance userexperience , since it is part of OM , it retrieve all the relevant information from
the Order management and once created and approved it creates Sales Order without much input from user.
In Oracle OM Quotes, Oracle has provided Negotiation , Customer Acceptance and Sale Order creation feature.
Following are features introduced in Oracle Quotes
1.Seeded Work flow ( Oracle has Introduced 2 worklfows ).
Workflow has introduced for the Order Header Type Only (OENH) , there is no Workflow for the Quote Lines.
 Negotiation Flow - Generic - It Support Negotiation , Customer Acceptance and Conversion of negotiation into Sales Order
 Negotiation Flow - Generic with Approval - It Supports Negotiation , Internal Approval , Customer Acceptance and finally conversion
into Sales Order.
With these workflow customer has flexibility to customized their Quotes process by adding or removing Fun ctions.
2.Quote Expiration Date - Every Quote has expiration date , once expiration date reached , Quote will be expired and Quote Headre
workflow is eligible for Purge.
SETUP
1.Transaction Type Setup
Set Document Sequence
2.Defaulting Rule Setup - This Defaulting Setup is required to populate the Transaction phase = " Negotiation " in Order Header Form.
Note: Common Mistake in these area are (User forgot to generate the defaulting Rule after enabling this Rule).
3.Profile Setup - this is Not a required setup , unless their is business requirement .We can leave this as blank.
4.Transaction Types - Oracle has introduce following New transaction types for Quotes Draft,
Pending Internal Approval, Approved,Lost, Pending Customer Approval, Accepted
Data Flow for OM Quotes
Create Quote - User Interface Similar to OM. When you save Quote , Quote status will be "Draft" and it indicate the Negotiation Phase.
Enter line details for quote , there will be no Line level workflow associated with Quote lines.
Quote Header Workflow is in Submit Draft Eligible Notified Status.
Once the Negotiation Process is complete , Progress the Quote header from the Negotiation Phase
Quote status will be now "Pending Customer Approval".
Once receive confirmation from customer regarding Approval /rejection , approve or reject the quote.
Once Quote is Approve , It automatically converted in Sales order .
System will Automatically Assign the Order Header level and line level workflow to Sales Order and Lines.
Order Header Workflow will be at "BOOK - ELIGIBLE" Notified and
Order Line Workflow will be at "Wait for Booking" Notified
Difference between back to back and drop shipment flow in Order management
Conceptual Difference:
Back to back flow - A business scenario where the material is specially purchased for a particular sales order and the material
needs to be received Into one ofThe warehouses ofthe selling group ofcompanies,is referred as "Back to back" cycle.
Back to back Purchase order is hard linked to the sales order until it is received.
Please note highlighted words here. Since, the material is received into the warehouse,the sales order needs to follow additional
picking/packing/shipping process only after which the goods are sent to the customer.
Drop Shipment flow - A business scenario where the material is specially purchased for a particular sales order and the material
is directly sent from the supplier to the customer,is referred as "Drop Shipment" cycle.
Drop shipment purchase order is also hard linked to the sales order until is received. However,in this case the material is never
received in the internal warehouse. Also, no additional picking/packing/shipping is involved by the selling company. Hence,
when such purchase order is received it is directly shipped without any physical shipping process.
Technical different in Oracle
Phase Back to back Drop shipment
Sales orderline source Sales order line ORDER SOURCE shouldbe internal Sales order line ORDER SOURCE shouldbe External
Import purchase requisitions Back to back requisitiondatais immediatelypumpedinto
requisition interface table afterPROGRESSORDER actionin
sales order
Drop Ship requisitiondata is NOT immediatelypumpedinto
requisition interface table afterPROGRESSORDER actionin
sales order. Workflowbackgroundprocess needs to be run to
insert data intorequisition interface tables
Reservations Back to back purchase requisition is reservedtothe sales order
in MTL_RESERVATIONStable. Same process is followingby
oracle for all sales order reservations.
Drop ship requisition is reservedtothe sales order in special
table calledOE_DROP_SHIP_SOURCES. This is a unique
process followedonlyfordrop shipment
Purchase orders It does not have “DropShip” tabin the PO Shipments form It has “Drop Ship” tabin the PO Shipments form
Purchase orderdelivery location Deliver To location in purchase ordershipment is set tothe
internal warehouse address
Deliver to locationin purchase order shipment is set to
“CustomerShip Toaddress”
Sales orderline status Line status changes on Progress Order, RequisitionCreation,
Purchase Order Approval & Purchase orderreceipts
e.g. Requisition Requested, Requisition Open,PO Open
Line status does NOT change on Progress Order andPurchase
Order Approval.
E.g. AwaitingReceipts – only status until PO is received
ViewingPO reservations Available in sales order line-Actions>Reservationdetails screen Available in Sales order line->Actions->AdditionalLine
information
PO receipt Physical receipt ofthe material happens Only logical receipt ofthe material
Flow of purchased material Material is receivedinside the warehouse andthenshipped Material is neverreceivedin the warehouse, it is shipped
directly fromsuppliertothe customer
After receipt Stock of the goods receivedincreases, stockgets reservedto the
sales order automatically
Sales order status changes to “AwaitingShipping”
Stock is receivedandimmediatelyshippedout by the system.
Sales order status changes directlyto“Shipped”
Sales orderdelivery
lines/delivery
Delivery lines are createdin shippingwhen PO is received No delivery lines are created, since shippingprocess in the
system is skipped
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Drop Ship Setup Steps
1-Create Transactions Type (Sales Order Type)
2-Defaulting Rules (Source Type)
3-Profile Options
4-Create New Buyer
5-Create New Item
6-Reciving Options (Clearing Account)
7-Drop Ship Test Cycle
1-OM: Setup ->Transactions Types ->Define
Transaction Type = SH Drop Ship
Define Item Attribute
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Drop Ship Line Status Flow
• Entered
• Booked
• Purchase Release: Item requires inspection before Purchasing can create a receipt
• Awaiting Receipt: Purchasing creates a receipt of the item
• Interfaced to Receivables
• Closed
OM: Order, Returns -> Requisitions Import
Parameter
Import Source :ORDER ENTERY
Group By : Buyer
Convert this PR(Drop ship) to Po
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Practice - Creating a Drop Ship Order
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to setup and create a Drop Ship Order.
The line item will ship directly from your supplier in an operating unit to your customer’s ship to address in another operating
unit.
 Perform the necessary setup steps for Drop Shipment across operating units
 Enter and book an order with a drop ship order line
 View the order processing in the workflow status window and progress the order through purchase release
 Run the requisition import concurrent program to generate a purchase requisition
 Autocreate a purchase order from the sales order (purchase requisition)
 Create a logical receipt for the quantity ordered
 View the quantities received in the Drop Ship tab, thereby completing the Drop Ship Order creation cycle
Tasks
1. Login to the database and navigate to the Sales Orders window.
2. Use the following header information for your drop shipment order:
 Operating Unit: Vision Operations
 Customer Name: Business World (1608)
 Customer PO: XX-015
 Order Type: Mixed
 (T) Others > Warehouse: D1
3. Use the following line information for your order:
 Ordered Item: AS54888
 Qty: 2
 Price List: Corporate
 Receiving Org: D1
 Source Type: External
Profile Option for Inter-Company Invoicing
1. Set the profile option INV:Advanced Pricing for Intercompany Invoice = No. This is set as a personal level profile
option.
2. Switch responsibility to Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA).
3. (N) Inventory > Setup > Organizations > Intercompany Transaction Flows
 Start Operating Unit: Vision Operations
 End Operating Unit: Singapore Distribution Center
 Type: Procuring
 Ship From/To Organization: D1
At the Nodes level, enter the following:
 Seq: 1
 From Operating Unit: Vision Operations
 To Operating Unit: Singapore Distribution Center
4. Click (B) Intercompany Relations. Enter the following information in the window:
 Customer: Vision
 Number: 1021
 Location: 5490
 Transaction Type: Invoice
 COGS Account: 01-580-7740-000-000
 Supplier: Vision
 Site: New York
 Inventory Accrual Account: 01-000-1810-0000-000
 Expense Accrual Account : 01-000-1110-0000-000
5. Save your work. The setup steps for drop ship are complete.
Drop Shipments Flow
6. Change Responsibility to Order Management Super User, Vision Operations USA.
7. Enter the sales order header information:
 Operating Unit: Vision Operations
 Customer Name: Business World (1608)
 Customer PO: SH-015
 Order Type: SH-Mixed
 (T) Others > Warehouse: D1
8. Enter line information:
 Ordered Item: AS54888
 Qty: 2
 Price List: Corporate
 Receiving Org: D1
 Source Type: External
9. (B) Book the Order.
10. Write your sales order number: 20140007 .
11. Check the workflow status in the (M) Tools > Workflow Status page. Verify that the order line has been
Purchase Released. If not, use the (B) Actions > Progress Order option or the Workflow Background Process
concurrent program to progress the order to complete Purchase Release. The parameters that you will need
for the Workflow Background Process are:
 Item Type: OM Order Line
 Process Deferred: Yes
 Process Timeout: Yes
12. The status of the order line will change to Awaiting Receipt.
13. The workflow status of the line is below. (M) Tools > Workflow Status
Run the Requisition Import concurrent program
Note: Please use the Purchasing option / responsibility’s Reports > Run functionality and not Order Management’s.
14. (N) Purchasing
15. (M) View > Requests
 Name: Requisition Import
 Operating Unit: Singapore Distribution Center (D1)
 Parameters window: Import Source: Order Entry (optional)
16. (B) Submit.
17. View the purchase requisition in the sales orders window. (N) Orders, Returns > Quick Sales Orders. Click
the Lines region and click (B) Actions > Additional Line Information. The Drop Ship tab will show the
purchase requisition with an approved status.
18. Enter the purchase requisition number____________________.
Autocreate Purchase Order
19. Change to Purchasing. (N) Purchasing > Autocreate
20. Click (B) Clear and then enter the purchase requisition number from the above step and click (B) Find to
display the requisition.
21. The search results open in the AutoCreate Documents page:
22. Select the requisition or requisitions that you require by clicking the box on the left of the Requisition
column. Click (B) Automatic.
23. In the New Document window, select the supplier as Vision and supplier site as NEW YORK.
24. Click (B) Approve to approve the purchase order when the Purchase Order window appears.
Note: Please ensure that the Submit for Approval box is selected.
25. (N) Receiving > Receipts
26. Enter the Purchase Order number that you created in Step 24. Enter the following information in the Receipts
window:
27. Receipt Header window: Select the Create New Receipt radio button.
28. Receipts window:
 Quantity: 5
 Destination Type: Inventory
 Subinventory: Drop Ship
29. Save your work and close the Receipts window.
Verifying that the order has been dropped shipped
30. (N) Orders, Returns > Quick Sales Orders
31. Query for your order number using the F11+Ctrl-F11 keys.
32. Select (T) Line Items. Choose (B) Actions > Additional Line Information.
33. In (T) Drop Ship, the quantity reserved will be 5.
This completes the drop shipment across operating units cycle.
Guided Demonstration – Creating Back to Back Orders
Setups for Back-to-Back Orders – Item Attributes
Note: Use Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) or comparable Super User Order Management responsibility.
1. Create an item using the Inventory > Items > Master Items.
2. Select the Vision Operations (V1) organization if prompted.
3. Setup Item Attributes for a standard item SH-FG2.
4. The item type for the item SH-FG2 should display a value Finished Goods and an Item Status of Active.
Enter the following attributes in each of the tabs indicated below:
 (T) Purchasing – Select Purchasable box. Enter a list price in the List Price field.
 (T) General Planning – Select Buy in the Make or Buy LOV
 (T) Work in Process – Select Build in WIP box
 (T) Order Management – Select Customer Ordered box and Assemble to Order box
5. The profile option MRP:Default Sourcing Assignment Set should be set to Null or any %Supplier% value.
6. Add the item SH-FG2 to the Corporate pricelist. (N) Pricing > Price List Setup.
Create an order
7. Navigate to the Quick Sales Orders window:
8. (N) Orders,Returns > Quick Sales Orders. Create a sales order for Business World:
 Customer: Business World (1608)
 Order Type: SH-Mixed
 Warehouse: SH1
 Operating Unit: Vision Operations
9. Verify the following on the Main tab and Others tab (if the field is not visible on the window, you can folder-enable it):
 Operating Unit = should be Vision Operations
 Warehouse: SH1
 Price List: Corporate
10. Enter Order Line Information:
 Ordered Item: SH-FG2
 Qty: 100
 ATO box should be checked. Use the (M) Folder > Show Field option to display the ATO check box.
11. Save your work. The Status on the line should display as Entered.
12. Book the Order using (B) Book Order.
Note: The Process Messages window may display with some warnings. Click (B) Continue.
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Note: Click (M) Tools > Workflow Status to see the status ofthe flow. Click (B) View Diagram on the Workflow Status HTML page to see
the order processes and activities. A green line around an activity (represented by a box) indicates that the activity is in progress.When you
book the order, the line status is Create Supply Eligible.
13. When you progress the order ((B) Actions > Progress Order), the line status is PO Requisition Requested.
14. Close the Workflow Status window to return to the Quick Sales Orders window.
Run Requisition Import
(N) Orders,Returns > Requisition Import
 Import Source: CTO
 Group By: Item
 Multiple Distributors: No
 Initiate Approval after re-import: Yes
After the concurrent request is processed successfully, the Sales Orders line shows External Req Open.
Find the PO Requisition
15. (N) Purchasing > Requisitions > Requisition Summary
16. Clear all fields and enter CTO in the Import Source field. The Requisition Headers Summary window displays.
17. The Approval Status should be Approved. Verify that the line information corresponds to that in the sales orders window.
AutoCreate the Purchase Order
18. (N) Purchasing > AutoCreate
19. In the Find Requisitions window, click (B) Clear and enter the PO Requsition number you created in Step 20140022.
20. In the AutoCreate Documents window that displays, verify the requisition details and click (B) Automatic to create the
purchase order.
21. Enter the following in the window:
 Supplier: Elshayeb Corporation
 Source: NEW YORK
Approve PO
22. Note: The line status of the sales order is PO Open.
23. (N) Purchasing > Receiving > Receipts
24. (B) Clear. Enter the PO Number and click (B) Find.
25. The Receipts window opens with the PO details.
26. Select the (T) Lines and enter Stores as the Subinventory value. (I) Save.
27. Note: If the value of the Subinventory field is blank, you can populate it by updating the value of the Subinventory field in
the Receiving Transactions window. (N) Purchasing > Receiving > Receiving Transactions.
28. Note: The line status on the Sales Order is Awaiting Shipping.
Creating Material Transactions
29. (N) Inventory > Transactions > Material Transactions
30. The following information is displayed:
 Item: SH-FG2
 Source Type: Purchase Order
 Source: 20140021
 Transaction Type: PO Received
 Transaction Action: Receipt in Stores
The Quantity Reserved To SO Number 20140008
31. Check the on-hand quantity in the Quick Sales Orders window, it should be 100.
32. Pick Release the order.
33. Ship Confirm the order.
Sales Agreements
Overview
Sales Agreements are used when you have specific characteristics related to a purchasing agreement between a customer and a supplier.
These characteristics include the date range of the agreement, the items included, the price of the items, the quantity of each item that the
parties committed to, as well as otherattributes, like freight or payment terms.
Once a Sales Agreement is entered for a customer, multiple releases (sales orders) against the Sales Agreement are processed overa period of
time within Order Management.
The order is fulfilled and billed according to the terms of the Sales Agreement.
Tracking information will also be accumulated for Sales Agreements, such as,quantity fulfilled, and dollar value fulfilled o f released lines.
This information is used to view status of orders executed against a Sales Agreement.
Sales Agreement functionality includes the following:
• New windows: Find Sales Agreements, Sales Agreements Summary, and Sales Agreements windows
• Captures agreement information
• Enforce sales agreements terms such as: price list, shipping method, payment terms, ship to, bill to.
• Ability to secure who can enter Sales Agreements
• Specify defaulting rules for sales agreement attributes for releases
• Ability to create non-customer specific Sales Agreements
• Default information from the Sales Agreement to the release
• Support Standard, ATO items, Kits, Services, and other items
• Support Item Categories and all items
• Ability to create releases by Order Import and Process Order API
• View releases of Sales Agreements
• Process the releases against the Sales Agreement
• Aggregate information about the releases and access that consolidated information from the Sales Agreement
• Integrations with Advanced Pricing and Release Management
• Effectivity dates of the agreement
• Inline Pricing
• Enhanced sales documents with Preview and Print
• Ability to terminate a Sales Agreement
• Workflows:
• Negotiation and Fulfillment flows
• Automatically attach Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) of current SA for Approvers to reference easily
• Quality Assurance (QA) validation for contractual terms and conditions included in Negotiation flow
• Draft, Internal Approval, Customer Acceptance,Terminate, Expire, Lost, and Close
• Internal Approvals
• Create Internal ApproverList
• Processes:
• Automatic and Manual Versioning
• Customer Acceptance captured
• Ability to create customer-specific Price List
• Ability to add customer items to a Price List
• Ability to authorand negotiate Contract Terms with Oracle Sales Contracts enabled
• Configuration support:
• Ability to define options and option classes on the Sales Agreement to hold price for configurations on releases
• Attachments
• Contract Documents
• Copy
• Security through Processing Constraints
Profiles
OM: Default Sales Agreement Type
This enables the systemto use a common (default) transaction type across Sales Agreements to generate unique sales agreement
numbers. There is no default value for this profile option.
This profile is seeded as available to setup at the responsibility and site level.
In most business processes,the profile option can only be modified by the SystemAdministrator.
The profile is visible to the user but not updateable.
OM: Default Agreement Transaction Phase
This profile enables the systemto use a common transaction phase across Sales Agreements.
Defining transaction types for Sales Agreements
Navigate to the Transaction Types window to set up transaction types.
The three seeded workflows for Sales Agreements are:
• Negotiation Flow—Generic: Simple negotiation flow, without approval.
Prepares negotiation, no management approval, get customer final acceptance,converts from negotiation phase to fulfillment phase.
• Negotiation Flow—Generic with Approval: Flow with approval.
Prepares draft, gets management approval, gets customer final acceptance,converts from negotiation phase to fulfillment phase.
• Sales Agreement Flow—Generic: Generic fulfillment flow for Sales Agreements.
Note the following when setting up a transaction type for Sales Agreement:
• Fulfillment Flow: Assign the fulfillment flow.
• Negotiation Flow: Assign the optional negotiation flow.
• Default Transaction Phase: Transaction phase determines where in the workflow the transaction will start.
Select either Fulfillment or Negotiation.
The profile OM: Default Sales Agreement Transaction Phase is the preferred source for the transaction default on Sales Agreements.
If the profile has not been set,the systemlooks at the transaction phase defined on the transaction type.
If neither default is available, the systemuses Fulfillment phase as the default. (Optional)
• Layout Template: Assign the layout template that you would like to use when generating a customer facing document to be previewed or
printed. See Preview and Print Sales Documents, page 5-29. (Optional)
• Contract Template: When Oracle Sales Contracts is enabled, assign a Contract Template to the sales agreement type for defaulting
purposes.See Authoring and Negotiating Contract Terms, page 20-15. (Optional)
Transaction types can point to the same template or different templates depending on the business process.
There is direct access to the Approval List setup from the transaction type. It can also be accessed from the menu.
For more information on setting up Approvals,see Defining Approvals,page 2-105 .
The Negotiation flow offers Internal Approval as well as Customer Acceptance prior to transitioning the Sales Agreement trans action to
Active where releases can be placed against the Sales Agreement.
Note: If you want to create an automatic attachment on the workflow notification (to allow approvers to easily view the document), on the
transaction itself as a reference in Contract Documents when Oracle Sales Contracts is enabled, or for FND attachments, the workflow must
be extended to add the "Sales Agreement/Sales Order Generation" process in between Submit Draft and Internal Approval, and XML
Publisher must be installed.
Practice - Creating a Sales Agreement
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to create a Sales Agreement and also how to create releases against this Sales Agreement. In
this practice, the SA creation begins in the Negotiation Phase and the Negotiation Flow selected does not include an approval
step.
 Create a Sales Agreement
 Create a release (sales order) against the Sales Agreement
Tasks
Create a Sales Agreement (SA)
1. Business World (1608) has contacted you to place a long-term order for item SH-FG2. They wish this to be supplied every
week in quantities of 15 for a period of 30 weeks.
2. Create a SA for Business World that incorporates all the conditions for a long-term order.
Create a Release against the SA
3. Create one or more sales orders that refer to the SA and track the Released Amount.
SA Creation
1. Navigate to the Sales Agreements window:
(N) Blanket Agreements > Sales Agreements
2. Create a SA for Business World:
Customer: Business World (1608)
Sales Agreement Type: SA without Approvals
Sales Agreement Name:SH-Blanket Practice
Activation Date:enter today’s date
Expiration Date:enter the date 8 months from today
3. (T) Pricing in the upper block. Enter the following information:
Price List: Corporate.
Check box Enforce Price List should be checked.
4. (B) Price List Setup. In (T) List Lines enter the following information:
Product Context: Item
Product Attribute: Item Number
Product Value: SH-FG2
Value: 50
Note: The above image shows the SA window, Pricing tab and above that, the Price Lists window is displayed.
5. Click (I) Save and close the Price Lists window to return to the SA window.
6. In the SA window, in (T) Fulfillment in both the upper and lower regions, enter the following information:
Min Quantity Agreed: 15
Max Quantity Agreed: 30
7. In (T) Fulfillment of the lower region, enter the following information:
Min Release Quantity: 15
Max Release Quantity: 30
Min Release Amount: 1000
Max Release Amount: 100000
8. In (T) Accounting for both the header and line regions, enter Payment Term of 30 NET and ensure that the Currency is
USD.
9. In the lines (lower) region, in (T) Main, enter Item Context as Internal Item Number and Item as SH-FG2 with a UOM of
Ea.
10. (I) Save and take note of the Status of the SA. It will appear as Draft. Select Submit Draft from the Actions button to
change the status to Pending Customer Acceptance.
11. (B) Actions > Customer Accepted. This will change the Status to Active. Now you can use the Sales Agreement in an order
release.
12. Write the name of the SA here 201401. Save your work and close the window.
Create Release against SA
13. (N) Blanket Agreements > Sales Agreement Organizer.
14. In the Find Blanket window that opens, enter the Blanket Number that you wrote in Step 9 and then click (B) Find.
15. The Blankets Summary window displays your SA. Click (B) Create Releases to create a sales order against the SA.
This will open the Sales Orders window, defaulting most of the information relevant to the SA.
Note: Alternatively, you can create a new sales order using the (N) Orders,Returns > Sales Orders option and refer to the
SA in the order header.
16. In (T) Line Items, enter SH-FG2 with a quantity of 15.
17. (I) Save. Close the window and return to the Sales Agreement Organizer. Click (B) Open Agreement.
18. In the upper region, go to (T) Fulfillment, you will see the release (sales order) amount in the Summary section in the field
Released Amount. The SA is constantly updated to reflect the latest Released Amount with each order created against it.
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Returns and Credits
Overview
Oracle Order Management provides Return Materials Authorization (RMA) functionality within the Sales Orders window, where you can
enter both standard and return order lines within the same order.
RMA is often used interchangeably with Return or Credit Orders and Returned Material.
An order can have a mix of outbound (standard)and inbound (return) lines, as restricted by the order type definition.
Credit order types can have an order type category as Return or an order with both standard and return lines can have an orde r type category
as Mixed. Each order type and each line type is associated with a workflow process.
A return line is indicated by Line Type Category of return negative and highlighted item quantity and negative line total.
Return Line types can include flows like Return with Approval, or Return for Credit Only, etc.
There are three ways to create RMA's within Order Management. First, identify a sales order to be returned and query the order lines.
After you have selected the sales order or order lines, use the Copy function in the Actions list to generate the return order or line by
specifying an RMA line type. Second,reference a sales order, invoice, PO number or serial number of an item directly in the Return
Reference field within the Line Items tab of the Sales Orders window.
Lastly, for return without originating sales order line, manually enter return line information and choose the appropriate return line type in the
Sales Orders window.
Setup
Profile Options
OM: Return Item Mismatch Action
This profile allows a mismatch value between the item on the RMA line and the item on the referenced line.
For example, you may need to allow a mismatch when a wrong item is shipped and you want to put the correct item on the RMA line.
The seeded value is Allow or no profile option entry will be treated as Allow.
OM: Return Unfulfilled Referenced Line Action
This profile allows non-fulfilled lines to be used as referenced lines.
The seeded value is Allow or no profile option entry will be treated as Allow.
OM: Over Return Tolerance
This profile option indicates the percentage by which a return line can be over-received.
Any value greater than or equal to zero (0) is a valid value. This profile option is set at the site level. The default value is zero (0).
OM: Under Return Tolerance
This profile option indicates the percentage by which a return line can be under-received for it to be considered fulfilled.
Any value between zero (0) and 100 (both inclusive) is a valid value. This profile option is set at the site level.
The default value is zero (0).
OM: Charges for Back Orders
In previous releases, Calculate Price Flag on the split (back order) lines was set to Freeze Price always.
Now in the current release, for return lines that are split, this profile option enables you to control the setting of the Calculate Price Flag
to calculate, partially calculate or freeze the price.
If the Calculate Price Flag is set to Partial, no repricing is carried out and only charges can be applied for return lines.
If the Calculate Price Flag is set to Freeze, the return lines are not priced. For a value of Calculate, the return lines are priced.
Workflow
Order Management comes with seeded Oracle Workflow processes.Review the seeded flows, activities and notifications to determine if the
seeded data can meet your business needs.
To successfully enter an RMA in OM, you can use the
Generic - Order Flow Return with Approval
Line Flow - Return for Credit only.
Line Flow - Return with Receipt Only, No Credit
Note: For Mixed Order types,if the workflow attached is Order Flow Return with Approval, then notifications are sent to the users only if
the order contains return lines.
The user can also modify existing seeded workflows or create new workflows to include or exclude inspections and/orinvoicing activity.
For instance,you can have the Invoicing Activity after the Receiving activity, or you can simply close the line without interfacing data to
Receivables. For inspections,a workflow can be setup to process Invoicing once the materials have been received or to wait until inspection
has been completed before invoicing is invoked.
The seeded workflow will process Invoicing only after the completion of Inspection (delivery) Activity. Also, if any return lines are flagged
as non-shippable or non-transactable,the Receiving workflow activity will complete with a Not Eligible result.
However, fulfillment of ATO/PTO items is required before crediting the ATO/PTO lines.
This is achieved by inserting ATO/PTO lines into Fulfillment sets.This means the ATO/PTO line will wait at fulfillment until all its children
are received and reach fulfillment.
ATO model line workflow waits until the configured line is shipped and then it progresses furtherno matter whether it is PTO and ATO or
only ATO or PTO.
With services, OM will use only the seeded "Return for Credit Only" workflow for returning service items when product items are returned.
Now, Order Management will use the RMA line to govern full or partial credit to the customer when a product is returned.
Install Base will use the information from the RMA product line to determine whether a credit is given.
Transaction Types
Both order and line transaction types need to be setup in order to process an RMA.
When setting up order types,you need to assign order header and line workflows to the order type.
Since each line can go through its own flow process,you need to setup workflow assignments to let each line assign its own workflow
process.
Credit order types have an order type category Return. An order with a Mixed order type category can contain both standard and return lines.
Line level workflow processes are assigned based on the order type, line type, and item type combination.
When you setup a return order type or mixed order type, you have the option to set a default return line type, so that the user doesn't have to
manually choose the line type unless they want it to be different. Refer to the topical essay Using Transaction Types in Oracle Order
Management at the end of this manual for details on setting up transaction types.
MasterItems Attributes
You can create a return line only if an item is Returnable. Therefore, a standard,finished good item should be defined in Oracle Inventory
with appropriately set attributes.
The best way to create your items is to copy them from the Finished Good seeded template and set additional attributes as needed in the
MasterItem window. The key attributes that control the processing ofa returnable item are:
• Order Management Tab: Returnable, Shippable and Transactable = Yes, RMA Inspection Required = Yes or No
• Receiving Tab: Receipt Routing = Inspection (if required)
• Invoicing Tab: Invoicable Item = Yes or No, Invoice Enabled = Yes or No
Note: If the Item is not flagged as Returnable, Shippable and Transactable, you cannot receive in Oracle Purchasing's receiving module and if
the item is not flagged as Invoicable the return lines will not interface to Receivables.
Also, an item can be returnable but not orderable. This is commonly used if a company stops selling an item, but they still want to be able to
do returns for it.
For lot and/or serial controlled items, Oracle Order Management has the capability to store one or more lot and serial numbers associated
with one RMA line.
Oracle Order Management does not validate the serial numbers against Inventory serial numbers in the systemor against serial numbers
associated with the referenced sales order.
Receiving captures the serial numbers of the items at delivery.
The Credit Order Discrepancy Report can showthe difference between actually delivered lot/serial numbers and the numbers on the RMA.
The sales orders window can capture lot and serial numbers suggested by the customer for the RMA line.
For ATO/PTO configurations,only the Returnable configuration lines are displayed on the sales orders window.
You need to make sure that the item attributes are set correctly for ATO/PTO children items.
Price List Setup
In order to price any new items when entering an ordered item on the sales orders window, add the new item to a price list.
The item is added to a price list in the Price List Setup window: Pricing > Lists > Price Lists Setup. Query an existing price list or create a
new price list. Add a new line, enter the item name, UOM and price and save.
The price and UOM will default when entering the item on the order line.
When an RMA line is created and the originating transaction is known, the pricing information is populated from the originating order line.
The user can change the pricing if needed.
The list of values on the Price List will showall the active price lists on the pricing date.
Also, ATO configured items and PTO included items should be included on a price list in order to be received and credited.
Processing Constraints
Order Management has seeded constraints that prevent data integrity problems.
For instance,you can prevent change for a line if it has been:
Closed
Canceled
Canceled at order level
Shipped
Invoiced
A return line cannot be canceled after it has been interfaced to Receivables or after it has been received. If your business needs more
restrictive rules when processing orders, you can set up rules to control changes oroperations of the order process flow.
See Processing Constraints,page 10-1 for details on setting up processing constraints.
Return ReasonCodes
You can set up your own reason codes in the Receivables QuickCodes window.
Navigate to the Order Management responsibility and select the menu: Setup > Quickcodes > Receivables.
The Oracle Receivables Lookup window will appear. Query the CREDIT_MEMO_REASON code from the query manager (Flashlight icon).
View the existing codes or add a new code. These codes appear in the Return Reason list of values.
Reports
The Returns by Reason report can be used to view all return reasons setup in the system. You can run the report by Return Reason, Credit
Order Date, Credit Order or Line Type and/or Item Number.
Freight and Special Charges for Returns
When setting up freight or special charges, you can specify if the charge is returnable, meaning the charge may be refunded. When you create
a return line from an original order line, you should copy the refundable invoiced charges.
You can also setup special charges to be applied specifically to returns,like restocking fees, return handling, damage etc. You can set this
through an attribute called Refundable Flag (Include on Returns field) within the Pricing Modifier setup.
See Freight and Special Charges, page 3-101 for more information.
Process Flow
This section will guide you through a basic flow for a Return for Credit with Receipt, from entry to generating a credit memo, including:
• Create an RMA having a single line whose originating transaction is unknown
• Book the RMA
• Receive the RMA using the Receipts window of Oracle Purchasing
• Check the on-hand quantity of the item in Inventory to verify that correct quantity was received
• Fulfill RMA line
• Generate a Credit Memo
• View the Credit Memo in Order Management
• Check the Shipped and Fulfilled quantity on the RMA line
1. Enter the RMA on the Sales Orders window. Entering a return on the Sales Orders window is exactly the same as entering an order, except
at the line level the user specifies the Line Type as a Return and a negative line quantity.
Thus,in the Order Information tab of the Sales Orders window, the user will enter the same information (i.e. Customer Name, Order Type,
etc.) as a standard order.
The Standard order type is assigned to a Generic Order and Line workflow which allows either an order or return to be entered.
Refer to the Workflow section for details on the Generic Order and Line workflow for returns.
This is the Sales Orders window for entering the Header information for the RMA:
Sales Orders (Header) window for Returns
2. Once the Order Header information is entered, you will enter the line information within the Line Items screen:
Line Items Window
3. In the Main Tab, enter the Ordered Item and the Quantity to be returned.
The user can enter a positive or negative number. You will also see that the negative quantity will be highlighted in anothercolor.
Next, in the Returns tab, the user will need to enter the Line Type as a return (i.e. Return for Credit with Receipt of Goods) and
enter a Return Reason. A Return Reason is required to be entered (i.e. Product Discontinued).
Since we did not reference a sales order, we are entering a single line RMA where the originating transaction is unknown.
If you receive the returns partially, and if the Calculate Price Flag is set to Y (Calculate Price) or P (Partial Price), then freight charges get
applied automatically on the partially received lines.
However if the Calculate Price Flag is set to N, then the freight charges do not get applied on the partially received lines.
4. Book the RMA. Users are able to book an order or return at either the Order Information Tab or Line Items Tab via the Book button.
5. Receive the RMA using the Receipts window in Oracle Purchasing.
Change responsibilities to Purchasing and navigate to the Receiving > Receipts window.
In the Find Expected Receipts window, an Organization window will be displayed if this is the first time you have navigated to the
Purchasing > Receipts window since your login.
The organization you choose should be the same warehouse where your RMA is created.
In the Receipt Header window, select the Customer Tab and find yourRMA #.
Tab through the Header window to the Receipts Line window.
Once you are in the Receipts Line window, the RMA number and quantity will populate the window. Check the box next to the line you wish
to receive, enter a Destination Type as Inventory and subinventory.
Save this transaction and record the receipt number in the Header window.
By choosing the Destination Type as Inventory, the user is creating a transfer to inventory transaction in Purchasing.
These items are now considered as supply.
Purchasing will communicate the quantity received to Order Management to update the RMA.
Receipt Header Window
Receipts (Line) Window
6. Check the on-hand quantity of the item in Inventory to verify that correct quantity was received.
Change responsibilities to Inventory and navigate to the Transactions > Material Transactions window.
In the Material Transactions window, an Organization window will be displayed if this is the first time you have navigated to the Inventory >
Material Transactions window since your login.
The organization you choose should be the same warehouse where your RMA is created.
Find the item being returned and navigate to the Transaction Type tab.
Verify that the source type is RMA and the source is your RMA # for the quantity being returned.
This window will show you your item #, the subinventory chosen and the quantity specified to be returned from the Receipts window.
Material Transaction Window
7. Fulfill RMA line.
The fulfillment activity acts as a synchronization point for all lines on the order that are in a fulfillment set.
The lines in the fulfillment set will wait at the fulfillment activity until all the lines in the set have reached the activity.
Lines that are not in a fulfillment set simply pass through the activity automatically.
The user will not have to perform anything during this step.
The eligible lines will automatically be put into a fulfillment set.
8. Generate a credit memo for the return. The Workflow process of the return line(s) will be on the Invoice Interface activity, once the
Fulfillment activity completes. The invoice interface activity places the information from the return line into the Receivables Interface tables.
Once the information is written to the tables, the invoice interface activity is complete, and the line proceeds to the close line activity.
However, note that the credit memo is not actually generated until the Autoinvoice program in Receivables has been run.
The credit memo will then be viewable in the Sales Orders window.
To run the Autoinvoice program, the userneeds to change responsibilities to Receivables and navigate to the Interfaces window.
Select the Autoinvoice Masterprogram and run the program for yourRMA # and specify the invoice source as the one associated with the
line type of the RMA line.
The Autoinvoice Master program will generate the Autoinvoice Import program which generates the credit memo.
These programs can be setup to run automatically in the background. Just set the programs as 'Deferred.'
9. View the credit memo in Order Management. To view the credit memo in Order Management, the user need to change responsibilities to
Order Management > Orders, Returns > Order Organizer window.
Query yourRMA # in the Order Organizer. Once the RMA is queried, open the RMA order, click Actions and choose AdditionalOrder
Information. Once the Additional Order Information window has opened,click on the Receivables tab to view the credit memo.
This window will show your the credit memo number and amount.
10. Check the Shipped and Fulfilled quantity on the RMA line. From the above step, navigate in the Sales Orders window to the Line Items
tab for the RMA. Scroll to view the Shipped Quantity field.
To access the Fulfilled Quantity field, the user needs to use the folder technology to add the field to the sales orders window.
To add the field, click on the Warehouse field in the Shipping Tab of the Line Items window.
Next, select the Folder menu at the top of the window, select Show Field and choose the Quantity Fulfilled field from the list.
The field will populate in the window.
The Shipped Quantity means the received quantity for return lines and the Fulfilled Quantity means the delivered quantity for the return lines.
Workflow
In Oracle Order Management, you can have many types of credit order by specifying it's Order Type and Line Type.
Each order type and each line type is associated with an Oracle Workflow process.
You can customize order types and RMA line types to meet yourbusiness needs.For instance,you can use Approvals and Holds with returns
in order to manage exceptions when your customer returns more or less than you authorize.
Credit order types have order type category Return'.
An order with a Mixed order type category can contain both standard and return lines. But you cannot enter return lines into an order with
order type category Regular.
The following is an example of a seeded Order Return Flow process (enter -> book -> approval notification -> close):
Order Flow - Return with Approval
The following is an example of a seeded Order Return Line Flow process (enter -> return-> invoice -> close):
Line Flow - Return for Credit with Receipt
The following are other workflow processes that Order Management seeds for Return
Line flows:
Line Flow - Return for Credit only
Line Flow - Return for Credit onlywith Approval
In Oracle Order Management, there are also flows that support both order and return lines (inbound and outbound transactions),however,
there are no seeded workflows for these flows. You can create flows that support both Order and Return Lines. For instance, the flow listed
below will not work correctly, since once a line is booked, workflow randomly picks which transition to process first. It then processes it all
the way till it can go no further. So for an outbound Line using this flow, if the branch 'Returns receiving' is first processed,it will get marked
as Not Eligible and hit the Fulfill -Defer activity and stop.
Then the WF Engine starts executing the other branch; the line will schedule and hit the Ship - Line, Manual sub-process,where it will stop
and wait to get picked and shipped.However the Background Engine could pick up the deferred activity and execute the Fulfill activity.
This activity will error out since the fulfilling event for the order line Ship-Confirmation is not yet complete.
INCORRECTLine Flow - Supporting inbound and outbound shipments
For this flow to work correctly, the flow ensures that only one transition is executed (Order or Return).
The flow needs to be defined as follows:
CORRECT Line Flow - Supporting inbound and outbound shipments
After booking the line flow branches based on the Line Category ens uring that only one of the branches are (Order or Return) executed
runtime. The activity Utility to get Line Category is seeded OM: Order Line Work Item.
With regard to item inspections,the Order Management systemdoes not process inspection results,and only processes delivery transactions.
Based on the users business rules,if an item is rejected, the user can either deliver to inventory (scrap sub-inventory)or return to the
customer. Delivering to inventory will give credit to the customer.
Returning to the customer will reduce the shipped quantity and credit will be given for only accepted goods.
Therefore, receiving transactions drive the flow of the return and what gets credited.
Defining Credit Check Rules
Overview
Order Management credit check rules enable you to determine what credit checking criteria is used when determining credit exposure during
the credit checking process.
Order Management transaction types determine when credit checking actually occurs, and when used in conjunction with credit checking
rules, define your credit checking process.
For example, you can define credit checking rules that utilize pre-calculated exposure information to use when comparing a customer's
current order amount against their overall exposure; if the order transaction type utilizes this rule, and the order fails during the credit check
process,it is automatically placed on credit check hold.
You can define as many credit checking rules as you need, and if you inactivate a credit checking rule, you also must remove it from any
order types that use it.
Additionally, you can include in or exclude from your credit check rule some or all of your open accounts receivable balances , and some or
all of your uninvoiced orders.
Order Management uses the currency of the order you are credit checking to determine which credit limits to use in credit checking
calculations.
Order Management only includes orders and invoices in the same currency as the order you are credit checking when calculating a customer's
outstanding credit balance, unless you have set up multiple currency credit checking.
You can also include/exclude returns based on yourcredit check rule definition.
However this should be used only if you are using return lines with credit memos.
Besides defining your credit exposure composition, the credit check rule also determines:
• Credit check level (order or line)
• Credit Hold level (order or line)
• Conversion type used when you enable multi-currency credit check
• Use of item category credit check
• Send hold notifications to the sales order creator
• Use of pre-calculated exposure
Credit Limits for Credit Checking and Rules Summary
1. When the Credit Check flag is turned off at the site level that pertains to the Bill-To address,there will be no credit checking for orders for
this Bill-To site. It doesn't roll up to the next level to get the credit limits.
2. If the Credit Check flag is turned on at the site level, and both overall credit limits and order credit limits are all NULL/BLANK, then the
limits for a customer who owns that bill to site will be automatically considered .
3. If the Credit Check flag is turned on at the customer level, and both overall credit limits and order credit limits are all NULL/BLANK, roll
up to the next level in the party hierarchy (if any).
Otherwise, use the Operating Unit Credit profile.
Note that party profiles are used only if Credit Management is setup.If not, from the customer level we go directly to the Operating Unit.
4. If the Credit Check flag is turned on at each level, and there is only one field left NULL/BLANK (for example, order limit is null but
overall exposure is some number), then this NULL/BLANK field is treated as unlimited and it does not rollup to next level.
5. If the last level reached with the Credit Check flag enabled has both overall and order credit limits set as NULL/BLANK, it means no
credit checking should be performed. IF the Credit Check flag is enabled and order credit limit is not NULL/BLANK, then a credit check will
be performed at the item category level.
6. If the Credit Check flag is disabled for item category or if the Credit Check flag is enabled and both order credit limit and overall credit
limit are all NULL/BLANK for item category, then credit checking will not happen at the item category level, but credit checking will still be
performed for the site-customer-(party)-OU level based on the rules discussed.IF the Credit Check flag is enabled and at least one of the
order credit limit and overall credit limit fields are not NULL/BLANK, then a credit check will be performed at the item category level.
Performance Note
In order to improve performance you can enable the use of pre-calculated exposure.
Utilizing this option, the credit check engine will use summary balance details stored in a periodically updated summary table.
The update is done by running a concurrent program which accesses Order Management and Account Receivable transactionaltables.
This program should be scheduled to run periodically based on your specific business needs.
You should also run this concurrent program when you have done major changes in your set up or transactionaldata (merge customers,
incorporate transactions from external systems, change transaction status using customized programs, etc.).
To define a credit check rule:
1. Navigate to the Credit Check Rules window.
Credit Check Rules Window
2. Enter a name for yourcredit check rule.
3. Optionally, enter the Effective Dates for your rule.
Options Tab
4. Select the entity to perform credit checking against for your rule. Select from:
• Sales Order
• Sales Order Line
Note: If you select Sales Order Line as your credit check level, the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box will be checked and protected
against update If you choose to perform credit checking at the Sales Order level, you are limited to the systemgenerating headerlevel credit
holds only. The Credit Hold Level field will default to Sales Order and is protected against update.
5. Select the Credit Hold Level for your credit rule. Select from:
• Sales Order: Sales Order (order level) credit check is performed for the header Bill To site.
Sales Order level credit checking provides backward compatibility with previous credit check versions.When credit checking rules are
defining using Sales Order as the credit check level, the credit check engine will examine order totals and evaluate credit exposure against the
credit profile attached at header level.
Holds will be always applied at header level.
Use order level credit check when order lines always have the same Bill To Site as the Order Header.
• Sales Order Line: Sales Order Line (line level) credit check is performed against order line Bill To Sites. The credit check engine will
group all order lines belonging to the same Bill To Site and check available credit for each specific Bill To Site.
When an order line fails credit check, any remaining lines grouped with the same Bill To Site are placed on hold.
Holds can be placed at either the order or order line level when you use line level credit checking.
Use line level credit check when sales order lines are attached to different Bill To Sites and you want to use the credit profile defined at that
level.
Additionally, you can use line level credit check when you have defined customer relationships within your systemand actively use them
within Order Management.
Using customer relationships, you can create sales orders with order lines attached to different Bill To Sites owned by different customers.
Order Header level credit checking uses headerlevel information ignoring different bill-to sites detailed at the line.
Credit Check uses the credit profile attached to the customer Bill-to site defined at order (header) level.
Credit checking at the Order Header level will use order totals and will evaluate credit exposure against the credit profile attached at header
level, and holds are always applied at header level.
Special Considerations for Credit Hold Level
• If you update the Credit Hold Level from Sales Order to Sales Order Line, a pop up dialog box will display a message indicating that
existing sales order credit holds will need to be released manually. Select Yes to continue or No to not commit the update.
• If you update the Credit Hold Level from Sales Order Line to Sales Order, a pop up dialog box will display a message indicating that
existing sales order line credit holds will not be released automatically. Select Yes to continue or No to not commit the update.
6. Override Manual Release check box: This check box enables an order or line which had failed credit checking and then was subsequently
manually released to be eligible for additional credit check processing.Select from:
• Yes: Manual Released Holds will be overridden. You must also enter a value within the Days to Honor Manual Release field.
• No: Manual Released Holds will be honored. The field Days to Honor Manual Release will be non-updatable.
7. Days to Honor Manual Release: The field is used in conjunction with the Override Manual Release check box. If you enable the Override
Manual Release check box, you must enter a numeric value greater than zero within this field.
Manual Released Holds (Credit Checking Procedures)
Each time a credit check failure occurs for order or order line, the corresponding order or order line is placed on credit check hold. However,
prior to the credit check holds actually being applied, the credit check process determines:
• If a manually released credit check hold exists and
• If your credit check rule enables override of manually released holds (in conjunction with the value for Days to Honor Manual Release).
If Override Manual Release is not enabled for your credit check rule, then manually released holds are honored and no additional credit
checking will occur.
If Override Manual Release is enabled, the credit checking process will validate if the release date is within the interval defined by the value
of Days to Honor Manual Release.
If the value is within the range defined, then manually released holds will be honored and additional credit checking is not performed.
If the value is not within the range defined, credit checking can occur again and credit check holds can be applied if the order or lines fails the
credit check process.
Note: The value of OE_HOLD_RELEASES.CREATION_ DATE is used by the credit check process to determine if the duration defined for
the credit check rule is within range for additional credit checking: when any hold is released for an order or line, Order Management inserts
a record within OE_HOLD_RELEASES.
8. Select the conversion type to use when performing credit checking using your credit rule.
The LOV for this field is limited to the values you define within the Oracle General Ledger Conversion Rate Types window.
9. Select the Check Item Categories check box for your credit rule if you wish to perform credit checking for sales orders by Item Categories
defined for Order Management.
10. Select the Send Hold Notifications check box if you wish to send hold notifications whenever a credit hold is placed for a sales order or
order line. The notification is sent to the creator of the order.
Determine the type of credit exposure to use when defining your credit check rules by selecting the Exposure Tab within the Define Credit
Check Rules window.
Exposure tab in the Credit Check Rules Window
Exposure Tab
11. Select the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box for yourcredit rule if you wish to perform credit checking against pre-calculated
exposure summary tables.
• When the first credit check rule that has the Use Pre-Calculated Exposure check box checked is successfully saved,the following message
will display:
This credit check rule uses pre-calculated exposure. Please run the Initialize Credit Summaries program to update the pre-calculated data.
• If the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box is checked and the Include Open Receivables balance check box is checked, then Open
Receivables Days is protected against update and is NULL.
• If the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box is checked and the Include Uninvoiced Orders check box is checked, then Shipping Horizon
Days is protected against update and is NULL.
12. Select the Include External Credit Exposure check box if you wish to include external exposure details imported into Order Management
during the credit checking process.
When an Oracle Order Management sales order is credit checked, the exposure data from the external systemis included in the overall
exposure check.
The default value for this check box is un-checked (exclude external exposure details when performing credit checking).
Receivables Balance Region
13. Select the Open Receivables Balance check box for yourcredit rule if you wish to include open receivables balances.
You must enable either the Include Open Receivables Balance check box or the Include
Uninvoiced Orders check box in yourcredit check rule.
You can activate both,but you cannot toggle both off.
If you select both the Pre-calculated Exposure and Open Receivables Balance check boxes, you are unable to specify Open Receivables Days.
14. If you enabled Include Open Receivables Balance in your credit check rule, you can indicate whether to Include Payments at Risk when
calculating a customer's outstanding balance.
Receipts at risk are remitted receipts that have not been cleared, or discounted (factored) receipts that have not been risk eliminated.
If the performance of credit checking requires improvement you can toggle off this option.
15. If you enabled Include Open Receivables Balance, enter a value to indicate the range of dates for open receivables you wish to include for
your credit check rule.
• Negative Number: Includes past due, current, and future open receivables up to X days beyond the current date
• Positive Number: Includes open receivables with invoice dates X days earlier than the current date
• No Value: Includes all open receivables
Uninvoiced Orders Region
Note: If you do not select the Include Uninvoiced Orders check box, you cannot select any check boxes within the region.
Important: If an order line has been interfaced to the Receivables interface table but hasn't been invoiced yet, the Order Management
credit check engine will include this line amount as part of the uninvoiced order amount. If yoursystemenables credit checking and your
Receivables Interface table can potentially contain large volume of data, it is recommended that you create a customindex on
RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL table ORIG_SYSTEM_BILL_CUSTOMER_ID column.
16. Select the Include Uninvoiced Orders check box if you wish to include uninvoiced orders for your credit rule.
If you enabled Include Uninvoiced Orders:
• Indicate whether to include Freight and Special Charges for uninvoiced orders when performing credit checking.
Select the Freight and Special charges check box to include Freight and Special Charges.
• Indicate whether to include Tax information for uninvoiced orders when performing credit checking Select the Tax check box to include
Tax information for uninvoiced orders.
Credit checking calculations on open receivables always include tax amounts and are not affected by the Include Tax option. If the
performance of credit checking requires improvement you can toggle off this option.
• Indicate the number of scheduled shipping horizon days for your credit rule for uninvoiced orders to be included in yourtotal credit
exposure when performing credit checking.
For example, if you enter 45, the total exposure includes only uninvoiced orders scheduled to ship within 45 days of the current date.
Orders scheduled to ship after 45 days are not included when calculating exposure.
Note: If the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box is checked, Scheduled Shipping Horizon Days is protected against update.
• Indicate whether to Include Orders Currently On hold. Select the Include Orders Currently On hold check box to include orders on hold
within the exposure calculation for your credit rule.
17. Indicate the Maximum Days Past Due.
The Maximum Days Past Due field value specifies the number of day that you will allow an invoice to be past due before holding the
customers orders. During the credit checking process,Order Management will verify that no invoices for the customer have been past due
beyond the number of days you specified with this field. If there are any such past due invoices, the order is placed on credit hold.
18. Save your work.
Deactivating Credit Checking
There are three ways to deactivate Credit Checking on an order:
• Use an order type that does not have an assigned credit rule
• Define the Customer Profile so that the Credit Check box is not selected
• Use payment terms for which the Credit Check box is not selected Deactivating Credit Checking does not automatically release orders
previously on credit hold. However, the next time you attempt to Book, Pick Release or Purchase Release (for drop shipments), Pack, or Ship
Confirm an order which utilizes a Order Management Transaction type that enables credit checking to occur at the specified order points,or
you perform an order change that trigger credit checking in the Sales Orders window, Order Management will releases the credit check hold
if the order or line meets the requirements for successfulcredit check.
Practice - Defining Credit Check and Hold
Overview
In this practice you will learn how to create a credit check rule in Oracle Order Management
Tasks
4. Create a credit check rule named Booking.
 Credit Check Level: Sales Order
 Credit Hold Level: Sales Order
 Conversion Type: Corporate
5. Enable Credit Check and Credit Hold for your customer.
6. Suspend the customer’s credit.
Solution – Defining Credit Check and Hold
Login
Login to the database using the User Name and Password supplied by your instructor.
Choose Responsibility
Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility is selected.
Create Credit Check Rule
(N) Order Management > Setup > Credit > Define Credit Check Rule
1. Enter Booking in the Rule field.
2. Use the list of values to select Sales Order in the Credit Check Level field.
3. Use the list of values to select Sales Order in the Credit Hold Level field.
4. Use the list of values to select Corporate in the Conversion Type field.
5. On the Exposure tab, enable the following fields:
 Use Pre-Calculated Exposure
 Include Uninvoiced Orders
 Include Freight and Special Charges
 Include Tax
 Include Orders Currently On Hold
 Include Returns
6. Save.
Define Credit Check and Hold
(N) Order Management > Receivables > Customers > Customers
26. Enter your customer name in the Name field.
27. (B) Find.
28. Click your company name in the Name column. (SH-Big City)
29. Within the Accounts tab, click the View Details icon in the Details column.
30. Open the Account Profile tab.
31. Enable Credit Check.
32. Enable Credit Hold.
33. (B) Apply.
34. (B) Save.
OM Concurrent Programs
Initialize Credit Summaries Table7
OM: Prevent Booking for Line Generic Holds
Credit Check Processor
Credit Exposure Report
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management
Practice - Order to Cash Cycle with Customer Acceptance
Overview
In this practice, you will learn how to create orders and record customer acceptance. Please note that you will be
completing an order to cash cycle with customer acceptance using all the seeded data available in the environment.
Tasks
Create an order to cash lifecycle
1. Create an order.
2. Save and book the order.
3. Pick release the order .
4. Ship confirm the order.
5. Use AutoInvoice to create an invoice for the order.
Enable Customer Acceptance in Order Management
1. (N) Orders,Returns > Setup > System Parameters
 Enable Fulfillment Acceptance = Yes
2. Enable function security for the Order Management Super User responsibility for the following two functions:
 Sales Orders: Fulfillment Acceptance – This ensures that the action attribute Fulfillment Acceptance is
available in the Actions LOV. You can use the folder functionality to include the Fulfillment
Acceptance option in the Actions LOV.
 Sales Orders: Update Acceptance Attributes – This allows for updating the acceptance attributes of
Acceptance Name and Acceptance Expire days.
Note: These are attached to the sales order menu – ADS_OM_SUPERMENU.
3. Change your responsibility to Revenue Management Super User Vision Operations USA.
4. (N) Revenue Contingencies > Contingency Definition
5. Create a Contingency Rule for pre-billing implicit acceptance. Contingency rules are terms and conditions that prevent
immediate revenue recognition like delivery, acceptance,government regulations, customer creditworthiness etc.
6. A contingency rule consists of the following that you need to enter:
 DeferralReason:XX-CA-PREBILL-IMPLICIT
 Start Date: enter a date of your choice
 Related General Policy region: Select the None button
 Define DeferralReason Removal Event region:
 Removal Event: Invoicing
 Event Attribute: Ship Confirm Date
 Days Added to Event Attribute: any number that you want the removal event to occur
7. Click (B) Apply and return to the main page.
8. Click (B) Define Assignment Rules.
9. Enter the following information:
 Rule Name: XX-CA-PREBILL-IMPLICIT-RULE
 Revenue Contingency Name:XX-CA-PREBILL-IMPLICIT
 Parameter:Bill-To Customer
 Condition: IN
 Case Sensitive: No
 Value: Business World
10. You can add one or more parameters for the assignment rule. Click (B) Apply.
Using Pre-Billing Implicit Customer Acceptance
11. Change responsibility to Order Management Super User,Vision Operations USA
12. Enable the Acceptance-related fields using folder functionality on the sales orders line in the Others tab:
 Acceptance Name (this is known as DeferralReason in Revenue Management responsibility)
 Acceptance Date
 Acceptance Expire Event
 Acceptance Expire Days
 Acceptance Type
 Accepted By
 Accepted Qty
 Acceptance Description
13. Open a default folder, include the above fields in the Others tab using the Show Field option. Checke the Make as
Default box and Use Folder > Save As giving the folder name as XX-Line-Cust-Accept.
14. The concurrent request set Implicit Acceptance Request set will run for recording implicit acceptance and updating the
above fields.
15. Enter the following in the Quick Sales Orders window:
 Customer Name: Business World (1608)
 Order Type: Mixed
 Item: AS54888
 Qty: 2
16. The default acceptance details will be displayed in (T) Others.
17. Book the order, using (B) Book.
18. Pick Release the order using (N) Shipping > Release Sales Orders > Release Sales Orders.
19. Ship Confirm the order.
20. Use AutoInvoice to invoice the order. (N) Receivables > Interface > AutoInvoice.
Note: If you require to perform an explicit acceptance,use Actions > Fulfillment Acceptance to open the Order
Information Portalpage and record your acceptance details.
Overview of Internal Requisitions
Internal requisitions provide the mechanism for requesting and transferring material from inventory to otherinventory or exp ense
locations. When Purchasing, Order Management, Shipping Execution, and Inventory are installed, they combine to give you a flexible
solution for your inter-organization and intra-organization requests.You should be able to:
• Set up your supply chain and automatically source yourrequirements from inventory or suppliers
• Define yourinter-organization shipping network, and optionally require that you use internal orders for yourinter-organization transfers
• Use intransit inventory when you want to track items as they move between organizations
• Reduce warehousing, shipping, and handling costs by requesting items in fixed lot sizes
• Use the same windows for data entry and inquiry that you use for purchase requisitions and sales orders
• Take advantage of standard requisition and sales order functionality to suit your individual business requirements
• Automatically generate inventory replenishment requisitions and fulfill them via internal or external suppliers
• Automatically source MRP generated requisitions to internal or external suppliers
• View the status ofrequests online
• Use internal requisitions to move inventory items from one inventory organization to another, even if that organization belongs to a
different operating unit, legal entity, or ledger
Major Features
Complete Item Sourcing Definition
Purchasing and Inventory combine to provide the flexibility you need to define your item sourcing information.
You can use the default sourcing options to automatically determine the correct source type and source for yourreques ts.
You can specify either Inventory or Supplier as the default source type, as well as the source organization and subinventory for internal
requests.
Inter-Organization Shipping Network
Inventory provides the features you need to define your inter-organization shipping network.
For transfers between two organizations, you can specify whether to use intransit or direct shipments.
You can also require internal orders for transfers between specific organizations.
Flexible Processing
You can tailor internal requisition processing to fit your requirements. You can limit online interaction by setting up background process es
to automatically perform specific actions such as creating inventory replenishment requests and creating internal sales orders in Order
Management. Or, you can take advantage of otherfeatures such as online requisition approvals, internal sales order cycles, and online
receipt and delivery of internally requested items.
Creating Online Requisitions
You can create online internal requisitions for both expense and inventory destinations using the same windows you use to create purchase
requisitions.
You can combine inventory and supplier sourced requisition lines on the same requisition.
Also, Purchasing uses your item sourcing information to default the correct source type and supplier for the item and destination.You can
define requisition templates for commonly requested internally sourced items.
Full Unit of Issue Enforcement
Purchasing offers the option of full unit of issue enforcement in which quantities entered on internal requisitions are automatically rounded
to a full unit of issue defined for the item.
You can also set this option to recommend a rounded quantity on requisitions, but leave the opportunity to change the re commended
quantity.
The quantity rounding is based on the specified unit of issue,if available, otherwise on the primary unit of measure.
Inventory Replenishment Requisitions
Inventory generates replenishment requisitions through min-max planning, reorder point planning, subinventory replenishment for
replenishment counts,and Kanban replenishment. Purchasing uses youritem sourcing information to create inter-organization or
subinventory transferrequests.
See: Overview of Inventory Planning and Replenishment, Oracle Inventory User's Guide.
See: Demand for Internal Requisitions, page 3-16.
MRP Generated Requisitions
MRP generated requisitions are sourced using the same item sourcing information that you define for inventory replenishment a nd online
requisitions. For "buy" items, the Requisition Import process uses the item sourcing information to create either a purchase requisition or an
inter-organization internal requisition for planned orders.
Approvals and Controls
You can control internal requisition approvals and document security just as you control purchase requisitions.
Purchasing gives you the flexibility you need to set up approvals and limits for internal requests.
You can use the same authorization rules, or you can relax or tighten controls for internal requisitions.
Creation of Internal Sales Orders
When you approve an internal requisition for a stocked item, Purchasing translates the requisition into an internal sales ord er, providing a
link between the end user's requirement and the physical demand against Inventory.
Order Management
Once you create an internal sales order from a requisition, you can manage internal requisitions just as you manage regular s ales orders.
You can use Order Management to define order cycles, approvals and holds to effectively process requisition orders.
You can selectively pick release and otherwise process internal sales orders as easily as you do regular sales orders.
Complete Requisitions Status Visibility
You get complete visibility on the status ofrequests through inquiries and reports.
You get online visibility to the internal sales order number, as well as the shipment and delivery status forrequisitions.
You can report on backordered items, internal requisition status,and delivery discrepancies.
Exception Processing
Internal requisitions help you manage exceptions to your normal business flow. Order Management automatically backorders your request
when you have insufficient supply to fill the internal order by creating anothershipment line for the unavailable quantity.
You can reschedule orders when the shipment date changes,and the expected arrival date on the intransit shipment is updated
automatically.
Cancellation of Requisitions
You can easily cancel a request if you have a change in requirements or if you cannot fulfill the entire order.
Using Order Management, you can partially or fully cancel the line quantities on the internal sales order.
You complete the cancellation process by cancelling the original requisition line in Purchasing.
Using Internal Requisitions
Internal requisitions provide a flexible solution to your inventory requisitioning needs.
You can eliminate user intervention when you do not need it, such as when you are loading internal requisitions into Order Ma nagement or
placing demand. The following sections describe the entire business and information flow for internal requisitions, and identifies
opportunities for you to simplify processing.
Demand for Internal Requisitions
Demand for inventory requests can come from several sources.The primary sources are:
• Online user's request for stockitems out of inventory
• Inventory Replenishment Requests
• Oracle MasterScheduling/MRP and Supply Chain Planning generated requisitions
• External system's requests
Online Requests
Online requisitions give you the choice of supplier or inventory sourced requisitions.
Default sourcing information is determined by the requisition type, the item, and the destination of the request.When you en ter a
requisition, Purchasing automatically selects the correct source type and source information for the item and destination.
To restrict certain users to internal requisitions only, set their profile PO: Legal Requisition Type to Internal.Purchasing then requires
that they source all internally orderable items from inventory. See: Entering Requisition Headers, page 3-48.
For frequently requested items, you can define requisition templates to create internal requisitions quickly. Requestors can pull up the
template they need,fill in the need-by date and destination of the request,and specify the quantity for each desired item.
Internal requisitions also use the Account Generator, which automatically builds account distributions. You can specify only one
accounting distribution per inventory sourced line. See: Using the Account Generator in Oracle Purchasing, page E-6.
Inventory Replenishment Requests
Inventory automatically generates requisitions to maintain an item's stocklevel.
The requisitions may request stockfrom an internal predefined source organization or from an outside supplier.
See: Overview of Inventory Planning and Replenishment, Oracle Inventory User's Guide.
Inventory generates replenishment requests automatically using the following methods:
• Min-Max Planning
• Reorder Point Planning
• Subinventory Replenishments for Replenishment Counts
• Kanban Replenishments
All inventory replenishment methods create requisitions via the Requisitions Open Interface.
Important: If the destination subinventory uses locatorcontrol, you must specify a primary locator for direct inter-organization and
subinventory transfers.
Tip: You can interface with third-party systems to enter count information and load it into Inventory using the Replenishment Interface.
Inventory automatically creates replenishment requisitions using the source and planning method you define.
Kanban Replenishments
In a pull-based system,inventory items for a particular part or assembly area are replenished as soon as they are needed. When the
items are needed,kanban cards in Oracle Inventory change their Supply Status to Empty, and Inventory generates the kanban
replenishment request automatically. Then Requisition Import in Purchasing validates and imports replenishment requests as
requisitions. If the Source Type of the request is Supplier, Purchasing creates a blanket release (if a blanket agreement exists) or a
standard purchase order (if a valid quotation exists) for the item. If the Source Type is Inter-Org, Requisition Import generates an
internal requisition for the item. See: Overview of Kanban Replenishment, Oracle Inventory User's Guide. See: Requisition Import
Process,
Once Purchasing approves the standard purchase order, blanket release, or internal requisition, Inventory automatically receives a
status for the kanban card of In Process.
In Purchasing, Kanban replenishment requests look like any other purchasing document, and you receive them like you do any other
shipment. As soon as you receive the item for delivery through the Receipts or Receiving Transactions windows in Purchasing,
Inventory automatically receives a status for the kanban request of Full, indicating that the inventory supply has been replenished.
MRP Generated Requisitions
MasterScheduling/MRP creates requisitions for "buy" items when you release them using the Planner Workbench. MRP generated
requisitions are sourced using the same rules as online and inventory replenishment requisitions. However, since MRP is plann ing for
the entire organization, inventory sourced requisitions for MRP planned orders must be inter-organization transfer requests.You
cannot request subinventory transfers using internal requisitions for MRP planned orders, unless you specify a non -nettable source
subinventory on the internal requisition. See: Viewing On-hand Quantities, Oracle Master Scheduling / MRP User's Guide.
External Systems
You can automatically import internal requisitions from other Oracle Applications or existing non-Oracle systems using the
Requisitions Open Interface. This interface lets you integrate the Purchasing application quickly with new or existing applications.
Purchasing automatically validates your data and imports your requisitions.
You can import requisitions as often as you want. Then, you can review these requisitions, approve or reserve funds for them if
necessary,and place them on internal sales orders.
See: Requisition Import Process,page 13-29.
Internal Requisition Approvals
After you create an internal requisition, you can optionally require approval.
For online requests,you can set up approval rules that are specific for internal requisitions, or you can share the same rules you use for
purchase requisitions. If you do not require additional approval steps,you can set up rules so that you can always complete and approve
the document in the Requisitions window. See: Entering Requisition Headers, page 3-48.
Min-max planning, Reorder Point planning, and MRP generated requisitions are loaded as approved requisitions through the Requisit ions
Open Interface.
If you set the Inventory Profile INV: RC Requisition Approval to Unapproved, you can optionally load Subinventory Replenishment
requisitions as unapproved and use the document approval functionality in Purchasing.
This profile option affects only Subinventory Replenishment requisitions. See: Submitting a Document for Approval, page 2-32.
See: Oracle Inventory Profile Options, Oracle Inventory User's Guide.
An internal requisition corresponding to a kanban card in Oracle Inventory enters Purchasing through Requisition Import with a status of
Approved.(If encumbrance/budgetary controlis on, Purchasing sets the status to Pre-Approved.) As soon as the internal requisition is
approved,Inventory automatically receives a status forthe kanban card of In Process.
See: Demand for Internal Requisitions, page 3-16. See: Requisition Import Process, page13-29.
Requisition supply is created for the destination organization as soon as the requisition is approved.If you create approved requisitions
through Requisition Import, supply is created at the time the requisition is created. Master Scheduling/MRP and Inventory planning get
complete visibility to the incoming internal requisition supply so the planning processes do not create additional reorders for items that
you have already requested.
Creation of Internal Sales Orders
Once you approve inventory sourced requisition lines, Purchasing translates the requisition into an internal sales order, providing the link
between the requestor's requirement and the physical demand against inventory. You run two separate batch
processes to create the internal sales order from the approved requisition:
• Create Internal Sales Orders. See: Create Internal Sales Orders Process,page 13-4.
• Order Import. See: Order Import, Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual.
Purchasing uses location associations to create internal sales orders from internal requisitions for a given deliver-to location. When you
associate a customer and customer site with a location and then enter an internal requisition with that location as the deliv er-to point,
Purchasing uses the associated customerand customer site on the internal sales order that it creates. The associated customersite becomes
the ship-to site
for Order Management's ship confirmation. See: Defining Locations, page 1-18.
See: Creating and Updating Customers, Oracle Receivables User's Guide.
Internal orders are automatically scheduled by setting the Schedule Ship Date on the sales order to the Need -by Date from the requisition.
If you specify a subinventory on the internal requisition line, Order Management reserves the goods and uses only the specified
subinventory for allocation. If the goods do not exist at the specified subinventory,Order Management backorders them, even if they do
exist in another subinventory.
The Create Internal Sales Orders process loads the Order Management open interface,
OrderImport, using the order type you define in the Purchasing Options window. See: Defining Internal Requisition Options, pa ge 1-38.
OrderImport creates internal sales orders from the records in the interface table, and determines the order cycle and defaults values based
on the order type.
Note: You should not drop-ship internal sales orders. See: Drop Shipments, page 4-114.
Multi-Org: Creation of Internal Sales Orders Across Operating Units
A Multi-Org implementation of Purchasing enables separate operating units within an organization to operate independently of each other.
However, you may still need to obtain goods from anotheroperating unit, and Purchasing supports this.
You can create an internal sales order for an item in anotheroperating unit. When creating this internal sales order, you must create it in
the destination organization's operating unit, and all Order Management activity must take place within that destination operating unit.
For example, the following table lists the generalized steps involved and indicate the organization in which they take place.
StepAction Operating Unit 1
Inventory Org A
Operating Unit 2
Inventory Org B
1- Create and approveinternal requisition. X
2- Run Create Internal Sales Orders. X
3- Run Order Import in Order. Management X
4- Perform pick release and ship confirm in Order Management. X
5- Receive goods. X
When you use internal sales orders to transfer goods from anotheroperating unit, the items' transfer cost is posted to the intercompany
payables and receivables accounts as defined in the shipping network and an intercompany invoice can be generated.
See: Inter-Organization Shipping Network, Oracle Inventory User's Guide.
Management of Internal Sales Orders
You manage internal sales orders using some of the same windows as customer sales orders.
Once you import an internal requisition using Order Import, you can use the Sales Orders window to change the reserved quantity,
schedule date, ship-to contact,and shipment priority.
The destination organization has complete visibility to any changes in incoming supply based on schedule date changes or part ial
shipments.
The price on the internal sales order line comes directly from the price on the requisition line, and is always the item cost.
Order Import does not use the price list to recalculate the line price and Oracle Receivables ignores internal sales orders. So the price on
the internal sales order is not used.
The profile option INV: Advanced Pricing for Intercompany Invoice actually controls the price on the intercompany payables invoice.
When this profile option is set to No (or null), the price on the intercompany invoice is derived from the Transfer Price Lis t associated to
the customer or item. If set to Yes, the price is derived from the Advanced Pricing engine. See: Intercompany Invoice Pricing and Using
Advanced Pricing Engine with Intercompany Invoicing, Oracle Inventory User's Guide.
Once an internal sales order is scheduled,it is visible as demand. You can reserve inventory for internal requisitions either to the
organization, or the organization and subinventory levels.
Order Management does not process internal sales order lines for the Receivables Interface, even if the Receivables Interface is an action
in the order cycle for the internal sales order.
Note: You should not drop-ship internal sales orders. See: Drop Shipments, page 4-114.
Pick Release for Internal Sales Orders
You can directly pick release from the Shipping Transactions window. Or you can selectively release one internal sales order at a time by
entering the internal sales order number as a pick release criterion. Or, you can release a group of internal sales orders by specifying the
internal sales order, order type,and a range of dates,or by using the shipment planning delivery, trip, and trip stop information. You can
also release internal sales orders with customer orders by entering a range of dates.
When you enter an internal requisition, you must specify the source organization, and you can optionally specify the subinventory source.
If you do not enter source subinventory information on an internal requisition, picking proceeds using the standard inventory picking
rules.
Oracle Shipping Execution releases only order lines which meet the prerequisites of the order cycle specific to the internal sales order
type. See: Oracle Shipping Execution User's Guide.
Ship Confirmation for Internal Sales Orders
Use the Shipping Transactions window to ship confirm entire or partial shipments. You can also backorder the internal sales order when
you do not have enough on-hand quantity to fulfill the request.
Partial shipments are handled by splitting internal order lines into multiple shipment schedules with different delivery dates.You cannot
change the warehouse or the subinventories on the delivery details.
When you ship confirm, Shipping Execution updates the Inventory Interface and generates a delivery ship notice outbound (DSNO)
transaction.Inventory automatically updates on-hand quantities to reflect the internally ordered items that you shipped.
If you are shipping using intransit inventory, the destination organization gets complete visibility of the incoming intransit supply.Internal
requisition supply is reduced by the quantity of the shipment.
You can also enter the expected arrival date at ship confirmation to provide a more accurate supply picture to MRP and invent ory
planning. See: Oracle Shipping Execution User's Guide.
Management of Internal Requisitions
Update Intransit Information
For inter-organization transfers that use intransit, you can use the Manage Shipments window to update the expected arrival date. Maste r
Scheduling/MRP and inventory planning get complete visibility to the change in expected arrival date.
See: Managing Shipments, page 9-81.
Receive, Inspect,and Deliver Items
Use the Receipts and Receiving Transactions windows to process receipts of
inter-organization requests that use intransit. Receiving personnelcan simply enter the
requisition number on the shipping documentation and process the entire shipment
using express receiving transactions.For receipt of partial shipments, you can record
the quantities for the individual items included in the shipment. You can receive items
into receiving, or you can receive the goods directly to the final destination,either an
inventory or expense location.
If you receive items into receiving/inspection, you process inspections,transfers,and
deliveries for internal requisitions just as you would process supplierreceipts or
inventory transfers. See: Overview of Receiving, page 9-1.
View Internal Requisition Status
In Purchasing, you can view the internal sales order and any changes to it, by selecting
View Sales Orders on the Tools menu in the Requisition Lines Summary window. Or,
you can access the Sales Orders window directly in Order Management and query on
the specific internal sales order number, or any otherrelevant criteria. The Sales Orders
window provides information about the status ofthe internal sales order, quantities
shipped,quantities cancelled, and dates of transactions.
You can also report on requisition status.See: Backordered Internal Requisitions Report,
page 11-6, Internal Requisitions Status Report, page 11-19, Internal
Requisitions/Deliveries Discrepancy Report, page 11-20, and Requisitions on Cancelled
Sales Order Report, page 11-77.
Cancelling Internal Requisitions
If you cancel an internal sales order that was generated by an internal requisition, you get a warning message that the order line is related
to a requisition line that is now awaiting cancellation. You can then use the Control Document window to cancel the requisition line.
See: Controlling Documents, page 2-57.
Purchasing lets you cancel or final close an inventory sourced requisition line only after you cancel the internal sales order in Order
Management. See: Cancelling Orders, Oracle Order Management User's Guide.
Internal Requisitions Processing Summary
Below is a summary of key transactions and processes you use for Internal requisitions.
If you are using inventory replenishment or MRP generated internal requisitions, Pick Release and Ship Confirmation are the only
required online transactions.
If you are creating online requests,you also use the Requisitions window.
See: Online Processing Automation for Internal Requisitions, page 3-30 for suggestions on howto implement automated processing and
reduce online interaction.
Step Action Required Window/Process
1- Create Internal Requisition On-line or AutomaticRequisitions window and Requisition Import process:Inventory replenishment, MRP Planned
Orders, External Sources
2- ApproveRequisition OptionalApproveDocuments window
3- Create Internal Sales Orders AutomaticCreate Internal Sales Orders process, Order Import process
4- Modify Order Schedule OptionalSales Orders window
5- Pick Release Orders On-line Release Sales Orders for Picking window or Shipping Transactions window
6- Confirm Pick-Wave MoveOrder OptionalTransact MoveOrder window (if not auto-pick confirming from Pick Release window)
7- Ship Confirmation On-line Shipping Transactions window, Order Management Interface, Inventory Interface
8- Receive Items OptionalReceipts window, Receiving Transaction Processor
9- Inspect Receipts OptionalReceiving Transactions window, Receiving Transaction Processor
10- Deliver Receipts OptionalReceiving Transactions window, Receiving Transaction Processor, Inventory Transaction Processor
11- View Requisition Status OptionalRequisition Headers Summary window, Requisition Lines Summary window
12- Cancelling Internal Orders OptionalSales Orders window, ControlDocument window, Define Mass Cancel window, Run Mass Cancel window
Internal Requisitions Setup Overview
Internal requisitions provide a solution to a variety of inventory requisitioning needs.
When you implement this feature, you need to carefully review the options and configure the applications to support yourbusiness
processes.
For example, if you are using internal requisitions to generate inventory replenishment requisitions and fulfill them via sub inventory
transfers within a plant, you may want to limit your online interaction to pick release and ship confirmation.
You do not have to record separate ship, receive, and deliver transactions when the same employee actually picks the items out of the
source subinventory and places them at the destination in one step.
Product Internal Requisition Setup Function
Order Management Update profile options,
Define transaction types,
Define order number sources,
Update/define default value rules,
Define price lists,
Define Concurrent Program Resubmission interval for the Order Import process
Shipping Execution Define release sequence rules,
Define pick slip grouping rules,
Define shipping parameters Inventory Define internally requested items,
Define inter-organization shipping network,
Define item sourcing,
Define Concurrent Program Resubmission intervals in Inventory planning and replenishment windows
Purchasing Define Internal Requisition Deliver-To Sites,
Set Legal Requisition Type profile,
Define Purchasing Options,
Define Concurrent Program Resubmission intervals for the Requisition Import and Create Internal Sales Orders processes
Minimum Order Management Setup for Internal Requisitions
You use standard sales order functionality to define transaction types for internal sales orders.
You also need to use the Purchasing Options window to specify the order type you use for internal requisitions.
See: Defining Internal Requisition Options ,You must perform the following setups in Order Management to use the internal requisition
features.
You may choose to take advantage of other Order Management features which require additional setups.
See: Oracle Order Management Recommended Setup, Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual.
Define Order Management Profile Options
Set the profile option OM: Item Flexfield.
This profile option defines which structure of the item flexfield to use.
Note. that Order Management uses the same ledger as defined in the SystemOptions window in Oracle Receivables.
Use the Parameters window in Order Management to define the Item Masterorganization for this installation.
Tip: Set the Item Validation Organization to the same Item Masterorganization as yourpurchasing reference organization (set in t he
Financials Options window).
Define Transaction Types
Use the Transaction Types window to define order and line types.
Order Management provides default order cycle workflows that you must associate with each order and line type.
Define an Order Management Number Source For Internal Requisitions
Define order number sources to automatically number internal sales orders as you import them.
You can use a single order number source to assign unique numbers to all your orders, or you can use a different order number source
within each order type.
Define a Price List For Internal Requisition
Although internal requisitions use the item's cost as the price, Order Management requires price lists to process all sales orders.
Define a price list for use with the internal requisition order type.
You do not need to add any lines to the price list.
Decide which Default Value Rules to Use
Default value rules define the defaulting that occurs as orders are entered or imported.
Order Management provides default value rules that you can use for internal sales orders.
Confirm that the default value rules that Order Management provides suit your business needs.
If not, use the Defaulting Rules window to modify them.
Define Inventory Accounting (Account Generator)
Order Management can dynamically create the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) Account for each shipped or returned item based on rules you
define. Order Management provides a default Account Generator process to be used in determining the COGS Account
during the Inventory Interface process.
You can either accept the default COGS Account Generator process or customize it to suit yourbusiness needs.For more information on
how to accept or customize this feature, see the Oracle Order Management documentation.
Internal Sales Orders Processing Constraints (Optional)
Order Management processing constraints apply to all your sales orders, including internal sales orders imported from Purchasing.
Processing constraints prevent users from adding, updating,deleting and cancelling order information beyond certain points in the order
cycles.
You can use the System rules Order Management provides, which prevent data integrity violations, or define yourown, stricter, rules.
See: Defining Processing Constraints, Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual.
Minimum Shipping Execution Setup for Internal Requisitions
Perform the following steps:
• Define release sequence rules
• Define pick slip grouping rules
• Define shipping parameters
Minimum Purchasing Setup for Internal Requisitions
Define Internal Requisition Deliver-To Sites
Purchasing uses locations to identify the final delivery location for both inventory and supplier sourced requisitions.
As a requestor, you want to specify the same destination for both purchase and internal requisitions.As a shipping clerk, yo u are
concerned with the final delivery location of the item, regardless whether it is for an internal or external customer.
Purchasing and Order Management use location associations to minimize the decisions you need to make when you create internal
requests.
Use the Location window to define a location for each site that receives either inventory or supplier sourced material.
For internal requisition deliver-to locations,you also need to associate the locations with a customer.
Use the Customers window to define a Customer and Ship-To site for each deliver-to location.
Use the Business Purposes region in the Customers window to associate yourinternal locations to your customers.
Tip: Create an internal customer for each destination organization, and customer ship-to site for each deliver-to location within the
destination organization.
Tip: Define the same address for the customer ship-to site as the deliver-to location. Order Management prints the ship-to address on
the shipping documentation.
Tip: Order Management requires both a ship-to and an invoice-to for each order, even though internal order lines are not invoiced.
When you define a customer, either make the ship-to address both a ship-to and bill-to business purpose and set the Primary flag to Yes on
the business purpose,or assign the ship-to to a bill-to location.
Set Up Internal Requisition Approvals and Security
You set up approval and security rules for internal requisitions just as you do for purchase requisitions.
Use the Document Types,Positions,Position Hierarchies, ApprovalGroups, and Assign ApprovalGroups windows to set up approval
and security options for internal requisitions. See: Setting Up Document Approvaland Security
Define Purchasing Options for Internal Requisitions
You need to set up these additional purchasing options to use internal requisitions:
• Order Type
Pick the Order Type you defined in Order Management for internal sales orders.
Purchasing uses this type to create sales orders from internal requisitions. See: Defining Internal Requisition Options,
• Enforce Quantity Rounding In the Purchasing Options window, specify whether you enforce lot quantity rounding or display advisory
messages when you create online requisitions using the Requisitions window. See: Defining Control Options
Minimum Inventory Setup for Internal Requisitions
Define Internally Orderable Items
When you define internally orderable items, there are a few attributes that require extra consideration.
• Inventory and Order Management regions Items you use on internal requisitions must be Inventory enabled, internally orderable and
stockable, shippable, and Order Management transactable for the source organizations.
Under Inventory,you need to select the Inventory Item,
Transactable, and Stockable options.Under Order Management, you need to select the Internal Ordered, Internal Orders Enabled, OE
Transactable, and Shippable options.
• Source Type - General Planning region Specify a default source type of Inventory or Supplier.
You cannot create intra-organization internal requisitions for MRP planned items.
When you specify sourcing information for MRP planned items, you need to ensure that you do not define an intra-organization sourcing
rule for these items.
• List Price - Purchasing region Inventory sourced requisitions use item costs for pricing. You may still want to specify a list price for
items that are sourced both from suppliers or inventory.
• Unit of Issue - Purchasing region You use units of issue to round order quantities,minimizing shipping, warehousing, and handling
costs.
Enter the unit of measure you typically use to issue the item from inventory.
Purchasing uses this unit of measure as the default for internal requisition lines sourced from inventory when you create them in the
Requisitions window.
• Rounding Factor - Purchasing region Enter a number between 0 and 1.
This factor determines how to round the quantity on an internal requisition that results from conversions between the requisition line
unit of measure and the item's Unit of Issue.
This factor ensures that the unit of issue resolves to an integer, rather than a fractional amount.
Purchasing either performs rounding automatically or advises you of the suggested quantity,depending howyou set up your purchasing
options.
Set Up Item Sourcing
Internal requisitions use the sourcing information you specify in Inventory.
All items, subinventories,and organizations may have item sourcing information specified for them.
At each level (item, subinventory,ororganization), you can choose whether items are replenished from in ventory or purchased from a
supplier.
• Source Type Specify Inventory as the default source type if you want to source requests from an internal stocklocation.
• Source Organization and Subinventory If you specify an item to be replenished from inventory, you must specify a source organization;
a source subinventory is optional.
When you place an order for this item, Inventory creates an internal requisition for the item from the source location.
In case of a conflict between the item, subinventory,and organization levels, internal requisitions use the following order of precedence to
determine the default source type and source for the item and destination:
• Sourcing information specified in the item-subinventory relationship
• Sourcing information specified in the subinventory definition
• Sourcing information specified in the item definition
• Sourcing information specified in the organization setup options
Define the Inter-Organization Shipping Network
Use the Shipping Networks window to define your inter-organization network.
You must enable the network between each source (shipping) and destination (receiving) organization.
• Internal Order Required
Select Internal Order Required if you want all transfers between these two organizations to use internal orders.
• Transfer Type
Specify whether you ship material directly, or use intransit inventory for shipments between these two organizations.
Important: If you use Lot, Serial, or Item Revision Control in both the source and destination organization, you must use intransit if
you ship from an organization with less control (i.e. Lot Control), to an organization with more control (i.e. Lot and Serial Control).
• Receipt Routing
For intransit transfers, you can choose from the following primary receipt routings:
Standard receipt, Inspection required, or Direct delivery.
• FOB Point
Specify whether the destination organization takes ownership of transferred items when they are issued to intransit (Shipment), or when
they are received out of intransit (Receipt).
• Transfer Charge Type
Specify how you want to apply transfer costs to the destination organization.
Choose either a predefined or requested percentage of the transaction value or a fixed amount that represents an added value.
Set Up a Customer Association
To define your organization as the destination for an internal requisition, Order Management has to recognize you as a customer.
See: Defining Locations, See: Creating and Updating Customers, Oracle Receivables User's Guide
Online Processing Automation for Internal Requisitions
Internal requisitions provide a number of options to automate processing.
You can set up the following processes to run automatically as often as you like to limit online interaction and streamline p rocessing.
• Reorder Point Planning Report
• Min-Max Planning Report
• Requisition Import
• Create Internal Sales Orders
• OrderImport
Tip: Create a report group to run all requests back-to-back over specific time intervals when you are using internal requisitions for
automatic subinventory transfers.
Internal Requisitions Example
Purchasing provides flexible internal requisitions that you can tailor to meet your needs.
Review the example in this section to better understand howyou can use internal requisitions.
You are not required to manage internal requisition activities exactly as described in the following example.
Rather, the objective of these examples is to highlight the flexibility of internal requisitions across a variety of situations.
Oracle Manufacturing recommends that you experiment and review the results of different approaches to determine the best
implementation of the internal requisition functionality for your unique needs.
You should use this example as a starting point to better understand how you might use internal requisitions.
Example Overview
Global Computers, Incorporated is a computer manufacturer with organizations in Austin,TX and Sacramento, CA.
The Austin organization repetitively manufactures plastic components and uses the components,along with purchased items, to assemble
base and cover assemblies in the Sacramento organization. Ownership of inter-organization transfers between Austin and Sacramento
changes hands at the time of receipt (FOB Point: Receiving).
The Sacramento organization uses the Austin base and cover assemblies to assemble configurations of Sentinel computers. Sacramento
also has a local sales offices for customer visits and demonstrations.Your salespeople distribute sales brochures during cus tomer visits.
Employees can request Sentinel Computers for their own use, as well as mouse pads and wrist pads for their offices.
Define the following items at Global Computers:
Item Description
A54888 Sentinel Base Assembly Assembled in Austin, Sub Assembly of SentinelComputer, Internally Orderable in Austin, Default Source Typeof
Inventory, Default Source Organization of Austin, Default Source Subinventory of Repetitive Assembly
S86662 Sentinel Cover Assembly Sub Assembly of SentinelComputer, Assembled in Austin, Internally Orderable from Austin,
Default Source Typeof Inventory, Default Source Organization of Austin, Default Source Subinventory of Repetitive Assembly
S56302 Sentinel Computer Assembled in Sacramento, Internally Orderable by Employees
C13139 Hard Drive Used in Sentinel Base Assembly
S85773 Sales Brochure Purchased from external suppliers, Stocked at Sacramento for internal use, Limited quantities on hand at the sales office
M1002 MousePad Purchased from external suppliers, Stocked at Sacramento for internal use
M1002 Wrist Pad Purchased from external suppliers, Stocked at Sacramento for internal use
Define the following subinventories at Global Computers:
Organization Subinventory
Austin AUS-FinishedGoods: Contains completed SentinelBase Assemblies,
Contains completed SentinelCoverAssemblies, Tracked - asset subinventory
Austin Repetitive Assembly: Contains Hard Drives for final assembly in WIP,
Uses Min/Max replenishment to signal replenishment, Request from AUS-Stores subinventory
Austin AUS-Stores:Contains additional supply of Hard Drives, Tracked - asset subinventory
Organization Subinventory
Sacramento SAC-FinishedGoods: Contains completed Sentinel Computers,
Tracked - asset subinventory
Sacramento SAC-Stores:Contains completed SentinelBase Assemblies shipped
from Austin, Contains completed SentinelCoverAssemblies shipped
from Austin, Tracked - asset subinventory
Sacramento Office Supplies:Contains supply of Wrist Pads and Mouse Pads for
internal use, Not tracked - expense subinventory
Sacramento Storage:Central storage for excess Sales Brochures, Tracked - asset
subinventory
Sacramento Visit Center:Contains local supply of SalesBrochures for customer
visits, Space for only 100 Sales Brochures, Not tracked - expense
subinventory
Inventory Replenishment Request (Manufacturing)
You use one Hard Drive during the assembly of each Sentinel Base Assembly, and
keep a limited supply of the Hard Drives in yourRepetitive Assembly subinventory.As
you consume Hard Drives from the Repetitive Assembly, you want to automatically
send inventory replenishment requests to transfer additional Hard Drives from your
Stores subinventory.The material handler needs to receive the inventory request and
transfer the material before you run into a shortage situation.You create a report group
that submits the Min-Max Planning, Requisition Import, Create Internal Sales Orders,
and OrderImport processes every two hours.
As soon as the Hard Drive supply in the Repetitive Assembly subinventory drops
below the minimum quantity,the next run of the Min-Max Planning process
automatically creates a replenishment order for the reorder quantity. The reorder uses
the item sourcing information to automatically create an intraorganization request in
the Austin plant to move Hard Drives from Stores to the Repetitive Assembly
subinventory.The request is automatically loaded as an internal requisition and an
internal sales order, providing visibility of the request to the material handlers in the
Austin plant.
The material handler also runs Pick Release every two hours to identify the pull
requests from the shop floor subinventory.The next run of Pick Release creates a move
order line for the subinventory transferof Hard Drives. The material handler picks the
Hard Drives out of the Stores subinventory,completes a ship confirmation and
replenishes the Repetitive Assembly subinventory before a shortage occurs.At ship
confirmation, the on-hand balances of the two subinventories are automatically updated.
MRP Generated Inter-Organization Request (Manufacturing)
You use Oracle Master Scheduling/MRP and Supply Chain Planning in Sacramento to
schedule production of the final assembly of the Sentinel Computer. The Sentinel Base
Assembly and Sentinel Cover Assembly are provided by the Austin organization, so
you define these items as "buy" items in Sacramento. You also specify the following
sourcing information for the item:
• Source Type - Inventory
• Source Organization - Austin
• Source Subinventory - AUS-Finished Goods
MasterScheduling/MRP recommends that you produce 400 Sentinel Computers to
fulfill demand over the next four weeks (100 each week), and you only have 100
Sentinel Cover Assemblies and 100 Sentinel Base Assemblies on hand in Sacramento.
You need five days to ship material from Austin to Sacramento, so the planner
implements planned orders for 100 Sentinel Cover Assemblies and 100 Sentinel Base
Assemblies for the next three weeks using the Planner Workbench.
When the planner releases the planned orders for Sacramento, Master Scheduling/MRP
automatically loads the Requisitions Open Interface and submits Requisition Import.
Requisition Import uses the sourcing information that you set up to create a requisition
line for each week sourced from the Austin AUS-Finished Goods subinventory.In the
background, the Create Internal Sales Orders and OrderImport processes automatically
load the internal sales order against the Austin organization.
What if you have a three day production delay in Austin and you need to delay the
third shipment of Sentinel Base Assemblies for a few days? Sacramento needs
visibility to the delay to adjust the production schedules of the final assembly of the
Sentinel Computers. In Austin, you can use the Sales Orders window to update the
scheduled shipment date by three days,or choose a different freight carrier for faster
delivery if you need to expedite the shipment to prevent a shortage in Sacramento.
When you ship the third shipment from Austin, you can update the expected arrival
date, giving the planner and MRP in Sacramento full visibility of supply changes.
Each ship confirmation of the Sentinel Base Assemblies creates an intransit shipment
from Austin to Sacramento. You do not require inspection of yourown
inter-organization transfers,so the receiving clerk in Sacramento receives directly into
the Final Assembly subinventory when the shipment arrives. The intransit inventory
balance is automatically updated and the inter-organization accounting entries are
created along with the receipt transaction.
Inventory Replenishment Request (Office Stock Locations)
In the Sacramento sales office, you use internal requisitions to replenish your stock of
Requisitions 3-35
sales brochures in the Visit Center.
Sales representatives use your brochures well, and most customers take brochures with
them after the visit. You want easy access to brochures in the Visit Center, but only
have room for 100 Sales Brochures. You typically use about 75 a week, but the number
fluctuates with sales activity. Sales representatives take what they need; you do a stock
count on Monday and Wednesday ofeach week and replenish whenever the stock
count falls below 25.
You need to define min-max information for the Sales Brochures that you stock in the
Visit Center subinventory.Use the Item Subinventories window to specify a planning
method of Min-max planning, a minimum quantity of 25, and a maximum quantity of
100.
Requisition Import creates an approved internal requisition for subinventory transfers,
and the sales order is automatically loaded.
The material handler reviews the picking slip, pulls the 80 Sales Brochures from Storage
Subinventory and delivers them to the Visit Center. After delivering the material the
handler records the shipment using the Confirm Shipments window. The shipment,
receipt, and delivery information is recorded at once, and the on-hand balance of the
Storage subinventory is updated automatically. Inventory automatically creates the
necessary accounting entries to reduce the overall value of Sales Brochures in the
Storage subinventory and charges the accounts associated with the Visit Center
subinventory.
Online Request for Goods out of Inventory
In Sacramento, you stocklow-cost office supplies on site to provide quick delivery to
your employees. Employees can request items that are sourced from suppliers or
inventory, but they do not know the source type at the time of the request. You also
require internal requisitions to process requests for goods out of the stock locations. You
have a company policy to always request items from Office Supplies whenever
possible.You do not require any additional approvals, and a material handler picks the
items out of inventory and delivers them directly to your office. A one day turnaround
time is required for all internal requests.
As a requestor, you want to order the following items to improve your comfort and
productivity:
• Sentinel Computer
• Mouse Pad
• Wrist Pad
• Glare Screen (not stocked on site)
Use the Requisitions window to create your request.Since company policy dictates that
you request items from inventory whenever possible, the default requisition type is
3-36 Oracle Purchasing User's Guide
Internal Requisition and the default source type is Inventory. When you create the
four requisition lines for your items, Purchasing automatically uses the item sourcing
information to source the Sentinel Computer from the SAC-Finished Goods
subinventory.Since the Glare Screen can only be purchased from suppliers, Purchasing
sets the source type to Supplier and uses yoursourcing rules and Approved Supplier
List entries to determine the suggested supplierand document information. See:
Automatic Sourcing, page 5-24. See: Approved Supplier List, page 5-35.
Material handlers need immediate visibility of your requests to be able to deliver in 24
hours.The systemadministrator sets the Create Internal Sales Orders and OrderImport
processes to run every hour for internal sales orders.
The material handler in charge of the Office Supplies subinventory runs Pick Release
twice a day to generate pick slips. The material handler reviews the picking slip, pulls
the Mouse Pad and Wrist Pad from Storage and delivers them to youroffice. After
getting your signature, the handler records the shipment using the Confirm Shipments
window. The shipment, receipt, and delivery information is recorded at once, and the
quantity delivered on the internal request is updated.
Office Supplies is an expense subinventory,and the correct accounts are charged when
you receive the supplies into this subinventory.Since you are sourcing from an expense
subinventory,ship confirmation does not generate any accounting entries for the issue
of the items from the Office Supplies subinventory to youroffice location.
A separate material handler receives the Sentinel Computer request,and picks and
ships it from the SAC-Finished Goods subinventory.When you complete the ship
confirmation, Inventory automatically issues the Sentinel Computer out of the
SAC-Finished Goods asset subinventory to the expense location listed on the
requisition. Inventory and Purchasing also record the accounting transactions to credit
the SAC-Finished Goods asset account and debits the appropriate charge account
listed on the requisition.
Finding Requisitions
Use the Find Requisitions window to:
• Access the Requisitions window.
• Perform requisition inquiries at header, line, and distribution levels
Depending on the function security assigned to your responsibility, you have varying
levels of access to information. A responsibility defines an application user's current
privileges while working with Oracle Applications.See: Function Security for
Purchasing, page D-1.
To entersearch criteria:
1. Navigate to the Find Requisitions window. Then enter as many as desired of the search criteria described in the following steps.
2. Select the Operating Unit for this search.
3. Enter the requisition number. If you enter a requisition number, you can also enter a Line number.
4. Select the requisition Type (Purchase or Internal).
5. Enter the Preparer.
6. Enter the Requestor.
7. Enter the Buyer.
8. Select Yes or No to restrict the search to Modified requisitions.
9. Enter the Reference Number.
10. Enter the Import Source.
11. Enter the Line Type.
12. Use the tabbed regions to further restrict the search:
• In the Item region, you can enter the following search criteria: Item number,
Revision number, Category, item Description, and Supplier Item number.
• In the Status region, you can limit the search by Approval status (Approved, Incomplete, In Process, Pre-Approved, Rejected, or
Returned), Control status
(Open, Cancelled, or Finally Closed), or Reserved status (Yes or No).
• In the Date Ranges region, you can enter date ranges for the following dates: Creation, Need By, and Closed.
• In the Sourcing region, you can limit the search by Source (Supplier or Inventory).
For Supplier sourced requisitions, you can further limit the search by Supplier, Site, and Currency. For Inventory sourced requisitions, you
can further limit the search by Organization and Subinventory. If you have enabled vendored managed inventory, you can limit your
search results to those items by checking the VMI box.
• In the Deliver To region, you can limit the search by Destination Type (Expense,
Inventory, or Shop Floor), Organization, Location, and (for Inventory
destinations only) Subinventory.
• In the Related Documents region, you can limit the search by Document Type,
Document number and Line Number, Purchase Order number, and drop
shipment Sales Order number.
• In the Accounting region, you can limit the search by Period, GL Date, Charge
Account,Budget Account,and whether there are Active Encumbrances (Yes or
No).
• In the Projects region, you can limit the search by Project or Task number.
13. Select the Results group (Headers, Lines, or Distributions) to determine which
summary window to open. Depending on the search criteria you have specified, all
summary windows may not be available. For example, if you specify criteria in the
Accounting region, only the Distributions summary window is available.
14. Select the Find button to initiate the search and open the appropriate Summary window.
To clearexisting search criteria:
• Select the Clear button to clear any existing search criteria.
To entera newrequisition:
• Select the New button to open the Requisitions window. See: Entering Requisition Headers,
Practice - Create Internal Requisitions
Overview
In order to use internal requisitions, you must have Oracle Inventory, Oracle Order Management,and Oracle Purchasing
installed. Order Management is used to track internal sales orders. To enter an internal sales order, you must start with a
requisition in Purchasing. Steps for this practice:
 Create an internal requisition in Oracle Purchasing
 Instructor will run processes in Oracle Order Management
 Verify the shipment of your internal order in Oracle Purchasing
R12: What Are The Steps Required To Setup An Internal Requisition In Purchasing? (Doc ID 1384716.1)
Goal
Solution
Step 1 - Creating the Item
Step 2 - Creating the Shipping Network
Step 3 - Create the Internal Location
Step 4 - Conduct a Miscellanies Transaction (Receipt)
Step 5 - Create the Internal Customer - Assign the Location
Step 6 - Item Price Information
Step 7 - Creating the Requisition (PO Requisition Approval, Main Requisition Approval, PO Create
Documents, Overall Document Creation/Launch Approval)
Step 8 - Submitting the Create Internal Orders Concurrent Request
Step 9 - Import the Internal Sales Order
Step 10 - Execute Pick Release/Ship Confirm
Step 11 - Conduct the Receipt in the Destination Organization
Step 12 - Confirm the Quantity is Delivered
SOLUTION
Test case Scenario : The following setups will demonstrate the flow of an Internal Requisition between two inventory organizations.
M1 - Seattle Manufacturing will represent the destination organization
M2 - Boston Manufacturing will represent the source organization
In this example, the item will be procured internally from the M2 - Boston Manufacturing inventory organization
The following responsibilities are utilized in this example:
Purchasing Super User (or equivalent)
Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA)
Inventory
Step 1 - Creating the Item
Purchasing Super User - Navigation: Items/MasterItems
Enter the Item Name
Ensure it is Purchased and Purchasable
Enter the Item Name
Ensure it is Purchased and Purchasable
Select these attributes:
Customer Ordered and Customer Orders Enabled
Shippable
Internal Ordered
Internal Orders Enabled
OE Transactable
Assign the item to the inventory organizations which are involved in the Internal Requisitioning process.
M1 will be the destination inventory organization and M2 will be the Source Inventory Organization.
Step 2 - Creating the Shipping Network
Inventory: Navigation: Setup/Organizations/Shipping Networks
Enter the Inventory Organization that will be the Source and the scope should be From or To Organizations
Choose the Transfer Type:
Direct - means that when the Internal Sales Order is shipped the receipt process in the destination organization 1. is done automatically
2. Intransit - means that when the Internal Sales Order is shipped - the destination inventory organization has to manually do the
receiving process in Purchasing
Choose Internal Order Required checkbox - Save
In this example, the setups are being done to allow the user to Enter a Receipt in SH1 after the item has been shipped from SH2 (Intransit).
Please Note - If the Source and Destination Inventory Organizations are the same, then this step is conditionally not required. (Essentially the
Item is being transferred between subinventories in the same Inventory Organization).
Step 3 - Create the Internal Location
Purchasing Super User: Setup/Organizations/Locations
Enter a Location Name - for the Internal Location
This is the location that is used as the Destination Location The Location will eventually be tied to a customer
Choose the Other Details tab, enter the Inventory Organization for the Destination Organization.
The location created will be used to tie the Destination Location in the requisition form to the Internal Customer to be used on the Sales Order
form.
Purchasing does not allow the entry of a Customer - therefore it passes the location to Order Management.
During Order Import in Order Management - the systemlocates the Customer Record to which the Location is assigned.Associating the
location to the customer record will be done in the later steps.
Step 5 - Create the Internal Customer - Assignthe Location
Order Management Super User: Navigation: Customers/Standard
A web based form will open,choose the Create button in the lower left.
Enter the Customer Name - in the Organization Name field.
Choose the Profile Class that applies to the customer. Ex. Excellent.
Scroll further down and enter the Address details for the Internal Customer.
Move to the bottomof the form and under Business Purposes - Choose Add AnotherRow.
Set the purpose for the new row as 'Ship To'
Choose the Save and Add Details
Move to the bottomof the page, and the address should be visible.
Choose the Details icon
The Account Site Information will appear, select the Business Purposes tab
The Ship To and Bill To should now be visible.
Select the Details icon to the right of the Ship To
Under the Order Management section,there is a field 'Internal Location'
Enter the Location that was created in Step 3 (Ex. M1-Internal Location)
Apply and save the record
PLEASE NOTE: The Customer must be created in the Operating Unit of the Source Inventory Organization that is used on the Internal
Requisition. You can check the Operating Unit for the Source Inventory Organization by using the following sql:
Select 'The Inventory Organization '
||oo.organization_code||'has the inventory organization ID of '
||oo.organization_id||' and is underthe Operating Unit'
||hro.name||' which has the Operating Unit ID of '||oo.operating_Unit
from org_organization_definitions oo, hr_all_organization_units hro
where upper(oo.organization_code) like upper('%&INV_ORG_CODE%')
and hro.organization_id = oo.operating_unit;
Pass in the Source Inventory Organization Code - and then ensure the Customer is created in the Operating Unit for the Source Inventory
Organization.
Step 6 - Item Price Information
Purchasing Super User: Items/Master Items The price used on the requisition comes from the item costs section.
Query back the item Choose from the top text menu - Tools/ItemCosts
The screen to follow shows the item price that is used when creating the Internal Requisition. This is how purchasing derives the price when
creating the Internal Requisition. It uses the price for the Cost - in the Source Inventory Organization. Whateverthe price is in the Source
Inventory Organization used on the requisition - the price is derived. The reason is that the Sales Order is being created in the Source
Organization, so the price in the Source Organization must be used.
Step 7 - Creating the Requisition
Purchasing Super User: Navigation - Requisitions/Requisitions
In the Order Type Field - change the Order Type to Internal Click into the Lines Region on the Item field
At this point - look to the Destination fields - this information is fetched from the Employee Record
If the Destination Inventory Organization is not proper - move to that field and change it
If the Location is not the internal location - move to that field and change it to the new Internal Location Approve the requisition.
Question: Why is the Following Error message encountered : 'Destination location requires customer association.'
The reason for this error is that the code is trying to match the Location that is currently entered on the form to a
customer, and the customer association is not found. This was done earlier in step 5. The solution to this error is to
setup the employee record to default a location that was associated with a customer (as in step 5 above) or prior to
entering the item, move to the destination section of the form and enter an inventory organization and location that is
properly assigned to a customer, followed with entry of the item.
Question: Why is the Source Inventory Organization Not showing the inventory organization which was setup in the shipping
networks?
If the internal requisition is going to be for a cross operating unit scenario - then it should be noted that the HR: Security Profile is used.
Both operating units for which the inventory organizations belong too must exist in the HR: Security Profile.
To confirm the operating units for the inventory organizations - this sql can be used:
SELECT oo.operating_Unit OU_id, hro.name Oper_Unit, oo.organization_code inv_org
FROM org_organization_definitions oo, hr_all_organization_units hro
WHERE oo.organization_id in (207, 204)
and hro.organization_id = oo.operating_unit;
Confirm that the operating units in the given output exist in the security profile that is set for the HR: Security Profile - profile.
Step 8 - Submitting the Create Internal Orders Concurrent Request
Purchasing Super User: Navigation - Reports/Run
This process is responsible for inserting data into the Order Management interface Tables.
One of the fields that is inserted is the location_id - and because Order Management uses Customers rather than locations - this is why it is
mandatory to assign the Internal Location to the Customer. The location that is passed from purchasin g is correlated to a customer so as to
allow the Order Import to run successfully.
Please note that the calculate_price_flag is inserted as N into the Order Management interface tables.
This means that Purchasing is going to pass the price and it will not be impacted or recalculated when imported into Order Management.
This is proper functionality. We are currently tracking on Enhancement Request Bug 3095239 that would allow the use of an Int ernal Price
List.
The following sql can be used to review the data in the oe_iface tables.
SELECT *
FROM OE_HEADERS_IFACE_ALL
WHERE order_source_id = 10
AND orig_sys_document_refIN
(SELECT REQUISITION_HEADER_ID
FROM PO_REQUISITION_HEADERS_ALL
WHERE segment1 = '&requisition_number');
SELECT *
FROM OE_LINES_IFACE_ALL
WHERE order_source_id = 10
AND orig_sys_document_refIN
(SELECT REQUISITION_HEADER_ID
FROM PO_REQUISITION_HEADERS_ALL
WHERE segment1 = '&requisition_number');
Pass in the requisition number when prompted.
Question: How can the interface data for Internal Requisitions be viewed in the Order Management Module?
This is possible using the Order Management Responsibility - and navigating to Orders>Import Orders>Corrections
Choose an order type of Internal In Order Reference use the List of Values to locate the Requisition Number
If the Requisition is not located - it has either been created into a Sales Order or not inserted into the tables by the Create Internal Orders
program The records are viewable at this stage and can be deleted.
PLEASE NOTE - if records are going to be deleted, it is necessary to Delete the Lines first and then the header
Be sure to choose Lines first - and then choose the delete icon from the toolbar - then delete the header
Deletion of the header record will NOT delete the line - it is not a cascade delete option. If the headeris deleted prior to the line - it is not
possible to ever again locate the line in this form - sqlplus will have to be used to remove the line.
Enhancement Bug 4966920 has been created to improve this form and add the cascade delete functionality and now is implemented with the
following
Patch 13702362 - AFTER HEADER IS DELETED, ORPHAN DATA IS LEAVED IN SALES ORDER INTERFACE TABLES>>
Question: How can the Internal Requisition be resubmitted to the Order Management interface tables?
In the po_requisition_headers_alland po_requisition_lines_all table there is a column 'transferred_to_o e_flag'.
Setting this column to a value of 'N' followed with a run of the
Create Internal Orders process will again post the requisition data into the Order Management interface tables.There are currently no options
available through the Oracle Purchasing forms that allow the updating of this flag, so sqlplus would have to be used.
Question (Problem):
When Running the Create Internal Sales Order Process - it completes with Success
But no records are inserted into the Order Management Interface Tables?
When the internal requisition is created the code needs to validate that the customer was created in the Operating Unit that the Source
Inventory Organization belongs too.
When the Create Internal Sales Order process runs,if the Deliver to Location is not tied to a Customer Ship To Site in the Operating Unit of
the Source Inventory Organization used on the requisition - then it will not insert data into the oe_headers_iface and oe_lines_iface table.
Please review the previous step 5 and use the sql given to ensure that the Customer was created in the Operating Unit that be longs to the
Source Inventory Organization. For
this example, it would be required to check the Purchasing Options for the Operating Unit which M2 is belonging too.
VERY IMPORTANT ALSO REGARDING Create Internal Orders
In Release 12 you must make sure that you are choosing an Order Type in the Purchasing Options - that was created in the SAME operating
unit for the Purchasing Options you are setting up.
Ex. If you are in the Germany Purchasing Options - then ensure you choose a Order Management Order Type that was created in Germany
Order Management. BEWARE - The list of values for Order Type is showing Transaction Types from other Operating Units. So, if you are in
Germany Purchasing Options and then choose a France Created
Transaction Type - no Records will be inserted during the Create Internal Orders Process.This is fixed in Release 12.1.1 and beyond.
Also, remember that whatever the Source Inventory Organization that is used on the Internal Requisition - the purchasing options must be
setup for that Source Organizations
Operating Unit. So if the internal requisition has two inventory organizations from different Operating Units - ensure the Purchasing Options
have been setup for both of the Inventory Organizations Operating Units - as the code is going to check the Purchasing Options from the
operating unit of the Source Organization to obtain the Order Type to
use - as the Sales Order is going to be created in the Source Organizations Operating Unit.
Question: Does the Purchasing Create Internal Orders process pass flexfield values from the Purchase Requisition?
Currently, the Create Internal Orders process does not pass any values from flexfields. If there are mandatory/required flexfields setup on the
Order Lines table in Order Management, a value will have to be defaulted as a default value from some other method in order for the import
process to complete successfully.
Step 9 - Import the Internal Sales Order
Order Management Super User: Navigation: Orders ,Returns/Import Orders/Order Import Request
Enter these values:
Operating Unit - Operating Unit of the Source Inventory Organization (Ex. M2)
Order Source - Internal (or the order type being used
Order Reference - Requisition Number
Submit the request.Confirm that it completes.
Navigating to Orders, Returns/Order Organizer
Enter the requisition number in the Find form
Confirm that the Internal Sales Order was created from the import
Question: Can the price be updated adjusted during the Order Import?
The calculate price flag is frozen and the price cannot be changed.This is based on the values inserted by the Create Internal Orders process
from Purchasing.
Question: Where is the schedule Ship Date coming from?
The scheduled ship date is passed from the requisition Need By Date, it cannot be defaulted any differently.
Question: How is the Order Type being chosen?
This is coming from the Purchasing Options - Responsibility Purchasing Super User - Setup/Organizations/Purchasing Options.
The following queries can be used to confirm that the Internal Sales Order was created.
SELECT *
FROM OE_ORDER_HEADERS_ALL
WHERE order_source_id = 10
AND orig_sys_document_refIN
(SELECT REQUISITION_HEADER_ID
FROM PO_REQUISITION_HEADERS_ALL
WHERE segment1 = '&requisition_number');
SELECT *
FROM OE_ORDER_LINES_ALL
WHERE order_source_id = 10
AND orig_sys_document_refIN
(SELECT REQUISITION_HEADER_ID
FROM PO_REQUISITION_HEADERS_ALL
WHERE segment1 = '&requisition_number');
Pass the requisition number into the script when prompted.
Step 10 - Execute Pick Release/Ship Confirm
Set Shipping Role For User
Order Management Super User: Shipping/Transactions
Enter the field - From Order Number - give the Internal Sales Order
Choose Find
From the Actions - choose Launch Pick Release
Once the Pick Release has been completed, requery the Internal Sales Order in the shipping transactions form.
The field 'Next Step' should now be showing Ship Confirm.
Choose the Delivery tab
While in the Delivery form, choose actions 'Ship Confirm'
The Ship Confirm submission form appears.
Ship Entered Quantities
Create Delivery for Staged quantities
Close Trip
The selections above were all defaulted into the ship confirm submission form. Choose OK.
Requiring the record shows that the Next Step is to Run Interfaces.
This represents running the Interface Trip Stop process.
In this example, the Interface Trip Stop ran automatically.
Navigation: Shipping/Interfaces/Run - Interface Trip Stop If required, run the Interface Trip Stop process for the Trip that was created.
Confirm that it completes with success.
The shipping process in M2 will also automatically create the receipt in M1 - if the Shipping Network was setup to have a transfer
type of Direct. For this example, Intransit was used to as to be able to demonstrate the receiving process.
Step 11 - Conduct the Receipt in the Destination Organization
Purchasing Super User: Receiving/Receipts
Upon entering the Receiving form, search based on the requisition number.
Select the line for Receipt - and save the record. The Receiving Transaction Processor will be engaged and the item will be transacted into the
M1 - Destination Inventory
Organization.
Navigating to Receiving/Receiving Transactions Summary - it is possible to search on the requisition and view the completed Receiving
Transactions.
Step 12 - Confirm the Quantity is Delivered
Purchasing Super User: Requisitions/Requisition Summary
Querying the requisition lines, it is possible to view the quantity delivered - giving confirmation that the Sales Order was shipped from the
source inventory organization (M2) and receipted into the destination inventory organization (M1).
Additional Scenario
Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only
The Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process is a workflow process is used for order lines that do not require shipping.
The Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process is used in a situation when only a bill for the order must be generated.
The process contains severalsubprocessesto ensure that the order line is properly entered, invoiced, fulfilled, and closed.
When you save an order line in Oracle Order Management, the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process verifies that the order is booked before
proceeding. Once booking is verified, the process continues with invoicing, fulfillment, and closing.
Several of these actions are performed in the following workflow subprocesses contained in Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only:
• Enter - Line
• Invoice Interface
• Close - Line
Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only ends once the line is successfully closed.The only process is contained in the Seeded Data File oexwford.wft,
page 1-6 and is associated with the OM Order Line, page 6-6 item type.
Summary of the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only Process
To view the properties of the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process,select the process in the navigator tree and then select Properties from
the Edit menu. This process is runnable, which indicates that it can be assigned to a transaction type.
The Details property page of the process activity indicates that the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process has an error item type of
WFERROR. This item type is associated with the RETRY_ONLY error process.The purpose of this error handling process is to alert an
administrator when an error occurs in a process and prompt the administrator to retry the process in error.
This error process is initiated only when an unexpected error with Oracle Workflow is encountered in the process.
When you display the Process window for the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only, you see that the process consists of2 unique
activities and 3 subprocesses,which comprise the 5 nodes that appear in the workflow diagram.
The following diagram depicts the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process.
Each node of this process is numbered for referencing.
Line Flow - Generic, Bill OnlyWorkflow
The Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only workflow begins at node 1 with the Enter - Line,
page 5-39 subprocess.
This subprocess verifies that the order is booked before proceeding with the remainder of the workflow.
The process attempts to fulfill the order at node 2. At node 3, the Invoice Interface - Line, Deferred, subprocess is initiated.
This subprocess moves the invoice interface to the background engine. The process initiates the Close - Line, subprocess at node 4. After the
line is successfully closed,the process ends at node 5.
Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only Activities
The following table provides descriptions of each activity in the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process.
For more information about individual activities, refer to Seeded Function Activity Definitions, page 6-1.
Line Flow - Generic, Bill OnlyActivities
Activity Function Result Type Required
Fulfill OE_FULFILL_WF.ST
ART_FULFILLMENT
None Yes
Seeded Workflow Definitions 4-35
Activity Function Result Type Required
End WF_STANDARD.NO
OP
None Yes
Line Flow - Standard Service
Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only with Payment Assurance
Ad

More Related Content

What's hot (20)

Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:
Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:
Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:
Boopathy CS
 
Oracle R12 Purchasing setup
Oracle R12 Purchasing setupOracle R12 Purchasing setup
Oracle R12 Purchasing setup
Mohammad Shahadat Hossain Chowdhury, CSSB,ITIL, PRINCE2
 
Oracle Application Differences & Drop Ship Sales Orders
Oracle Application Differences & Drop Ship Sales OrdersOracle Application Differences & Drop Ship Sales Orders
Oracle Application Differences & Drop Ship Sales Orders
iWare Logic Technologies Pvt. Ltd.
 
Oracle SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers - Order Management Module...
Oracle SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers - Order Management Module...Oracle SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers - Order Management Module...
Oracle SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers - Order Management Module...
Boopathy CS
 
Elshayeb Expense Subinventory And Items Scenario
Elshayeb Expense Subinventory And Items ScenarioElshayeb Expense Subinventory And Items Scenario
Elshayeb Expense Subinventory And Items Scenario
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Oracle R12 inventory Table name details with description
Oracle R12 inventory Table name details with descriptionOracle R12 inventory Table name details with description
Oracle R12 inventory Table name details with description
Boopathy CS
 
Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12
Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12
Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12
G Madhusudhan
 
R12 subinventory transfer and inter org transfers
R12 subinventory transfer and inter org transfersR12 subinventory transfer and inter org transfers
R12 subinventory transfer and inter org transfers
shravan kumar chelika
 
Oracle Quality setup
Oracle Quality setupOracle Quality setup
Oracle Quality setup
Mina Lotfy
 
Oracle R12 Apps – SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers – Purchasing M...
Oracle R12 Apps – SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers – Purchasing M...Oracle R12 Apps – SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers – Purchasing M...
Oracle R12 Apps – SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers – Purchasing M...
Boopathy CS
 
Oracle order management implementation manual
Oracle order management implementation manualOracle order management implementation manual
Oracle order management implementation manual
Nawaz Sk
 
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management,
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management, Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management,
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management,
Boopathy CS
 
Ame how to diagnose issues with the default approver list in purchasing when ...
Ame how to diagnose issues with the default approver list in purchasing when ...Ame how to diagnose issues with the default approver list in purchasing when ...
Ame how to diagnose issues with the default approver list in purchasing when ...
Abdul Rahman Fouad Thabit
 
Technical architecture for order management
Technical architecture for order managementTechnical architecture for order management
Technical architecture for order management
Mohit kumar Gupta
 
Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...
Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...
Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...
Boopathy CS
 
Basics of Oracle Order Management
Basics of Oracle Order ManagementBasics of Oracle Order Management
Basics of Oracle Order Management
shravan kumar chelika
 
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order ManagementOracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management
Boopathy CS
 
Oracle forms personalization
Oracle forms personalizationOracle forms personalization
Oracle forms personalization
Kaushik Kumar Kuberanathan
 
Oracle i procurement
Oracle i procurementOracle i procurement
Oracle i procurement
Pietro Prestia
 
R12 inventory features
R12 inventory featuresR12 inventory features
R12 inventory features
Suresh Mishra
 
Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:
Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:
Oracle R12 Order Management - Back to Back (B2B) Order Flow:
Boopathy CS
 
Oracle SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers - Order Management Module...
Oracle SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers - Order Management Module...Oracle SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers - Order Management Module...
Oracle SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers - Order Management Module...
Boopathy CS
 
Elshayeb Expense Subinventory And Items Scenario
Elshayeb Expense Subinventory And Items ScenarioElshayeb Expense Subinventory And Items Scenario
Elshayeb Expense Subinventory And Items Scenario
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Oracle R12 inventory Table name details with description
Oracle R12 inventory Table name details with descriptionOracle R12 inventory Table name details with description
Oracle R12 inventory Table name details with description
Boopathy CS
 
Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12
Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12
Blanket purchase agreement and blanket release in oracle r12
G Madhusudhan
 
R12 subinventory transfer and inter org transfers
R12 subinventory transfer and inter org transfersR12 subinventory transfer and inter org transfers
R12 subinventory transfer and inter org transfers
shravan kumar chelika
 
Oracle Quality setup
Oracle Quality setupOracle Quality setup
Oracle Quality setup
Mina Lotfy
 
Oracle R12 Apps – SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers – Purchasing M...
Oracle R12 Apps – SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers – Purchasing M...Oracle R12 Apps – SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers – Purchasing M...
Oracle R12 Apps – SCM Functional Interview Questions & Answers – Purchasing M...
Boopathy CS
 
Oracle order management implementation manual
Oracle order management implementation manualOracle order management implementation manual
Oracle order management implementation manual
Nawaz Sk
 
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management,
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management, Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management,
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management,
Boopathy CS
 
Ame how to diagnose issues with the default approver list in purchasing when ...
Ame how to diagnose issues with the default approver list in purchasing when ...Ame how to diagnose issues with the default approver list in purchasing when ...
Ame how to diagnose issues with the default approver list in purchasing when ...
Abdul Rahman Fouad Thabit
 
Technical architecture for order management
Technical architecture for order managementTechnical architecture for order management
Technical architecture for order management
Mohit kumar Gupta
 
Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...
Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...
Oracle Purchasing – Purchase Order Types & Difference between Standard & Plan...
Boopathy CS
 
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order ManagementOracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management
Oracle R12 SCM Functional Interview Questions - Order Management
Boopathy CS
 
R12 inventory features
R12 inventory featuresR12 inventory features
R12 inventory features
Suresh Mishra
 

Similar to Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management (20)

Order to cash flow cycle in order management
Order to cash flow cycle in order managementOrder to cash flow cycle in order management
Order to cash flow cycle in order management
venkatesh gurusamy
 
Purchasing setup steps
Purchasing setup stepsPurchasing setup steps
Purchasing setup steps
Rajak Khan
 
Oracle r12 multi org
Oracle r12 multi orgOracle r12 multi org
Oracle r12 multi org
gbalagee
 
Oracler12multiorg 121119014000-phpapp02
Oracler12multiorg 121119014000-phpapp02Oracler12multiorg 121119014000-phpapp02
Oracler12multiorg 121119014000-phpapp02
Sumit Thakur
 
purchasing-setups-in-oracle-r12_compress.pdf
purchasing-setups-in-oracle-r12_compress.pdfpurchasing-setups-in-oracle-r12_compress.pdf
purchasing-setups-in-oracle-r12_compress.pdf
Hesham Mahdy
 
Sap 20 overview_203_1_
Sap 20 overview_203_1_Sap 20 overview_203_1_
Sap 20 overview_203_1_
Rodolfo Ocampo
 
Multi org-r12
Multi org-r12Multi org-r12
Multi org-r12
Srikanth Reddy Kota
 
All About Multi Organization Access
All About Multi Organization AccessAll About Multi Organization Access
All About Multi Organization Access
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Order to cash flow cycle in order management in detail
Order to cash flow cycle in order management in detailOrder to cash flow cycle in order management in detail
Order to cash flow cycle in order management in detail
Shiv Om Mishra
 
Oracle hrms bg setup examples
Oracle hrms bg setup examplesOracle hrms bg setup examples
Oracle hrms bg setup examples
Oracle HRMS Functional Consultant
 
32 payroll setup_part_32_(skylark_group_pvt_ltd)
32 payroll setup_part_32_(skylark_group_pvt_ltd)32 payroll setup_part_32_(skylark_group_pvt_ltd)
32 payroll setup_part_32_(skylark_group_pvt_ltd)
Oracle HRMS Functional Consultant
 
11 job costing
11 job costing11 job costing
11 job costing
MD. Monzurul Karim Shanchay
 
Oracle R12 Apps - Purchasing Module Setup Steps
Oracle R12 Apps - Purchasing Module Setup Steps Oracle R12 Apps - Purchasing Module Setup Steps
Oracle R12 Apps - Purchasing Module Setup Steps
Boopathy CS
 
Operational Company creation in AX v1.3
Operational Company creation in AX v1.3Operational Company creation in AX v1.3
Operational Company creation in AX v1.3
Shakil Zaman
 
58528447 oracle-e am
58528447 oracle-e am58528447 oracle-e am
58528447 oracle-e am
sakshigoel030405
 
Check printing in_r12
Check printing in_r12Check printing in_r12
Check printing in_r12
Rajesh Khatri
 
Oracle financials theory_vol_i
Oracle financials theory_vol_iOracle financials theory_vol_i
Oracle financials theory_vol_i
Abdul Rahman Fouad Thabit
 
237922323-Payroll-Setups-of-Oracle-HRMS-R12.pdf
237922323-Payroll-Setups-of-Oracle-HRMS-R12.pdf237922323-Payroll-Setups-of-Oracle-HRMS-R12.pdf
237922323-Payroll-Setups-of-Oracle-HRMS-R12.pdf
souad72
 
Performance Tuning for Visualforce and Apex
Performance Tuning for Visualforce and ApexPerformance Tuning for Visualforce and Apex
Performance Tuning for Visualforce and Apex
Salesforce Developers
 
Df12 Performance Tuning
Df12 Performance TuningDf12 Performance Tuning
Df12 Performance Tuning
Stuart Bernstein
 
Order to cash flow cycle in order management
Order to cash flow cycle in order managementOrder to cash flow cycle in order management
Order to cash flow cycle in order management
venkatesh gurusamy
 
Purchasing setup steps
Purchasing setup stepsPurchasing setup steps
Purchasing setup steps
Rajak Khan
 
Oracle r12 multi org
Oracle r12 multi orgOracle r12 multi org
Oracle r12 multi org
gbalagee
 
Oracler12multiorg 121119014000-phpapp02
Oracler12multiorg 121119014000-phpapp02Oracler12multiorg 121119014000-phpapp02
Oracler12multiorg 121119014000-phpapp02
Sumit Thakur
 
purchasing-setups-in-oracle-r12_compress.pdf
purchasing-setups-in-oracle-r12_compress.pdfpurchasing-setups-in-oracle-r12_compress.pdf
purchasing-setups-in-oracle-r12_compress.pdf
Hesham Mahdy
 
Sap 20 overview_203_1_
Sap 20 overview_203_1_Sap 20 overview_203_1_
Sap 20 overview_203_1_
Rodolfo Ocampo
 
All About Multi Organization Access
All About Multi Organization AccessAll About Multi Organization Access
All About Multi Organization Access
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Order to cash flow cycle in order management in detail
Order to cash flow cycle in order management in detailOrder to cash flow cycle in order management in detail
Order to cash flow cycle in order management in detail
Shiv Om Mishra
 
Oracle R12 Apps - Purchasing Module Setup Steps
Oracle R12 Apps - Purchasing Module Setup Steps Oracle R12 Apps - Purchasing Module Setup Steps
Oracle R12 Apps - Purchasing Module Setup Steps
Boopathy CS
 
Operational Company creation in AX v1.3
Operational Company creation in AX v1.3Operational Company creation in AX v1.3
Operational Company creation in AX v1.3
Shakil Zaman
 
Check printing in_r12
Check printing in_r12Check printing in_r12
Check printing in_r12
Rajesh Khatri
 
237922323-Payroll-Setups-of-Oracle-HRMS-R12.pdf
237922323-Payroll-Setups-of-Oracle-HRMS-R12.pdf237922323-Payroll-Setups-of-Oracle-HRMS-R12.pdf
237922323-Payroll-Setups-of-Oracle-HRMS-R12.pdf
souad72
 
Performance Tuning for Visualforce and Apex
Performance Tuning for Visualforce and ApexPerformance Tuning for Visualforce and Apex
Performance Tuning for Visualforce and Apex
Salesforce Developers
 
Ad

More from Ahmed Elshayeb (20)

Personalization who i can restrict subinventory locator to store one item only
Personalization who i can restrict subinventory locator to store one item onlyPersonalization who i can restrict subinventory locator to store one item only
Personalization who i can restrict subinventory locator to store one item only
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Oracle Purchasing Internal Requisition
Oracle Purchasing Internal RequisitionOracle Purchasing Internal Requisition
Oracle Purchasing Internal Requisition
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization select all record from menu for manage buyer work load
Personalization select all record from menu for manage buyer work loadPersonalization select all record from menu for manage buyer work load
Personalization select all record from menu for manage buyer work load
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Sales Order needs to be automatically reserved, shipped & invoiced without an...
Sales Order needs to be automatically reserved, shipped & invoiced without an...Sales Order needs to be automatically reserved, shipped & invoiced without an...
Sales Order needs to be automatically reserved, shipped & invoiced without an...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Customized security roles
Customized security rolesCustomized security roles
Customized security roles
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Cascading dependencies
Cascading dependenciesCascading dependencies
Cascading dependencies
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Select all record from menu for matching item type in ap invoice personalization
Select all record from menu for matching item type in ap invoice personalizationSelect all record from menu for matching item type in ap invoice personalization
Select all record from menu for matching item type in ap invoice personalization
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Oracle Personalization Restrict Subinventory And Lot Number LOV Dependent On...
Oracle Personalization Restrict Subinventory And Lot Number LOV  Dependent On...Oracle Personalization Restrict Subinventory And Lot Number LOV  Dependent On...
Oracle Personalization Restrict Subinventory And Lot Number LOV Dependent On...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Select All Record From Tools Menu On Find Receipts For Matching Form
Select All Record From Tools Menu On Find Receipts For Matching FormSelect All Record From Tools Menu On Find Receipts For Matching Form
Select All Record From Tools Menu On Find Receipts For Matching Form
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Run report from menu Personalization كيفية تشغيل تقرير أو ما شابة من خلال شا...
Run report from menu  Personalization كيفية تشغيل تقرير أو ما شابة من خلال شا...Run report from menu  Personalization كيفية تشغيل تقرير أو ما شابة من خلال شا...
Run report from menu Personalization كيفية تشغيل تقرير أو ما شابة من خلال شا...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
How to install a font using xml publisher administrator
How to install a font using xml publisher administratorHow to install a font using xml publisher administrator
How to install a font using xml publisher administrator
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Oracle Order Management (Assign freight cost on shipping transaction)
Oracle Order Management (Assign freight cost on shipping transaction)Oracle Order Management (Assign freight cost on shipping transaction)
Oracle Order Management (Assign freight cost on shipping transaction)
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in interorganization transfer كي...
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in interorganization transfer كي...Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in interorganization transfer كي...
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in interorganization transfer كي...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalizations for control deliver to organizations in Purchase Requisition...
Personalizations for control deliver to organizations in Purchase Requisition...Personalizations for control deliver to organizations in Purchase Requisition...
Personalizations for control deliver to organizations in Purchase Requisition...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in miscellaneous transaction to ...
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in miscellaneous transaction to ...Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in miscellaneous transaction to ...
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in miscellaneous transaction to ...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Items Subinventory Assignment كيفية ربط مخزن معين بعدة أصناف بإستخدام API
Items Subinventory Assignment كيفية ربط مخزن معين بعدة أصناف بإستخدام APIItems Subinventory Assignment كيفية ربط مخزن معين بعدة أصناف بإستخدام API
Items Subinventory Assignment كيفية ربط مخزن معين بعدة أصناف بإستخدام API
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Assign Freight Cost On Shipping Transaction
Assign Freight Cost On Shipping TransactionAssign Freight Cost On Shipping Transaction
Assign Freight Cost On Shipping Transaction
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Procedure To Store Database Object Size And Number Of Rows In Custom Table
Procedure To Store Database Object Size And Number Of Rows In Custom TableProcedure To Store Database Object Size And Number Of Rows In Custom Table
Procedure To Store Database Object Size And Number Of Rows In Custom Table
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization to restrict values in customer name and number lov in sales o...
Personalization to restrict values in customer name and number lov in sales o...Personalization to restrict values in customer name and number lov in sales o...
Personalization to restrict values in customer name and number lov in sales o...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
How to remove disable and cancel shipment functionality in enter purchase or...
How to remove  disable and cancel shipment functionality in enter purchase or...How to remove  disable and cancel shipment functionality in enter purchase or...
How to remove disable and cancel shipment functionality in enter purchase or...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization who i can restrict subinventory locator to store one item only
Personalization who i can restrict subinventory locator to store one item onlyPersonalization who i can restrict subinventory locator to store one item only
Personalization who i can restrict subinventory locator to store one item only
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Oracle Purchasing Internal Requisition
Oracle Purchasing Internal RequisitionOracle Purchasing Internal Requisition
Oracle Purchasing Internal Requisition
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization select all record from menu for manage buyer work load
Personalization select all record from menu for manage buyer work loadPersonalization select all record from menu for manage buyer work load
Personalization select all record from menu for manage buyer work load
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Sales Order needs to be automatically reserved, shipped & invoiced without an...
Sales Order needs to be automatically reserved, shipped & invoiced without an...Sales Order needs to be automatically reserved, shipped & invoiced without an...
Sales Order needs to be automatically reserved, shipped & invoiced without an...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Customized security roles
Customized security rolesCustomized security roles
Customized security roles
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Cascading dependencies
Cascading dependenciesCascading dependencies
Cascading dependencies
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Select all record from menu for matching item type in ap invoice personalization
Select all record from menu for matching item type in ap invoice personalizationSelect all record from menu for matching item type in ap invoice personalization
Select all record from menu for matching item type in ap invoice personalization
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Oracle Personalization Restrict Subinventory And Lot Number LOV Dependent On...
Oracle Personalization Restrict Subinventory And Lot Number LOV  Dependent On...Oracle Personalization Restrict Subinventory And Lot Number LOV  Dependent On...
Oracle Personalization Restrict Subinventory And Lot Number LOV Dependent On...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Select All Record From Tools Menu On Find Receipts For Matching Form
Select All Record From Tools Menu On Find Receipts For Matching FormSelect All Record From Tools Menu On Find Receipts For Matching Form
Select All Record From Tools Menu On Find Receipts For Matching Form
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Run report from menu Personalization كيفية تشغيل تقرير أو ما شابة من خلال شا...
Run report from menu  Personalization كيفية تشغيل تقرير أو ما شابة من خلال شا...Run report from menu  Personalization كيفية تشغيل تقرير أو ما شابة من خلال شا...
Run report from menu Personalization كيفية تشغيل تقرير أو ما شابة من خلال شا...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
How to install a font using xml publisher administrator
How to install a font using xml publisher administratorHow to install a font using xml publisher administrator
How to install a font using xml publisher administrator
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Oracle Order Management (Assign freight cost on shipping transaction)
Oracle Order Management (Assign freight cost on shipping transaction)Oracle Order Management (Assign freight cost on shipping transaction)
Oracle Order Management (Assign freight cost on shipping transaction)
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in interorganization transfer كي...
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in interorganization transfer كي...Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in interorganization transfer كي...
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in interorganization transfer كي...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalizations for control deliver to organizations in Purchase Requisition...
Personalizations for control deliver to organizations in Purchase Requisition...Personalizations for control deliver to organizations in Purchase Requisition...
Personalizations for control deliver to organizations in Purchase Requisition...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in miscellaneous transaction to ...
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in miscellaneous transaction to ...Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in miscellaneous transaction to ...
Personalization to restrict subinventory lov in miscellaneous transaction to ...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Items Subinventory Assignment كيفية ربط مخزن معين بعدة أصناف بإستخدام API
Items Subinventory Assignment كيفية ربط مخزن معين بعدة أصناف بإستخدام APIItems Subinventory Assignment كيفية ربط مخزن معين بعدة أصناف بإستخدام API
Items Subinventory Assignment كيفية ربط مخزن معين بعدة أصناف بإستخدام API
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Assign Freight Cost On Shipping Transaction
Assign Freight Cost On Shipping TransactionAssign Freight Cost On Shipping Transaction
Assign Freight Cost On Shipping Transaction
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Procedure To Store Database Object Size And Number Of Rows In Custom Table
Procedure To Store Database Object Size And Number Of Rows In Custom TableProcedure To Store Database Object Size And Number Of Rows In Custom Table
Procedure To Store Database Object Size And Number Of Rows In Custom Table
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Personalization to restrict values in customer name and number lov in sales o...
Personalization to restrict values in customer name and number lov in sales o...Personalization to restrict values in customer name and number lov in sales o...
Personalization to restrict values in customer name and number lov in sales o...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
How to remove disable and cancel shipment functionality in enter purchase or...
How to remove  disable and cancel shipment functionality in enter purchase or...How to remove  disable and cancel shipment functionality in enter purchase or...
How to remove disable and cancel shipment functionality in enter purchase or...
Ahmed Elshayeb
 
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

NewBase 28 April 2025 Energy News issue - 1783 by Khaled Al Awadi_compressed...
NewBase 28 April 2025  Energy News issue - 1783 by Khaled Al Awadi_compressed...NewBase 28 April 2025  Energy News issue - 1783 by Khaled Al Awadi_compressed...
NewBase 28 April 2025 Energy News issue - 1783 by Khaled Al Awadi_compressed...
Khaled Al Awadi
 
EquariusAI analytics for business water risk
EquariusAI analytics for business water riskEquariusAI analytics for business water risk
EquariusAI analytics for business water risk
Peter Adriaens
 
Salesforce_Architecture_Diagramming_Workshop (1).pptx
Salesforce_Architecture_Diagramming_Workshop (1).pptxSalesforce_Architecture_Diagramming_Workshop (1).pptx
Salesforce_Architecture_Diagramming_Workshop (1).pptx
reinbauwens1
 
Alec Lawler - A Passion For Building Brand Awareness
Alec Lawler - A Passion For Building Brand AwarenessAlec Lawler - A Passion For Building Brand Awareness
Alec Lawler - A Passion For Building Brand Awareness
Alec Lawler
 
INTRODUCTION OF MANAGEMENT.pdf CA SUVIDHA CHAPLOT
INTRODUCTION OF MANAGEMENT.pdf CA SUVIDHA CHAPLOTINTRODUCTION OF MANAGEMENT.pdf CA SUVIDHA CHAPLOT
INTRODUCTION OF MANAGEMENT.pdf CA SUVIDHA CHAPLOT
CA Suvidha Chaplot
 
AlaskaSilver Corporate Presentation Apr 28 2025.pdf
AlaskaSilver Corporate Presentation Apr 28 2025.pdfAlaskaSilver Corporate Presentation Apr 28 2025.pdf
AlaskaSilver Corporate Presentation Apr 28 2025.pdf
Western Alaska Minerals Corp.
 
www.visualmedia.com digital markiting (1).pptx
www.visualmedia.com digital markiting (1).pptxwww.visualmedia.com digital markiting (1).pptx
www.visualmedia.com digital markiting (1).pptx
Davinder Singh
 
Harnessing Hyper-Localisation: A New Era in Retail Strategy
Harnessing Hyper-Localisation: A New Era in Retail StrategyHarnessing Hyper-Localisation: A New Era in Retail Strategy
Harnessing Hyper-Localisation: A New Era in Retail Strategy
RUPAL AGARWAL
 
intra-mart Accel series 2025 Spring updates-en.ppt
intra-mart Accel series 2025 Spring updates-en.pptintra-mart Accel series 2025 Spring updates-en.ppt
intra-mart Accel series 2025 Spring updates-en.ppt
NTTDATA INTRAMART
 
2_English_Vocabulary_In_Use_Pre-Intermediate_Cambridge_-_Fourth_Edition (1).pdf
2_English_Vocabulary_In_Use_Pre-Intermediate_Cambridge_-_Fourth_Edition (1).pdf2_English_Vocabulary_In_Use_Pre-Intermediate_Cambridge_-_Fourth_Edition (1).pdf
2_English_Vocabulary_In_Use_Pre-Intermediate_Cambridge_-_Fourth_Edition (1).pdf
ThiNgc22
 
From Dreams to Threads: The Story Behind The Chhapai
From Dreams to Threads: The Story Behind The ChhapaiFrom Dreams to Threads: The Story Behind The Chhapai
From Dreams to Threads: The Story Behind The Chhapai
The Chhapai
 
Influence of Career Development on Retention of Employees in Private Univers...
Influence of Career Development on Retention of  Employees in Private Univers...Influence of Career Development on Retention of  Employees in Private Univers...
Influence of Career Development on Retention of Employees in Private Univers...
publication11
 
Liberal Price To Buy Verified Wise Accounts In 2025.pdf
Liberal Price To Buy Verified Wise Accounts In 2025.pdfLiberal Price To Buy Verified Wise Accounts In 2025.pdf
Liberal Price To Buy Verified Wise Accounts In 2025.pdf
Topvasmm
 
Web Design Creating User-Friendly and Visually Engaging Websites - April 2025...
Web Design Creating User-Friendly and Visually Engaging Websites - April 2025...Web Design Creating User-Friendly and Visually Engaging Websites - April 2025...
Web Design Creating User-Friendly and Visually Engaging Websites - April 2025...
TheoRuby
 
Network Detection and Response (NDR): The Future of Intelligent Cybersecurity
Network Detection and Response (NDR): The Future of Intelligent CybersecurityNetwork Detection and Response (NDR): The Future of Intelligent Cybersecurity
Network Detection and Response (NDR): The Future of Intelligent Cybersecurity
GauriKale30
 
Strategic Enterprise Management - Unit I.pptx
Strategic Enterprise Management - Unit I.pptxStrategic Enterprise Management - Unit I.pptx
Strategic Enterprise Management - Unit I.pptx
PrekshyaRana
 
Brandon Flatley - A Skilled Musician
Brandon Flatley - A Skilled MusicianBrandon Flatley - A Skilled Musician
Brandon Flatley - A Skilled Musician
Brandon Flatley
 
Looking for Reliable BPO Project Providers?"
Looking for Reliable BPO Project Providers?"Looking for Reliable BPO Project Providers?"
Looking for Reliable BPO Project Providers?"
anujascentbpo
 
CGG Deck English - Apr 2025-edit (1).pptx
CGG Deck English - Apr 2025-edit (1).pptxCGG Deck English - Apr 2025-edit (1).pptx
CGG Deck English - Apr 2025-edit (1).pptx
China_Gold_International_Resources
 
Level Up Your Launch: Utilizing AI for Start-up Success
Level Up Your Launch: Utilizing AI for Start-up SuccessLevel Up Your Launch: Utilizing AI for Start-up Success
Level Up Your Launch: Utilizing AI for Start-up Success
Best Virtual Specialist
 
NewBase 28 April 2025 Energy News issue - 1783 by Khaled Al Awadi_compressed...
NewBase 28 April 2025  Energy News issue - 1783 by Khaled Al Awadi_compressed...NewBase 28 April 2025  Energy News issue - 1783 by Khaled Al Awadi_compressed...
NewBase 28 April 2025 Energy News issue - 1783 by Khaled Al Awadi_compressed...
Khaled Al Awadi
 
EquariusAI analytics for business water risk
EquariusAI analytics for business water riskEquariusAI analytics for business water risk
EquariusAI analytics for business water risk
Peter Adriaens
 
Salesforce_Architecture_Diagramming_Workshop (1).pptx
Salesforce_Architecture_Diagramming_Workshop (1).pptxSalesforce_Architecture_Diagramming_Workshop (1).pptx
Salesforce_Architecture_Diagramming_Workshop (1).pptx
reinbauwens1
 
Alec Lawler - A Passion For Building Brand Awareness
Alec Lawler - A Passion For Building Brand AwarenessAlec Lawler - A Passion For Building Brand Awareness
Alec Lawler - A Passion For Building Brand Awareness
Alec Lawler
 
INTRODUCTION OF MANAGEMENT.pdf CA SUVIDHA CHAPLOT
INTRODUCTION OF MANAGEMENT.pdf CA SUVIDHA CHAPLOTINTRODUCTION OF MANAGEMENT.pdf CA SUVIDHA CHAPLOT
INTRODUCTION OF MANAGEMENT.pdf CA SUVIDHA CHAPLOT
CA Suvidha Chaplot
 
www.visualmedia.com digital markiting (1).pptx
www.visualmedia.com digital markiting (1).pptxwww.visualmedia.com digital markiting (1).pptx
www.visualmedia.com digital markiting (1).pptx
Davinder Singh
 
Harnessing Hyper-Localisation: A New Era in Retail Strategy
Harnessing Hyper-Localisation: A New Era in Retail StrategyHarnessing Hyper-Localisation: A New Era in Retail Strategy
Harnessing Hyper-Localisation: A New Era in Retail Strategy
RUPAL AGARWAL
 
intra-mart Accel series 2025 Spring updates-en.ppt
intra-mart Accel series 2025 Spring updates-en.pptintra-mart Accel series 2025 Spring updates-en.ppt
intra-mart Accel series 2025 Spring updates-en.ppt
NTTDATA INTRAMART
 
2_English_Vocabulary_In_Use_Pre-Intermediate_Cambridge_-_Fourth_Edition (1).pdf
2_English_Vocabulary_In_Use_Pre-Intermediate_Cambridge_-_Fourth_Edition (1).pdf2_English_Vocabulary_In_Use_Pre-Intermediate_Cambridge_-_Fourth_Edition (1).pdf
2_English_Vocabulary_In_Use_Pre-Intermediate_Cambridge_-_Fourth_Edition (1).pdf
ThiNgc22
 
From Dreams to Threads: The Story Behind The Chhapai
From Dreams to Threads: The Story Behind The ChhapaiFrom Dreams to Threads: The Story Behind The Chhapai
From Dreams to Threads: The Story Behind The Chhapai
The Chhapai
 
Influence of Career Development on Retention of Employees in Private Univers...
Influence of Career Development on Retention of  Employees in Private Univers...Influence of Career Development on Retention of  Employees in Private Univers...
Influence of Career Development on Retention of Employees in Private Univers...
publication11
 
Liberal Price To Buy Verified Wise Accounts In 2025.pdf
Liberal Price To Buy Verified Wise Accounts In 2025.pdfLiberal Price To Buy Verified Wise Accounts In 2025.pdf
Liberal Price To Buy Verified Wise Accounts In 2025.pdf
Topvasmm
 
Web Design Creating User-Friendly and Visually Engaging Websites - April 2025...
Web Design Creating User-Friendly and Visually Engaging Websites - April 2025...Web Design Creating User-Friendly and Visually Engaging Websites - April 2025...
Web Design Creating User-Friendly and Visually Engaging Websites - April 2025...
TheoRuby
 
Network Detection and Response (NDR): The Future of Intelligent Cybersecurity
Network Detection and Response (NDR): The Future of Intelligent CybersecurityNetwork Detection and Response (NDR): The Future of Intelligent Cybersecurity
Network Detection and Response (NDR): The Future of Intelligent Cybersecurity
GauriKale30
 
Strategic Enterprise Management - Unit I.pptx
Strategic Enterprise Management - Unit I.pptxStrategic Enterprise Management - Unit I.pptx
Strategic Enterprise Management - Unit I.pptx
PrekshyaRana
 
Brandon Flatley - A Skilled Musician
Brandon Flatley - A Skilled MusicianBrandon Flatley - A Skilled Musician
Brandon Flatley - A Skilled Musician
Brandon Flatley
 
Looking for Reliable BPO Project Providers?"
Looking for Reliable BPO Project Providers?"Looking for Reliable BPO Project Providers?"
Looking for Reliable BPO Project Providers?"
anujascentbpo
 
Level Up Your Launch: Utilizing AI for Start-up Success
Level Up Your Launch: Utilizing AI for Start-up SuccessLevel Up Your Launch: Utilizing AI for Start-up Success
Level Up Your Launch: Utilizing AI for Start-up Success
Best Virtual Specialist
 

Elshayeb Oracle R12 Order Management

  • 1. Order Management Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved. Order to Cash Lifecycle Bank ReconciliationInvoice Pick Release Book Receipt Enter Receivables Ship Confirm Order Management AutoInvoice Cash Management Shipping Execution
  • 2. Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved. Objectives After completing this module, you should be able to: • Use some of the important Oracle Order Management flows: – Order to Cash Lifecycle with Standard Items – Order to Cash Lifecycle with PTO Items – Drop Shipments – Back-to-Back Orders – Sales Agreements – Order to Cash Lifecycle with Customer Acceptance Profile Option For New Responsibility TP:INV Transaction processing mode Profile Option Name Site Application Responsibility AP: Use Invoice Batch Controls No AR: Allow Update Of Existing Sales Credits Yes AR: Cash - Allow Actions Yes AR: Keep or Replace Existing Profile Amounts Keep AR: Mask Bank Account Numbers Mask - First Four Digits Visible AR: Use Statement, Dunning, and Late Charges Site Profiles No Default Country United States GL: Data Access Set Vision Operations (USA) HZ: Change Party Name Yes INV: Item Master Flexfield System Items OE: Item Validation Organization Vision Operations QP: Item Validation Organization Vision Operations Service: Default Operating Unit HR: Security Profile Vision Corporation HR:User Type HR with Payroll User MO: Default Operating Unit MO: Operating Unit MO: Security Profile Vision Corporation GL Ledger Name Vision Operations (USA) INV:Override Neg for Backflush No
  • 3. Run Request == Replicate Seed Data System Administrator> Requests
  • 4. https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?_afrLoop=356715836428752&parent=DOCUMENT&sou rceId=1101666.1&id=1067402.1&_afrWindowMode=0&_adf.ctrl-state=qwj6ljmuz_131 How to Setup a Remit-To Address in Release 12 Oracle Receivables (Doc ID 1101666.1) https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?_afrLoop=190500665481489&parent=DOCUMENT&sou rceId=1101855.1&id=1101666.1&_afrWindowMode=0&_adf.ctrl-state=k0mvht6dq_170
  • 5. Order Management Setup Stapes 1- Creating a User and Assigning Responsibilities Overview In this practice you will learn how to create a user and assign responsibilities to the user Login 1. Login to the database. User Name: operations Password: welcome 2. Select the System Administrator responsibility. 3. Create a User. (N) Security > User > Define Enter the following information: a. User: <your chosen login name> b. Password: <any pwd of your choice; you need to type it twice> c. Password Expiration: select None d. Effective Dates: enter dates 4. (M) File > Save. 5. Assign the following responsibilities to your user using (T) Direct Responsibilities: Responsibility Security Group Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA) Standard Inventory, Vision Operations (USA) Standard Receivables Manager Standard System Administrator Standard Purchasing Super User,Vision Operations Standard CRM Administrator, Vision Enterprises Standard Oracle Pricing Manager,Global Standard 6. (I) Save.
  • 6. 7. Log out of the operations username and login again using your newly created account. You will be prompted to change your password. Note: You can use this account for subsequent logins. 8. Once you have logged in again, select the System Administrator responsibility again and navigate to (N) Security > Responsibility > Define. 9. Query for the Order Management Super User Vision Operations USA responsibility (F11 and Ctrl-F11). 10. Please ensure that the appropriate menu (shown below) ADS_OM_SUPERMENU is assigned to the OM Super User responsibility. 11. Save your work and close the Responsibilities window.
  • 7. Guided Demonstration – Setting Up MOAC Notes: Enter the following enterprise structure: Top Org with 2 Operating Units. Both Operating Units have an Inventory Org each. Responsibility: HRMS Management (N) > HRMS Manager > Work Structures > Location 1. Enter the following details for some new locations:  Scope: Global  Name: enter a name starting with your intials (e.g. SH-OrgLocation)  Description: any description  (T) Address Details
  • 8. 2. Address flexfield – enter the following:  Address Line 1: 301 Patriots Road  City: San Diego  State: CA  Zip Code: 92130  County: San Diego  Country: United States 3. (B) OK 4. (N) Inventory > Setup > Organizations > Organizations 5. Click (B) New in the Find window and in the Organizations window, enter the location (SH-OrgLocation) that you created in the previous steps. 6. (T) Shipping Details:  Enter a Contact  The Ship-To Location should default as your location name  Ensure that the following boxes are checked: o Ship-To Site o Bill-To Site o Receiving Site o Internal Site o Office Site 7. (M) Save.
  • 9. 8. Similarly, create locations for your other orgs: OU1, OU2, InvOrg1, InvOrg2. Select the Global button for determining the scope of the location. Possible names that you could use for the locations:  SH-OU1-Location  SH-OU2-Location  SH-InvOrg1-Location  SH-InvOrg2-Location 9. (N) > HRMS Manager > Work Structures > Organization > Description 10. A Find window pops up prompting you to search for an org. Click (B) New to create a new org. 11. Create the following orgs in the Organization window one by one. Leave the Type field blank and enter the effective dates for the org. Org Name Location Internal or External Organization Classification SH-TOP SH-OrgLocation Internal GRE/Legal Entity SH-OU1 SH-OU1-Location Internal Operating Unit SH-OU2 SH-OU2-Location Internal Operating Unit SH-InvOrg1 SH-InvOrg1-Location Internal Inventory Organization SH-InvOrg2 SH-InvOrg2-Location Internal Inventory Organization When You Define OU Additional Information When You Define Inventory Organization
  • 10. 12. When you save your work, you will be prompted with a flexfield screen to display more information. Accept all defaults and enter USA for Legislation and USD for Currency. 13. (N) > HRMS Manager > Work Structures > Organization > Hierarchy 14. Enter a hierarchy for your organization structure. 15. In the Name field enter a Name for your hierarchy.
  • 11. 16. Save your work 17. Enter a Version Number and Start Date for the new hierarchy. Save Your Work 18. Using F11 and Ctrl-F11, query for your top organization in the Organization region > Name field. Please note that if your organization classification is a Business Group it will not appear in this search result list.
  • 12. 19. In the Subordinates sub-region, enter the operating units and click the Down arrow key to enter a subordinate (Inventory Org) for each operating unit. 20. Save your work and exit the window. 21. (N) > HRMS Manager > Security > Profile 22. Enter a Name and a Business Group. Business Group = Vision Corporation Name = SH-Security Profile 23. Select the Security Type as Secure organizations by organization hierarchy and/or organization list. 24. Enter your Organization Hierarchy name (you created it in the steps above). 25. Check the Include Top Organization box and the Exclude Business Groups box. 26. Enter Operating Unit in the Classification field and enter the name of your operating unit. You need to do this for both operating units that you have created.
  • 13. 27. Save your work. 28. Run the Security List Maintenance concurrent program. (M) View > Requests > Security List Maintenance with the following parameters:  Generate Lists For: All Security Profiles or One Named Security Profile 29. Responsibility: System Administrator 30. (N) > Profile > System 31. When you have created the security profile, you can assign the value to the MO: Security Profile option at the responsibility level. You can select the same security profile for multiple responsibilities.
  • 14. 32. Assign a default operating unit to the profile option MO: Default Operating Unit. (N) > Profile > System. 33. Run the Setup Validation Report to check if the setup steps have been performed successfully. Order Management Setup Validation Report (XML) Define Inventory Parameter For Inventory Organization Inventory : Setup-> Organizations -> Organization Item MasterOrganization You define items in one organization. To distinguish it from others, we call it the Item Master organization .Other organizations (child organizations) refer to the Item Master for item definition. After you define an item in the Item Master, you can assign it to any number of other organizations. There is no functional or technical difference between theItem Master organization and other organizations. However, for simplicity, Oracle recommends that you limit theItem Master to just an item definition organization. Oracle also recommends that you do not define multiple item masters. This can make item definition and maintenance confusing. In addition, multipleitem masters are distinct entities, with no relationship to each other. You cannot associate items in one item master organization with another item master organization. You cannot copy items across item master organizations. To create the item master: 1. Use theOrganization window to create theorganization you want to use as the Item Master. 2. Use theOrganization Parameters window to specify that organization as the Item Master. This is also where you assign child organizations to the Item Master. Theitem master organization uses itself as the Item Master.
  • 16. You can define and updatedefault inventory and costing parameters for your current organization in the following areas: 1. Inventory Parameters 2. Costing Information 3. Other Account Parameters 4. Revision, Lot, Serial, LPN Parameters 5. ATP, Pick, Item–Sourcing Parameters 6. Defining Inter–Organization Information 7. Defining Warehouse Parameters 1. Enter an organization code for which you want to set up the organization parameter. 2. Select an Item Masterorganization. Oracle Inventory only defines items in the Item Master organization of the organization from which you enter the Items window. 3. Select a workday calendar. This is required when Oracle Master Scheduling/MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning is installed. 4. Optionally, select a demand class. Demand classes segregate scheduled demand and production into groups, allowing you to track and consume thosegroups independently. Oracle Master Scheduling/MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning uses this demand class during forecast consumption, and shipment and production relief. 5. In the Move Order Timeout Periodfield, enter the number of days a move order requisition can wait for approval. The workflow approvalprocess sends a notification to the item planner when a move order requisition requires approval. After the first timeout period, if the recipient has not approved or rejected theorder, a reminder notice is sent. After the second timeout period, the order is automatically approved or rejected, depending on whether you select Approveautomatically or Reject automatically in the MoveOrder Timeout Action field. If you want to bypass themove order approvalprocess and automatically approvemove order requisitions, enter 0 days in the MoveOrder Timeout Period field and select Approveautomatically in the MoveOrder Timeout Action field. 6. Select a move order timeout action Approve automatically: After the second timeout period, move order requisitions are automatically approved. Select this option and set the Move Order Timeout Period to 0 if you want to bypass themove order approvalprocess and automatically approvemove order requisitions. Reject automatically: After the second timeout period, move order requisitions are automatically rejected. 7. Select a locatorcontrol option: None: Inventory transactions within this organization do not require locator information. Prespecified only: Inventory transactions within this organization require a valid, predefined locator for each item. Dynamic entry allowed: Inventory transactions within this organization require a locator for each item. You can choose a valid, predefined locator, or define a locator dynamically at thetime of transaction. Determined at subinventory level: Inventory transactions use locator control information that you define at the subinventory level.
  • 17.  Indicate whether to allownegative balances. Determines whether inventory transactions can drive the inventory balance of an item negative. Attention: If insufficient quantity on hand exists in a supply subinventory to satisfy backflush demand, Oracle Work in Process forces the supply subinventory balance negative, ignoring this option setting.  Auto delete allocation at Move Order cancellation  Indicate whether this organization is an Oracle Warehouse Management enabled organization. You can use WMS features such as LPNs, task management, warehouse execution rules and cost groups in this organization. Locator control must be enabled in order to enable WMS. Once this has been enabled and transactions have been entered in this organization, this box cannot be unchecked.  Indicate whether this organization is enabled for Quality inspection.  Indicate whether this organization is an Oracle Enterprise Asset Management enabled Organization.  Enter a total load weight and unit of measure for this organization.  Enter a total volume and unit of measure for this organization. 8 . Select a Default On-handMaterial Status tracking option. This step is optional. Attention:You cannot updatethis field for existing organizations. To enable this field, you must submit the Activate Onhand Level Material Status Tracking concurrent program. 9. Indicate whether locator aliases must be unique across the organization. 1. Costing Organization 2. Costing Method 3. Transferto GL Indicate whether all transactions are posted in detail to thegeneral ledger. Caution: Transferring detail transaction distributions to the general ledger increases general ledger posting times due to the number of records created. 4. Reverse Encumbrance Indicate whether to reverse encumbrance entry upon receipt in inventory. You normally select this option if you use encumbrances with Oracle Purchasing. 5. Optionally, enter a Cost Cutoff Date If you leave this field blank, all available transactions will be costed as usual. If you enter a date, all transactions prior to this date will be costed. All transactions on or later than this date will not be costed. For inter–organization transfers, a standard costing, receiving organization will not cost a receipt if the sending organization did not already cost the transaction. The default time is the first instant of the date. You can optionally choose another time. The standard cost updateprocess can be performed on thecost cutoff date. You can restart cost processing by changing the cutoff date to blank, or a future date. 6. Default Material Subelement
  • 18. For standard costing, select a material sub–element that this organization uses as a default when you define item costs. For average costing, the default material sub–element you select can be used for cost collection when Project Cost Collection Enabled is set. 7. Material Over headSubelement Optionally, select a Default Material Overhead Sub–Element from the list of values. During the Supply Chain Rollup process, when costs are merged from another organization, markup and shippingcosts will use this value. The supply chain cost rollup will complete successfully, regardless of whether this field is populated. If the Cost Rollup identifies an organization with a default material overhead sub–element not set up, a corresponding warning message will be printed in the log file. 8. Default Cost Group Indicate thedefault cost group for the organization. This will default into theDefault Cost Group field for each subinventory. If theWMS cost group rules engine fails to find a cost group, this cost group will be used. 9. Valuation Accounts You choose a default valuation account when you define organization parameters. Under standard costing, theseaccounts are defaulted when you define subinventories and can be overridden. Under average costing, these accounts (except for Expense) are used for subinventory transactions and cannot be updated. For a detailed discussion of cost elements. Material An asset account that tracks material cost. For average costing, this account holds your inventory and intransit values. Once you performtransactions, you cannot change this account. Material OverheadAn asset account that tracks material overhead cost. Resource An asset account that tracks resource cost. Overhead An asset account that tracks resource and outsideprocessing overheads. Outside processing An asset account that tracks outside processing cost. Expense Theexpense account used when tracking a non–asset item. Enter The Following Valuation Account Account Type Account Material 01-000-1410-0000-000 Material Overhead 01-000-1420-0000-000 Resource 01-000-1440-0000-000 Overhead 01-000-1430-0000-000 Outside processing 01-000-1450-0000-000 Expense 01-520-7530-0000-000 Revision, Lot, Serial, LPN Parameters Enter a starting revision to be thedefault for each new item. Lot Number 1. Select an option for lot number uniqueness. Across items: Enforce unique lot numbers for items across all organizations. None: Unique lot numbers are not required. 2. Select an option for lot number generation. User–defined: Enter user–defined lot numbers when you receive items. At organization level: Define the starting prefix and lot number information for items using the values you enter in thePrefix, Zero Pad Suffix, and Total Length fields. When you receive items, this information is used to automatically generate lot numbers for your items. At item level: Define thestarting lot number prefix and thestarting lot number when you define theitem. This information is used to generate a lot number for the item when it is received. 3. Indicate whether to add zeroes to right–justify the numeric portion of lot numbers (Zero Pad Suffix). 4. Optionally, select an alphanumeric lot number prefix to use for system–generated lot numbers when generation is at the organization level. 5. Optionally, define the maximum length for lot numbers. If you use Oracle Work in Process and you set theWIP parameter to default the lot number based on inventory rules, then WIP validates thelength of the lot number against the length you define in this field. Serial Number 1. Select an option for serial number uniqueness. Within inventory items: Enforce unique serial numbers for inventory items. Within organization: Enforce unique serial numbers within the current organization. Across organizations: Enforce unique serial numbers throughout all organizations.
  • 19. 2. Select an option for serial number generation. At organization level: Define the starting prefix and serial number information for items using the information you enter in the following fields of this window. At item level: Define thestarting serial number prefix and the starting serial number when you define the item. 3. Optionally, select an alphanumeric serial number prefix to use for system–generated serial numbers when generation is at theorganization level. 4. Optionally, enter a starting serial number to use for system–generated serial numbers. If serial number generation is at the organization level you must enter a starting serial number. 5. Indicate whether the systemwill suggest serial numbers as part of the move order line allocating process. If you do not select this option, you must manually enter theserial numbers in order to transact the move order.
  • 20. ATP, Pick, Item–Sourcing Parameters Select a default ATP rule. ATP rules define the options used to calculate the quantity of an item. If you are using Oracle Order Management, the default is the ATP rule for the Master organization. Picking Defaults Select a default picking rule. Picking rules define the priority that order management functions use to pick items. Notes:This rule will not be employed in a WMSenabled organization. TheWMS picking rules will be used. Enter a default subinventory picking order. This value indicates the priority with which you pick items from a subinventory, relative to another subinventory, in which a given item resides. The value you enter here displays as thedefault when you define a subinventory. Enter a default locator picking order. This value indicates the priority with which you pick items from a locator, relative to another locator, where a given item resides. Thevalue you enter here displays as the default when you define a locator. Check thePick Confirmation Requiredbox if you want your pickers to manually pick confirm. If you do not check the box, pick confirmation will occur automatically. Item-Sourcing Default Select a source type for item replenishment. Inventory:Replenish items internally from another subinventory in the same organization or another organization. Supplier: Replenish items externally, from a supplier you specify in Oracle Purchasing. None: No default source for item replenishment. Select the organization usedto replenish items. You must enter a value in this field if you selected Inventory in the Typefield. Select the subinventory usedto replenish items. You must enter a value in this field if you selected your current organization in the Organization field. You cannot enter a value in this field if you selected Supplier in the Typefield.
  • 21. Other Account Encumbrance: An expense account used to recognize thereservation of funds when a purchaseorder is approved. Inventory A/P Accrual : Theliability account that represents all inventory purchaseorder receipts not matched in Accounts Payable, such as the uninvoiced receipts account. Purchase Price Variance : Thevariance account used to record differences between purchaseorder price and standard cost. This account is not used with the average cost method. Invoice Price Variance : Thevariance account used to record differences between purchaseorder price and invoice price. This account is used by Accounts Payable to record invoice price variance. Cost of Goods Sold: Theprofit and loss (income statement) account that tracks the default cost of goods sold account. Sales: Theprofit and loss (income statement) account that tracks thedefault revenue account. Project Clearance Account: When performing miscellaneous issues to capital projects, theproject clearance account is used to post thedistributions. Average Cost Variance: Under average costing with negative quantity balances, this account represents theinventory valuation error caused by issuing your inventory before your receipts. Cost Variance Will Appear when you Issue Value from inventory greater than current inventory value Note: For standard costing, only the Purchase Price Variance, Inventory A/P Accrual, Invoice Price Variance, Expense, Sales and Cost of Goods Sold accounts are required. Theother accounts are used as defaults to speed your set up. Note: For average costing, only theMaterial, Average Cost Variance, Inventory A/P Accrual, Invoice Price Variance, Expense, Sales and Cost of Goods Sold accounts are required. Theother accounts are used as defaults or are not required. Enter The Following Other Account Information: Account Type Account Purchase Price Variance 01-520-5210-0000-000 Invoice Price Variance 01-520-5220-0000-000 Inventory AP Accrual 01-000-2220-0000-000 Encumbrance Sales 01-520-4110-0000-000 Cost of Goods Sold 01-450-5110-0000-000 Deferred COGS Account 01-450-5110-0000-000 Cost Variance Account 01-000-1410-0000-000
  • 22. Repeat This Steps Fro To Organization SH 1 And SH 2 Organization Access
  • 23. Receiving Options Account Type Account Receiving Inventory Account 01-000-1410-0000-000 Clearing Account 01-000-1410-0000-000 Subinventories Subinventories are unique physicalor logical separations of material inventory, such as raw inventory, finished goods, or defective material. All material within an organization resides in a subinventory. There are two types of subinventories within Warehouse Management, storage and receiving. Storage subinventories are intermediate or final put away locations for material. Material that resides in a storage subinventory app ears in on hand quantity, and is tracked by thesystem. Thesystemcan book orders against, and use manufacturing processes on material that resides in a storage subinventory. You must define at least one storage subinventory for your implementation. Receiving subinventories. Optionally, you can create receiving subinventories to track material in the receiving area. You use receiving subinventories when you want to track thematerial as soon as it enters thewarehouse before an operator puts it away. Receiving subinventories enable managers to see where the material resides as soon as it enters the warehouse. Material located in a receiving subinventory does not appear in on hand quantity, and thesystemcannot reserve the material. An operator can also only specify a receiving subinventory if they are using a mobile device to receive the material. Note: Operators cannot transfer material from a storage subinventory to a receiving subinventory.
  • 24. All material within an organization is held in a subinventory therefore, you must define at least one subinventory. Table : MTL_SECONDARY_INVENTORIES Header 1. Enter a unique alphanumeric name. 2. Indicate thematerial status of this subinventory, which controls the enabled transactions for all material in this subinventory. The status is not overridden by the status of any locator, lot or serial, within this subinventory. The statuses of thoseobjects will be considered when determining transactions that are not enabled. This field is used if you have Oracle Warehouse Management installed. 3. Indicate thedefault cost group for this subinventory. If the cost group assignment rules fail to identify a cost group for newly received material, this cost group will be assigned. This cost group will remain with the material, even through subinventory transfers, until you perform a cost group change transaction. This feature is available if you have Oracle Warehouse Management installed, and you are working with a WMS enabled organization. 4. Select the subinventory typefromthedrop down list. Theavailable choices are as follows: Storage: Designates the subinventory as a Storage subinventory. Receiving: Designates thesubinventory as a receiving subinventory, and links it to a receiving location. This subinventory typeis used only for receiving material. Material in this typeof subinventory cannot be on–hand, or reserved. Null: No subinventory designation Parameters Following are the important parameters that we must define 1. Quantity trackedIndicate whether each transaction for this subinventory updates thequantity on hand for the subinventory (Quantity Tracked). If you leave this option unchecked, on–hand balances are not maintained and you cannot check or updatethe Asset Inventory, Include in ATP, Reservable, or Nettable options. You can updatethis value only if there is no on–hand quantity, no pending transaction, or no uncosted transaction for the subinventory. 2. Asset Subinventory:Indicate whether to maintain thevalue of this subinventory on the balance sheet (Asset Subinventory). You can updatethis value only if there is no on–hand quantity for the subinventory. 3. Include in ATP: Indicate whether to include items in this subinventory in ATP calculations. 4. Depreciable: Indicate whether to designate items in this subinventory as depreciable. This data is needed to support depreciableand location information in the Subinventory Setup from the Oracle Network Logistics product. 5. Allow Reservation: Indicate whether to include this subinventory when you perform available–to–reserve calculations. 6 Nettable: Indicate whether theplanning process uses the on–hand balance of thesesubinventory items as available inventory (Nettable). 7. LPN Controlled: Indicate if material may be packed into an LPN in thesubinventory. If this is unchecked, all LPNs transacted into this subinventory will be automatically unpacked, and LPNs cannot be packed into this subinventory. This feature is available if you have Oracle Warehouse Management installed, and you are working with a WMS enabled organization
  • 25. 8. Select a type of locator control. You can select an option only if you selected locator control as Determined at subinventory level in the Locator Control field in the Organization Parameters window. You can only updatethis option if there is no on–hand quantity for the subinventory. None: Inventory transactions within this subinventory do not require locator information. Prespecified: Inventory transactions within this subinventory require you to enter a valid predefined locator for each item. Dynamicentry: Inventory transactions within this subinventory require you to enter a locator for each item. You may choose a valid predefined locator, or define a locator dynamically at thetime of transaction. Item level: Inventory transactions uselocator control information that you define at the item level. 9. Optionally, enter an inactive date for thesubinventory. 10. Enter a location for the subinventory. If the Subinventory typeis Receiving, this field is mandatory. Lead times Optionally, enter pre–processing, processing, and post–processinglead times for items in this subinventory. These lead times are used when you use min–max planning at the subinventory level. Sourcing Inventory:Replenish items internally, from another organization. Supplier: Replenish items externally, from a supplier you specify in Oracle Purchasing. Subinventory: Replenish items internally, from another subinventory in the same inventory organization.Navigate to the Subinventories Summary folder window. Choose New. The Subinventories window appears. subinventory account information Enter the general ledger accounts. The default accounts are thosedefined for the organization in the Organization Parameters window. If y ou are using average costing, you may enter thevaluation accounts, but they are not used. Average costing uses only the Expense and Encumbrance accounts. If you use standard costing, and Oracle Bills of Material is installed, all asset accounts are required. If you use standard costing, and Oracle Bills of Materialis not installed, you are only required to enter the Materialand MaterialOverhead accounts. Define Subinventory ForOrg SH1 Subinventory Code Description Status Type Locator Control Quantity Tracked SH FGI Finished Goods Inventory Active Storage Item Level Selected SH Stage Stage Active Storage Dynamic Entry Selected SH Main Main Stores Active Storage Dynamic Entry Selected
  • 26. Setting OM System Parameters Define a territory in Oracle Order Management Overview In this practice you will learn how to define a territory in Oracle Order Management Login Login to the database using the User Name and Password supplied by your instructor. Choose Responsibility Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility is selected. Define a Territory (N) Receivables> Transactions > AutoInvoice > Territories 1. Name: XX-Territory. 2. Description: Territory for XX. 3. Flexfield (list of values):  Area:APAC  Country: Your choice  Region: Your choice 4. Active: Enable 5. Effective Dates:  Start: Today’s date  End: Leave blank 6. Save.
  • 27. Setting OM System Parameters Parameters in the Oracle Order Management Parameters window can be functionally grouped,and you can define controls as easily as defining profile options. OM System Parameters allows you to define new parameters and setting up the values for the parameters using different sources like SQL and constant values. This is step five of the Order Management Setup Steps, page 2-3. Defining Parameters Create and define parameters using the following attributes: • Parameter Code: Unique code for the new parameter • Name: Name of the parameter • Description: Description of the parameter • Category: Category the parameter belongs to. The category is controlled using the lookup type "OM_PARAMETER_CATEGORY." To create a new category, add the lookup code in the lookup type "OM_PARAMETER_CATEGORY" and then enter that lookup type in your parameter definition window. • Value Set: Value Set associated as the source of values.The possible value sets can have validation types of NONE or TABLE. For seeded parameters please make sure that you use a value set that begins with "ONT." • Open Orders Check: Provides a control to allow or restrict changes to the parameter value once it is set for a given operating unit. • Enabled: Controls the availability of the parameter. For seeded parameters this field is active for internal users. • Seeded: Indicates whether the parameter is seeded or user-defined. This is only active for internal users. To define Order Management system parameters: 1. Navigate to the Define OM System Parameters window. Order Management > Setup > SystemParameters > Define Warning:You cannot have any open orders when performing updates to Order Management Parameters. If open orders are found, a warning message displays. Select the OK button to ignore the Warning or select the Cancel button to not commit changes. 2. Enter a unique code in the Parameter Code field. 3. Enter a name for the parameter in the Name field. 4. Enter a description of the parameter in the Description field. 5. Select the category from the Category field that the parameter belongs to. This is controlled with a lookup. To create a new category,add the lookup code in the lookup type "OM_PARAMETER_CATEGORY" and then enter that lookup type in the parameter definition window. 6. In the Value Set field, enter a value set associated as the source of values. The possible value sets can have validation types of NONE or TABLE. For seeded parameters, use a value set that begins with "ONT." 7. Select a value from the Open Orders Check field. This provides a control to allow or restrict changes to the parameter value once it is set for a given operating unit. Available options are Allow, Give error, or Give warning. 8. When the Enabled box is selected the parameter is available to use. For seeded parameters this field is active only for internal users. 9. The Seeded check box indicates if the parameter is a seeded parameter or a user defined parameter. This is active only for internal users. 10. Save your changes and click OK. To cancel without saving any changes,click Cancel.
  • 28. Setting Parameter Values You can set up parameter values at the operating unit level by specifying following attributes: • Operating Unit: Select the operating unit from the available list of values for which parameter values are to be set. • Category: Select the category. On selection all the parameters for the selected category display. • Show All: Check this to see all the parameters of all the categories. • Parameter: Displays the name of the parameter for the selected category. • Value: Parameter value of the parameter. This field shows a list of values based on value set attached with the parameter definition. • Description: Displays description of the parameter currently selected. Note: If Multi-Org Access Control is enabled, you can manage System Parameter values across all Operating Units accessible to you via your MO: Security Profile. To set up Order Management system parameter values: 1. Navigate to the Define OM System Parameters window. Order Management > Setup > System Parameters > Values 2. Select the operating unit from the available list of values. The Operating Unit field displays yourdefault Operating Unit, however you can pick a different one from the list of values to manage parameters in it. 3. The Category field identifies the category to which the parameter belongs. The available parameters and their currently selected values display. Select the Show All check box to display all the parameters for all categories. 4. In the value field next to the parameter you want to set,select a value. The Value field displays a list of values available for each respective parameter. The Description field describes the currently selected parameter. 5. Save your changes and click OK. To cancel without saving any changes,click Cancel.
  • 29. Generic Parameters Audit Trail The audit trail parameter is used in order to capture audit history at either order entry or booking. You can select either Disable, Enable when Order is Entered or Enable when Order is Booked. The default is Null - Disabled. When the default is set, then you can also capture cancellation history of entered orders. Previously, the processing constraint used to maintain a history of cancellations of orders when Require Reason action was selected. Customer Relationships The default value is Single Customer. Customer Relationship Parameter Setting Examples The table below lists sample customers, their sites and business purposes. Sample Customers, Sites, and Business Purpose Customer Site Bill-to Ship-to Deliver-to A X Yes Yes Yes B Y Yes No No B Z No Yes Yes C W Yes Yes Yes The table below lists the relationships that exist between these sample customers. The data within the table will be used to describe how each of the profile option settings controlthe list of values for available for order data fields when placing an order. RelationshipsBetween Sample Customers Customer RelatedTo Customer Bill To Relationship Flag ShipTo RelationshipFlag A None B A Yes Yes C None If the parameter for Customer Relationships is set to Single, using the data within the second table, when placing an order for Customer A: • The eligible Bill To, Ship To, and Deliver To location is Customer A, Site X If the parameter for Customer Relationships is set to Related Customers, using the data within the second table, when placing an order for Customer A: • The eligible Ship To and Deliver To locations are Customer A, Site X and Customer B, Site Z • The eligible Bill To locations are Customer A, Site X and Customer B, Site Y If the parameter for Customer Relationships is set to All Customers, when placing an order for Customer A: • The eligible Ship To, and Deliver To locations are all customers and all of their ship-to sites and deliver-to sites respectively, within the first table. • The eligible Bill To locations are all customers and all of their Bill To sites within the first table. Item Validation Organization In Order Management, the Item Validation Organization parameter indicates the Oracle Manufacturing organization against which items are validated. Organization is synonymous with warehouse in Order Management. You set the Item Validation Organization parameter in the Parameters window, and can only set the value to the operating unit associated with your current sign on responsibility. You must also define all transactable items in this organization. Note: Before setting this parameter, you should first setup values for: HR: Security Profile HR: Business Group profile options.Valid inventory master organizations will be available based on values of HRMS profile settings.
  • 30. Invoicing Parameters Over Shipment Invoice Basis This parameter determines whether to invoice the ordered quantity or the shipped quantity for an over shipment. This parameter can be overridden for the parameter specific to customers or customer sites by setting a value in the Customer window. Default value is Shipped.
  • 31. Receivables (AR) Required Steps For Order Management The objective of this document is to provide step by step instructions on the setups required in Receivables (AR) in order for you to create simple transactions. If You Have Oracle Support Account You Can See That In URL: https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?_afrLoop=356715836428752&parent=DOCUMENT&sourceId=110 1666.1&id=1067402.1&_afrWindowMode=0&_adf.ctrl-state=qwj6ljmuz_131 1. Define Common Accounts Receivable Configuration Common Accounts configuration pertains to the Accounting Flexfield setup. This is done in the General Ledger (GL) application. The assumption of this case study is that you have already defined your accounting flexfield segments, and can create and complete manual transactions using the Transaction Workbench. If you need more information on how to set up your Accounting Flexfield, refer to the Oracle General Ledger Implementation Guide, page 1-33.
  • 32. Manage Receivables System Options Realized Gains Account 01-740-7830-0000-000 Realized Losses Account 01-740-7840-0000-000 Tax Account 01-000-2520-0000-000 Unallocated Revenue Account Cross Currency Rounding Account 01-740-7826-0000-000 Header Rounding Account 01-740-7827-0000-000 The settings in System Options that impact AutoInvoice are in the Trans and Customers tab. The following screenshot shows recommended settings for fields in the 'AutoInvoice' Section. Also highlighted is the Grouping rule we defined earlier. Log file message level = 10 provides the most detailed debug messages, and is useful when you are debugging or troubleshooting. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Setup > System > System Options
  • 33. To see how to Manage Receivable System Options, please refer to Note 1068052.1, How To Manage Receivables System Options For AutoInvoice. Additional information on the Tuning Segments, refer to the Oracle Receivables User's Guide, page 2-210. 14. Manage Receivables Accounting Periods Open or close periods in your accounting calendar to control the recording of accounting information for these periods. Since the objective of AutoInvoice is to create new transactions, the goal is to have these transactions impact open GL periods. Ensure that the GL_DATE value you provide in the next task is within an open period. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Control > Accounting > Open/Close periods
  • 34. To see how to Manage Receivable Accounting Periods, please refer to Note 1069057.1, How To Manage Receivables Accounting Periods. 2. Manage Receivables Descriptive Flexfields Oracle Receivables uses the transaction flexfields to uniquely identify each transaction line that is imported though AutoInvoice. AutoInvoice is capable of using information from four types of transaction flexfields:  Line Transaction Flexfield  Link-to Transaction Flexfield  Reference Transaction Flexfield  Invoice Transaction Flexfield More details on each of these types is available in Note 1068344.1, Setting Up Receivables Descriptive Flexfields. For this case study, you need to setup a Line Transaction Flexfield as shown below.
  • 35. Click on the segments button to create the following rows. The values in the field Column are not shown completely, they are INTERFACE_LINE_ATTRIBUTE1 and INTERFACE_LINE_ATTRIBUTE2 respectively. 3. Manage Receivables Profile Options Several Profile options impact the behavior of AutoInvoice.
  • 36. Please refer to Note 1069294.1, Setting Up System Profile Options For AutoInvoice for details. 4. Manage Transaction Types The data you insert into the interface table will be associated to a particular transaction type. Create an invoice transaction type which will be used when we insert data into the Interface table. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Setup > Transactions > Transaction Types Name Account Receivable Account 01-000-1210-0000-000 Revenue Account 01-000-4504-0000-000 Unbilled Receivable Account 01-000-1210-0000-000 Clearing Account 01-000-1222-0000-000 Tax Account 01-000-2510-0000-000 Freight Account 01-000-7220-0000-000 Unearned Revenue Acct. 01-000-1210-0000-000 Note:If you also want to run a test case to import a Credit memo, create a Credit Memo transaction type as shown below, otherwise you don't need to create a Credit Memo transaction type.
  • 37. To see more details on how to create new transaction types, please refer to Note 1067797.1, Setting Up Transaction Types In Receivables. Please note that if you want to use the AutoAccounting functionality (next task), and some of the segments of the Account are sourced from the transaction type, then you must define GL accounts in the Accounts tab.
  • 38. 5. Manage AutoAccounting Rules AutoAccounting enables you to create default accounts for revenue, receivable, freight, tax, unearned revenue, unbilled receivable, late charges, bills receivables accounts, and AutoInvoice clearing (suspense) accounts. In the following screen, the source for the third segment is 'Transaction Types'. When the default accounting is generated for the Receivable account, the accounting flexfield will pull the third segment from the Receivables account defined for the transaction type. If we cross-reference this to the screenshot from the previous task, the value for the third segment is 1210, coming from 01-000-1210-0000-000 defined for Receivables account. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Setup > Transactions > AutoAccounting During AutoInvoice, you are interfacing data with the intention of creating complete transactions automatically. Hence, you are advised to complete the setup for AutoAccounting so that AutoInvoice can determine the GL accounts to use for your interfaced transactions, and process them completely without errors and without the need for manual intervention. To see how to manage and setup AutoAccounting, please refer to Note 1069052.1, Setting Up AutoAccounting Rules In Receivables.
  • 39. 6. Manage AutoInvoice Line Ordering Rules If you want the data in your interface table to be created in a particular sort order, define Line Ordering Rules. The following screenshot shows a Line Ordering Rule, that references the same fields we used in the Line transaction flexfield defined in Task 2 above. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Setup > Transactions > AutoInvoice > Line Ordering Rules To see how to manage and setup AutoInvoice Line Ordering Rules, please refer to Note 1067965.1, How to Manage Line Ordering When Using Autoinvoice To Import. 7. Manage AutoInvoice Grouping Rules Grouping rules specify attributes that must be identical for lines to be created as one transaction. Grouping rules always include the mandatory attributes, and to this is added optional attributes that you define in your grouping rule. The following screenshot shows a Grouping Rule that uses the Line Ordering Rule defined in Task 6 above. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Setup > Transactions > AutoInvoice > Grouping Rules
  • 40. To see how to manage and setup AutoInvoice Grouping Rules, please refer to Note 1067993.1, How To Use Grouping Rules With AutoInvoice. 8. Manage Receivables Payment Terms Payment terms let you define the due date to be calculated for transactions. When you interface data, it is mandatory to provide either a TERM_ID or a TERM_NAME in the RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL table (depending on how you have set up your transaction batch source). Although there is a defaulting mechanism for payment term when entering transactions manually in the form, this is defaulting is not available during AutoInvoice, because it would significantly slow down the performance of the process. The following screenshot shows a Payment term we will use in our interface data. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Setup > Transactions > Payment Terms
  • 41. To see how to manage and setup Payment Terms, please refer to Note 1069049.1, How To Define Transaction Payment Terms In Receivables.
  • 42. 9. Manage Transaction Sources Batch sources define default information such as transaction type and automatic numbering. There are two types available: Manual and Imported. AutoInvoice requires a batch of type Imported. The following screenshot shows a Transaction source we will use to interface data via AutoInvoice. Highlighted below is the transaction type we created earlier, here we are associating it to this Imported Batch Source. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Setup > Transactions > Sources Following screenshots show the sub-tab for the Transaction Sources form: The AutoInvoice Options tab highlights the Grouping rule created earlier. The setup indicates this batch will group data as specified in this grouping rule.
  • 43. The following screenshots show the rest of the sub-tabs of this form, including Customer, Accounting, Salescredit and other information. You need to define whether the data you will interface provides the Value or the ID so that AutoInvoice can validate the data. Customer Information tab: Accounting Information tab:
  • 44. Other Information tab: Sales Credit Validation tab: To see how to manage and setup Transaction Sources, please refer to Note 1068008.1, Creating Transaction Sources Used For AutoInvoice.
  • 45. 10. Manage Receipt Classes and Methods To default a payment method to the transactions you interface via AutoInvoice, you need to define a Receipt Class and Method for your transaction to use. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Setup > Receipts > Receipt Classes To see how to manage and setup Receipt Classes and Methods, please refer to Note 1071284.1, Setting Up Receipt Class And Method For AutoInvoice.
  • 46. 11. Manage Receivables Customer Profile Classes Oracle Receivables provides a profile class DEFAULT. If necessary, you can define different customer profile classes to categorize your customers. You can associate Customer Profile classes to customer records you create later. By using a profile class you default certain attributes/fields into the customer records to make customer maintenance more efficient. The following screenshot defines a new customer profile class, to which we associate the Payment Term from Task 8 and the grouping rule from Task 7. Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation: Customers > Profile Classes To see how to manage and setup Customer Profile Classes, please refer to Note 1071218.1, How To Define Customer Profile Classes For AutoInvoice.
  • 47. Remit-To Address Setup 1. Setting Up a Remit-To Address Define remit-to addresses to let your customers know where to send payment for their invoices. Receivables uses the addresses that you define in the Remit To Addresses window to provide default remit-to information when you enter transactions. Note: Receivables does not provide default remit-to information when you enter credit memos. A. Define System Options and Profile Options Responsibility:Receivables Manager Navigation:Setup > System > System Options Select the Miscellaneous Tab and enter values for the following: If you check the Print Remit-To Address box in the System Options window, Receivables prints the remit-to address that you define here on your dunning letters and statements. The width and height (in characters) of your customer's remit-to address in your printed dunning letters is 8 characters (height) by 30 characters (width) Responsibility:System Administrator Navigation: Profile > System You can only enter information in the alternate name field when defining a Remit-to Address if the profile option AR: Customers - Enter Alternate Fields is Yes. Receivables also uses the alternate name to sort customer names in certain reports if the profile option AR: Sort Customer Reports by Alternate Fields is Yes. B. Navigate to the Remit-To Address Form Responsibility: Receivables Manager Navigation:Setup > Print > Remit To Address > Create Remit-To Address
  • 48. C. Select the Country Default: Country defaults from the System Options Window Impact: If you have implemented flexible address formats and the country you enter has an address style assigned to it, Receivables opens a window in which you can enter address information in the style most appropriate for that country.
  • 49. Notice in the screenshot below, we change the country to Canada and the "Province" field is now displayed. d. Enter an Alternate Name Enter an Alternate Name for this address (optional). This field is used in some reports. See step 1a for more information. The 'Alternate Address Name' is not rendered by default in Release 12. Users can use Forms Personalization to personalize the address block by setting the Render flag to True for Alternate Address Name field. See Bug BUG:8571973 e. Enter a remit-to Address Note: The release 12 Receivables Implementation Guide incorrectly refers to an obsolete PostalCode field on the Receivables System Options. This setup is no longer used in Release 12. Internal Documentation Bug 9715200 will correct this in a future version of the manual. Verify that your Remit-To address is associated with the proper Operating Unit Once you have completed the address,select "Apply"
  • 50. f. Re-Query the Remit-To Address After you apply and save you will be returned ot the Remit-To Address search window. Enter the country name and select Go. g. Identify the Customer Addresses that will use this Remit-To Select the radio button next to the address created in step 1e and then select "Create" Optionally Enter a State and/or range of Postal Codes for each country. You can define multiple assignments for a remit-to address that has the same country or state, but different postal code ranges. In the example below we first created a range that covers the western United States. Next we created a range for the same Remit-To address that covers the entire country of Canada. In this scenario one address could be used for all remittance in both areas. 1st Range:
  • 52. After adding both ranges the Remit-To will show as follows: 2. Assigning a Default Remit-To Address Define default remit-to addresses to ensure that:  Receivables is able to provide a default remit-to address when you enter transactions  AutoInvoice will not reject invoices because it is not able to determine a remit-to address You can only have one default remit-to address for each country or Country + State combination. In the example from step 1g, the address is the Default Remit-To address for Canada. If we wished to also make this the default Remit-To address for the United States we could create a third combination and fill in only the country of United States. Note: It is a best practice to set up a default remit-to address even if you do not anticipate requiring this value. If for example you have a default remit-to for the United States,you can also define alternate remit-to address to be used with different zip-code ranges which take priority over the default due to their more granular definitions. 3. Troubleshooting Refer to Note 1101855.1 Troubleshooting Receivables Remit To Address Errors
  • 53. Perform Oracle Inventory Setup Perform all setup steps required for Oracle Inventory,then perform the following. • Set up internal locations for Human Resources for your Inventory Organizations • Map inventory organizations to internal locations Organizations Define at least one of the following: • Item validation organization • Organization as inventory source for internal orders • Organization for receiving purposes,if you use drop ship orders Your item validation organization can be the same as your inventory source or your logical receiving organization, but you cannot use one organization for all three purposes. Note: If you change the location of your organization, after delivery details have been created, then the new location will not take effect as the ship from location until new transactions are created. Each delivery detail needs to be updated with the new location if the ship from location needs to be changed on current deliv eries. Pick Confirmation The Pick Confirmation Required check box affects the behavior of the picking process in Shipping Execution. Navigate: Oracle Shipping > Set up > Organization Parameters > ATP, Picking, Item- Sourcing tab. If the Pick Confirmation Required check box is selected, then the systemrequires you to navigate to Inventory forms or Pick Confirm using a mobile device to perform a manual pick confirmation of the move order that was generated as a result of the Pick Release process. The pick confirmation process acknowledges the transfer of the item being picked from its source location to the default staging location. If the Pick Confirmation Required check box is deselected (the default) for new installs, the systemperforms the pick confirmation process automatically based on sourcing rules set up in Oracle Inventory. Organization Parameters Window - ATP, Pick, Item-Sourcing Tab Staging Subinventory Create at least one staging subinventory for each organization. Move orders record the movement of pick released material to staging subinventories.Staging subinventories should be Reservable .
  • 54. Defining Shipping Document Sets You can group related shipping documents and other reports in a set that can be printed at pick release or ship confirm. You can include a variety of shipping documents in a set such as a Bill of Lading and Packing Slip Report and determine the print sequence. Shipping Execution provides three pre-defined (seeded) document sets: • All Pick Release documents: You can set the default Pick Release Document Set in the Pick Release tab of the Shipping Parameters window • Ship Confirm documents: You can set the default in the Document Set field of the ship confirm window • Pack Slip only (at ship confirm): You can set the default in the Document Set field of the ship confirm window Note: You can create additional document sets based on your business needs. To define document sets: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Document Sets window. Shipping DocumentSets Window 2. Enter a Name and Description for the new document set. 3. Select the Usage for the document set: • Pick Release: For printing at pick release • Ship Confirm: For printing at ship confirm 4. Optionally, enter the Effective Dates for the document set. 5. The default Printing Method is parallel. This submits the reports for printing separately, each with a different request ID. If one of the reports in the document set fails to print, the otherreports will print. 6. Enter a Sequence number. 7. Select Shipping Execution as the Application. 8. Select the Report Name to be included in the document set. Selecting a report with PDF Output enables you to select a layout template. If you select a report without PDF Output,then the Layout Template field is not updatable. 9. If you selected a report with PDF Output, then use the list of vales to select a Layout Template for your report. Oracle XML Publisher enables you to extend various Oracle Shipping Execution reports to suit your business needs. The following list represents those seeded Oracle Shipping Execution report layout templates within Oracle XML Publisher: • Bill of Lading • Commercial Invoice • Mailing Label • MasterBill of Lading • Packing Slip • Pick Slip • Vehicle Load Sheet Summary 10. Enter the number of Copies that you want. If number of copies for a document is specified in the document set form, then copy count is used.If it is not specified (that is, it is null), then the profile option Concurrent: Report Copies is used. If the profile option Concurrent: Report Copies is also null, then 1 copy is printed. 11. Save your work. To Edit document sets: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Document Sets window. 2. Query an existing document set. 3. Edit the existing Effective Dates, Sequence of documents,or documents contained within the document set. 4. Save your work.
  • 55. Defining Pick Slip Grouping Rules You can create grouping rules to organize how picking lines for released sales orders are grouped on to pick slips. For example, if you select Delivery as a grouping criteria, all picking lines for the same delivery are grouped togetheron a pick slip. If there are multiple deliveries, multiple pick slips are created. You can also define yourgrouping criteria further by selecting additional grouping attributes. For example, if you select Delivery and Carrier as grouping criteria, picking lines for the same delivery and carrier are grouped togetheron a pick slip.
  • 56. Defining Release Sequence Rules You can define release sequence rules to specify the order in which eligible picking lines are allocated to Inventory during pick release. You can release the picking lines by: • Order number • Outstanding Invoice Value • Scheduled Date • Departure Date • Shipment Priority You can assign a priority level to one or more attributes with 1 being the highest priority and 5 being the lowest. You can also define whether you want the picking lines released in ascending or descending order. For example, if you select the Ascending button for Order, picking lines are released by ascending order number--Order 1 is released first, then Order 2, Order 3, and so on. If the Descending button is selected,the picking lines are released by descending Order number from highest to lowest --Order 4 is released first, then Order 3, Order 2, and Order 1. Note: You can define either the Outstanding Invoice Value attribute or the Order attribute for the release sequence rule, but you c annot select both for the same rule. No two attributes can be given the same priority. You can edit existing release sequence rules, but you cannot change the name of an existing release sequence rule. To define release sequence rules: 1. Navigate to the Release Sequence Rules window. Release Sequence Rules Window 2. In the Rule field, enter a name for your rule. 3. Enter a Description. 4. Enter the Effective Dates for the rule. 5. Within the Release Priority region, specify a Priority (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 where 1 is the highest priority and 5 is the lowest) for one or all of the following attributes: • Order Number: Releases picking lines based on order number. If you define a priority for the Order Number attribute, you cannot define a priority for the Outstanding Invoice Value attribute. • Outstanding Invoice Value: Releases picking lines based on the outstanding invoice value. If you define a priority for the Outstanding Invoice Value attribute, you cannot define a priority for the Order Number attribute. • Scheduled Date: Releases picking lines based on scheduled date. • Departure Date: Releases picking lines based on departure date. • Shipment Priority: Releases picking lines based on shipment priority. 6. Select the Ascending orDescending toggle next to each attribute. If you select the Ascending toggle next to the Scheduled Date attribute, for example, the picking lines with the earliest Scheduled Date are released first. If you select the Descending toggle, the picking lines with the most recent Scheduled Date are released last. 7. Save your work.
  • 57. Defining Release Rules Define the order in which picking lines are allocated to inventory. You can create default pick release rules that are applied at pick release in the Release Sales Orders window. Each rule can be set up with its own set of unique pick release parameters depending on the pick release criteria required. When pick release is run, the pick release is performed based on the parameters set up in the selected pick release rule. For example, you can create a specific rule that pick releases only backordered lines. Note: Although you can also enter the pick release criteria at pick release time without creating a rule, creating a rule is more efficient if you frequently run the same pick release. Also, note that it is required when releasing using SRS or when using the Auto Pick Pack and Ship features. To define release rules: 1. Navigate to the Release Rules window. Release Rules Window - Order Tab 2. Enter a Rule name and the Effective dates. Within the Order tab, select one or more of the following criteria for your query. Select only the criteria that you want for the pick release: 3. Select the Orders and Order Types that you want included in the pick release: • Unreleased: The rule is applied to unreleased lines. • All: The rule applies to all lines not pick released. • Backordered: The rule applies only to backordered lines. 4. Enter the Order Number. 5. Select the Ship Set. 6. Optionally, select the Prior Reservations Only check box if you only want to pick release already reserved quantity for lines. This is allowed only for the allocation method of Inventory Only. 7. Select the Destination Type: • Region • Zone • Ship-To Location 8. Select the Customer and the Ship-To location for the customer. 9. Within the Item region select a Category Set, Category, and Item Number 10. Select the range of Scheduled Ship Dates and/or Requested Dates. You can indicate whether you want the systemto look at the scheduled ship date or the requested date. You can then enter the number of days in the past or future, as well as the time, relative to current systemdate that you want included in the release criteria. This means that it is possible to set up a desired release window in terms of number of days rather than only static dates. If your organization has a calendar assigned,then the release rule will honornon-working days (for example, Saturday, Sunday)to select delivery lines for pick release. If the rule shown were applied to Organization V1 and that Organization has Saturday and Sunday as non-working days on their organization calendar, then the following would occur: If pick release is run on Thursday,the delivery lines for Thursday,Friday, Monday, and Tuesday (systemdate + 3 working days) are selected for pick release. A negative value may be used in the Days field to include past dates which enables backordered lines to be considered for pick release. Alternatively, you can create a pick release rule using static dates by selecting the options Start On and End On in the Scheduled Ship Dates region and the Requested Dates region.
  • 58. Release Rules Window - Shipping Tab 11. Select the Ship Method to pick release by a certain ship method. 12. Select the Shipment Priority, and Ship From location. 13. Enable the Include Assigned Lines box if you want to include assigned lines in the pick release. 14. Select a Document Set to be printed during pick release. 15. Select a Release Sequence Rule if required. 16. From the list of values, select either Yes or No to Autocreate Deliveries. 17. If you selected Yes to Autocreate Deliveries, then in the Autocreate Delivery Criteria field select either Across Orders or Within an Order. 18. Select either Yes or No in the Auto Pick Confirm field. Auto pick confirm is not allowed for the allocation method of Cross Dock. 19. From the AutopackDeliveries list of values, select No if you do not want to utilize autopacking, select Yes to enable autopacking, or select Auto Pack Masterif you want to utilize autopacking the item into its primary container and additionally automatically packing the primary container into a defined master container. You must setup container-item relationships to support the functionality for auto pack or auto pack master. See: Oracle Inventory User's Guide. 20. Select a Ship Confirm Rule, if you want to utilize auto ship confirming. 21. Select Yes or No to Append Deliveries (consolidate delivery lines.) Note: The appending limit must be defined as a value otherthan Do Not Append in the Shipping Parameters window before you can append deliveries within a release rule. Additional prerequisites for setting Append Deliveries flag include: • Oracle Transportation Planning is not installed • Organization must be specified • Autocreate Delivery Criteria must be Across Orders • Autocreate Delivery must be Yes • Auto Pick Confirm must be No
  • 59. Release Rules Window - Inventory Tab 22. Select the Warehouse (organization code) and default Pick Slip Grouping Rule for grouping the pick slips. 23. Optionally, enter a specific Subinventory for your rule. This value determines which lines are considered for picking based on the subinventory name assigned to the sales order line. 24. If Oracle Project Manufacturing is installed, specify a Project and Task for your rule. 25. If Oracle Warehouse Management is installed, then you can select an Allocation Method to be used: • Inventory Only: (Default) If you select this allocation method, then pick release allocates inventory materials only. • Cross Dock Only: If you select this allocation method, then pick release allocates cross docking materials only. • Prioritize Inventory: If you select this allocation method, then pick release checks for inventory availability before all othersources, then allocates material from othersources if needed. • Prioritize Cross Dock: If you select this allocation method, then pick release checks for material available for cross docking from all other sources otherthan Inventory, then allocates materials from Inventory if needed. The Allocation Method field cannot be updated unless Oracle Warehouse Management is installed. See: Oracle Warehouse Management User's Guide and Oracle Warehouse Management Implementation Guide for more information. 26. If Oracle Warehouse Management is installed and if you selected Cross Dock Only or Prioritize Cross Dock in the Allocation Method, then select a Cross Dock Criteria. Enables a rule to be named, which limits the cross docking criteria. This field is disabled if the organization is not WMS Enabled, or the Allocation Method is Inventory Only. See: Oracle Warehouse Management User's Guide and Oracle Warehouse Management Implementation Guide for more information. 27. Select Auto Allocate if you want to allocate the order lines automatically at pick release. If Auto Allocate is selected, order lines are automatically allocated and reserved. If not selected,you must allocate the lines and create reservations using the Inventory Transact Move Orders window. 28. Select either Yes or No to Enable Plan Tasks if Oracle Warehouse Management is installed and you choose to utilize the Plan Tasks feature. 29. Enter a Task Priority. 30. In the Pick From region, select the Subinventory and Locator of the default picking location. Pick From Subinventory determines where the line items are picked/allocated from. 31. In the Default Stage region, select the Subinventory and Locator of the default staging area. 32. Save your work.
  • 60. Shipping Parameters You define the default values for basic shipping information such as units of measurement, pick release rules, weight and volume calculations, and delivery grouping rules. Shipping parameters are organization specific. The parameters are arranged into the following tabbed regions in the Shipping Parameters window: • General: You can define the shipping weight and volume unit of measure classes, criteria for calculating percent fill basis like weight, volume, or quantity, and shipping events at which export compliance screening will be performed. (Screening is only applicable if Oracle Shipping Execution is integrated with a third party ITM partner application). • Pick Release: You can define Release Sequence rules and Pick Slip Grouping rules, limiting the number of lines in the pick slip, printing behavior, document set to be printed at pick release, default staging subinventory,locator,and decision points to autocreate delivery, auto allocation, enforcing ship sets and ship models, and task planning at the time of pick release. • Shipping Transaction: You can define document sets to be printed at the time of ship confirm, ship confirm rule, auto-pack options,goods dispatched (COGS) account and whether to enforce packing in containers. • Delivery: You can define the attributes forming the basis of delivery grouping for the organization. You can also specify if delivery grouping is limited to lines within the same sales order or across orders. For consolidation of deliveries, you specify the event at which appending will stop for the appending of delivery lines to the delivery stops. • Transportation: If Oracle Transportation Execution is installed, you specify whether or not to Apply Routing Rules automatically, define Freight Payment and Audit related parameters, and define Freight Rating parameters. Defining Shipping Parameters On the General tab, you define general Shipping Execution parameters such as weight and volume unit of measure (UOM) class parameters, criteria for percent fill basis calculations, International Trade Management (ITM) screening generation, and Oracle Workflow settings. To define shipping parameters: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Parameters window. Shipping Parameters Window - General Tab 2. Select the General tab. 3. Select the default Weight UOM Class from the valid UOM classes. 4. Select the Volume UOM Class from the valid UOM classes. Note: The seeded values shown in the UOM class are created in Oracle Inventory. 5. Select the default unit of measure for the Percent Fill Basis of a container. You can select Weight, Volume, or Quantity. Percent Fill Basis is used to determine if containers have met their minimum fill percentage requirements. If you select Weight or Volume, the calculation uses the item and container physical attributes in Oracle Inventory. If you select Quantity, the calculation uses the Container Load Relationship details to determine the maximum number of items that will fit into the container. 6. In the Export Compliance Screening field, select one of the following: (Requires ITM Partnership Integration) • Not Required: Use this option if ITM Partner Integration is not used • At Delivery Creation: Use this option if Export Compliance Screening is to be enforced when the delivery is created • At Ship Confirm: Use this option if Export Compliance Screening is to be enforced at ship confirm • At Delivery Creation and Ship Confirm: Use this option if Export Compliance Screening is to be enforced when the delivery is created and at ship confirm 7. Enable Workflows by selecting whether you want Delivery workflows or None of the workflows enabled. Specific tasks and output are enabled through the use of customized business objects.For example, the workflow can be configured so that specific users receive a notification email when an overship or backorder occurs. 8. Depending on yourbusiness needs,select the Raise Business Events check box. Business events are optional. Individual Business Events can be enabled via the Business Events definition window.
  • 61. See: Shipping Execution Workflows and Oracle Workflow User's Guide. 9. Save your work. Defining Pick Release Parameters You can define default picking criteria that is used at pick release. You can also select the default settings for auto-detailing and auto-creating deliveries. To define pick release parameters: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Parameters window. Shipping Parameters Window - Pick Release Tab 2. Select the Pick Release tab. 3. Select the Release Sequence Rule. During pick release, this rule determines the order in which delivery lines are allocated to inventory. It appears as the default release sequence rule in the Release Sales Order window. Note: It is recommended that you select the most frequently used release sequence rule; although it becomes the default, you can change it any time you launch pick release. 4. Select the Pick Slip Grouping Rule. This rule dictates how the released delivery lines are grouped on pick slips and how the pick slip number is generated by pick release. It appears as the default pick slip grouping rule in the Release Sales Order form. Note: It is recommended that you select the most frequently used pick slip grouping rule; although it becomes the default, you can change it any time you launch pick release. 5. From the Print Pick Slip list of values, select when you want the pick slips printed. • If you select At the End, pick slips will be generated when the pick release process has completed. • If you select Immediate, you specify the number of lines per pick slip. Wheneverthis threshold is reached, a pick slip document is submitted for printing. Every time the threshold is reached, another pick slip document will be submitted for printing. This continues until all lines meeting the release criteria for a batch have been pick released. For example, if there are 20 customdefined lines, all pick slips belonging to these 20 lines are printed in a single pick slip report. The number of pick slips printed depends on the pick slip grouping rule and the customdefined lines. This choice has more impact on systemresources.
  • 62. 6. Enter the Number of Pick Slip Lines to print on each pick slip. If Print Pick Slip is Immediate, enter the maximum Number of Pick Slip Lines to print on each pick slip. For example, if Number of Pick Slip Lines is 25 and pick release selects 40 lines, it prints two pick slips, one with 25 lines and the other with 15 lines. 7. Select the Default Pick Release Document set to be printed at pick release. 8. Select the Default Stage Subinventory. The process of Pick Confirmation transfers move orders to this staging subinventory.The list of values displays all subinventories in the organization. Staging subinventories should be reservable. 9. Select the Default Stage Locator. Move orders move material to this locator. The list of values displays all locators in the Default Stage Subinventory. 10. Select the Autocreate Deliveries option to specify yourpreference for delivery creation. You can override this preference at pick release execution. • Selected: Pick release automatically creates deliveries based on the delivery grouping rules and assigns delivery lines to them. When pick releasing, the Autocreate Deliveries check box in the pick release form defaults to this parameter setting if you enter a warehouse. If you do not enter a warehouse, pick release uses this parameter setting from the organization of the warehouse on each sales order line. • Cleared: Pick release does not automatically create deliveries. Note: There are six descriptive flex field defaulting types supported when auto-creating deliveries: SQL Statement (Not having references to:$FLEX$.<VALUE_SET_NAME> and:block.field),Constant, Current Date, Current Time, Previous Segment, and Profile Option value. 11. Select Auto Allocate to automatically allocate delivery lines at pick release. • Selected: Pick release creates move orders and automatically allocates them. • Cleared: Pick release creates move orders. You must manually allocate the order lines using the Inventory Transact Move Orders window. 12. Select Enforce Ship Sets and Ship Models to enforce that all lines in the Ship Set or Ship Model are released together. • If you do not select the Enforce Ship Sets and Ship Model's check box, delivery lines for ship sets and ship models are not validated during picking even if the ship set is specified on order lines. Note: Depending on your business needs,you must set up the Enforce Ship Sets and Ship Models parameter for each warehouse. • If you select the Enforce Ship Sets and Ship Models check box, delivery lines for ship sets and ship models are validated during picking. All order lines in ship sets are either released completely or auto-backordered during pick release. If any portion is not available, then all lines in the entire ship set are backordered. When you create the order, you must specify if you want to retain (or not retain) the ship set for the back-ordered lines. You can do this in the Sales Order window in Order Management. Note: Ship sets for non-transactable delivery lines are validated during ship confirm. However, a ship set for non-transactable delivery lines is not validated during pick release because the item(s) are not picked from inventory. 13. Select Plan Tasks if Oracle Warehouse Management is enabled within your organization. See: Oracle Warehouse Management User's Guide. Defining Shipping Transaction Parameters You can define parameters for yourshipping transactions such as default ship confirm document set, ship confirm rule, auto -pack options, goods dispatched account and whetherto enforce packing into containers. To define shipping transaction parameters: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Parameters window. Shipping Parameters Window - Shipping Transaction Tab 2. Select the Shipping Transaction tab. 3. Select the Default Ship Confirm Document Set that prints as part of the ship confirm process. The list of values displays the valid delivery document sets.See: Defining Shipping Document Sets .
  • 63. 4. Select a Ship Confirm Rule that your organization will use as a default for auto ship confirming. Note: If you want to define a default ship confirm rule, then you must select Ship All as your option when you define your ship confirm rules in the Ship Confirm window. 5. Select your AutopackOptions. From the list of values, select either No, Yes, or AutopackMaster. • No: Autopack will not be enabled • Yes: Autopackwill be enabled and delivery line items will be systematically packed into LPNs based on container-item relationships • AutopackMaster: Autopackwill be enabled and delivery line items will be systematically packed into LPNs based on container-item relationships and the container will then be packed into another container, such as a freight container for transport. You can autopack delivery lines for a delivery into LPNs (containers). When you autopacka delivery, the delivery lines are grouped togetherby shared attributes such as the Ship To location, and are packed into LPNs based on the delivery grouping rules. Once a delivery is packed, the delivery line information cannot be changed until you unpackthe delivery. The weight and volume is calculated at ship confirm automatically. 6. Select a default Goods Dispatched Account. Use the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) account for this organization. The sales order issue transaction uses this account if the Oracle Order Management workflow cannot determine one. 7. Select a value for Enforce Packing in Containers: • If you select Yes, ship confirm displays a warning when confirming a delivery or trip with unpacked delivery line items. You can bypass the warning and complete the shipment. • If you select No, ship confirm does not display the warning. 8. Save your work. Defining Delivery Parameters Delivery parameters enable you to define how to group delivery lines for a delivery. The mandatory default attributes are Ship From Location and Ship To Location; however, you can select additional optional grouping parameters that include: • Customer • Freight Terms • FOB Code • Intermediate Ship To location • Ship Method The delivery attributes determine how delivery lines are grouped into deliveries when auto-creating deliveries. For example, if the grouping attribute Customer is selected,the delivery lines are grouped into deliveries by customer: for example, deliveries for Customer A are grouped into Delivery A, deliveries for Customer B are grouped into Delivery B. You can select more than one grouping attribute to refine your grouping criteria further: for example, if you select Customer and Ship Method as grouping criteria, delivery lines with the same customer and carrier criteria are grouped into deliveries. If each optional grouping attribute is checked, the delivery's corresponding field cannot be updated if delivery lines are assigned to the delivery. This ensures that the delivery lines' grouping criteria is not broken by a different attribute value: for example, if someone tries to select a different ship method. If each optional grouping attribute is unchecked,its field in the delivery record can be updated until the ship confirm stage. For example, if you want to change the Ship Method in the delivery and do not need to enforce it as a grouping attribute, you can deselect Ship Method. Do not change these options if you have deliveries that are not ship confirmed. To define delivery parameters: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Parameters window. Shipping Parameters Window - Delivery Tab 2. Select the Delivery tab.
  • 64. 3. Choose the attributes for grouping the delivery lines. 4. Optionally, select Autocreate Delivery Criteria if you enabled the Autocreate Delivery option on the Pick Release tab. • Select Within An Order to autocreate deliveries whose lines all belong to the same sales order and match on the Delivery Grouping Attributes. • Select Across Orders to autocreate deliveries across orders. All selected delivery lines that match on the Delivery Grouping Attributes are eligible to appear on one delivery. 5. Select an Appending Limit. The appending limit enables you to indicate the point at which you want to stop the systemfrom adding lines to a delivery (the point that ends the ability to merge deliveries). You must set the appending limit to a value other than Do Not Append in order to use the Append Deliveries option within Release Rules and the Process Deliveries SRS. The Appending Limits include: • Do Not Append • Start of Staging • End of Staging • Start of Packing (Oracle WMS enabled organizations only) • Start of Shipping (Oracle WMS enabled organizations only) 6. Save your work.
  • 65. Ship Confirm Rule (N) Shipping > Setup > Ship Confirm Rules You use the Ship Confirm Rules window to define the Ship Confirm Rules based on your business needs. Within the Ship Confirm Rules window, there are several options,which are covered next. Ship Confirm Rule Ship Options The Ship Options region of the Ship Confirm Rules window enables you to specify the default action to take when ship confirming. It also enables you to choose what to do when the Action is Ship Entered Quantities and the quantities are unspecified. The following describes the default actions: • Action: - Ship Entered Quantities: This action enables you to ship the quantities entered at ship confirm time. - Ship All: This action enables you to ship all lines, regardless of the actual quantity. Ship All is required if you choose t o use a default ship confirm rule. - Backorder All: This actions enables you to backorder all lines, regardless of the quantity. - Cycle Count All: This action enables you to cycle count all line items, regardless of the quantity. • Unspecified Quantities (only available when the Action is Ship Entered Quantities): - Ship: Ship confirms the quantity of items specified in the Shipped Quantity field and treats blank values as full quantity (shipped quantity = requested quantity). - Backorder: Ship confirms the quantity of items specified in the Shipped Quantity field and treats blank quantities as full backorders (backorder quantity = requested quantity). - Stage: Leaves the unspecified delivery line quantity as staged and removes it from the delivery. Note: If a non-zero Stage Quantity exists on a line, it is split from the line and unassigned from the delivery. If the Create Delivery for Staged Quantities is enabled, all staged delivery lines are grouped togetherin a new delivery. Cycle Count: Ship confirms the quantity of items specified in the Shipped Quantity field, treats blank quantities as full backorders (backorder quantity = requested quantity),and transfers the backorder reservation to cycle counting.
  • 66. Calculating Available to Promise (ATP) Oracle Order Management enables you to advise your customers when items will be available based on current on-hand inventory plus the expected incoming supply and outgoing demand. Calculating ATP requires as input the item, the order quantity,the order quant ity unit of measure and the request date. In general the userwill enter the item and order quantity on every order line. The request date and order quantity unit of measure may be defaulted or manually entered. ATP may be calculated for a single line, a group of lines, or a complete order. The results for a single line are displayed in a single column in a small window. The results for multi-line ATP are displayed in a table. In both formats, the following information is displayed: • Warehouse:Either the warehouse on the order line or, if the warehouse on the order line was blank, the best warehouse as selected by the sourcing rules. • Request Date Qty: The quantity that is available on the requested date • Available: The order quantity, if ATP was successful.The available quantity,which will be less than the order quantity,if ATP was not successful. • On-hand Qty: The quantity that is currently in the warehouse. • Qty Reservable: The on-hand quantity minus the quantity that is already reserved to other sources ofdemand. • Request Date: The date on the order line. • Available date: The date that the ordered quantity will be available. It could be the request date if the order quantity is available on the request date, or it might be a future date when the order quantity will be available • Error Message:Any error that occurred in calculating ATP. For example, if the Check ATP flag for the item is not selected then this field will display ATP not applicable.
  • 67. • Substitute Item: If the requested item is not available and the requested quantity for a defined substitute is available, the substitute itemwill be displayed. An additional tab, showing the availability of the substitute item, is also displayed.displayed for single items. A multi-line window displays availability information for sets and models. Clicking the Global Availability button located at the bottom of the Availability window opens the ATP window that has the list of warehouses where the item is enabled. You can select the warehouses for which you want to see the availability, and the systemwill return the availability in all the selected warehouses. The ATP Details window can also be opened from the Availability window by pressing the ATP Details Button. The ATP Details window displays how the results were derived. ATP is calculated automatically during scheduling, and may be calculated manually by clicking Availability on the Line Items tab of the Sales Order window. There are several steps required for ATP calculations. If you are using ASCP, supply/demand is set up at the plan level. See the Oracle ASCP Implementation Manual. Global Order Promising will only use the infinite time fence specified on the ATP rule. If you are not using ASCP, ATP rules must be defined to determine the sources of supply and demand which are included in the calculation. The ATP rules must be associated with items and/orinventory organizations. Also, the data collection program must be run. There is a requirement for ATP calculations to be very fast; some customer service representatives will need to give this information to customers on the phone. However, considering all the possible sources of supply and demand for an ATP calculation can be very complex. Therefore, a c oncurrent process known as data collection must be run to summarize the supply and demand picture. This program is part of the Oracle Advanced Planning and Scheduling application. The ATP calculation is then performed on the summary tables. For details about setting up ATP rules and running the data collection program, see the setup section of this document.
  • 68. Guided Demonstration - Creating an ATP Rule Responsibility: Inventory, Vision Operations USA 1. Navigate to the ATP Rules window.  (N) Inventory Setup > Rules > Available to Promise 2. Enter the following information: Name: ATP_Backward Description: ATP Backward consumption Backward Selected Past Due Days Demand: 10 Infinite Supply: User-defined time fence Aggregate Order Promising Time Fence: User Defined 3. Select the following Demand Sources: Sales Orders Internal Orders Discrete WIP Repetitive WIP 4. Select the following Supply Sources: Discrete WIP Repetitive WIP Internal Reqs Supplier Reqa Purchase Orders On-hand Available Interorg Transfers 5. (M) File > Save 6. (M) File > Close Form
  • 69. Guided Demonstration – Creating a Salesperson Responsibility: CRM Administrator Find Employee Number (B) Search
  • 70. (B) Start Import (B) Save Resource (B) Details
  • 71. Responsibility: Order ManagementSuper User, Vision Operations (USA) Find an Employee 1. (N) Order Management > Setup > Sales > Salespersons 2. Within the Find Resources window, Resource region, enter the following in the Name field: Ahmed Elshayeb, (B) Find. Ahmed Elshayeb, employee number 10242 is displayed in the Resource Search Results window.
  • 73. Oracle Pricing Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved. Overview of Pricing in the Order to Cash Process Bank Reconciliation Invoice Pick Release Book Orders Receiving payment Enter and Price Orders Receivables Ship Confirm Order Management AutoInvoice Cash Management Shipping Execution Pricing (F&SC)
  • 74. Practice - Creating a Price List Overview Adding items to a price list is a prerequisite for pricing items in a sales order. In this practice,you will create a new price list (header) and then add price list lines that define the items and their list prices. Price lists relate a selling price to a product. Price lists consist of price list lines, pricing attributes, and a secondary price list and include information such as the price list name, effective dates,currency, rounding factor, and shipping defaults such as freight terms and freight carrier. You may default a price list based on any one of the following: • An agreement • The sold-to organization • The ship-to organization • The bill-to organization • Order type You can create multiple price lists. Alternatively, you may enter a specific price list on the order header or at the order line level. For each price list, you can also assign a secondary price list, which the pricing engine searches when it cannot find an item on the primary list. Only one secondary price list will be searched for each primary list. Creating General Information for the Price List Responsibility = Oracle Pricing Manager, Vision Operations Change Profile Option : QP: Item Validation Organization = Your Master Organization = SH MST 1. Navigate to the Price Lists window.  (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup 2. Enter the following price list header information: Name = SH-Price List 1 (XX is a unique identifier) Active = Selected Description = Base price list Currency = USD Round To = -2 (defaults) Effective Dates = Use today’s date for start date. Leave end date blank. Freight Terms/Freight Carrier = Leave blank Payment Terms = 30 Net 3. (B) Save.
  • 75. Creating Price List Lines 4. Enter the first price list line using the following data: In the Product region: Product Context = Item Product Attribute = Item Number Product Value = XX-Palm Pilot Product Description = Defaults UOM = EA (Each) Primary UOM = Deselected Line Type = Price List Line Application Method = Unit Price Value = $700 Start Date = Current date Precedence = Defaults 5. Add the following items, one item at a time, to the price list. Product Context Product Attribute Product Value UOM Primary UOM Value Item Item Number XX-Pager Ea. Deselected $700 Item Item Number XX- Phone Ea. Deselected $500 Item Item Number XX-Phone Card Ea. Deselected $100 Item Item Number AS54888 Ea. Deselected $1599 Item Item Number AS92888 Ea. Deselected $2300 6. (I) Save.
  • 76. Practice - Copying a Price List Overview You can quickly create a new price list by copying an existing price list. Only active price list lines (those with an effective end date later than the current date) can be copied. In this practice you will copy your existing price list named XX-Price List 1. Copying a Price List Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations 1. Navigate to the Copy Price List window.  (N) Oracle Management Super User > Pricing > Price Lists > Copy Price List 2. Enter the following Copy From information: Price List = XX-Price List 1 Retain Effective Dates = Selected 3. Enter the following information in the Copy To region: Price List = SH-Price List 2 Description = Adjusted by 10% Global check box = Selected 4. Submit the request 5. Confirm that the request completed normally.
  • 77.  (M) View > Requests 6. Repeat the preceding steps to copy the following price list from XX-Price List 1: Copy To: Price List Name Description SH-Price List 2 Manually updating a price list. 7. Query your XX-Price Lists to confirm that they were copied successfully.
  • 78. Practice - Adjusting a Price List Overview You can quickly adjust list prices (such as a 10 percent increase) for selected items or all items on a price list using the Adjust Price List window. In this practice, you will increase all prices on XX-Price List 2 by 10 percent. Adjusting a Price List Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations 1. Navigate to the Adjust Price List window.  (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Adjust Price List 2. Enter the following information: Price List = SH-Price List 2 Adjust By = Percent Value = 10 3. (B) Submit. 4. Verify that the request completed normally.  (M) View > Requests
  • 79. 5. Query your XX-Price List 2 to confirm that the prices were adjusted successfully.  (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup
  • 81. Practice - Adding an Item Category to a Price List Overview In this practice, you will learn how to add an item category to a price list. Creating a Price List Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations 1. Navigate to the Price Lists window.  (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup 2. Enter the following information in the price list header using (all remaining information defaults in): Name = SH-Price List 4 Description = Accessories price list. Round To = -2 (defaults from multicurrency list) Effective Date = Today’s Date 3. (I) Save. Adding an Item Category to a Price List 4. Navigate to the Add Items to Price List window.  (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Add Items to Price List 5. Enter the following data: Price List = SH-Price List 4 Item Category Set = Inv.Items Item Category = ELECTRONIC.ACCESSORY Item Status = Active Set List Price Equal to Cost From check box = Selected Inventory Organization = SH1
  • 82. 6. (B) Submit. 7. Record the Request ID number: __________. 8. Review the request status to ensure the concurrent request completed successfully.  (M) View > Requests
  • 83. 9. Find your price list SH-Price List 4.  (N) Pricing > Price Lists > Price List Setup  (I) Find > SH-Price List 4 10. Verify that many items have been added to your price list, including the item cost from M1 inventory organization.
  • 84. Practice - Setting Up Transaction Types Define Order Management transaction types to classify sales documents. As an example, for each order type, you can assign a default price list, defaulting rules, order lines, return lines, line types,workflow assignments,payment terms, and freight terms. This is step twenty-two of the Order Management Setup Steps, page 2-3. Note: You must first define any OM Line Transaction Types so that they can be assigned when defining your OM Order transaction types. Overview In this practice, you will learn how to set up a transaction type with associated line type and assign the workflow process.  Create a line transaction type for the order lines  Create an order transaction type for the order header  Assign line flows  Create a document sequence  Assign the document sequence to the order type Creating a Line Transaction Type Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) 1. Navigate to the Transaction Types window:  (N) Setup > Transaction Types > Define 2. Create a new transaction type by entering the following information: Operating Unit = Vision Operations Transaction Type = SH-StandardLine Description = Standard Line Transaction Type Sales Document Type = Sales Order Order Category = Order Transaction Type Code = Line Effective Dates – From = Today’s date 3. (I) Save. 4. Create a new transaction type by entering the following information: Operating Unit = Vision Operations Transaction Type = SH-StandardReturn Description = Standard Return Line Sales Document Type = Sales Order Order Category = Return Transaction Type Code = Line Effective Dates – From = Today’s date
  • 85. Creating an Order Transaction Type for the Order Header 4. (I) New. Create the order header transaction type. Operating Unit = Vision Operations Transaction Type = SH-Mixed Description = Mixed Order Transaction Type Sales Document Type = Sales Order In the Sales Document Type field, select Sales Agreement or Sales Order from the list of values (for Quotes, Returns and Releases,choose Sales Order). Order Category = Mixed Transaction Type Code = ORDER Fulfillment Flow = Order Flow - Generic . Note: Selecting a fulfillment flow assigns the workflow to the order header when the sales order is created. This enables you to save the sales order. Effective Dates – From = Today’s date 5. (T) Main. Default Return Line Type = SH-StandardReturn Default Order Line Type = SH-StandardLine 6. (T) Shipping. Shipping Method = DHL Freight Terms = Prepaid 7. (T) Finance. Accounting Rule = Immediate Invoice Source = ORDER ENTRY Receivable Transaction Type = Inv-Hdwre-East COGS Account = 01-740-7610-0000-000 Currency = USD
  • 86. 8. (B) Assign Line Flows. Enter the following information: Order Type = SH-StandardOrder Line Type = SH-StandardLine , SH-StandardReturn Process Name = Line Flow - Generic Start Date = Today’s date Order Type = SH-StandardOrder Line Type = SH-StandardReturn Process Name = Line Flow - Return with Receipt Only, No Credit Start Date = Today’s date 9. (B) OK. Exit the Transaction Types window.
  • 87. Tax Calculation You can calculate tax by selecting a Tax Date to base yourtax rates on, choosing the tax, the tax schedule,requested,promise, and system dates.You cannot set a value for the Tax Date field within the Sales Order window, but you can decide to change or update th e existing seeded Defaulting Rule for Tax Date. Tax calculation in Order Management can occur at one of the following events: • Entry • Booking • Invoicing Tax calculation for the above events can only be controlled at the order level (not at the order line level). You specify when to calculate the tax for an entire order when you create Order Types within the Order Management Transaction Types window. The default value for Tax Calculation Event Code is null. Null Tax Calculation Event is same as Entry. For payment verification purposes (to include tax in the total authorized amount), specify Entry or Booking as your Tax Event. Note: The Copy Order functionality does not copy tax amounts; tax is recalculated for the new order. For return orders (referenced or non-referenced returns), tax calculation occurs at the tax event defined for the associated Order Management transaction type. To calculate tax at any time, select Calculate Tax from the Actions button menu within the Sales Order or Order Organizer windows. Tax amounts are displayed: • Within the Sales Orders window, Main Tab. This is value is the current total order tax • Within the Sales Orders Lines window, Pricing tab. This tax value is for each taxable order line Additionally, tax is always recalculated when tax-dependent attributes change on the order line. Tax Calculation at Entry With tax calculation at Entry, tax is calculated as each order line is entered. This tax calculation is used,for example, in businesses that requires the userperforming order entry to view the total of the order, including tax, so it can be quoted to a customer. To include tax in Commitment Applied Amount, set the tax event to Entry. Tax Calculation at Booking When tax calculation occurs at Booking, tax is calculated on each of the booked order lines. This tax calculation option is u sed,for example, in business that require tax visibility for booked orders, but who want to increase order entry input times by not calculating tax at ent ry. Tax Calculation at Invoicing When tax calculation occurs at Invoicing, no tax calculations will occur within Order Management. Tax calculation will occur in Oracle Receivables when the order or order line is invoiced. For maximum performance, set the Tax Event as Invoicing. Inclusive Taxes When you create yourtax codes,you can specify that the taxes are inclusive taxes (the tax amounts are already included in the price of the item). When the Tax Engine is called to calculate taxes, it will return inclusive taxes as well as exclusive taxes. Any inclusive taxes returned are not added to the extended amount of the order line or displayed within the Tax column of an order line. Order Management displays the estimated tax amount based on the tax date on the order line. However, inclusive taxes are disp layed when you View Tax Details from the Action button menu within the Sales Orders Lines window. You can perform a credit check including or excluding the estimated tax amount.
  • 88. Practice - Viewing Tax Setups Overview In this practice you will learn how view tax setups in Oracle Order Management Tasks 1. Navigate to the Transaction Types window in Order Management. 2. Find the tax related fields and determine the tax events. (N) Order Management > Setup > Transaction Types > Define 7. (T) Finance 8. Navigate to the Receivables Transaction Type field and use the list of values to view the applicable options. 9. Navigate to the Tax Event field and use the list of values to view the applicable options.
  • 89. Define Document Sequences for Order Numbering Order Management uses AOL Document Sequence functionality for order numbering. This is step eleven of the Order Management Setup You can define document sequences that automatically generate numbers for y our sales documents as you enter them. You can define a single document sequence to assign unique consecutive numbers to all yours ales documents, or you can define multiple document sequences that are assigned to different order types.In the latter case,an order or ret urn is uniquely identified by its type and its number, since sales documents of different types may share numbers. Note. Sales document numbers cannot contain alphabetic characters. Gapless Order Number Source Many countries have legal and audit requirements for order numbers to be contiguous. You can set up a document sequence as gapless through the Define Documents Sequences window. You can set up a gapless sequence for quotes,sales orders and Sales Agreements. In addition, Order Management prevents deletion of orders that have been numbered using the gapless numbering sequence. The application uses locks to ensure gapless numbering. If you are using gapless sequences,please save yourchanges frequently to minimize lock contention issues. Note: Transactions may be gapless,however if all quotes do not become orders, the order numbers will not appear gapless. Manual Order Numbers Order Management enables you to enter the order numbers for certain types of orders. You can define a document sequence as manual and assign it to a desired order type. This order type can be used on orders that you want to manually enter order numbers. When an order number is specified for such an order, Order Management validates that it is unique for a given order type. Prerequisites • Set the profile option Sequential Numbering to Partially Used at the Order Management Application level. • Set your document sequences to Automatic, Gapless, or Manual. To define document sequences for order numbering: 1. Navigate to the Document Sequences window. Order Management > Setup >Documents > Define. Order Management Document Sequences Window 2. You can define the sequence to be Automatic, Gapless or Manual. • Automatic: The systemautomatically increment document numbers. Automatic sequences do not guarantee contiguous numbering. • Gapless: The systemguarantees that the numbers returned are contiguous. • Manual: The user must specify a unique document number. For all types ofnumbering, Order Management validates that the number specified by you is unique for a given order type. For more information on AOL Document Sequences, see the Oracle Applications System Administrator'sGuide - Configuration,Document Sequences. 3. Enter a name for the document sequence.Specify Oracle Order Management as the Application.
  • 90. 4. Enter a starting number. 5. Optionally, enter effective dates for the document sequence. 6. Save your work. Note: When sales document Types are defined, a corresponding Document Sequence Category will automatically be created for order types and not for line types.The category created has the same name as the order type. You must navigate to the AOL Assign Document Sequence window to assign a sequence to the newly created category. If the Document Descriptive Flexfield is enabled, you need to specify the governing ledger. The Document Method code should be left blank. Creating a Document Sequence and Assigning It to the Transaction Type Now you will create a document sequence for the transaction type and then assign the document sequence to the transaction type. 10. Navigate to the Document Sequences window.  (N) Setup > Documents > Define 11. Enter the following information in the window: Name = SH-STD-Order Application = Order Management Effective From = Today’s date Type = Automatic Initial Value = 1 12. (I) Save. Exit the window. 13. Navigate to the Sequence Assignments window.  (N) Setup > Documents > Assign 14. (T) Document. Enter the following information: Application = Order Management Category = SH-Mixed Ledger = Vision Operations (USA) 15. (T) Assignment. Enter the following information: Start Date = Today’s date Sequence = SH-STD-Order
  • 91. 16. (I) Save and exit the window. 17. Enter a sales order with the Order Type = SH-Mixed. The order number will be 1 and the line type will be defaulted to SH-StandardLine.
  • 93. Practice - Creating a Customer Overview In this practice you will learn how to create a customer in Oracle Order Management Tasks 3. Define a new customer named XX-Big City with two sites:  Bill to address: 102 N. LaSalle, Cook County, Chicago, Illinois, 60610  Deliver to address: 487 Beverly, San Mateo County, Palo Alto, California, 94301 Create a Customer SELECT PROFILE_CLASS_ID,CURRENCY_CODE,min_fc_balance_percent,min_fc_balance_overdue_type,aa.* FROM hz_cust_prof_class_amts aa WHERE 1=1 and PROFILE_CLASS_ID=0 and CURRENCY_CODE='EGP' and min_fc_balance_percent IS NOT NULL AND min_fc_balance_overdue_type IS NULL; (N) Order Management > Customers > Standard 10. (B) Create. 11. Organization Name: SH-Big City. Leave Alias, D-U-N-S Number,URL, and Context Value. 12. Account Description: Enter a description for your customer. 13. Profile Class: Default. 14. Account Type: External. Leave all other fields, in the Account Information region, blank.
  • 94. 15. Country: United States. 16. Address Line 1: 102 N. LaSalle. 17. City: Chicago. 18. County: Cook
  • 95. 19. State: Illinois. 20. Postal Code: 60610. Leave all other fields, in the Account Site Address region, blank. 21. In the Business Purpose region, set Purpose to Bill To and check the Primary check box. 22. (B) Save And Add Detail. 23. (B) Create Site.
  • 96. 24. In the Business Purpose region, set Purpose to Deliver To and leave the Primary check box unchecked.
  • 98. Guided Demonstration – Defining Freight Carriers A freight carrier is a commercial company that transports shipments to and from customers, suppliers, and internal organizations. You must set up each carrier's information as a party in Oracle Shipping Execution before shipping goods; you should assign a carrier to each delivery. You also must associate a general ledger account with each carrier to collect associated costs. Before you set up the carriers: • Collect general information about each carrier • Determine the types of services that your carriers offer and that you use Responsibility: Order ManagementSuper User, Vision Operations (USA) (N) Shipping > Setup > Freight Carriers, Cost Types > Freight Carriers 1. (N) Shipping > Setup > Freight Carriers,Cost Types > Freight Carriers 2. Enter the following information: Name: SH-Freight Short Name: SH-F 3. Enter the following in the Services tab Service Level: Select a Service Level from the LOV Mode: Select the mode of transport from the LOV 4. (B) Organization Assignments 5. Select Assigned check box for the Organization SH 1 and click Done. Select Assigned to assign the ship method to the organization(s) that use it. You can assign the ship method to more than one organization. Note: If you want to assign the ship method to all of your organizations, click Assign All to have all organizations' Assigned field selected.If you want to begin again with yourassignments,click Unassign All to have all organizations' Assigned field cleared. 6. (M) File > Save.
  • 99. Defining Freight Costs You can define allowable freight costs and suggested amounts for shipments. These amounts are applied at ship confirm or once a delivery line is planned. You can add multiple freight costs to a shipment from the list of allowable freight cost types that you define. Note: If necessary,you can override the freight costs and suggested freight amounts at ship confirm. You can also define multiple freight costs for a specific freight cost type. For example, if you want to track different types of insurance,you can create different insurance costs underthe insurance freight cost type such as liability insurance or shipping insurance. When you add freight costs at ship confirmation for a foreign currency order, you can use either yourfunctional currency or the order's foreign currency. If you use yourfunctional currency, the freight charges are converted to the order currency through Oracle Receivables. Note: You should define all your freight costs in yourfunctional currency for uniformity. You can then modify the currency to match the order, and modify the amount on the Confirm Shipments window, as necessary. Prerequisites • Define yourFreight Cost Type Lookups. • To pass freight costs to Order Management and Accounts Receivable so that the customer is invoiced (for example, freight terms = Prepay and Add), then a pricing modifier and pricing formula are required. To define freight costs: 1. Navigate to the Freight Cost Types window. 1. (N) Shipping > Setup > Freight Carriers,Cost Types > Freight Cost Types Freight Cost Types Window 2. Enter a Name for the freight cost. 3. Select the Type of freight cost. 4. Select a Currency for the freight cost. 5. Enter the Amount for the freight cost. You can change this amount during ship confirmation. You can enter 0 as the amount. 6. Optionally, enter Effective dates for the freight cost. 7. Save your work.
  • 100. Practice - Setting Up a Defaulting Rule Overview In this practice, you will learn how to set up a defaulting sourcing rule for the Freight Terms attribute for your customer XX-Big City Electronics. You will then create a sales order to observe how the sourcing rule provides a defaulting value for Freight Terms on the Sales Orders window. In Oracle Order Management,defaulting sourcing rules enable you to automatically default attribute values into sales order entities:  Sales order entities include groups of related attributes such as Order or Line.  Attributes are the individual fields within a particular entity, such as Warehouse, Ship To Location, or Agreement. Note: Changes to defaulting rules take effect for any new orders that use the modified defaulting rules when you open the Sales Order Header or Lines windows or if you update an attribute (field) on an order. Setting Up a Defaulting Condition Template Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) 1. Navigate to the Defaulting Setup – Entity Attributes window.  (N) Order Management > Setup > Rules > Defaulting 2. (I) Find. 3. Select entity = Order Header.
  • 101. 4. (B) OK. 5. (B) Defaulting Condition Templates. The Defaulting Condition Validation Templates window appears. Note: In the header region, ensure the following values are selected for the Application and Entity values (if you do not see these values, do a query to find them): Application = Order Management Entity = Order Header
  • 102. 6. (I) New (place cursor in the Validation Templates region). 7. Enter a new validation template: Condition Name = SH-Freight Terms for SH-Big City Electronics Description = Used for Freight Terms for Customer XX-Big City Electronics 8. In the Validation Rules region, create two validation rules for the template you added: --- Group # Attribute Validation Operation Value String Rule # 1 105 Customer = XX-Big City Electronics Rule # 2 106 Currency = USD 9. (I) Save. 10. Close the Defaulting Condition Validation Template window. Setting Up a Defaulting Sourcing Rule for the Freight Terms Attribute 11. Navigate to the Defaulting Setup – Entity Attributes window. 12. Select Attribute = Freight Terms.
  • 103. 13. (B) Defaulting Rules. The Attribute Defaulting Rules window appears. 14. On the Defaulting Conditions region, select a defaulting condition for the Freight Terms attribute (use the defaulting condition template you created in previous steps): Precedence = 3 Defaulting Condition = XX-Freight Terms for XX-Big City Electronics Enabled = Selected 15. On the Default Sourcing Rules region, create a default sourcing rule for the Freight Terms attribute. The sourcing rule defines what Freight Terms value is displayed when the defaulting conditions are met: Sequence = 501 (or similar 3-digit value if you cannot use 501) Source Type = Constant Value Default Source/Value = To Be Determined
  • 104. 16. (M) Tools > Generate Defaulting Handler Package. This program generates the defaulting rules for the attribute. 17. (I) Save. Viewing the Freight Terms Attribute in the Sales Order Window 18. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.  (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders 19. (T) Order Information, (T) Main: 20. Enter a sales order for the following customer: Customer = XX-Big City* Order Type = Mixed Currency = USD* Note: *These conditions are required for the Freight Terms rule to be applied. 21. (T) Order Information, (T) Others. 22. On the Freight Terms field, confirm that the defaulting freight term value is To Be Determined. If so,then the default rule was applied successfully. Disabling the Defaulting Condition SH-Freight Terms for SH-Big City Electronics for the Freight Terms Attribute 23. Navigate to the Defaulting Setup – Entity Attributes window. 24. Select Attribute = Freight Terms.
  • 105. 25. (B) Defaulting Rules. The Attribute Defaulting Rules window appears. 26. Select the Defaulting Condition = XX-Freight Terms for XX-Big City Electronics Enabled = Deselected Note: If the Enabled check box for the defaulting condition is not selected,the defaulting condition is disabled and the rules and condition associated with this condition are not used in default rule processing. 27. (M) Tools > Generate Defaulting Handler Package. 28. (I) Save. Viewing the Freight Terms Attribute in the Sales Order Window 29. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.  (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders 30. (T) Order Information, (T) Main.
  • 106. 31. Enter a sales order for the following customer: Customer = XX-Big City* Order Type = Mixed Currency = USD* Note: *These conditions are required to see if the Freight Terms rule you created has been disabled successfully. 32. (T) Order Information, (T) Others. 33. In the Freight Terms field, notice that the default Freight Terms value is now Prepaid and not To Be Determined. This means that you have successfully disabled the Freight Terms sourcing condition, and a different rule was applied to derive the Freight Terms value.
  • 107. Practice - Creating a Discount Modifier Using Qualifiers Overview In this practice, you will learn how to create a discount modifier to apply a 5% discount. You will then create a sales order and see the discount applied automatically. Creating a Discount Modifier Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations QP: Allow Buckets For Manual Modifiers Default Value: No This profile option enables you to define buckets for manual line or group of line level modifiers. Yes: Enables you to define buckets for manual line or group of line level modifiers. No: You cannot define buckets for manual line or group of line level modifiers. 1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window. 2. (T) Main: Modifier Type = Discount List Number = SH-Discount 1 Active = Deselected (to start) Automatic = Selected Name = SH-Discount 1 Version =1 Start Date = Today’s date Description = 4
  • 108. 3. (B) List Qualifiers. Enter the following qualifiers: Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Operator Value From Customer Customer Name = Global Communications Modifier List Price List = SH-Price List 4
  • 109. 4. (B) OK. This action applies the qualifier to the modifier and modifier lines defined in the Modifiers Summary tab. 5. (T) Modifiers Summary tab: Modifier Number Modifier Level Modifier Type Start/ Finish Dates Pricing Phase Incompatibility Level Bucket 1 Line Discount Optional 10 – List Line Adjustment (blank) 1 6. (T) Discounts/Charges: Application Method = Percent Value = 5 7. A discount of 5% will be applied for all products ordered, but only when:  Customer is Global Communications, and  Price list for the order is SH-Price List 4 8. Return to the header of the modifier and select the Active check box.
  • 110. 9. (I) Save. Creating a Sales Order Using a Discount Modifier Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations 10. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.  (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders 11. (T) Order Information, (T) Main: Customer = Global Communications. Required sales order header information defaults from your customer setup. Order Type = Mixed Price List = SH-Price List 4
  • 111. 12. (T) Line Items: Ordered Item = DD-00010-0040-01 Qty = 10
  • 112. 13. (I) Save. Note the order number 66399. 14. (B) Actions > View Adjustments. 15. (T) Adjustments. Note that the 5% modifier discount has been applied. Manual Apply
  • 114. Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved. Freight and Special Charge List Modifier Add freight charges that are applied to the sales order total Order Total > $500 10% Freight Charge Order Total < $500 20% Freight Charge
  • 115. Practice - Creating a Freight and Special Charge List Modifier Overview In this practice, you create a Freight and Special Charge List modifier using formulas, modifiers, and qualifiers. In this exercise you will define:  Two Special Charge Formulas  A Modifier List with four line modifiers that determine how to use the formulas  List and line qualifiers to determine eligibility Note:For freight charge modifiers, you can apply freight charges corresponding to ONLY ONE Charge name (such as "Freight Costs") even if severalcharge names qualify. Assumptions  Oracle Order Management Super User responsibility  You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice. Note: Oracle Advanced Pricing screenshots are shown in the Solution section of this practice. If you are running Basic Pricing, the pricing system software components restrict exposure of advanced features in the pricing windows. Therefore, the screenshots may differ from the pricing windows in the Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or test instance you use at your site to complete this practice. Defining the First Formula Responsibility = Oracle Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) 1. Navigate to the Pricing Formulas window.  (N) Pricing > Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup 2. Enter the following: Name = SH-Freight Description = Dollar Amount x Constant .01 Formula = 1*2 Formula Type Pricing Attribute Context Pricing Attribute Component Step Pricing Attribute Volume Item Amount N/A 1 Numeric Constant N/A N/A .01 2 3. (I) Save.
  • 116. Defining the Second Formula 4. Enter the next formula Name = SH-Handling Description = Item Quantity x Constant .05 Formula = 1*2 5. Formula Lines region: Formula Type Pricing Attribute Context Pricing Attribute Component Step Pricing Attribute Volume Item Quantity N/A 1 Numeric Constant N/A N/A .05 2 6. (I) Save. 7. Run Build Formula Package 8. Build Attribute Mapping Rules
  • 117. Defining a Freight and Special Charge List Modifier Note:For freight charge modifiers, you can apply freight charges of one Charge Name (such as "Freight Costs") only once even if more number of charges qualifies. 7. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.  (N) Pricing > Modifiers > Modifier Setup 8. (T) Main. Enter the following: Type = Freight and Special charge List Number = SH-Freight and Handling Active = Deselected (to start) Automatic = Selected Name = SH-Freight and Handling Version = 1 Start Date = Default Currency =Defaults Description = Enter a meaningful description 9. (B) List Qualifiers. Grouping Number Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Precedence Operator Value From 1 Modifier List Price List Defaults = SH-Price List 1 1 Order Order Type Defaults = Mixed 10. (B) OK.
  • 118. 11. (T) Main, (T) Modifiers Summary. Modifier Number Level Modifier Type Start/End Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket Freight1 Line Freight/Special Charge Optional Selected 50 (Line Charges) 1 12. (T) Discounts/Charges. Charge Name Formula Application Method Value Freight Costs SH-Freight Lumpsum (blank) 13. (B) Line Qualifiers: Grouping Number Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Precedence Operator Value From Value To 1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000 14. (B) OK. 15. (T) Modifiers Summary to create a new modifier line: Modifier Number Level Modifier Type Start/End Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket Freight2 Order Freight/Special Charge Optional Selected 70 (Charges: Header/All Lines) (Blank)
  • 119. 16. (T) Discounts/Charges. Charge Name Application Method Value Freight Costs Lumpsum 100 17. (B) Line Qualifier. Grouping Number Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Precedence Operator Value From Value To 1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000.99 18. (B) OK. 19. (T) Modifiers Summary. Create a new modifier line
  • 120. Modifier Number Level Modifier Type Start/End Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket Handling1 Line Freight/Special Charge Optional Selected 50 (Line Charges) 1 20. (T) Discounts/Charges. Charge Name Formula Application Method Value Handling Costs SH-Handling Lumpsum Blank 21. (B) Line Qualifier and create a Line Level Qualifier. Grouping Number Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Precedence Operator Value From Value To 1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 0 10000.99 22. (B) OK. 23. (T) Modifiers Summary. Create a new modifier line: Modifier Number Level Modifier Type Start/End Dates Automatic Pricing Phase Bucket Handling2 Order Freight/Special Charge Optional Selected 70 (Charges: Header/All Lines) (blank) 24. (T) Discounts/Charges. Charge Name Application Method Value Handling Costs Lumpsum 50
  • 121. 25. (B) Line Qualifier. Create a Line Level Qualifier: Grouping Number Qualifier Context Qualifier Attribute Precedence Operator Value From Value To 1 Volume Order Amount Defaults BETWEEN 10001 9999999 26. (B) OK. 27. (T) Main tab. 28. Select the Active check box.
  • 122. 29. (I) Save your work. Creating a Sales Order Using the Freight and Special Charge Modifier Responsibility = Oracle Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) 30. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.  (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders 31. (T) Order Information, (T) Main Customer = XX-Big City Electronics Order Type = Mixed Required Header information defaults from your customer setup Price List = XX-Price List 1 32. (T) Line Items Ordered Item = DD-00010-0040-01 Quantity =10
  • 123. 33. (I) Save your work and note the order number 66402. 34. (B) Actions > Charges and Freight Costs to view your charges. 35. Close the window. 36. (T) Order Information. 37. (B) Actions > Charges. 38. Close the Charges window. 39. Increase the quantity ordered (such as quantity 20) of the order line so that the ordered amount exceeds $1,000.
  • 124. 40. (I) Save. 41. (B) Actions > Charges and Freight Costs. There should be no changes provided that the Order Total is above $1,000. 42. Close the window. 43. (T) Order Information tab. 44. (B) Actions > Charges. There should be a line for Freight Costs of $750 and a line for Handling Costs of $100 (provided the Order Total is greater than $1,000). 45. Save your work.
  • 125. Discount Per Item And Quantity For any 10 compact discs purchased by Jan 2016, the customer receives two Currency Discount 1. Create a modifier. Modifier Type: Discount Modifier Level: Line End Date: 31 Jan 2016 Product Attribute: Item Number Product Attribute Value: DD-00010-0040-01 Volume Type: Item Quantity Break Type: Recurring Value From: 10 Application Method: Lumpsum
  • 127. Explain New Selling Price Quantity List Price Extended Amount Lump sum NEW Selling Price 100 20 2000 (100/10)=10 ---- (10*2)=20 (2000-20)/100=19.8 Line 2
  • 128. Explain New Selling Price Quantity List Price Extended Amount Lump sum NEW Selling Price 20 25 500 (20/5)=4---(4*2)=8 (500-8)/20=24.6
  • 129. Discount for Third Unit Customers who buy two bottles of shampoo receive one Currency unit off of the third bottle of shampoo. 1. Create a modifier. Modifier Type: Discount Modifier Level: Line Product Attribute: Item Number Product Attribute Value: DD-00030-0110-01 Volume Type: Item Quantity Break Type: Recurring UOM: Each Value From: 3 Application Method: Lumpsum Value: 1 Test Scenario
  • 130. .
  • 131. Explain New Selling Price Quantity List Price Extended Amount Lump sum NEW Selling Price 100 30 3000 (100/3)=33---(33*1)=33 (3000-33)/100=29.67
  • 132. Price Break Scenario 1 All employees in Company ABC's mobile phone plan receive per minute discounts based on minutes used, as follows: Minutes Discount Per Minute ($USD) 0-120 0.05 120-240 0.10 240-420 0.12 > 420 0.15 A customer who uses 150 minutes receives the following discounts: - $ 0.05 per minute discount on 120 minutes - $ 0.10 per minute discount on 30 minutes 1. Create a modifier. Modifier Type: Price Break Header Modifier Level: Line - Product Attribute: Item Number - Product Attribute Value: Minutes - Volume Type: Item Quantity - Break Type: Range - Adjustment Type: Discount 2. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the price break modifier. - Grouping Number: 1 - Qualifier Context: Customer - Qualifier Attribute: Customer Name - Operator: = - Value From: Global Communications
  • 133. 3. In the Price Break Lines region, enter the break lines. Value From Value To Application Method Value 0 120 Amount .05 120 240 Amount .10 240 420 Amount .12 420 Amount .15
  • 134. Test Price Break Scenario 1
  • 136. Sales Order Change Management Processing Constraints Overview Processing Constraints enable you to control changes to sales documents in Oracle Order Management. This chapter describes the Processing Constraints framework in detail. Introduction Processing constraints are rules that control who can change what and when they can change it. Processing constraints can prevent certain changes,but can also be set up to perform actions based on those changes. They can define actions that can result from these changes,such as requiring a reason for the change,triggering an action in Audit Trail or Versioning, or raising an Integration Event. With processing constraints, you can control: • Who can make changes based on responsibility. A constraint (rule) may apply to all responsibilities, to only a list of constrained responsibilities or to all except a list of authorized responsibilities. • More than just what can be updated.The following operations can be controlled: Create, update, delete, cancel, and split all at the entity level. For example, given a set of conditions you may not want to allow a userto create a new order line. You can also control the update operation down to the attribute level. For example, given a set of conditions,you could choose to allow update to the warehouse field of an order line but not to the price list field. • Changes to entities. An entity roughly corresponds to a table or window. The entities you can control in Order Management are: • Order Header • Order Line • Order Sales Credit • Line Sales Credit • Order Price Adjustment • Line Price Adjustment • Order Payment • Line Payment • Sales Agreement Header • Sales Agreement Line • Changes based on a group of conditions. The conditions must be collectively true for the constraint to fire or prevent the changes. The conditions may be based on either the state of a workflow activity (where the entity is in the flow) or a value in a table. A condition may also be based on a customAPI, which means that you can call your own PL/SQL code to evaluate the condition. Multiple conditions can be combined using either AND logic (all the conditions must be true) or OR logic (at least one of the conditions must be true.) A custommessage can display when an attempt is made to violate a constraint. This chapter details the differences between Processing Constraints and the functionality in Order Entry that it replaced - Security Rules. It describes in detail the implications of selected values in the following forms: Processing Constraints, Validation Templates and Record Sets.Finally, set up for processing constraints is demonstrated using the following business examples: • No one can change the customer purchase order at the line level; your company requires that one sales order can relate to only one customer purchase order. • No one can add a line to an order after any of the lines on the order have been invoice interfaced. • A reason is required to cancel an order line after it has been booked. • Only the Customer Service Manager can change the discount percentage on an order line after the line has been shipped. • Require all return orders, identified by order type = Return, to be shipped to a central returns processing facility. Constraints for drop ship functionality enable you to control changes within the drop ship flow between Oracle Order Management and Oracle Purchasing. See Processing Constraints,page 10-1 for details on these constraints. Versioning in Order Management uses constraints to enable automatic versioning. You can use validation templates for example to drive versioning by transaction type as a condition. By using the processing constraints and workflow activity, you can increment the version and determine the statuses available to version, which give you complete flexibility setting up versioning. See: Versioning, page 10-21 Background Security Rules provide functionality to control changes to orders. However, they have certain limitations both in the philosophy and in implementation. In Order Management there is a processing constraints framework usable by other products. This framework provides to you the ability to: • Control changes based on who is trying to make them (by responsibility) • Define constraining conditions based on the state of related objects (for example, define a constraint on a line based on the state of the order) • Control changes based on the value of a field - see Validation Templates section below
  • 137. • Call customPL/SQL code to determine whether a condition is true • Constrain operations at any point in the process flow. In prior releases you could only control operations for certain hardcoded cycle actions. Terminology Processing Constraints are very powerful and setting them up is not difficult; however, knowledge of the following terms is helpful: Entity A group of related attributes that roughly correspond to a table or a window in Order Management. The entities that can be managed using processing constraints are Order Header, Order Line, Order Price Adjustment, Line Price Adjustment, Order Sales Credit, Line Sales Credit, Order Payment, Line Payment, Sales Agreement Header, and Sales Agreement Line. Entities correspond to 'objects' in the old security rules. Attribute A field or column that belongs to an entity. For example, the ordered unit of measure is an attribute of the Order Line entity. Attributes correspond to fields in the old security rules. Operation An action that you can take on an entity. The operations that can be controlled by processing constraints are Create, Update, Delete, Cancel and Split. Processing Constraints Framework A generic facility that will enable you to define processing constraints forapplication entities and attributes. It includes the set of APIs that will enable you to query the existence of any constraint against the operations you wish to perform on that entity or its attributes. Seeded constraints have the System box checked and cannot be modified. Validation Template Names a condition and defines the semantics of how to validate that condition. These validation templates can be used in the processing constraints framework to specify the conditions for a given constraint. Record Set A record set is a set of records that are bound by some common attribute values (for example all lines on an order). In the processing constraints framework, when you define constraining conditions, you may specify a record set to be validated for a given condition as defined by its validation template. Scope Given a record set and a condition, the scope (Any/All) defines how the validation should be performed on records of the record set."All" requires the validation to be TRUE for every record in the set."Any" requires the validation to be TRUE for at least one record in the set. Conditions The test(s)which must be passed for a constraint to be active. For example, a condition for a constraint might be that the order is booked.
  • 138. Defining Processing Constraints Processing Constraints Window ConditionsTab Navigate to the Processing Constraints window. Order Management > Setup > Rules > Security > Processing Constraints. Note that the window is divided into several regions. The top region has fields for the Application and the Entity. Any one of the OM entities are the valid values for the entity field. This is used for querying—you cannot create new entities. When you query an entity you will see all the constraints defined against that entity. Constraints The Constraints region is where most of the details of a processing constraint are defined. The region enables you to view the seeded constraints,view, or update the constraints that were created for your company. You can create new constraints,but you cannot change the seeded constraints with the systemcheck box marked. Operation Field The Operation field can have the values of Create, Update, and Delete for any of the entities, Cancel for Order Header and Order Line entities only, and Split for the Order Line Entity only. Attribute Field The Attribute field can only be used if the operation selected is UPDATE. You may enter a value here, and the constraint will only apply to that field. For instance you may define a constraint that affects only the warehouse field on the order line. If the Attribute field is left blank the constraint will be in effect for all the attributes of the entity. For instance,you may define a constraint which prevents updates to any of the fields of an order line. Please note that only when constrainable attributes are updated, processing constraints execute. All attributes are not constrainable, therefore processing constraints will not execute for such attributes,even though the operation selected is UPDATE. Action Field The Action field allows you to select the action to be taken if the constraining conditions are met. Note: There is no unique Require Reason action; it must be used in conjunction with Versioning or Audit. Processing Constraints Window with User Action Menu Displayed
  • 139. The combination of Actions that can be selected are: • Generate Version, Require Reason and Raise Integration Event • Generate Version and Require Reason • Generate Version • Require Reason, History and Raise Integration Event • Require Reason and Require History • Require History • Raise Integration Event Actions of Require Reason and Require Reasons and Require History for audit history are supported only for the UPDATE operation. Constraints are evaluated in the following order (Only one constraint may take effect for a change): • User Action • Not Allowed. • Generate Version, Require Reason and Raise Integration Event. This activates automatic versioning. • Generate Version and Require Reason. This activates automatic versioning. • Generate Version. This activates automatic versioning. • Require Reason, History, and Raise Integration Event. This activates Audit Trail to capture changes. • Require Reason and Require History. This activates Audit Trail to capture changes. • Require History. This activates Audit Trail to capture changes. • Raise Integration Event. This can be used with versioning. During implementation any action which includes "Raise Integration Event" may be selected.This event is presently used by XML processing and can be used by any other product. Actions that Require Reason take precedence over actions that do not. Example Assume that both versioning and audit constraints apply to update of price list. Only version is captured as it takes precedence and audit history is not available for this update. However, if audit constraint is on a different attribute like update of payment term and you change the payment term and price list, both version and audit history are captured. Applies To Field The Applies To field is used to define whether the constraint is applicable in the Negotiation or Fulfillment transaction phase.If the field is blank, then it is applicable to both phases. Enabled Field The Enabled field indicates whether the current Constraint is active. This allows constraints to be temporarily disabled if necessary. System Changes Field Use the SystemChanges field to indicate if systemchanges are allowed even if the constraining conditions are met. The systemchanges here refer to an attribute initially getting a default value or being re-defaulted when a source attribute changes. This is applicable only for attribute or field level UPDATE operations. The possible values are: • Never after Insert: System changes are allowed to this field only if the entity has not yet been saved to the database. This is the default value. • Always: Systemchanges are always allowed on the attribute User Changes Field Use the User Changes field to indicate when the user performing the operation is constrained.This is applicable only for attribute or field level UPDATE operations. The possible values are: • Never after Insert: You can change this field only if the entity has not yet been saved to the database.This is the default value. • Always: You can never enter a value for this attribute, even if the entity (for
  • 140. example an order) is being created for the first time. System Field The System Field indicates if a constraint included with the OM systemis user updateable.System constraints help prevent data integrity problems and cannot be updated.Any operation, field, action, or list of responsibilities attached to these constraints cannot be modified. However, additional validation conditions can be included as long as they do not have the same group number. Enabled Field The Enabled field indicates whether the current Condition is active. This allows conditions to be temporarily disabled if necessary. Note that if all conditions are disabled and the constraint itself is not disabled, the constraint always applies for that change. Care must be taken to ensure that the disabling of conditions does not introduce problems in the business flow. The bottomsection of the window has two tabbed regions - the Conditions region and the Applicable to region. Conditions The Conditions region allows you to define the condition(s) that must be true for the constraint to fire. Unless the group of conditions are true, the constraint will not be active. Group Number Field The Group Number field determines whether AND or OR logic is used to combine conditions.For conditions that should togetherevaluate to TRUE (AND conditions), enter the same group number. Define OR conditions by using different numbers. Scope Field The Scope field is evaluated with the Record Set field to determine if the condition is true. The possible values are: • ANY: If the record set on this validation condition can select multiple records, then this condition should be TRUE for AT LEAST ONE of the records. For example you can evaluate a condition against any line on an order: If ANY line on the order is canceled. • ALL: If the record set on this validation condition can select multiple records, then this condition should be TRUE for ALL the records. For example you can evaluate a condition against all lines on an order: If ALL lines on the order are canceled. Validation Entity The Validation Entity is the one for which the condition is evaluated. The validation entity can be the constrained entity (displayed in the Entity region) or any related entity. For example, the constrained entity could be an order line and the constraint could be evaluated based on characteristics of the validation entity order header. Select the Record Set and based on the selected scope,the conditions will be evaluated for any or all of the records in the set. An example of a seeded Record Set is a ship set. You may define additional record sets as needed. Note: If the validation entity on the condition is different from the constrained entity, then only the record set based on the primary key for the validation entity will be available in the LOV Check the NOT Box to create a NOT condition. For example if the condition is Booked, checking this flag will evaluate the condition NOT Booked. System Field The System field is checked for the conditions that were included with the OM system and are not userupdateable. You cannot define new AND conditions with the same group number as a systemcondition. User Message Field The User Message field displays when an attempt is made to violate a constraint.The message is specific not just to the constraint but also to the specific condition that was violated. For example, you can create a user message that states:"line has been booked." If the constraint is set up to prevent any update to the item field on the order line if the line had been booked, the complete error message displayed at run time is: "You are not allowed to update the item; line has been booked." The following screen shows the Processing Constraints window again, this time with the Applicable To tab selected. Use this tab to define the responsibilities the constraint applies to. Processing Constraints Window, ApplicableTab If the button for All Responsibilities is selected, then the constraint will apply to all users. No one will be able to perform the constrained action. All seeded constraints are applicable to all responsibilities.
  • 141. If you select the Authorized Responsibilities button,then only the responsibilities that you list will be allowed to perform the action. All other users will be stopped from performing the action by the constraint. If you select the Constrained Responsibilities button,then all users except for the responsibilities defined will be able to perform the action. The users that you list will be stopped from performing the action by the constraint. There are two other forms that are used in setting up processing constraints. These are the Validation Templates window and the Record Sets window. The validation templates and record sets you create, as well as the seeded ones can be used in the Processing Constraints window as described above. Note: After updating constraints and/orconditions,close and reopen the sales document windows for the updated constraints to apply correctly.
  • 142. Guided Demonstration - Setting Up a Processing Constraint In this demonstration, you will learn how to set up a processing constraint that prevents a sales order header from being updated when the order is booked or when there are order lines created. Processing constraints control who can change what and when they can change it. Processing constraints can prevent certain changes,but also can perform actions based on those changes such as requiring a reason for the change, triggering an action in Audit Trail or Versioning, or raising an Integration Event. Responsibility: Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations 1. (N) Order Management > Setup > Rules> Security > Processing Constraints 2. Query in the top of the window (To query, press CNTRL + F11): Application = Order Management Entity = Order Header 3. Create a new line on the Constraints region: Operation = Update Attribute = Order Type User Action = Not Allowed. This means the constrained operation cannot be performed. Leave System Changes and User Changes fields blank. Enabled check box = Selected 4. Create a new line on the Conditions tab: Group Number = 101 Scope = Any Validation Entity = Order Header
  • 143. Record Set = Order. The record set corresponds to the entities to which the constraints process should apply the condition. For example, if you enter the order line record set Line, the condition is evaluated against the order line in question. If you enter the order line record set Order, the condition is evaluated against any or all (depending on the scope) lines of the order in question. NOT check box = Deselected Validation Template = Booked Enabled check box = Selected User Message = The order is booked. 5. Create a second line on the Conditions tab: Group Number = 102 Scope = Any Validation Entity = Order Header Record Set = Order NOT check box = Deselected Validation Template = Lines Exist User Message = The order has lines. Applying the Processing Constraint to a Sales Order (Constraint Based on Booked Orders) Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations 6. Navigate to the Sales Orders window. 7. Enter the sales order header using the following information (all remaining information defaults in): Customer = XX-Big City Electronics Order Type = Order Only 8. In the Line Items tab, enter the following line items: Ordered Item Quantity XX- Phone 3 XX-Palm Pilot 5 9. Save the sales order. 10. Book the order. 11. On the Order Information tab, Main subtab, change the order type: Order Type = Drop Shipment 12. Save your work. Note: If the processing constraint condition has been applied successfully, a Message box alerts you that you cannot update the Order Type because the order is in Booked status. Applying the Processing Constraint to a Sales Order (Constraint Based on Existing Lines) Responsibility = Order Management Super User, Vision Operations 13. Navigate to the Sales Orders window. 14. Enter the sales order header using the following information (all remaining information defaults in): Customer = XX-Big City Electronics Order Type = Order Only 15. In the Line Items tab, enter the following line items: Ordered Item Quantity XX- Phone 2 16. Save your work. 17. On the Order Information tab, Main subtab, change the order type:
  • 144. Order Type = Bill Only 18. Save your work. Note: You should not be able to save your changes because the second processing constraint condition does not allow you to update the Order Type for orders with existing order lines.
  • 145. Roles and Users Shipping Execution provides data access controls called roles that control users'access to the Actions list and Tools menu in the Shipping Transactions form and the Quick Ship window. Roles also control ship confirm error and warning messages for breaking ship set s,missing inventory controls, and breaking proportionality of ship model complete. Roles are assigned to users using grants that control access to view or edit specific shipping data or actions. This is useful, for example, if you want to assign a grant to inexperienced users that provides view-only access or assign grants that prevent unwanted actions such as unintentionalpick releases across multiple organizations. Note: Roles provide data access controls for the Shipping Transactions form and the Quick Ship window. If you want to restrict user access to other windows like the Pick Release or setup windows, you can edit the Shipping menus in Shipping Administration. For each role, select the following data access controls that control Edit and View access to shipping entities: • Data Access Edit enables you to edit and view the data • Data Access View enables you to browse the data • Data Access None prevents you from editing and browsing data and performing actions A role can provide either view-only, edit-only, or a combination of view and edit access depending on how you setup the role. You can create customized roles by defining the access controls you want. During the setup for each role, you enable or disable actions by selecting or deselecting the check box next to each action. Note: If no data access control is selected, the user cannot edit or view the selected action. Note: Ship confirm error and warning message configuration, on the Message tab,does not use data access. After you have defined a role you can assign it to a userthrough a grant. A grant defines both the user's role and related information about the grant including the date, and the organization(s) to which the grant applies. The systemadministrator or super useris responsible for defining roles and assigning the grants to users. Defining a New Role Shipping Execution enables you to define new roles by selecting the data access controls that you want. You can define a new role by: • Copying an existing role: An existing role can be copied to create a new role. The copied role has the same data access privileges of the original, but if desired, these privileges can be edited for the new role. Save the new role with a different name than the original. • Manually defining a new role: You can create a new role in the Shipping Execution Role Definition window by selecting the data access controls to trips, stops,lines, and deliveries. Save the new role with a unique name. After you have created the new role you can assign it by grant to a user. Note: In an environment that does not have Oracle Transportation Execution installed, five privileges related to Oracle Transportation Execution are grayed out in the Shipping Execution Role Definition window. The following privileges are strictly related to Oracle Transportation Execution, and therefore, do not apply if this application is not licensed: Send Outbound Message,Select Carrier, Get Freight Costs,Cancel Ship Method, and View Message History. To define a new role: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Execution Role Definition window. Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window 2. Enter the Name of the role. 3. Enter a Description for the role. 4. In the Trips tab, in the Data Access field, select: • Edit to provide edit access for the trip records • View to provide view-only access for the trip records • None to disable access and actions
  • 146. 5. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform. Note: As a shortcut,choose the Disable Actions button to disable all the actions or the Enable Actions button to enable all the actions. 6. Select the Stops tab. Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window - Stops Tab 7. In the Data Access field, select: • Edit to provide edit access to the stop records • View to provide view-only access to the stop records • None to provide no access to the stop records 8. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform. Note: As a shortcut,choose the Disable Actions button to disable all the actions or the Enable Actions button to enable all the ac tions. 9. Select the Deliveries tab. Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window - Deliveries Tab 10. In the Data Access field, select: • Edit to provide edit access to the delivery records • View to provide view-only access to the delivery records • None to provide no access to the delivery records 11. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform. Note: Use the Actions View Message History, Send Outbound Message,Select Carrier, Get Freight Costs,and Cancel Ship Method if you have Oracle Transportation Execution installed. Note: As a shortcut,choose the Disable Actions button to disable all the actions or the Enable Actions button to enable all the ac tions. 12. Select the Lines/LPNs tab. Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window - Lines/LPNs Tab 13. In the Data Access field, select: • Edit to provide edit access to the lines/LPNs records • View to provide view-only access to the lines/LPNs records • None to provide no access to the lines/LPNs records Note: The delivery records also include delivery legs and packing slips. 14. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform. Note: As a shortcut,choose the Disable Actions button to disable all the actions or the Enable Actions button to enable all the ac tions. 15. Select the General tab. Shipping Execution RoleDefinition Window - General Tab 16. Enable each action that you want the userto have permission to perform. 17. Select the Message tab. The Message tab enables you to configure ship confirm messages for Breaking Proportionality of Ship Model Complete, Breaking Ship Sets, and Missing Inventory Controls. See: Message Configuration in the Shipping Execution chapter of the Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual. 18. From the Activity list of values, select Ship Confirm. 19. For each Message,select either Error or Warning depending on your business needs. Note: The SystemDefaults are Warning for each Message. 20. Save your work. Copying an Existing Role Copying a role is useful for creating a new role based on the privileges of an exiting role. Because copying automatically duplicates the original role, it saves you time from manually entering all the control privileg es of the original. You can edit the privileges of the copied role, save the role with a new name, and assign it to users. To copy an existing role: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Execution Role Definition window. 2. Find the role that you want to copy. 3. Click New Record to create a new record. 4. From the Edit menu, select Duplicate—Record Above to create a new role based on the privileges of the original.
  • 147. 5. Save the new role. Granting a Role to a User You can grant a user a role in one organization or all organizations for a period of time. The role is assigned to a userby a grant. The grant is specific to a particular user and defines the role(s) assigned to the user, the organization where the grant is effective, the start date and optionally, an end date. More than one grant can be assigned if the user requires different access controls to more than one organization. The start and end dates for grants can overlap. For example, if a user requires full-access privileges to three organizations and view-only access to a fourth, the user must be assigned four grants—one for each respective organization (three full-access and one view-only grant). However, if only one grant is assigned,that grant becomes the default grant for the user. In addition, the grant has the following requirements: • A grant may or may not have one inventory organization selected. • Many grants can be assigned for each role. • A user can have one or more grants.If the userdoes not have any grant (expired, effective, or future), the default is view-only access to all organizations. If the user has grants,the user's access is controlled by the effective grants. If there are overlapping gran ts in the same organization or an intersection of grant date ranges,the union of grant privileges controls the user's access. • A grant cannot be designated as the default grant. A role can be assigned to a userthat spans all organizations instead of g ranting a unique grant per organization. If an organization is not specified, the grant is applicable to all organizations. Warehouse Organization A grant can have one or all inventory organizations. If an organization is not specified, the grant is applicable to all organizations.
  • 148. For example, you can use grants to prevent a shipping clerk from assigning freight costs or planning a delivery in one or all organizations. Note: Use caution when creating grants for all organizations (when no specific organization is selected). For example, if a userhas a grant to view all organizations and a grant to perform actions on one organization, the union of these grants will enable the userto perform actions in all organizations. Changing Organizations in the Shipping Transactions Form If a user's effective grants are single organization, the user can select an organization when opening the Shipping Transactions form or from the Tools menu—Choose Organization. If all effective grants are in the same organization, the Shipping Transactions form defaults to that organization. Effective Dates for a Grant Optionally, in the Start and End Date fields, you can enter a start and end date for the grant to assign it for a specific period. For example, you can assign temporary employees a grant that is effective for the duration of their assignment. The date status for a grant can be endless,future or expired: • Endless: If you enter a start date but no end date, the grant is effective for an indefinite period. • Future: You can specify start and end dates for a grant so that the grant is effective only between those dates.For example, a temporary employee can be assigned a role that is effective for the duration of his/her contract. The start date can be a current or future date. You cannot back-date the date: for example, you cannot enter a start date of yesterday. • Expired: When the end date of the grant expires, the usercannot perform the job duties unless assigned a new grant by the system administrator. Note: If the userhas expired and future grants but no effective grants, the user has no access to the Shipping Transactions form. If required, you can leave a gap between an expired grant and a future grant: for example, one grant can expire in June and another can begin in August. To grant a role to a user: 1. Navigate to the Shipping Execution Grants window. Shipping Execution Grants Window 2. In the User field, select the user's name. 3. In the Role field, select the role that you want assigned to the user. Note: To view the available privileges for a selected role, click Edit Role to display the Shipping Execution Role Definition windo w. 4. In the Org field, select the organization to which the grant is assigned (optional). A user can be assigned only role per warehouse (organization). However, you can assign a different role to a different wareho use.
  • 149. 5. In the Start Date field, enter the date that you want the role to start. 6. In the End Date field, enter the date that you want the role to end. If you do not want the role to end, leave the field blan k. Once the grant is saved,only the end date can be updated.However, the date cannot be updated once it has expired. 7. Save your work to activate the role.
  • 150. Guided Demonstration – Shipping Transactions Form Responsibility: Order ManagementSuper User, Vision Operations (USA) Querying using Query Manager 1. (N) Shipping > Transactions 2. Search for region Lines (B) - Select 3. (T) Lines Line Status: Not Shipped 4. Saved Query region Name: SH-Notshipped Description: Not Shipped Lines Saved Query?:Select. This makes the query public to all users 5. (B) Find. All lines which are not shipped are displayed in the Shipping Transaction Form Shipping TransactionForm 9. Click on the Vertical Splitter on the left of the Shipping Transaction Form to view the Query details. 10. Click on the Vertical Splitter on the right of the Shipping Transaction Form to view the Packing Calculator.
  • 151. Guided Demonstration – Quick Ship Window Responsibility: Order ManagementSuper User, Vision Operations (USA) WSH: Quick Ship Default View = Delivery Confirm (N) Shipping > Quick Ship Changing Quick Ship View 1. (N) Shipping > Quick Ship 2. (M) Tools > Change View to toggle between the two Quick Ship views. The two Quick Ship views are as follows: Delivery Confirm View Trip Confirm View Finding Deliveries 3. Ensure that you are in the Delivery Confirm View. 4. You can find the deliveries in the Quick Ship window using any one the following methods: Enter the delivery in the Name field and click Tab Click on Name LOV to find for a delivery. Click on the Find icon to find the delivery using Find Deliveries window. In the Find Deliveries window, you can find the delivery based on the search criteria you enter. Using Folder Option 5. To hide the Number of LPNs field. Click on the field. You can hide a field using any one of the following option (M) Folder > Hide Field. Right click on the field, select Folders option on the popmenu, and click Hide Field. 6. To show a field, you can use anyone of the following methods:
  • 152. (M) Folder > Show Field. Select a field, which you want to display from the LOV. Right click on any field, select Folders option on the popmenu and click Show field. Select a field, which you want to display from the LOV. 7. To change the position of a field in the Quick Ship window, you can use anyone of the following methods.  Click on the field to be moved. Click (M) Folder and click on Move Right, Move Left, Move Up, and Move Down to move to respective position.  Right click on the field to be moved. Select the Folders option in the popment, and click on Move Right, Move Left, Move Up, and Move Down to move to respective position. Creating New Folder 8. (M) Folder > New 9. Enter XX-Folder in the Folder field. 10. Select the Show Additional Delivery to display the Additional tab. 11. Select the Show Trip Information to display the Trip tab 12. (M) File > Save.
  • 153. Practice - Order to Cash Cycle with Standard Items Overview In this practice, you will learn how to create orders with a standard item. Please note that you will be completing an order to cash cycle with a standard item using all the seeded data available in the environment. Examples of seeded data are: Order Type, Customer, Price List, Item, etc. Tasks Create an order to cash lifecycle 1. Create an order. 2. Save and book the order. 3. Pick release the order. 4. Ship confirm the order. 5. Use AutoInvoice to create an invoice for the order. Create an order 1. Navigate to the Quick Sales Orders window: 2. (N) Orders,Returns > Quick Sales Orders 3. Create an order for Computer Service and Rental:  Customer: Advanced Network Devices ( )  Order Type: SH-Mixed 4. Verify the following on the Main tab and Others tab (if the field is not visible on the window, you can folder-enable it):  Operating Unit = should be Vision Operations  Shipping Method: DHL  Warehouse: SH1  Price List: SH-Price List 1  Ship To and Bill To Address should default depending on the Customer Name/Number field value 5. Enter Order Line Information:  Ordered Item: DD-00100-0105-01 , DD-00020-0110-01  Qty: 10  Shipping Method: DHL 6. Save your work. The Status on the line should display as Entered. 7. Book the Order using (B) Book Order. 8. Note: Click (M) Tools > Workflow Status to see the status of the flow. Click (B) View Diagram on the Workflow Status HTML page to see the order processes and activities. A green line around an activity (represented by a box) indicates that the activity is in progress. Close the Workflow Status window to return to the Quick Sales Orders window.
  • 155. Pick Release the order 9. (N) Shipping > Release Sales Orders 10. Enter the order number in the Order Number field. 11. The Customer and Order Type fields get populated based on the Order Number field value. 12. Click (T) Inventory. Set Auto Allocate to Yes. (From Release Rule)
  • 156. 13. Click (T) Shipping. Set Auto Pick Confirm and Autocreate Delivery to Yes. 14. Click (B) Execute Now to pick release and pick confirm the order.
  • 157. Ship Confirmation 15. Open the Shipping > Shipping Transactions window. 16. The Query Manager window opens. Enter your order number in the fields From Order Number and To Order Number. Select no value in the Line Status field.
  • 158. 17. Click Find to find your order. 18. The Shipping Transactions window opens to display your order details with the statuses.
  • 159. The Order Line Status Backordered Because No On Hand In Inventory Shipping Organization Mack Miscellaneous Receipt For Items You Want Shipped Pick Release again The Line Status Is Ready To Release You Must Go To Inventory To Transact Move Order
  • 160. Find SO Number Cause #1: The rules are not yet visible though they are created. This could be because they are not enabled, or because the "Generate All Rules" concurrent program (WMSGRULE) was not run.
  • 161. SOLUTION For Cause #1: Sometimes the enabled flag on the rule or association is not checked. Other times the Rules were not generated. 1. Review each Picking Rule defined in Inventory > Setup > Rules > Picking Rules. 2. Ensure each rule is enabled. 3. Press the associations and ensure that each association is enabled. 4. Run the "Generate All Rules" concurrent program (WMSGRULE). Note: If your responsibility does not have this, you could add it to your responsibility using System Administrator > Security > Responsibility > Define. Query your responsibility and see what your request set is. Then choose System Administrator > Security > Responsibility > Request, query your request group name, add a row for the program "Generate All Rules". 19. Click on the Delivery, Path by Stop and Path by Trip tabs. The delivery and trip should have been autocreated. If not, use the Actions LOV to Auto-Create Deliveries, Auto-Create Trip.
  • 162. 20. Navigate to the (T) Delivery tab. Click (B) Ship Confirm.
  • 163. select trigger_name,status,owner from dba_triggers where trigger_name like '%ADS_WSH_DELIVERY_DET_TRG1%'; alter trigger ADS_WSH_DELIVERY_DET_TRG1 disable; 21. Accept all other defaults. Click (B) Ok. 22. You will get a message that the delivery was successfully confirmed. Click Ok and close the Shipping Transactions window. Verifying Status 23. Open the Quick Sales Orders window to check the status of your order. It should display as Shipped. 24. Click (M) Tools > Workflow Status to see the current status of your order. Click (B) View Diagram to see the diagrammatic representation of the order flow. When a workflow activity (represented by a box) is enclosed with a green line, it implies that the activity is in progress. Viewing the Shipping Details from the Quick Sales Orders window
  • 164. 25. Click (B) Actions > Additional Line Information to view the delivery and trip information and status. Order Header Main Tab Line Status Additional Line Information Booked Shipped Delivery Status = Closed Picked Status = Shipped Trip Status = Closed Interfacing to Receivables using the Workflow Background Process concurrent program 26. From the Quick Sales Orders window, navigate to (M) View > Requests. Click (B) Submit a New Request (single request) and select the concurrent request Workflow Background Process. Enter the following as parameters:  Parameters window:  Item Type: OM Order Line  Process Deferred: Yes  Process Timeout: No
  • 165. 27. Click Submit to process your request. You will get a request ID that you can track in the Find Requests window. Click Find to see your request processed. It should complete as Normal. 28. Return to the Quick Sales Orders window. Query for your order by using the F11 key. Enter your order number and use the Ctrl-F11 keys to get the query results. Though your order status still displays as Booked, the line status should show up as Closed. Shipping Transition Form Line Status
  • 166. Run AutoInvoice 29. Navigate to (N) Receivables > Interfaces > AutoInvoice. Click (B) Submit a New Request and then select a single request when prompted. The concurrent programs window opens to enable you to run AutoInvoice. 30. In the Name field select the AutoInvoice Master Program and enter the following parameters when the parameters window pops up:  Parameters for AutoInvoice:  Organization: All  Invoice Source: ORDER ENTRY  Date: your current date  (Low) Sales Order Number: Look for your sales order number in the LOV and select it  (High) Sales Order Number: Look for your sales order number in the LOV and select it
  • 167. 31. Click Ok and return to the main window. Click Submit to run AutoInvoice. You will be given a request ID, which you can use to track the status of your request. It should complete as normal.
  • 168. Viewing your Invoice details 32. (N) Quick Order Organizer. Enter your order number and click (B) Find. When your order appears in the result list, click (B) Actions > Additional Order Information > (T) Invoices / Credit Memos. 33. Click (B) Invoice Details to view the invoice that has been autocreated from your order.
  • 170. Practice - Customizing the Quick Sales Orders Window Overview In this practice you will learn how to customize the Quick Sales Orders window.  Open the Quick Sales Orders window  Use the Folder Tool  Enable Diagnostics  Personalize the Quick Sales Orders window  Tasks  1. Login to the database with the login and password that you created in the previous practice.  2. Choose the responsibility Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA).  3. Create a folder at the header and line level using the Folder tool.  4. Enable Diagnostics.  5. Personalize the Quick Sales Orders window. Choose Responsibility 1. Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility is selected. Customize the Quick Sales Orders window 2. (N) > Orders,Returns > Quick Sales Orders 3. Place your cursor on any of the header fields and then select (M) Folder > New or (I) Folder Tools > (I) New. 4. The following window opens:
  • 171. 5. Enter the following:  Folder - a name for the header level folder, replacing XX with your initials.  Autoquery – Never  Open as default – selected  Public – selected  Others tab (Others box) – selected  Configure Buttons block – you need to display the Actions button in the window, so select the Display box of the Actions entry in the Action Name column  Click OK to save and return to the Quick Sales Orders window  Verify the following: your new folder name, Others tab, Actions button – should be visible on the window 6. Place your cursor at a line level field and re-open the Quick Sales Orders window: (M) Folder > New or (I) Folder Tools > (I) New. Note: Enter the order type and customer name in the header so that you can navigate to the lines region. 7. Enter the following:  Folder – enter the folder name, replacing XX with your initials  Autoquery – Never  Open as default – selected  Public – selected  Line Tabs block – select all the tabbed regions that you wish to see in the window  Line Details (Regions) – select all the regions that you wish to use in the window (these are accessible by clicking on the icon at the bottom right of the window – this expands to show the details of the selected region)
  • 172. 8. Save your work and return to the Quick Sales Orders window. 9. Verify the following: your new folder name, all tabs in the Lines block, Regions – should be visible on the window. Personalize the windowusing Forms Personalization 10. With the Quick Sales Orders window open, navigate to the Personalizations window: (M) Help > Diagnostics > Custom Code > Personalize 11. If there are seeded Personalizations already in the window, do not modify them. 12. Enter a short description in the Description column, “Workflow Status menu”. Select the Level as Function and select the Enabled box. 13. (T) Condition: Select the Trigger Event as WHEN-NEW-FORM-INSTANCE with a processing mode of BOTH. 14. (T) Actions: Enter the following: a. Seq: 1
  • 173. b. Type: Menu c. Description: wf menu d. Language: All e. Enabled box: selected 15. Menu Entry: SPECIAL2: 16. Menu Label: Workflow Status 17. (B) Validate. 18. (B) Apply Now. 19. Close the Personalizations form and return to the Quick Sales Orders window. 20. Close the Quick Sales Orders window and reopen it. Check if the Workflow Status menu option is now available in the Tools menu. Use the Specials Menus to add some menu option to your Quick Sales Order window. The list is below: Function Special Menu # Find Customer SPECIAL1 Workflow Status SPECIAL2 Price Debug SPECIAL3 AutoSchedule SPECIAL4 User Sets SPECIAL5 Purge SPECIAL6 Show Line Details SPECIAL7 Item Search SPECIAL8 Quick Customer Entry SPECIAL9 Debug SPECIAL10 Apply Holds SPECIAL11 Mass Change SPECIAL12
  • 175. Scheduling in the Sales Orders Scheduling Activity The Schedule function can be performed anywhere in a process flow according to yourbusiness needs.If you want to setup sche duling to run automatically, you can set it as a synchronous function within the workflow process so it will happen automatically. The profile option OM: Autoschedule should be set to Yes. Or the user can schedule manually directly from the sales orders window. See Scheduling for details on scheduling setup.
  • 176. Practice - Using Scheduling in the Sales Orders Window Overview In this practice, you will learn how to schedule an order both manually and automatically. Your customer XX-Big City Electronics wants to order 15 units of item XX-Phone, 45 days from today’s date. Assumptions  Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations responsibility  Prior practices are completed. Practices build on earlier exercises.  You must have access to an Oracle Application Vision database or comparable training or test instance at your site on which to complete this practice.  You have set the following profile option: OM: AutoSchedule = No  You have set the following system parameter. Setup-> System Parameters -> Values Reservation Time Fence = 30 * The Time Fence Reservations are performed automatically whenever a line is scheduled and the schedule date is within the reservation time fence. For example, suppose the today's date is November 25th. An order line is scheduled for December 1st, which is 6 days away. If the reservation time fence is 10, the line will be reserved because 6 < 10. If the reservation time fence is 2, the line will not be reserved because 6 > 2. If the reservation time fence is NULL,then lines will not be automatically reserved. The reservation time fence is set using the system parameter Reservation Time Fence. Reservations Time Fence is affected by the scheduling parameters,Allow Partials. If you want the reservation time fence to reserve as much as possible, even though full supply is not available, set the scheduling parameter to allow partials. Creating a Sales Order Responsibility = Oracle Management Super User, Vision Operations 1. Navigate to the Sales Orders window.  (N) Orders, Returns > Sales Orders 2. (T) Order Information, (T) Main: Customer = XX-Big City Electronics Order Type = Mixed
  • 177. Price List = Corporate 3. (T) Line Items, (T) Main: Ordered Item = DD-00010-0040-01 Qty = 100 Request Date = Today’s Date + 45 days Line Type = Standard (Header Invoicing) Checking Item Availability 4. Select the order line for item DD-00010-0040-01.
  • 178. 5. (B) Availability. In the Availability window, confirm that the item quantity you want is available. If the available quantity is sufficient, you can continue to the scheduling task. Scheduling the Order Line 6. (M) Tools > Scheduling > Schedule. 7. (B) OK. 8. (T) Line Items, (T) Shipping. Note: Notice that the schedule ship date has been set to the request date.
  • 179. Reserving the Order Line 9. From the Tools menu, select Scheduling > Reserve. Check The On-hand Item Status Before And After Reservation Item Code = DD-00010-0040-01
  • 180. 10. Click OK. 11. On the Shipping tab note that the Qty Reserved field shows the reserved quantity. 12. (I) Save. Using the Auto Scheduling Feature 13. (M) Tools > Auto Schedule (Ensure Auto Schedule is selected) 14. (I) New: Item = XX-Phone Card Qty = 2 15. (I) Save. 16. (T) Line Items, (T) Shipping.
  • 181. Notice that the Qty Reserved field has been automatically entered for item XX-Phone Card.
  • 182. Sales Quotes in Oracle Order Management. NegotiationinOrder Management Overview Order Management provides an end to end solution for processing a simple Quote through the negotiation process and automating the transition of the document to fulfillment. This process reduces administration expenses, and increases productivity in an environment geared for rapid response to the customer base. A quote can pass through various stages from its initial preparation to fulfillment (as a Sales or Sales Agreement). These stages include preparation of a draft; negotiation with the customer; internal and external business approvals; versioning based on customer feedback and conversion to an order or archival as an unsuccessfulorunused quote.Negotiation in Order Management provides a seamless flow from a quote status through to firm order. Negotiation:  Prepares and publishes quotes for assisted selling of products and services to customers and business partners.  Creates and manage quotes as a negotiation tool and transition the quote to a firm order acting as a single point of entry in to Order Management.  Allows quick entry of order lines with a minimum of data entry. Quoting processes the quote and submits to Oracle Order Management a firm order complete with approvals (Internal/External). Relevant information captured by the quote flows th rough to the order. You can use quoting to:  Create, modify and select quotes.  Configure Complex Products.  Manually adjust quote prices.  Perform real time global availability checks.  Calculate taxes  Assign sales Credits  Convert quotes to orders.  Support E-Business requirements.  Reduce administration expenses and increase productivity. Oracle Order Management includes a workflow phase to support the activities that typically occur within a negotiation process ,such as internal approval and customer acceptance.This allows you to create and manage quotes during the negotiation phase and t ransition the quote to a firm order. Features include:  A separate menu option for entering Quotes  Date Expiration  Pricing and Availability queries  Copy support  Defaulting of attributes that can affect a quote  Display of Related Items, such as up-sell, cross-sell or substitute items, and their price and availability  Integration with Pricing  Integration with TCA  Minimal data entry that can be processed through to Oracle Order Management as a firm order complete with approvals (Internal/External). Relevant information captured by the quote flows through to the order.  Change Management using Processing Constraints and versioning  Automated Process definition—workflows can be defined and extended.  Visibility through the Order Information Portal Miscellaneous Both Quotes and SAs use the same seeded Negotiation workflows. After Customer Acceptance,Quotes transition to a sales order and Sales Agreements become Active. SAs do not capture an Offer Expiration date and therefore do not leverage this functionality in the Negotiation flow. Unsupported Features The functionality supported with Quotes is similar to the level of support for Sales Orders. There are a few Sales Order feat ures that are not available during the negotiation phase of a transaction including:  Holds  Scheduling
  • 183.  Copy a return from a quote.  Independent line flows  Cancellations – progress to LOST Status  Ship and Arrival Sets  Commitments  Quotes for returns or Internal Sales Orders  Sales Agreements - Can specify sales agreement reference on a quote but released quantity and released amount on a sales agreement are updated only when a quote is converted to an order Setup Transaction Type To create a Transaction Type 1. Set up the transaction type.See Transaction Types for generic setup instructions. Note : that when the transaction type contains both a fulfilment and negotiation phase there are some additional implementation considerations associated with set up. These impact when and how document numbers are generated by document sequencing. On the transaction type set up form there is a check box for retain Document Number. When an order type is created two categories are created. Depending upon the value of Retain Document Number the following steps need to be taken. SH Qut To So 2. If you want to keep the document number from the quote when the transaction moves to fulfilment, use the category appended with “TTXXX-Quote” when creating and assigning document sequencing. 3. If you need to generate a new document number for the transaction in the fulfilment phase,two document sequences need to be set up: o One for fulfilment, using the category with no appending text “TTXXX” o One for the category appended with “-Quote”. If this is not set up correctly then the document will not transition to fulfilment because the document cannot be assigned a Sales Order Number. NOTE: Retain Document Number check box applies only to transaction types with Sales Document Type of Sales Ord er. Sales Agreements have only one document number, Sales Agreement Number, associated with the transaction irrespective of whether agreement is in negotiation or fulfillment phase. 4. Then optionally assign a default transaction phase. The transaction phase defaults to either Negotiation or Fulfillment based on Order Management defaulting rules when the quick sales or standard sales order form is opened. The transaction phase always defaults to Negotiation independent of the default ing rules when the form is opened through the Quotes menu option. If the transaction phase defaults to Negotiation, only the transaction types that also have a negotiation workflow associated with it are displayed. In the absence of a default, the fulfillment phase is automatically populated by the system.
  • 184. Note: The transaction phase can be changed up to the point of saving the transaction or before lines are entered.Once the trans action is saved or lines are entered,the transaction phase cannot be changed and the transaction phase field is non-updatable. You can set the transaction phase directly on the sales document; the transaction phase determines where in the workflow the transaction starts.Using a single transaction type you can choose to begin the transaction process in either phase if both fulfillment and negotiation workflow assignments exist on that transaction type. Note: While Sales Orders lines are assigned a line type through which the transaction is processed,quotes and SAs do not use line types and follow a header flow only. Transaction type designed for use with Sales documents For example in addition to header and line block data: SA uses the following settings on the transaction types: Document numbering Flow assignments Layout and contract templates. Transaction phase Quotes use: Retain document number Header flow assignment Transaction phase Layout and contract templates. Workflows Quotes and Sales Agreements leverage the flexibility of Workflow to manage the quote life cycle. There are two phases for workflow: Negotiation and Fulfillment. Workflow flexibility allows you to tailor your Negotiation and Fulfillment phases to your specific processes. You can choose one of the following generic seeded header-level negotiation flows, these flows can be associated to transaction types for both Sales Orders and Sales Agreements. Both can be converted to an order. Quotes can be converted to sales orders in either the Entered or Booked status (if the booking activity is synchronous).The seeded workflows are as follows:  Negotiation Flow - Simple :This workflow does not require any approvals nor customer acceptance.However the quote can either expire or get lost if it does not progress to being converted to an order.  Negotiation Flow—Generic: Simple negotiation flow, without approval. Prepares quote document, get customer final acceptance, convert quote to the Sales Order.  Negotiation Flow—Generic with Approval: Flow with Approval. Prepare quote document, get management approval, get customer final acceptance,and convert the quote to an order.
  • 185. In support of a quote the following Status types are predefined:  Draft  Pending Internal Approval  Lost  Pending Customer Acceptance  Draft Submitted  Internal Approved  Customer Accepted  Offer Expired - This status does not apply to Sales Agreements.  Draft - Customer Accepted  Draft - Customer Rejected Seededworkflow that incorporates Internal Approval and customer acceptance After a quote has been put together, it can be submitted for approval. The relevant documents can be routed to various people in the organization, including people from Sales, Business Practice,Legal, or Finance, for review. The list of approvers is defined at the Transaction Type level. The document must be approved by each participant in the list before the transaction is eligible to move forward in the workflow. If the approver fails to respond within the time limit, the system will re-send the notification. If the approver again fails to respond, the system will either send the notification to the next approver (if the current approver is not the last approver), or reject the notification based on the system parameter setup. The Approver List can be accessed two ways: 1. From the Transaction Type setup window: (N) > Orders, Returns > Setup > Transaction Type > Define. Select the Approvals button to bring up the Approver List. 2. Navigate directly to the window: (N) > Orders,Returns > Setup > Transaction Type > Approvals. If an approver is deleted from the list the notifications still need to be processed. If an approver is added to the list and any transaction is pending approval they will receive a notification. The user will receive a notification and must approve or reject.
  • 186. Practice Quotes Functionality. Topics that I will cover here are 1. Setup 2. Defaulting Rule & Generation of Defaulting Rule (When Required). 3. Profile setup. 4. Transaction Type. Data Flow from Quotes to OM Order. Oracle Quotes offers limited capability to create Quotes and Progress it through the Negotiation phase and finally creates Sales Order . In case your Organization has complex / advance quoting needs you should Implement Oracle Sales Quoting. One of advantage of Sales Quoting is that it enhance userexperience , since it is part of OM , it retrieve all the relevant information from the Order management and once created and approved it creates Sales Order without much input from user. In Oracle OM Quotes, Oracle has provided Negotiation , Customer Acceptance and Sale Order creation feature. Following are features introduced in Oracle Quotes 1.Seeded Work flow ( Oracle has Introduced 2 worklfows ). Workflow has introduced for the Order Header Type Only (OENH) , there is no Workflow for the Quote Lines.  Negotiation Flow - Generic - It Support Negotiation , Customer Acceptance and Conversion of negotiation into Sales Order  Negotiation Flow - Generic with Approval - It Supports Negotiation , Internal Approval , Customer Acceptance and finally conversion into Sales Order. With these workflow customer has flexibility to customized their Quotes process by adding or removing Fun ctions. 2.Quote Expiration Date - Every Quote has expiration date , once expiration date reached , Quote will be expired and Quote Headre workflow is eligible for Purge. SETUP 1.Transaction Type Setup
  • 187. Set Document Sequence 2.Defaulting Rule Setup - This Defaulting Setup is required to populate the Transaction phase = " Negotiation " in Order Header Form. Note: Common Mistake in these area are (User forgot to generate the defaulting Rule after enabling this Rule).
  • 188. 3.Profile Setup - this is Not a required setup , unless their is business requirement .We can leave this as blank. 4.Transaction Types - Oracle has introduce following New transaction types for Quotes Draft, Pending Internal Approval, Approved,Lost, Pending Customer Approval, Accepted Data Flow for OM Quotes Create Quote - User Interface Similar to OM. When you save Quote , Quote status will be "Draft" and it indicate the Negotiation Phase. Enter line details for quote , there will be no Line level workflow associated with Quote lines.
  • 189. Quote Header Workflow is in Submit Draft Eligible Notified Status. Once the Negotiation Process is complete , Progress the Quote header from the Negotiation Phase
  • 190. Quote status will be now "Pending Customer Approval". Once receive confirmation from customer regarding Approval /rejection , approve or reject the quote.
  • 191. Once Quote is Approve , It automatically converted in Sales order . System will Automatically Assign the Order Header level and line level workflow to Sales Order and Lines. Order Header Workflow will be at "BOOK - ELIGIBLE" Notified and Order Line Workflow will be at "Wait for Booking" Notified
  • 192. Difference between back to back and drop shipment flow in Order management Conceptual Difference: Back to back flow - A business scenario where the material is specially purchased for a particular sales order and the material needs to be received Into one ofThe warehouses ofthe selling group ofcompanies,is referred as "Back to back" cycle. Back to back Purchase order is hard linked to the sales order until it is received. Please note highlighted words here. Since, the material is received into the warehouse,the sales order needs to follow additional picking/packing/shipping process only after which the goods are sent to the customer. Drop Shipment flow - A business scenario where the material is specially purchased for a particular sales order and the material is directly sent from the supplier to the customer,is referred as "Drop Shipment" cycle. Drop shipment purchase order is also hard linked to the sales order until is received. However,in this case the material is never received in the internal warehouse. Also, no additional picking/packing/shipping is involved by the selling company. Hence, when such purchase order is received it is directly shipped without any physical shipping process. Technical different in Oracle Phase Back to back Drop shipment Sales orderline source Sales order line ORDER SOURCE shouldbe internal Sales order line ORDER SOURCE shouldbe External Import purchase requisitions Back to back requisitiondatais immediatelypumpedinto requisition interface table afterPROGRESSORDER actionin sales order Drop Ship requisitiondata is NOT immediatelypumpedinto requisition interface table afterPROGRESSORDER actionin sales order. Workflowbackgroundprocess needs to be run to insert data intorequisition interface tables Reservations Back to back purchase requisition is reservedtothe sales order in MTL_RESERVATIONStable. Same process is followingby oracle for all sales order reservations. Drop ship requisition is reservedtothe sales order in special table calledOE_DROP_SHIP_SOURCES. This is a unique process followedonlyfordrop shipment Purchase orders It does not have “DropShip” tabin the PO Shipments form It has “Drop Ship” tabin the PO Shipments form Purchase orderdelivery location Deliver To location in purchase ordershipment is set tothe internal warehouse address Deliver to locationin purchase order shipment is set to “CustomerShip Toaddress” Sales orderline status Line status changes on Progress Order, RequisitionCreation, Purchase Order Approval & Purchase orderreceipts e.g. Requisition Requested, Requisition Open,PO Open Line status does NOT change on Progress Order andPurchase Order Approval. E.g. AwaitingReceipts – only status until PO is received ViewingPO reservations Available in sales order line-Actions>Reservationdetails screen Available in Sales order line->Actions->AdditionalLine information PO receipt Physical receipt ofthe material happens Only logical receipt ofthe material Flow of purchased material Material is receivedinside the warehouse andthenshipped Material is neverreceivedin the warehouse, it is shipped directly fromsuppliertothe customer After receipt Stock of the goods receivedincreases, stockgets reservedto the sales order automatically Sales order status changes to “AwaitingShipping” Stock is receivedandimmediatelyshippedout by the system. Sales order status changes directlyto“Shipped” Sales orderdelivery lines/delivery Delivery lines are createdin shippingwhen PO is received No delivery lines are created, since shippingprocess in the system is skipped
  • 195. Drop Ship Setup Steps 1-Create Transactions Type (Sales Order Type) 2-Defaulting Rules (Source Type) 3-Profile Options 4-Create New Buyer 5-Create New Item 6-Reciving Options (Clearing Account) 7-Drop Ship Test Cycle 1-OM: Setup ->Transactions Types ->Define Transaction Type = SH Drop Ship Define Item Attribute
  • 197. Drop Ship Line Status Flow • Entered • Booked • Purchase Release: Item requires inspection before Purchasing can create a receipt • Awaiting Receipt: Purchasing creates a receipt of the item • Interfaced to Receivables • Closed OM: Order, Returns -> Requisitions Import Parameter Import Source :ORDER ENTERY Group By : Buyer
  • 198. Convert this PR(Drop ship) to Po
  • 202. Practice - Creating a Drop Ship Order Overview In this practice you will learn how to setup and create a Drop Ship Order. The line item will ship directly from your supplier in an operating unit to your customer’s ship to address in another operating unit.  Perform the necessary setup steps for Drop Shipment across operating units  Enter and book an order with a drop ship order line  View the order processing in the workflow status window and progress the order through purchase release  Run the requisition import concurrent program to generate a purchase requisition  Autocreate a purchase order from the sales order (purchase requisition)  Create a logical receipt for the quantity ordered  View the quantities received in the Drop Ship tab, thereby completing the Drop Ship Order creation cycle Tasks 1. Login to the database and navigate to the Sales Orders window. 2. Use the following header information for your drop shipment order:  Operating Unit: Vision Operations  Customer Name: Business World (1608)  Customer PO: XX-015  Order Type: Mixed  (T) Others > Warehouse: D1 3. Use the following line information for your order:  Ordered Item: AS54888  Qty: 2  Price List: Corporate  Receiving Org: D1  Source Type: External Profile Option for Inter-Company Invoicing 1. Set the profile option INV:Advanced Pricing for Intercompany Invoice = No. This is set as a personal level profile option. 2. Switch responsibility to Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA). 3. (N) Inventory > Setup > Organizations > Intercompany Transaction Flows  Start Operating Unit: Vision Operations  End Operating Unit: Singapore Distribution Center  Type: Procuring  Ship From/To Organization: D1 At the Nodes level, enter the following:  Seq: 1  From Operating Unit: Vision Operations  To Operating Unit: Singapore Distribution Center
  • 203. 4. Click (B) Intercompany Relations. Enter the following information in the window:  Customer: Vision  Number: 1021  Location: 5490  Transaction Type: Invoice  COGS Account: 01-580-7740-000-000  Supplier: Vision  Site: New York  Inventory Accrual Account: 01-000-1810-0000-000  Expense Accrual Account : 01-000-1110-0000-000 5. Save your work. The setup steps for drop ship are complete.
  • 204. Drop Shipments Flow 6. Change Responsibility to Order Management Super User, Vision Operations USA. 7. Enter the sales order header information:  Operating Unit: Vision Operations  Customer Name: Business World (1608)  Customer PO: SH-015  Order Type: SH-Mixed  (T) Others > Warehouse: D1
  • 205. 8. Enter line information:  Ordered Item: AS54888  Qty: 2  Price List: Corporate  Receiving Org: D1  Source Type: External 9. (B) Book the Order. 10. Write your sales order number: 20140007 .
  • 206. 11. Check the workflow status in the (M) Tools > Workflow Status page. Verify that the order line has been Purchase Released. If not, use the (B) Actions > Progress Order option or the Workflow Background Process concurrent program to progress the order to complete Purchase Release. The parameters that you will need for the Workflow Background Process are:  Item Type: OM Order Line  Process Deferred: Yes  Process Timeout: Yes 12. The status of the order line will change to Awaiting Receipt. 13. The workflow status of the line is below. (M) Tools > Workflow Status
  • 207. Run the Requisition Import concurrent program Note: Please use the Purchasing option / responsibility’s Reports > Run functionality and not Order Management’s. 14. (N) Purchasing 15. (M) View > Requests  Name: Requisition Import  Operating Unit: Singapore Distribution Center (D1)  Parameters window: Import Source: Order Entry (optional)
  • 208. 16. (B) Submit. 17. View the purchase requisition in the sales orders window. (N) Orders, Returns > Quick Sales Orders. Click the Lines region and click (B) Actions > Additional Line Information. The Drop Ship tab will show the purchase requisition with an approved status. 18. Enter the purchase requisition number____________________. Autocreate Purchase Order 19. Change to Purchasing. (N) Purchasing > Autocreate
  • 209. 20. Click (B) Clear and then enter the purchase requisition number from the above step and click (B) Find to display the requisition. 21. The search results open in the AutoCreate Documents page: 22. Select the requisition or requisitions that you require by clicking the box on the left of the Requisition column. Click (B) Automatic. 23. In the New Document window, select the supplier as Vision and supplier site as NEW YORK.
  • 210. 24. Click (B) Approve to approve the purchase order when the Purchase Order window appears. Note: Please ensure that the Submit for Approval box is selected. 25. (N) Receiving > Receipts 26. Enter the Purchase Order number that you created in Step 24. Enter the following information in the Receipts window: 27. Receipt Header window: Select the Create New Receipt radio button.
  • 211. 28. Receipts window:  Quantity: 5  Destination Type: Inventory  Subinventory: Drop Ship 29. Save your work and close the Receipts window. Verifying that the order has been dropped shipped 30. (N) Orders, Returns > Quick Sales Orders 31. Query for your order number using the F11+Ctrl-F11 keys.
  • 212. 32. Select (T) Line Items. Choose (B) Actions > Additional Line Information. 33. In (T) Drop Ship, the quantity reserved will be 5. This completes the drop shipment across operating units cycle.
  • 213. Guided Demonstration – Creating Back to Back Orders Setups for Back-to-Back Orders – Item Attributes Note: Use Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) or comparable Super User Order Management responsibility. 1. Create an item using the Inventory > Items > Master Items. 2. Select the Vision Operations (V1) organization if prompted. 3. Setup Item Attributes for a standard item SH-FG2. 4. The item type for the item SH-FG2 should display a value Finished Goods and an Item Status of Active. Enter the following attributes in each of the tabs indicated below:  (T) Purchasing – Select Purchasable box. Enter a list price in the List Price field.  (T) General Planning – Select Buy in the Make or Buy LOV  (T) Work in Process – Select Build in WIP box  (T) Order Management – Select Customer Ordered box and Assemble to Order box 5. The profile option MRP:Default Sourcing Assignment Set should be set to Null or any %Supplier% value. 6. Add the item SH-FG2 to the Corporate pricelist. (N) Pricing > Price List Setup.
  • 214. Create an order 7. Navigate to the Quick Sales Orders window: 8. (N) Orders,Returns > Quick Sales Orders. Create a sales order for Business World:  Customer: Business World (1608)  Order Type: SH-Mixed  Warehouse: SH1  Operating Unit: Vision Operations 9. Verify the following on the Main tab and Others tab (if the field is not visible on the window, you can folder-enable it):  Operating Unit = should be Vision Operations  Warehouse: SH1  Price List: Corporate 10. Enter Order Line Information:  Ordered Item: SH-FG2  Qty: 100  ATO box should be checked. Use the (M) Folder > Show Field option to display the ATO check box. 11. Save your work. The Status on the line should display as Entered. 12. Book the Order using (B) Book Order. Note: The Process Messages window may display with some warnings. Click (B) Continue.
  • 216. Note: Click (M) Tools > Workflow Status to see the status ofthe flow. Click (B) View Diagram on the Workflow Status HTML page to see the order processes and activities. A green line around an activity (represented by a box) indicates that the activity is in progress.When you book the order, the line status is Create Supply Eligible.
  • 217. 13. When you progress the order ((B) Actions > Progress Order), the line status is PO Requisition Requested. 14. Close the Workflow Status window to return to the Quick Sales Orders window. Run Requisition Import (N) Orders,Returns > Requisition Import  Import Source: CTO  Group By: Item  Multiple Distributors: No  Initiate Approval after re-import: Yes
  • 218. After the concurrent request is processed successfully, the Sales Orders line shows External Req Open.
  • 219. Find the PO Requisition 15. (N) Purchasing > Requisitions > Requisition Summary 16. Clear all fields and enter CTO in the Import Source field. The Requisition Headers Summary window displays.
  • 220. 17. The Approval Status should be Approved. Verify that the line information corresponds to that in the sales orders window. AutoCreate the Purchase Order 18. (N) Purchasing > AutoCreate 19. In the Find Requisitions window, click (B) Clear and enter the PO Requsition number you created in Step 20140022. 20. In the AutoCreate Documents window that displays, verify the requisition details and click (B) Automatic to create the purchase order. 21. Enter the following in the window:  Supplier: Elshayeb Corporation  Source: NEW YORK
  • 221. Approve PO 22. Note: The line status of the sales order is PO Open. 23. (N) Purchasing > Receiving > Receipts 24. (B) Clear. Enter the PO Number and click (B) Find. 25. The Receipts window opens with the PO details. 26. Select the (T) Lines and enter Stores as the Subinventory value. (I) Save.
  • 222. 27. Note: If the value of the Subinventory field is blank, you can populate it by updating the value of the Subinventory field in the Receiving Transactions window. (N) Purchasing > Receiving > Receiving Transactions. 28. Note: The line status on the Sales Order is Awaiting Shipping. Creating Material Transactions 29. (N) Inventory > Transactions > Material Transactions 30. The following information is displayed:  Item: SH-FG2  Source Type: Purchase Order  Source: 20140021  Transaction Type: PO Received  Transaction Action: Receipt in Stores
  • 223. The Quantity Reserved To SO Number 20140008 31. Check the on-hand quantity in the Quick Sales Orders window, it should be 100. 32. Pick Release the order. 33. Ship Confirm the order.
  • 224. Sales Agreements Overview Sales Agreements are used when you have specific characteristics related to a purchasing agreement between a customer and a supplier. These characteristics include the date range of the agreement, the items included, the price of the items, the quantity of each item that the parties committed to, as well as otherattributes, like freight or payment terms. Once a Sales Agreement is entered for a customer, multiple releases (sales orders) against the Sales Agreement are processed overa period of time within Order Management. The order is fulfilled and billed according to the terms of the Sales Agreement. Tracking information will also be accumulated for Sales Agreements, such as,quantity fulfilled, and dollar value fulfilled o f released lines. This information is used to view status of orders executed against a Sales Agreement. Sales Agreement functionality includes the following: • New windows: Find Sales Agreements, Sales Agreements Summary, and Sales Agreements windows • Captures agreement information • Enforce sales agreements terms such as: price list, shipping method, payment terms, ship to, bill to. • Ability to secure who can enter Sales Agreements • Specify defaulting rules for sales agreement attributes for releases • Ability to create non-customer specific Sales Agreements • Default information from the Sales Agreement to the release • Support Standard, ATO items, Kits, Services, and other items • Support Item Categories and all items • Ability to create releases by Order Import and Process Order API • View releases of Sales Agreements • Process the releases against the Sales Agreement • Aggregate information about the releases and access that consolidated information from the Sales Agreement • Integrations with Advanced Pricing and Release Management • Effectivity dates of the agreement • Inline Pricing • Enhanced sales documents with Preview and Print • Ability to terminate a Sales Agreement • Workflows: • Negotiation and Fulfillment flows • Automatically attach Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) of current SA for Approvers to reference easily • Quality Assurance (QA) validation for contractual terms and conditions included in Negotiation flow • Draft, Internal Approval, Customer Acceptance,Terminate, Expire, Lost, and Close • Internal Approvals • Create Internal ApproverList • Processes: • Automatic and Manual Versioning • Customer Acceptance captured • Ability to create customer-specific Price List • Ability to add customer items to a Price List • Ability to authorand negotiate Contract Terms with Oracle Sales Contracts enabled • Configuration support: • Ability to define options and option classes on the Sales Agreement to hold price for configurations on releases • Attachments • Contract Documents • Copy • Security through Processing Constraints Profiles OM: Default Sales Agreement Type This enables the systemto use a common (default) transaction type across Sales Agreements to generate unique sales agreement numbers. There is no default value for this profile option. This profile is seeded as available to setup at the responsibility and site level. In most business processes,the profile option can only be modified by the SystemAdministrator. The profile is visible to the user but not updateable. OM: Default Agreement Transaction Phase This profile enables the systemto use a common transaction phase across Sales Agreements.
  • 225. Defining transaction types for Sales Agreements Navigate to the Transaction Types window to set up transaction types. The three seeded workflows for Sales Agreements are: • Negotiation Flow—Generic: Simple negotiation flow, without approval. Prepares negotiation, no management approval, get customer final acceptance,converts from negotiation phase to fulfillment phase. • Negotiation Flow—Generic with Approval: Flow with approval. Prepares draft, gets management approval, gets customer final acceptance,converts from negotiation phase to fulfillment phase. • Sales Agreement Flow—Generic: Generic fulfillment flow for Sales Agreements. Note the following when setting up a transaction type for Sales Agreement: • Fulfillment Flow: Assign the fulfillment flow. • Negotiation Flow: Assign the optional negotiation flow. • Default Transaction Phase: Transaction phase determines where in the workflow the transaction will start. Select either Fulfillment or Negotiation. The profile OM: Default Sales Agreement Transaction Phase is the preferred source for the transaction default on Sales Agreements. If the profile has not been set,the systemlooks at the transaction phase defined on the transaction type. If neither default is available, the systemuses Fulfillment phase as the default. (Optional) • Layout Template: Assign the layout template that you would like to use when generating a customer facing document to be previewed or printed. See Preview and Print Sales Documents, page 5-29. (Optional) • Contract Template: When Oracle Sales Contracts is enabled, assign a Contract Template to the sales agreement type for defaulting purposes.See Authoring and Negotiating Contract Terms, page 20-15. (Optional) Transaction types can point to the same template or different templates depending on the business process. There is direct access to the Approval List setup from the transaction type. It can also be accessed from the menu. For more information on setting up Approvals,see Defining Approvals,page 2-105 . The Negotiation flow offers Internal Approval as well as Customer Acceptance prior to transitioning the Sales Agreement trans action to Active where releases can be placed against the Sales Agreement. Note: If you want to create an automatic attachment on the workflow notification (to allow approvers to easily view the document), on the transaction itself as a reference in Contract Documents when Oracle Sales Contracts is enabled, or for FND attachments, the workflow must be extended to add the "Sales Agreement/Sales Order Generation" process in between Submit Draft and Internal Approval, and XML Publisher must be installed.
  • 226. Practice - Creating a Sales Agreement Overview In this practice, you will learn how to create a Sales Agreement and also how to create releases against this Sales Agreement. In this practice, the SA creation begins in the Negotiation Phase and the Negotiation Flow selected does not include an approval step.  Create a Sales Agreement  Create a release (sales order) against the Sales Agreement Tasks Create a Sales Agreement (SA) 1. Business World (1608) has contacted you to place a long-term order for item SH-FG2. They wish this to be supplied every week in quantities of 15 for a period of 30 weeks. 2. Create a SA for Business World that incorporates all the conditions for a long-term order. Create a Release against the SA 3. Create one or more sales orders that refer to the SA and track the Released Amount. SA Creation 1. Navigate to the Sales Agreements window: (N) Blanket Agreements > Sales Agreements 2. Create a SA for Business World: Customer: Business World (1608) Sales Agreement Type: SA without Approvals Sales Agreement Name:SH-Blanket Practice Activation Date:enter today’s date Expiration Date:enter the date 8 months from today
  • 227. 3. (T) Pricing in the upper block. Enter the following information: Price List: Corporate. Check box Enforce Price List should be checked. 4. (B) Price List Setup. In (T) List Lines enter the following information: Product Context: Item Product Attribute: Item Number Product Value: SH-FG2 Value: 50 Note: The above image shows the SA window, Pricing tab and above that, the Price Lists window is displayed. 5. Click (I) Save and close the Price Lists window to return to the SA window. 6. In the SA window, in (T) Fulfillment in both the upper and lower regions, enter the following information: Min Quantity Agreed: 15 Max Quantity Agreed: 30 7. In (T) Fulfillment of the lower region, enter the following information: Min Release Quantity: 15 Max Release Quantity: 30 Min Release Amount: 1000 Max Release Amount: 100000
  • 228. 8. In (T) Accounting for both the header and line regions, enter Payment Term of 30 NET and ensure that the Currency is USD. 9. In the lines (lower) region, in (T) Main, enter Item Context as Internal Item Number and Item as SH-FG2 with a UOM of Ea. 10. (I) Save and take note of the Status of the SA. It will appear as Draft. Select Submit Draft from the Actions button to change the status to Pending Customer Acceptance. 11. (B) Actions > Customer Accepted. This will change the Status to Active. Now you can use the Sales Agreement in an order release. 12. Write the name of the SA here 201401. Save your work and close the window. Create Release against SA 13. (N) Blanket Agreements > Sales Agreement Organizer. 14. In the Find Blanket window that opens, enter the Blanket Number that you wrote in Step 9 and then click (B) Find.
  • 229. 15. The Blankets Summary window displays your SA. Click (B) Create Releases to create a sales order against the SA. This will open the Sales Orders window, defaulting most of the information relevant to the SA. Note: Alternatively, you can create a new sales order using the (N) Orders,Returns > Sales Orders option and refer to the SA in the order header. 16. In (T) Line Items, enter SH-FG2 with a quantity of 15.
  • 230. 17. (I) Save. Close the window and return to the Sales Agreement Organizer. Click (B) Open Agreement. 18. In the upper region, go to (T) Fulfillment, you will see the release (sales order) amount in the Summary section in the field Released Amount. The SA is constantly updated to reflect the latest Released Amount with each order created against it.
  • 232. Returns and Credits Overview Oracle Order Management provides Return Materials Authorization (RMA) functionality within the Sales Orders window, where you can enter both standard and return order lines within the same order. RMA is often used interchangeably with Return or Credit Orders and Returned Material. An order can have a mix of outbound (standard)and inbound (return) lines, as restricted by the order type definition. Credit order types can have an order type category as Return or an order with both standard and return lines can have an orde r type category as Mixed. Each order type and each line type is associated with a workflow process. A return line is indicated by Line Type Category of return negative and highlighted item quantity and negative line total. Return Line types can include flows like Return with Approval, or Return for Credit Only, etc. There are three ways to create RMA's within Order Management. First, identify a sales order to be returned and query the order lines. After you have selected the sales order or order lines, use the Copy function in the Actions list to generate the return order or line by specifying an RMA line type. Second,reference a sales order, invoice, PO number or serial number of an item directly in the Return Reference field within the Line Items tab of the Sales Orders window. Lastly, for return without originating sales order line, manually enter return line information and choose the appropriate return line type in the Sales Orders window. Setup Profile Options OM: Return Item Mismatch Action This profile allows a mismatch value between the item on the RMA line and the item on the referenced line. For example, you may need to allow a mismatch when a wrong item is shipped and you want to put the correct item on the RMA line. The seeded value is Allow or no profile option entry will be treated as Allow. OM: Return Unfulfilled Referenced Line Action This profile allows non-fulfilled lines to be used as referenced lines. The seeded value is Allow or no profile option entry will be treated as Allow. OM: Over Return Tolerance This profile option indicates the percentage by which a return line can be over-received. Any value greater than or equal to zero (0) is a valid value. This profile option is set at the site level. The default value is zero (0). OM: Under Return Tolerance This profile option indicates the percentage by which a return line can be under-received for it to be considered fulfilled. Any value between zero (0) and 100 (both inclusive) is a valid value. This profile option is set at the site level. The default value is zero (0). OM: Charges for Back Orders In previous releases, Calculate Price Flag on the split (back order) lines was set to Freeze Price always. Now in the current release, for return lines that are split, this profile option enables you to control the setting of the Calculate Price Flag to calculate, partially calculate or freeze the price. If the Calculate Price Flag is set to Partial, no repricing is carried out and only charges can be applied for return lines. If the Calculate Price Flag is set to Freeze, the return lines are not priced. For a value of Calculate, the return lines are priced. Workflow Order Management comes with seeded Oracle Workflow processes.Review the seeded flows, activities and notifications to determine if the seeded data can meet your business needs. To successfully enter an RMA in OM, you can use the Generic - Order Flow Return with Approval Line Flow - Return for Credit only. Line Flow - Return with Receipt Only, No Credit Note: For Mixed Order types,if the workflow attached is Order Flow Return with Approval, then notifications are sent to the users only if the order contains return lines. The user can also modify existing seeded workflows or create new workflows to include or exclude inspections and/orinvoicing activity. For instance,you can have the Invoicing Activity after the Receiving activity, or you can simply close the line without interfacing data to Receivables. For inspections,a workflow can be setup to process Invoicing once the materials have been received or to wait until inspection has been completed before invoicing is invoked. The seeded workflow will process Invoicing only after the completion of Inspection (delivery) Activity. Also, if any return lines are flagged as non-shippable or non-transactable,the Receiving workflow activity will complete with a Not Eligible result. However, fulfillment of ATO/PTO items is required before crediting the ATO/PTO lines. This is achieved by inserting ATO/PTO lines into Fulfillment sets.This means the ATO/PTO line will wait at fulfillment until all its children are received and reach fulfillment. ATO model line workflow waits until the configured line is shipped and then it progresses furtherno matter whether it is PTO and ATO or only ATO or PTO. With services, OM will use only the seeded "Return for Credit Only" workflow for returning service items when product items are returned. Now, Order Management will use the RMA line to govern full or partial credit to the customer when a product is returned. Install Base will use the information from the RMA product line to determine whether a credit is given.
  • 233. Transaction Types Both order and line transaction types need to be setup in order to process an RMA. When setting up order types,you need to assign order header and line workflows to the order type. Since each line can go through its own flow process,you need to setup workflow assignments to let each line assign its own workflow process. Credit order types have an order type category Return. An order with a Mixed order type category can contain both standard and return lines. Line level workflow processes are assigned based on the order type, line type, and item type combination. When you setup a return order type or mixed order type, you have the option to set a default return line type, so that the user doesn't have to manually choose the line type unless they want it to be different. Refer to the topical essay Using Transaction Types in Oracle Order Management at the end of this manual for details on setting up transaction types. MasterItems Attributes You can create a return line only if an item is Returnable. Therefore, a standard,finished good item should be defined in Oracle Inventory with appropriately set attributes. The best way to create your items is to copy them from the Finished Good seeded template and set additional attributes as needed in the MasterItem window. The key attributes that control the processing ofa returnable item are: • Order Management Tab: Returnable, Shippable and Transactable = Yes, RMA Inspection Required = Yes or No • Receiving Tab: Receipt Routing = Inspection (if required) • Invoicing Tab: Invoicable Item = Yes or No, Invoice Enabled = Yes or No Note: If the Item is not flagged as Returnable, Shippable and Transactable, you cannot receive in Oracle Purchasing's receiving module and if the item is not flagged as Invoicable the return lines will not interface to Receivables. Also, an item can be returnable but not orderable. This is commonly used if a company stops selling an item, but they still want to be able to do returns for it. For lot and/or serial controlled items, Oracle Order Management has the capability to store one or more lot and serial numbers associated with one RMA line. Oracle Order Management does not validate the serial numbers against Inventory serial numbers in the systemor against serial numbers associated with the referenced sales order. Receiving captures the serial numbers of the items at delivery. The Credit Order Discrepancy Report can showthe difference between actually delivered lot/serial numbers and the numbers on the RMA. The sales orders window can capture lot and serial numbers suggested by the customer for the RMA line. For ATO/PTO configurations,only the Returnable configuration lines are displayed on the sales orders window. You need to make sure that the item attributes are set correctly for ATO/PTO children items. Price List Setup In order to price any new items when entering an ordered item on the sales orders window, add the new item to a price list. The item is added to a price list in the Price List Setup window: Pricing > Lists > Price Lists Setup. Query an existing price list or create a new price list. Add a new line, enter the item name, UOM and price and save. The price and UOM will default when entering the item on the order line. When an RMA line is created and the originating transaction is known, the pricing information is populated from the originating order line. The user can change the pricing if needed. The list of values on the Price List will showall the active price lists on the pricing date. Also, ATO configured items and PTO included items should be included on a price list in order to be received and credited. Processing Constraints Order Management has seeded constraints that prevent data integrity problems. For instance,you can prevent change for a line if it has been: Closed Canceled Canceled at order level Shipped Invoiced A return line cannot be canceled after it has been interfaced to Receivables or after it has been received. If your business needs more restrictive rules when processing orders, you can set up rules to control changes oroperations of the order process flow. See Processing Constraints,page 10-1 for details on setting up processing constraints. Return ReasonCodes You can set up your own reason codes in the Receivables QuickCodes window. Navigate to the Order Management responsibility and select the menu: Setup > Quickcodes > Receivables. The Oracle Receivables Lookup window will appear. Query the CREDIT_MEMO_REASON code from the query manager (Flashlight icon). View the existing codes or add a new code. These codes appear in the Return Reason list of values. Reports The Returns by Reason report can be used to view all return reasons setup in the system. You can run the report by Return Reason, Credit Order Date, Credit Order or Line Type and/or Item Number.
  • 234. Freight and Special Charges for Returns When setting up freight or special charges, you can specify if the charge is returnable, meaning the charge may be refunded. When you create a return line from an original order line, you should copy the refundable invoiced charges. You can also setup special charges to be applied specifically to returns,like restocking fees, return handling, damage etc. You can set this through an attribute called Refundable Flag (Include on Returns field) within the Pricing Modifier setup. See Freight and Special Charges, page 3-101 for more information. Process Flow This section will guide you through a basic flow for a Return for Credit with Receipt, from entry to generating a credit memo, including: • Create an RMA having a single line whose originating transaction is unknown • Book the RMA • Receive the RMA using the Receipts window of Oracle Purchasing • Check the on-hand quantity of the item in Inventory to verify that correct quantity was received • Fulfill RMA line • Generate a Credit Memo • View the Credit Memo in Order Management • Check the Shipped and Fulfilled quantity on the RMA line 1. Enter the RMA on the Sales Orders window. Entering a return on the Sales Orders window is exactly the same as entering an order, except at the line level the user specifies the Line Type as a Return and a negative line quantity. Thus,in the Order Information tab of the Sales Orders window, the user will enter the same information (i.e. Customer Name, Order Type, etc.) as a standard order. The Standard order type is assigned to a Generic Order and Line workflow which allows either an order or return to be entered. Refer to the Workflow section for details on the Generic Order and Line workflow for returns. This is the Sales Orders window for entering the Header information for the RMA: Sales Orders (Header) window for Returns 2. Once the Order Header information is entered, you will enter the line information within the Line Items screen: Line Items Window 3. In the Main Tab, enter the Ordered Item and the Quantity to be returned. The user can enter a positive or negative number. You will also see that the negative quantity will be highlighted in anothercolor. Next, in the Returns tab, the user will need to enter the Line Type as a return (i.e. Return for Credit with Receipt of Goods) and enter a Return Reason. A Return Reason is required to be entered (i.e. Product Discontinued). Since we did not reference a sales order, we are entering a single line RMA where the originating transaction is unknown. If you receive the returns partially, and if the Calculate Price Flag is set to Y (Calculate Price) or P (Partial Price), then freight charges get applied automatically on the partially received lines. However if the Calculate Price Flag is set to N, then the freight charges do not get applied on the partially received lines.
  • 235. 4. Book the RMA. Users are able to book an order or return at either the Order Information Tab or Line Items Tab via the Book button. 5. Receive the RMA using the Receipts window in Oracle Purchasing. Change responsibilities to Purchasing and navigate to the Receiving > Receipts window. In the Find Expected Receipts window, an Organization window will be displayed if this is the first time you have navigated to the Purchasing > Receipts window since your login. The organization you choose should be the same warehouse where your RMA is created. In the Receipt Header window, select the Customer Tab and find yourRMA #. Tab through the Header window to the Receipts Line window. Once you are in the Receipts Line window, the RMA number and quantity will populate the window. Check the box next to the line you wish to receive, enter a Destination Type as Inventory and subinventory. Save this transaction and record the receipt number in the Header window. By choosing the Destination Type as Inventory, the user is creating a transfer to inventory transaction in Purchasing. These items are now considered as supply. Purchasing will communicate the quantity received to Order Management to update the RMA. Receipt Header Window
  • 236. Receipts (Line) Window 6. Check the on-hand quantity of the item in Inventory to verify that correct quantity was received. Change responsibilities to Inventory and navigate to the Transactions > Material Transactions window. In the Material Transactions window, an Organization window will be displayed if this is the first time you have navigated to the Inventory > Material Transactions window since your login. The organization you choose should be the same warehouse where your RMA is created. Find the item being returned and navigate to the Transaction Type tab. Verify that the source type is RMA and the source is your RMA # for the quantity being returned. This window will show you your item #, the subinventory chosen and the quantity specified to be returned from the Receipts window. Material Transaction Window
  • 237. 7. Fulfill RMA line. The fulfillment activity acts as a synchronization point for all lines on the order that are in a fulfillment set. The lines in the fulfillment set will wait at the fulfillment activity until all the lines in the set have reached the activity. Lines that are not in a fulfillment set simply pass through the activity automatically. The user will not have to perform anything during this step. The eligible lines will automatically be put into a fulfillment set. 8. Generate a credit memo for the return. The Workflow process of the return line(s) will be on the Invoice Interface activity, once the Fulfillment activity completes. The invoice interface activity places the information from the return line into the Receivables Interface tables. Once the information is written to the tables, the invoice interface activity is complete, and the line proceeds to the close line activity. However, note that the credit memo is not actually generated until the Autoinvoice program in Receivables has been run. The credit memo will then be viewable in the Sales Orders window. To run the Autoinvoice program, the userneeds to change responsibilities to Receivables and navigate to the Interfaces window. Select the Autoinvoice Masterprogram and run the program for yourRMA # and specify the invoice source as the one associated with the line type of the RMA line. The Autoinvoice Master program will generate the Autoinvoice Import program which generates the credit memo. These programs can be setup to run automatically in the background. Just set the programs as 'Deferred.' 9. View the credit memo in Order Management. To view the credit memo in Order Management, the user need to change responsibilities to Order Management > Orders, Returns > Order Organizer window. Query yourRMA # in the Order Organizer. Once the RMA is queried, open the RMA order, click Actions and choose AdditionalOrder Information. Once the Additional Order Information window has opened,click on the Receivables tab to view the credit memo. This window will show your the credit memo number and amount. 10. Check the Shipped and Fulfilled quantity on the RMA line. From the above step, navigate in the Sales Orders window to the Line Items tab for the RMA. Scroll to view the Shipped Quantity field. To access the Fulfilled Quantity field, the user needs to use the folder technology to add the field to the sales orders window. To add the field, click on the Warehouse field in the Shipping Tab of the Line Items window. Next, select the Folder menu at the top of the window, select Show Field and choose the Quantity Fulfilled field from the list. The field will populate in the window. The Shipped Quantity means the received quantity for return lines and the Fulfilled Quantity means the delivered quantity for the return lines. Workflow In Oracle Order Management, you can have many types of credit order by specifying it's Order Type and Line Type. Each order type and each line type is associated with an Oracle Workflow process. You can customize order types and RMA line types to meet yourbusiness needs.For instance,you can use Approvals and Holds with returns in order to manage exceptions when your customer returns more or less than you authorize. Credit order types have order type category Return'. An order with a Mixed order type category can contain both standard and return lines. But you cannot enter return lines into an order with order type category Regular. The following is an example of a seeded Order Return Flow process (enter -> book -> approval notification -> close): Order Flow - Return with Approval The following is an example of a seeded Order Return Line Flow process (enter -> return-> invoice -> close): Line Flow - Return for Credit with Receipt The following are other workflow processes that Order Management seeds for Return Line flows: Line Flow - Return for Credit only
  • 238. Line Flow - Return for Credit onlywith Approval In Oracle Order Management, there are also flows that support both order and return lines (inbound and outbound transactions),however, there are no seeded workflows for these flows. You can create flows that support both Order and Return Lines. For instance, the flow listed below will not work correctly, since once a line is booked, workflow randomly picks which transition to process first. It then processes it all the way till it can go no further. So for an outbound Line using this flow, if the branch 'Returns receiving' is first processed,it will get marked as Not Eligible and hit the Fulfill -Defer activity and stop. Then the WF Engine starts executing the other branch; the line will schedule and hit the Ship - Line, Manual sub-process,where it will stop and wait to get picked and shipped.However the Background Engine could pick up the deferred activity and execute the Fulfill activity. This activity will error out since the fulfilling event for the order line Ship-Confirmation is not yet complete. INCORRECTLine Flow - Supporting inbound and outbound shipments For this flow to work correctly, the flow ensures that only one transition is executed (Order or Return). The flow needs to be defined as follows: CORRECT Line Flow - Supporting inbound and outbound shipments
  • 239. After booking the line flow branches based on the Line Category ens uring that only one of the branches are (Order or Return) executed runtime. The activity Utility to get Line Category is seeded OM: Order Line Work Item. With regard to item inspections,the Order Management systemdoes not process inspection results,and only processes delivery transactions. Based on the users business rules,if an item is rejected, the user can either deliver to inventory (scrap sub-inventory)or return to the customer. Delivering to inventory will give credit to the customer. Returning to the customer will reduce the shipped quantity and credit will be given for only accepted goods. Therefore, receiving transactions drive the flow of the return and what gets credited.
  • 240. Defining Credit Check Rules Overview Order Management credit check rules enable you to determine what credit checking criteria is used when determining credit exposure during the credit checking process. Order Management transaction types determine when credit checking actually occurs, and when used in conjunction with credit checking rules, define your credit checking process. For example, you can define credit checking rules that utilize pre-calculated exposure information to use when comparing a customer's current order amount against their overall exposure; if the order transaction type utilizes this rule, and the order fails during the credit check process,it is automatically placed on credit check hold. You can define as many credit checking rules as you need, and if you inactivate a credit checking rule, you also must remove it from any order types that use it. Additionally, you can include in or exclude from your credit check rule some or all of your open accounts receivable balances , and some or all of your uninvoiced orders. Order Management uses the currency of the order you are credit checking to determine which credit limits to use in credit checking calculations. Order Management only includes orders and invoices in the same currency as the order you are credit checking when calculating a customer's outstanding credit balance, unless you have set up multiple currency credit checking. You can also include/exclude returns based on yourcredit check rule definition. However this should be used only if you are using return lines with credit memos. Besides defining your credit exposure composition, the credit check rule also determines: • Credit check level (order or line) • Credit Hold level (order or line) • Conversion type used when you enable multi-currency credit check • Use of item category credit check • Send hold notifications to the sales order creator • Use of pre-calculated exposure Credit Limits for Credit Checking and Rules Summary 1. When the Credit Check flag is turned off at the site level that pertains to the Bill-To address,there will be no credit checking for orders for this Bill-To site. It doesn't roll up to the next level to get the credit limits. 2. If the Credit Check flag is turned on at the site level, and both overall credit limits and order credit limits are all NULL/BLANK, then the limits for a customer who owns that bill to site will be automatically considered . 3. If the Credit Check flag is turned on at the customer level, and both overall credit limits and order credit limits are all NULL/BLANK, roll up to the next level in the party hierarchy (if any). Otherwise, use the Operating Unit Credit profile. Note that party profiles are used only if Credit Management is setup.If not, from the customer level we go directly to the Operating Unit. 4. If the Credit Check flag is turned on at each level, and there is only one field left NULL/BLANK (for example, order limit is null but overall exposure is some number), then this NULL/BLANK field is treated as unlimited and it does not rollup to next level. 5. If the last level reached with the Credit Check flag enabled has both overall and order credit limits set as NULL/BLANK, it means no credit checking should be performed. IF the Credit Check flag is enabled and order credit limit is not NULL/BLANK, then a credit check will be performed at the item category level. 6. If the Credit Check flag is disabled for item category or if the Credit Check flag is enabled and both order credit limit and overall credit limit are all NULL/BLANK for item category, then credit checking will not happen at the item category level, but credit checking will still be performed for the site-customer-(party)-OU level based on the rules discussed.IF the Credit Check flag is enabled and at least one of the order credit limit and overall credit limit fields are not NULL/BLANK, then a credit check will be performed at the item category level. Performance Note In order to improve performance you can enable the use of pre-calculated exposure. Utilizing this option, the credit check engine will use summary balance details stored in a periodically updated summary table. The update is done by running a concurrent program which accesses Order Management and Account Receivable transactionaltables. This program should be scheduled to run periodically based on your specific business needs. You should also run this concurrent program when you have done major changes in your set up or transactionaldata (merge customers, incorporate transactions from external systems, change transaction status using customized programs, etc.). To define a credit check rule: 1. Navigate to the Credit Check Rules window. Credit Check Rules Window
  • 241. 2. Enter a name for yourcredit check rule. 3. Optionally, enter the Effective Dates for your rule. Options Tab 4. Select the entity to perform credit checking against for your rule. Select from: • Sales Order • Sales Order Line Note: If you select Sales Order Line as your credit check level, the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box will be checked and protected against update If you choose to perform credit checking at the Sales Order level, you are limited to the systemgenerating headerlevel credit holds only. The Credit Hold Level field will default to Sales Order and is protected against update. 5. Select the Credit Hold Level for your credit rule. Select from: • Sales Order: Sales Order (order level) credit check is performed for the header Bill To site. Sales Order level credit checking provides backward compatibility with previous credit check versions.When credit checking rules are defining using Sales Order as the credit check level, the credit check engine will examine order totals and evaluate credit exposure against the credit profile attached at header level. Holds will be always applied at header level. Use order level credit check when order lines always have the same Bill To Site as the Order Header. • Sales Order Line: Sales Order Line (line level) credit check is performed against order line Bill To Sites. The credit check engine will group all order lines belonging to the same Bill To Site and check available credit for each specific Bill To Site. When an order line fails credit check, any remaining lines grouped with the same Bill To Site are placed on hold. Holds can be placed at either the order or order line level when you use line level credit checking. Use line level credit check when sales order lines are attached to different Bill To Sites and you want to use the credit profile defined at that level. Additionally, you can use line level credit check when you have defined customer relationships within your systemand actively use them within Order Management. Using customer relationships, you can create sales orders with order lines attached to different Bill To Sites owned by different customers. Order Header level credit checking uses headerlevel information ignoring different bill-to sites detailed at the line. Credit Check uses the credit profile attached to the customer Bill-to site defined at order (header) level. Credit checking at the Order Header level will use order totals and will evaluate credit exposure against the credit profile attached at header level, and holds are always applied at header level. Special Considerations for Credit Hold Level • If you update the Credit Hold Level from Sales Order to Sales Order Line, a pop up dialog box will display a message indicating that existing sales order credit holds will need to be released manually. Select Yes to continue or No to not commit the update. • If you update the Credit Hold Level from Sales Order Line to Sales Order, a pop up dialog box will display a message indicating that existing sales order line credit holds will not be released automatically. Select Yes to continue or No to not commit the update. 6. Override Manual Release check box: This check box enables an order or line which had failed credit checking and then was subsequently manually released to be eligible for additional credit check processing.Select from: • Yes: Manual Released Holds will be overridden. You must also enter a value within the Days to Honor Manual Release field. • No: Manual Released Holds will be honored. The field Days to Honor Manual Release will be non-updatable. 7. Days to Honor Manual Release: The field is used in conjunction with the Override Manual Release check box. If you enable the Override Manual Release check box, you must enter a numeric value greater than zero within this field. Manual Released Holds (Credit Checking Procedures) Each time a credit check failure occurs for order or order line, the corresponding order or order line is placed on credit check hold. However, prior to the credit check holds actually being applied, the credit check process determines: • If a manually released credit check hold exists and • If your credit check rule enables override of manually released holds (in conjunction with the value for Days to Honor Manual Release). If Override Manual Release is not enabled for your credit check rule, then manually released holds are honored and no additional credit checking will occur.
  • 242. If Override Manual Release is enabled, the credit checking process will validate if the release date is within the interval defined by the value of Days to Honor Manual Release. If the value is within the range defined, then manually released holds will be honored and additional credit checking is not performed. If the value is not within the range defined, credit checking can occur again and credit check holds can be applied if the order or lines fails the credit check process. Note: The value of OE_HOLD_RELEASES.CREATION_ DATE is used by the credit check process to determine if the duration defined for the credit check rule is within range for additional credit checking: when any hold is released for an order or line, Order Management inserts a record within OE_HOLD_RELEASES. 8. Select the conversion type to use when performing credit checking using your credit rule. The LOV for this field is limited to the values you define within the Oracle General Ledger Conversion Rate Types window. 9. Select the Check Item Categories check box for your credit rule if you wish to perform credit checking for sales orders by Item Categories defined for Order Management. 10. Select the Send Hold Notifications check box if you wish to send hold notifications whenever a credit hold is placed for a sales order or order line. The notification is sent to the creator of the order. Determine the type of credit exposure to use when defining your credit check rules by selecting the Exposure Tab within the Define Credit Check Rules window. Exposure tab in the Credit Check Rules Window Exposure Tab 11. Select the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box for yourcredit rule if you wish to perform credit checking against pre-calculated exposure summary tables. • When the first credit check rule that has the Use Pre-Calculated Exposure check box checked is successfully saved,the following message will display: This credit check rule uses pre-calculated exposure. Please run the Initialize Credit Summaries program to update the pre-calculated data. • If the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box is checked and the Include Open Receivables balance check box is checked, then Open Receivables Days is protected against update and is NULL. • If the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box is checked and the Include Uninvoiced Orders check box is checked, then Shipping Horizon Days is protected against update and is NULL. 12. Select the Include External Credit Exposure check box if you wish to include external exposure details imported into Order Management during the credit checking process. When an Oracle Order Management sales order is credit checked, the exposure data from the external systemis included in the overall exposure check. The default value for this check box is un-checked (exclude external exposure details when performing credit checking). Receivables Balance Region 13. Select the Open Receivables Balance check box for yourcredit rule if you wish to include open receivables balances. You must enable either the Include Open Receivables Balance check box or the Include Uninvoiced Orders check box in yourcredit check rule. You can activate both,but you cannot toggle both off. If you select both the Pre-calculated Exposure and Open Receivables Balance check boxes, you are unable to specify Open Receivables Days. 14. If you enabled Include Open Receivables Balance in your credit check rule, you can indicate whether to Include Payments at Risk when calculating a customer's outstanding balance. Receipts at risk are remitted receipts that have not been cleared, or discounted (factored) receipts that have not been risk eliminated. If the performance of credit checking requires improvement you can toggle off this option. 15. If you enabled Include Open Receivables Balance, enter a value to indicate the range of dates for open receivables you wish to include for your credit check rule. • Negative Number: Includes past due, current, and future open receivables up to X days beyond the current date • Positive Number: Includes open receivables with invoice dates X days earlier than the current date • No Value: Includes all open receivables Uninvoiced Orders Region Note: If you do not select the Include Uninvoiced Orders check box, you cannot select any check boxes within the region. Important: If an order line has been interfaced to the Receivables interface table but hasn't been invoiced yet, the Order Management
  • 243. credit check engine will include this line amount as part of the uninvoiced order amount. If yoursystemenables credit checking and your Receivables Interface table can potentially contain large volume of data, it is recommended that you create a customindex on RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL table ORIG_SYSTEM_BILL_CUSTOMER_ID column. 16. Select the Include Uninvoiced Orders check box if you wish to include uninvoiced orders for your credit rule. If you enabled Include Uninvoiced Orders: • Indicate whether to include Freight and Special Charges for uninvoiced orders when performing credit checking. Select the Freight and Special charges check box to include Freight and Special Charges. • Indicate whether to include Tax information for uninvoiced orders when performing credit checking Select the Tax check box to include Tax information for uninvoiced orders. Credit checking calculations on open receivables always include tax amounts and are not affected by the Include Tax option. If the performance of credit checking requires improvement you can toggle off this option. • Indicate the number of scheduled shipping horizon days for your credit rule for uninvoiced orders to be included in yourtotal credit exposure when performing credit checking. For example, if you enter 45, the total exposure includes only uninvoiced orders scheduled to ship within 45 days of the current date. Orders scheduled to ship after 45 days are not included when calculating exposure. Note: If the Use Pre-calculated Exposure check box is checked, Scheduled Shipping Horizon Days is protected against update. • Indicate whether to Include Orders Currently On hold. Select the Include Orders Currently On hold check box to include orders on hold within the exposure calculation for your credit rule. 17. Indicate the Maximum Days Past Due. The Maximum Days Past Due field value specifies the number of day that you will allow an invoice to be past due before holding the customers orders. During the credit checking process,Order Management will verify that no invoices for the customer have been past due beyond the number of days you specified with this field. If there are any such past due invoices, the order is placed on credit hold. 18. Save your work. Deactivating Credit Checking There are three ways to deactivate Credit Checking on an order: • Use an order type that does not have an assigned credit rule • Define the Customer Profile so that the Credit Check box is not selected • Use payment terms for which the Credit Check box is not selected Deactivating Credit Checking does not automatically release orders previously on credit hold. However, the next time you attempt to Book, Pick Release or Purchase Release (for drop shipments), Pack, or Ship Confirm an order which utilizes a Order Management Transaction type that enables credit checking to occur at the specified order points,or you perform an order change that trigger credit checking in the Sales Orders window, Order Management will releases the credit check hold if the order or line meets the requirements for successfulcredit check.
  • 244. Practice - Defining Credit Check and Hold Overview In this practice you will learn how to create a credit check rule in Oracle Order Management Tasks 4. Create a credit check rule named Booking.  Credit Check Level: Sales Order  Credit Hold Level: Sales Order  Conversion Type: Corporate 5. Enable Credit Check and Credit Hold for your customer. 6. Suspend the customer’s credit.
  • 245. Solution – Defining Credit Check and Hold Login Login to the database using the User Name and Password supplied by your instructor. Choose Responsibility Order Management Super User,Vision Operations (USA) Responsibility is selected. Create Credit Check Rule (N) Order Management > Setup > Credit > Define Credit Check Rule 1. Enter Booking in the Rule field. 2. Use the list of values to select Sales Order in the Credit Check Level field. 3. Use the list of values to select Sales Order in the Credit Hold Level field. 4. Use the list of values to select Corporate in the Conversion Type field. 5. On the Exposure tab, enable the following fields:
  • 246.  Use Pre-Calculated Exposure  Include Uninvoiced Orders  Include Freight and Special Charges  Include Tax  Include Orders Currently On Hold  Include Returns 6. Save. Define Credit Check and Hold (N) Order Management > Receivables > Customers > Customers 26. Enter your customer name in the Name field. 27. (B) Find. 28. Click your company name in the Name column. (SH-Big City) 29. Within the Accounts tab, click the View Details icon in the Details column. 30. Open the Account Profile tab. 31. Enable Credit Check. 32. Enable Credit Hold.
  • 247. 33. (B) Apply. 34. (B) Save. OM Concurrent Programs
  • 248. Initialize Credit Summaries Table7 OM: Prevent Booking for Line Generic Holds Credit Check Processor Credit Exposure Report
  • 252. Practice - Order to Cash Cycle with Customer Acceptance Overview In this practice, you will learn how to create orders and record customer acceptance. Please note that you will be completing an order to cash cycle with customer acceptance using all the seeded data available in the environment. Tasks Create an order to cash lifecycle 1. Create an order. 2. Save and book the order. 3. Pick release the order . 4. Ship confirm the order. 5. Use AutoInvoice to create an invoice for the order. Enable Customer Acceptance in Order Management 1. (N) Orders,Returns > Setup > System Parameters  Enable Fulfillment Acceptance = Yes
  • 253. 2. Enable function security for the Order Management Super User responsibility for the following two functions:  Sales Orders: Fulfillment Acceptance – This ensures that the action attribute Fulfillment Acceptance is available in the Actions LOV. You can use the folder functionality to include the Fulfillment Acceptance option in the Actions LOV.  Sales Orders: Update Acceptance Attributes – This allows for updating the acceptance attributes of Acceptance Name and Acceptance Expire days. Note: These are attached to the sales order menu – ADS_OM_SUPERMENU. 3. Change your responsibility to Revenue Management Super User Vision Operations USA. 4. (N) Revenue Contingencies > Contingency Definition
  • 254. 5. Create a Contingency Rule for pre-billing implicit acceptance. Contingency rules are terms and conditions that prevent immediate revenue recognition like delivery, acceptance,government regulations, customer creditworthiness etc. 6. A contingency rule consists of the following that you need to enter:  DeferralReason:XX-CA-PREBILL-IMPLICIT  Start Date: enter a date of your choice  Related General Policy region: Select the None button  Define DeferralReason Removal Event region:  Removal Event: Invoicing  Event Attribute: Ship Confirm Date  Days Added to Event Attribute: any number that you want the removal event to occur 7. Click (B) Apply and return to the main page. 8. Click (B) Define Assignment Rules. 9. Enter the following information:  Rule Name: XX-CA-PREBILL-IMPLICIT-RULE  Revenue Contingency Name:XX-CA-PREBILL-IMPLICIT  Parameter:Bill-To Customer  Condition: IN  Case Sensitive: No  Value: Business World 10. You can add one or more parameters for the assignment rule. Click (B) Apply. Using Pre-Billing Implicit Customer Acceptance
  • 255. 11. Change responsibility to Order Management Super User,Vision Operations USA 12. Enable the Acceptance-related fields using folder functionality on the sales orders line in the Others tab:  Acceptance Name (this is known as DeferralReason in Revenue Management responsibility)  Acceptance Date  Acceptance Expire Event  Acceptance Expire Days  Acceptance Type  Accepted By  Accepted Qty  Acceptance Description 13. Open a default folder, include the above fields in the Others tab using the Show Field option. Checke the Make as Default box and Use Folder > Save As giving the folder name as XX-Line-Cust-Accept. 14. The concurrent request set Implicit Acceptance Request set will run for recording implicit acceptance and updating the above fields. 15. Enter the following in the Quick Sales Orders window:  Customer Name: Business World (1608)  Order Type: Mixed  Item: AS54888  Qty: 2 16. The default acceptance details will be displayed in (T) Others. 17. Book the order, using (B) Book.
  • 256. 18. Pick Release the order using (N) Shipping > Release Sales Orders > Release Sales Orders. 19. Ship Confirm the order. 20. Use AutoInvoice to invoice the order. (N) Receivables > Interface > AutoInvoice. Note: If you require to perform an explicit acceptance,use Actions > Fulfillment Acceptance to open the Order Information Portalpage and record your acceptance details.
  • 257. Overview of Internal Requisitions Internal requisitions provide the mechanism for requesting and transferring material from inventory to otherinventory or exp ense locations. When Purchasing, Order Management, Shipping Execution, and Inventory are installed, they combine to give you a flexible solution for your inter-organization and intra-organization requests.You should be able to: • Set up your supply chain and automatically source yourrequirements from inventory or suppliers • Define yourinter-organization shipping network, and optionally require that you use internal orders for yourinter-organization transfers • Use intransit inventory when you want to track items as they move between organizations • Reduce warehousing, shipping, and handling costs by requesting items in fixed lot sizes • Use the same windows for data entry and inquiry that you use for purchase requisitions and sales orders • Take advantage of standard requisition and sales order functionality to suit your individual business requirements • Automatically generate inventory replenishment requisitions and fulfill them via internal or external suppliers • Automatically source MRP generated requisitions to internal or external suppliers • View the status ofrequests online • Use internal requisitions to move inventory items from one inventory organization to another, even if that organization belongs to a different operating unit, legal entity, or ledger Major Features Complete Item Sourcing Definition Purchasing and Inventory combine to provide the flexibility you need to define your item sourcing information. You can use the default sourcing options to automatically determine the correct source type and source for yourreques ts. You can specify either Inventory or Supplier as the default source type, as well as the source organization and subinventory for internal requests. Inter-Organization Shipping Network Inventory provides the features you need to define your inter-organization shipping network. For transfers between two organizations, you can specify whether to use intransit or direct shipments. You can also require internal orders for transfers between specific organizations. Flexible Processing You can tailor internal requisition processing to fit your requirements. You can limit online interaction by setting up background process es to automatically perform specific actions such as creating inventory replenishment requests and creating internal sales orders in Order Management. Or, you can take advantage of otherfeatures such as online requisition approvals, internal sales order cycles, and online receipt and delivery of internally requested items.
  • 258. Creating Online Requisitions You can create online internal requisitions for both expense and inventory destinations using the same windows you use to create purchase requisitions. You can combine inventory and supplier sourced requisition lines on the same requisition. Also, Purchasing uses your item sourcing information to default the correct source type and supplier for the item and destination.You can define requisition templates for commonly requested internally sourced items. Full Unit of Issue Enforcement Purchasing offers the option of full unit of issue enforcement in which quantities entered on internal requisitions are automatically rounded to a full unit of issue defined for the item. You can also set this option to recommend a rounded quantity on requisitions, but leave the opportunity to change the re commended quantity. The quantity rounding is based on the specified unit of issue,if available, otherwise on the primary unit of measure. Inventory Replenishment Requisitions Inventory generates replenishment requisitions through min-max planning, reorder point planning, subinventory replenishment for replenishment counts,and Kanban replenishment. Purchasing uses youritem sourcing information to create inter-organization or subinventory transferrequests. See: Overview of Inventory Planning and Replenishment, Oracle Inventory User's Guide. See: Demand for Internal Requisitions, page 3-16. MRP Generated Requisitions MRP generated requisitions are sourced using the same item sourcing information that you define for inventory replenishment a nd online requisitions. For "buy" items, the Requisition Import process uses the item sourcing information to create either a purchase requisition or an inter-organization internal requisition for planned orders. Approvals and Controls You can control internal requisition approvals and document security just as you control purchase requisitions. Purchasing gives you the flexibility you need to set up approvals and limits for internal requests. You can use the same authorization rules, or you can relax or tighten controls for internal requisitions. Creation of Internal Sales Orders When you approve an internal requisition for a stocked item, Purchasing translates the requisition into an internal sales ord er, providing a link between the end user's requirement and the physical demand against Inventory. Order Management Once you create an internal sales order from a requisition, you can manage internal requisitions just as you manage regular s ales orders. You can use Order Management to define order cycles, approvals and holds to effectively process requisition orders. You can selectively pick release and otherwise process internal sales orders as easily as you do regular sales orders. Complete Requisitions Status Visibility You get complete visibility on the status ofrequests through inquiries and reports. You get online visibility to the internal sales order number, as well as the shipment and delivery status forrequisitions. You can report on backordered items, internal requisition status,and delivery discrepancies. Exception Processing Internal requisitions help you manage exceptions to your normal business flow. Order Management automatically backorders your request when you have insufficient supply to fill the internal order by creating anothershipment line for the unavailable quantity. You can reschedule orders when the shipment date changes,and the expected arrival date on the intransit shipment is updated automatically. Cancellation of Requisitions You can easily cancel a request if you have a change in requirements or if you cannot fulfill the entire order. Using Order Management, you can partially or fully cancel the line quantities on the internal sales order. You complete the cancellation process by cancelling the original requisition line in Purchasing. Using Internal Requisitions Internal requisitions provide a flexible solution to your inventory requisitioning needs. You can eliminate user intervention when you do not need it, such as when you are loading internal requisitions into Order Ma nagement or placing demand. The following sections describe the entire business and information flow for internal requisitions, and identifies opportunities for you to simplify processing. Demand for Internal Requisitions Demand for inventory requests can come from several sources.The primary sources are: • Online user's request for stockitems out of inventory • Inventory Replenishment Requests • Oracle MasterScheduling/MRP and Supply Chain Planning generated requisitions • External system's requests Online Requests Online requisitions give you the choice of supplier or inventory sourced requisitions. Default sourcing information is determined by the requisition type, the item, and the destination of the request.When you en ter a requisition, Purchasing automatically selects the correct source type and source information for the item and destination.
  • 259. To restrict certain users to internal requisitions only, set their profile PO: Legal Requisition Type to Internal.Purchasing then requires that they source all internally orderable items from inventory. See: Entering Requisition Headers, page 3-48. For frequently requested items, you can define requisition templates to create internal requisitions quickly. Requestors can pull up the template they need,fill in the need-by date and destination of the request,and specify the quantity for each desired item. Internal requisitions also use the Account Generator, which automatically builds account distributions. You can specify only one accounting distribution per inventory sourced line. See: Using the Account Generator in Oracle Purchasing, page E-6. Inventory Replenishment Requests Inventory automatically generates requisitions to maintain an item's stocklevel. The requisitions may request stockfrom an internal predefined source organization or from an outside supplier. See: Overview of Inventory Planning and Replenishment, Oracle Inventory User's Guide. Inventory generates replenishment requests automatically using the following methods: • Min-Max Planning • Reorder Point Planning • Subinventory Replenishments for Replenishment Counts • Kanban Replenishments All inventory replenishment methods create requisitions via the Requisitions Open Interface. Important: If the destination subinventory uses locatorcontrol, you must specify a primary locator for direct inter-organization and subinventory transfers. Tip: You can interface with third-party systems to enter count information and load it into Inventory using the Replenishment Interface. Inventory automatically creates replenishment requisitions using the source and planning method you define. Kanban Replenishments In a pull-based system,inventory items for a particular part or assembly area are replenished as soon as they are needed. When the items are needed,kanban cards in Oracle Inventory change their Supply Status to Empty, and Inventory generates the kanban replenishment request automatically. Then Requisition Import in Purchasing validates and imports replenishment requests as requisitions. If the Source Type of the request is Supplier, Purchasing creates a blanket release (if a blanket agreement exists) or a standard purchase order (if a valid quotation exists) for the item. If the Source Type is Inter-Org, Requisition Import generates an internal requisition for the item. See: Overview of Kanban Replenishment, Oracle Inventory User's Guide. See: Requisition Import Process, Once Purchasing approves the standard purchase order, blanket release, or internal requisition, Inventory automatically receives a status for the kanban card of In Process. In Purchasing, Kanban replenishment requests look like any other purchasing document, and you receive them like you do any other shipment. As soon as you receive the item for delivery through the Receipts or Receiving Transactions windows in Purchasing, Inventory automatically receives a status for the kanban request of Full, indicating that the inventory supply has been replenished. MRP Generated Requisitions MasterScheduling/MRP creates requisitions for "buy" items when you release them using the Planner Workbench. MRP generated requisitions are sourced using the same rules as online and inventory replenishment requisitions. However, since MRP is plann ing for the entire organization, inventory sourced requisitions for MRP planned orders must be inter-organization transfer requests.You cannot request subinventory transfers using internal requisitions for MRP planned orders, unless you specify a non -nettable source subinventory on the internal requisition. See: Viewing On-hand Quantities, Oracle Master Scheduling / MRP User's Guide. External Systems You can automatically import internal requisitions from other Oracle Applications or existing non-Oracle systems using the Requisitions Open Interface. This interface lets you integrate the Purchasing application quickly with new or existing applications. Purchasing automatically validates your data and imports your requisitions. You can import requisitions as often as you want. Then, you can review these requisitions, approve or reserve funds for them if necessary,and place them on internal sales orders. See: Requisition Import Process,page 13-29. Internal Requisition Approvals After you create an internal requisition, you can optionally require approval. For online requests,you can set up approval rules that are specific for internal requisitions, or you can share the same rules you use for purchase requisitions. If you do not require additional approval steps,you can set up rules so that you can always complete and approve the document in the Requisitions window. See: Entering Requisition Headers, page 3-48. Min-max planning, Reorder Point planning, and MRP generated requisitions are loaded as approved requisitions through the Requisit ions Open Interface. If you set the Inventory Profile INV: RC Requisition Approval to Unapproved, you can optionally load Subinventory Replenishment requisitions as unapproved and use the document approval functionality in Purchasing. This profile option affects only Subinventory Replenishment requisitions. See: Submitting a Document for Approval, page 2-32. See: Oracle Inventory Profile Options, Oracle Inventory User's Guide. An internal requisition corresponding to a kanban card in Oracle Inventory enters Purchasing through Requisition Import with a status of Approved.(If encumbrance/budgetary controlis on, Purchasing sets the status to Pre-Approved.) As soon as the internal requisition is approved,Inventory automatically receives a status forthe kanban card of In Process. See: Demand for Internal Requisitions, page 3-16. See: Requisition Import Process, page13-29. Requisition supply is created for the destination organization as soon as the requisition is approved.If you create approved requisitions through Requisition Import, supply is created at the time the requisition is created. Master Scheduling/MRP and Inventory planning get complete visibility to the incoming internal requisition supply so the planning processes do not create additional reorders for items that you have already requested.
  • 260. Creation of Internal Sales Orders Once you approve inventory sourced requisition lines, Purchasing translates the requisition into an internal sales order, providing the link between the requestor's requirement and the physical demand against inventory. You run two separate batch processes to create the internal sales order from the approved requisition: • Create Internal Sales Orders. See: Create Internal Sales Orders Process,page 13-4. • Order Import. See: Order Import, Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual. Purchasing uses location associations to create internal sales orders from internal requisitions for a given deliver-to location. When you associate a customer and customer site with a location and then enter an internal requisition with that location as the deliv er-to point, Purchasing uses the associated customerand customer site on the internal sales order that it creates. The associated customersite becomes the ship-to site for Order Management's ship confirmation. See: Defining Locations, page 1-18. See: Creating and Updating Customers, Oracle Receivables User's Guide. Internal orders are automatically scheduled by setting the Schedule Ship Date on the sales order to the Need -by Date from the requisition. If you specify a subinventory on the internal requisition line, Order Management reserves the goods and uses only the specified subinventory for allocation. If the goods do not exist at the specified subinventory,Order Management backorders them, even if they do exist in another subinventory. The Create Internal Sales Orders process loads the Order Management open interface, OrderImport, using the order type you define in the Purchasing Options window. See: Defining Internal Requisition Options, pa ge 1-38. OrderImport creates internal sales orders from the records in the interface table, and determines the order cycle and defaults values based on the order type. Note: You should not drop-ship internal sales orders. See: Drop Shipments, page 4-114. Multi-Org: Creation of Internal Sales Orders Across Operating Units A Multi-Org implementation of Purchasing enables separate operating units within an organization to operate independently of each other. However, you may still need to obtain goods from anotheroperating unit, and Purchasing supports this. You can create an internal sales order for an item in anotheroperating unit. When creating this internal sales order, you must create it in the destination organization's operating unit, and all Order Management activity must take place within that destination operating unit. For example, the following table lists the generalized steps involved and indicate the organization in which they take place. StepAction Operating Unit 1 Inventory Org A Operating Unit 2 Inventory Org B 1- Create and approveinternal requisition. X 2- Run Create Internal Sales Orders. X 3- Run Order Import in Order. Management X 4- Perform pick release and ship confirm in Order Management. X 5- Receive goods. X When you use internal sales orders to transfer goods from anotheroperating unit, the items' transfer cost is posted to the intercompany payables and receivables accounts as defined in the shipping network and an intercompany invoice can be generated. See: Inter-Organization Shipping Network, Oracle Inventory User's Guide. Management of Internal Sales Orders You manage internal sales orders using some of the same windows as customer sales orders. Once you import an internal requisition using Order Import, you can use the Sales Orders window to change the reserved quantity, schedule date, ship-to contact,and shipment priority. The destination organization has complete visibility to any changes in incoming supply based on schedule date changes or part ial shipments. The price on the internal sales order line comes directly from the price on the requisition line, and is always the item cost. Order Import does not use the price list to recalculate the line price and Oracle Receivables ignores internal sales orders. So the price on the internal sales order is not used. The profile option INV: Advanced Pricing for Intercompany Invoice actually controls the price on the intercompany payables invoice. When this profile option is set to No (or null), the price on the intercompany invoice is derived from the Transfer Price Lis t associated to the customer or item. If set to Yes, the price is derived from the Advanced Pricing engine. See: Intercompany Invoice Pricing and Using Advanced Pricing Engine with Intercompany Invoicing, Oracle Inventory User's Guide. Once an internal sales order is scheduled,it is visible as demand. You can reserve inventory for internal requisitions either to the organization, or the organization and subinventory levels. Order Management does not process internal sales order lines for the Receivables Interface, even if the Receivables Interface is an action in the order cycle for the internal sales order. Note: You should not drop-ship internal sales orders. See: Drop Shipments, page 4-114. Pick Release for Internal Sales Orders You can directly pick release from the Shipping Transactions window. Or you can selectively release one internal sales order at a time by entering the internal sales order number as a pick release criterion. Or, you can release a group of internal sales orders by specifying the internal sales order, order type,and a range of dates,or by using the shipment planning delivery, trip, and trip stop information. You can also release internal sales orders with customer orders by entering a range of dates. When you enter an internal requisition, you must specify the source organization, and you can optionally specify the subinventory source. If you do not enter source subinventory information on an internal requisition, picking proceeds using the standard inventory picking rules.
  • 261. Oracle Shipping Execution releases only order lines which meet the prerequisites of the order cycle specific to the internal sales order type. See: Oracle Shipping Execution User's Guide. Ship Confirmation for Internal Sales Orders Use the Shipping Transactions window to ship confirm entire or partial shipments. You can also backorder the internal sales order when you do not have enough on-hand quantity to fulfill the request. Partial shipments are handled by splitting internal order lines into multiple shipment schedules with different delivery dates.You cannot change the warehouse or the subinventories on the delivery details. When you ship confirm, Shipping Execution updates the Inventory Interface and generates a delivery ship notice outbound (DSNO) transaction.Inventory automatically updates on-hand quantities to reflect the internally ordered items that you shipped. If you are shipping using intransit inventory, the destination organization gets complete visibility of the incoming intransit supply.Internal requisition supply is reduced by the quantity of the shipment. You can also enter the expected arrival date at ship confirmation to provide a more accurate supply picture to MRP and invent ory planning. See: Oracle Shipping Execution User's Guide. Management of Internal Requisitions Update Intransit Information For inter-organization transfers that use intransit, you can use the Manage Shipments window to update the expected arrival date. Maste r Scheduling/MRP and inventory planning get complete visibility to the change in expected arrival date. See: Managing Shipments, page 9-81. Receive, Inspect,and Deliver Items Use the Receipts and Receiving Transactions windows to process receipts of inter-organization requests that use intransit. Receiving personnelcan simply enter the requisition number on the shipping documentation and process the entire shipment using express receiving transactions.For receipt of partial shipments, you can record the quantities for the individual items included in the shipment. You can receive items into receiving, or you can receive the goods directly to the final destination,either an inventory or expense location. If you receive items into receiving/inspection, you process inspections,transfers,and deliveries for internal requisitions just as you would process supplierreceipts or inventory transfers. See: Overview of Receiving, page 9-1. View Internal Requisition Status In Purchasing, you can view the internal sales order and any changes to it, by selecting View Sales Orders on the Tools menu in the Requisition Lines Summary window. Or, you can access the Sales Orders window directly in Order Management and query on the specific internal sales order number, or any otherrelevant criteria. The Sales Orders window provides information about the status ofthe internal sales order, quantities shipped,quantities cancelled, and dates of transactions. You can also report on requisition status.See: Backordered Internal Requisitions Report, page 11-6, Internal Requisitions Status Report, page 11-19, Internal Requisitions/Deliveries Discrepancy Report, page 11-20, and Requisitions on Cancelled Sales Order Report, page 11-77. Cancelling Internal Requisitions If you cancel an internal sales order that was generated by an internal requisition, you get a warning message that the order line is related to a requisition line that is now awaiting cancellation. You can then use the Control Document window to cancel the requisition line. See: Controlling Documents, page 2-57. Purchasing lets you cancel or final close an inventory sourced requisition line only after you cancel the internal sales order in Order Management. See: Cancelling Orders, Oracle Order Management User's Guide. Internal Requisitions Processing Summary Below is a summary of key transactions and processes you use for Internal requisitions. If you are using inventory replenishment or MRP generated internal requisitions, Pick Release and Ship Confirmation are the only required online transactions. If you are creating online requests,you also use the Requisitions window. See: Online Processing Automation for Internal Requisitions, page 3-30 for suggestions on howto implement automated processing and reduce online interaction.
  • 262. Step Action Required Window/Process 1- Create Internal Requisition On-line or AutomaticRequisitions window and Requisition Import process:Inventory replenishment, MRP Planned Orders, External Sources 2- ApproveRequisition OptionalApproveDocuments window 3- Create Internal Sales Orders AutomaticCreate Internal Sales Orders process, Order Import process 4- Modify Order Schedule OptionalSales Orders window 5- Pick Release Orders On-line Release Sales Orders for Picking window or Shipping Transactions window 6- Confirm Pick-Wave MoveOrder OptionalTransact MoveOrder window (if not auto-pick confirming from Pick Release window) 7- Ship Confirmation On-line Shipping Transactions window, Order Management Interface, Inventory Interface 8- Receive Items OptionalReceipts window, Receiving Transaction Processor 9- Inspect Receipts OptionalReceiving Transactions window, Receiving Transaction Processor 10- Deliver Receipts OptionalReceiving Transactions window, Receiving Transaction Processor, Inventory Transaction Processor 11- View Requisition Status OptionalRequisition Headers Summary window, Requisition Lines Summary window 12- Cancelling Internal Orders OptionalSales Orders window, ControlDocument window, Define Mass Cancel window, Run Mass Cancel window Internal Requisitions Setup Overview Internal requisitions provide a solution to a variety of inventory requisitioning needs. When you implement this feature, you need to carefully review the options and configure the applications to support yourbusiness processes. For example, if you are using internal requisitions to generate inventory replenishment requisitions and fulfill them via sub inventory transfers within a plant, you may want to limit your online interaction to pick release and ship confirmation. You do not have to record separate ship, receive, and deliver transactions when the same employee actually picks the items out of the source subinventory and places them at the destination in one step. Product Internal Requisition Setup Function Order Management Update profile options, Define transaction types, Define order number sources, Update/define default value rules, Define price lists, Define Concurrent Program Resubmission interval for the Order Import process Shipping Execution Define release sequence rules, Define pick slip grouping rules, Define shipping parameters Inventory Define internally requested items, Define inter-organization shipping network, Define item sourcing, Define Concurrent Program Resubmission intervals in Inventory planning and replenishment windows Purchasing Define Internal Requisition Deliver-To Sites, Set Legal Requisition Type profile, Define Purchasing Options, Define Concurrent Program Resubmission intervals for the Requisition Import and Create Internal Sales Orders processes Minimum Order Management Setup for Internal Requisitions You use standard sales order functionality to define transaction types for internal sales orders. You also need to use the Purchasing Options window to specify the order type you use for internal requisitions. See: Defining Internal Requisition Options ,You must perform the following setups in Order Management to use the internal requisition features. You may choose to take advantage of other Order Management features which require additional setups. See: Oracle Order Management Recommended Setup, Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual. Define Order Management Profile Options Set the profile option OM: Item Flexfield. This profile option defines which structure of the item flexfield to use. Note. that Order Management uses the same ledger as defined in the SystemOptions window in Oracle Receivables. Use the Parameters window in Order Management to define the Item Masterorganization for this installation. Tip: Set the Item Validation Organization to the same Item Masterorganization as yourpurchasing reference organization (set in t he Financials Options window). Define Transaction Types Use the Transaction Types window to define order and line types. Order Management provides default order cycle workflows that you must associate with each order and line type. Define an Order Management Number Source For Internal Requisitions Define order number sources to automatically number internal sales orders as you import them. You can use a single order number source to assign unique numbers to all your orders, or you can use a different order number source within each order type. Define a Price List For Internal Requisition Although internal requisitions use the item's cost as the price, Order Management requires price lists to process all sales orders. Define a price list for use with the internal requisition order type. You do not need to add any lines to the price list.
  • 263. Decide which Default Value Rules to Use Default value rules define the defaulting that occurs as orders are entered or imported. Order Management provides default value rules that you can use for internal sales orders. Confirm that the default value rules that Order Management provides suit your business needs. If not, use the Defaulting Rules window to modify them. Define Inventory Accounting (Account Generator) Order Management can dynamically create the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) Account for each shipped or returned item based on rules you define. Order Management provides a default Account Generator process to be used in determining the COGS Account during the Inventory Interface process. You can either accept the default COGS Account Generator process or customize it to suit yourbusiness needs.For more information on how to accept or customize this feature, see the Oracle Order Management documentation. Internal Sales Orders Processing Constraints (Optional) Order Management processing constraints apply to all your sales orders, including internal sales orders imported from Purchasing. Processing constraints prevent users from adding, updating,deleting and cancelling order information beyond certain points in the order cycles. You can use the System rules Order Management provides, which prevent data integrity violations, or define yourown, stricter, rules. See: Defining Processing Constraints, Oracle Order Management Implementation Manual. Minimum Shipping Execution Setup for Internal Requisitions Perform the following steps: • Define release sequence rules • Define pick slip grouping rules • Define shipping parameters Minimum Purchasing Setup for Internal Requisitions Define Internal Requisition Deliver-To Sites Purchasing uses locations to identify the final delivery location for both inventory and supplier sourced requisitions. As a requestor, you want to specify the same destination for both purchase and internal requisitions.As a shipping clerk, yo u are concerned with the final delivery location of the item, regardless whether it is for an internal or external customer. Purchasing and Order Management use location associations to minimize the decisions you need to make when you create internal requests. Use the Location window to define a location for each site that receives either inventory or supplier sourced material. For internal requisition deliver-to locations,you also need to associate the locations with a customer. Use the Customers window to define a Customer and Ship-To site for each deliver-to location. Use the Business Purposes region in the Customers window to associate yourinternal locations to your customers. Tip: Create an internal customer for each destination organization, and customer ship-to site for each deliver-to location within the destination organization. Tip: Define the same address for the customer ship-to site as the deliver-to location. Order Management prints the ship-to address on the shipping documentation. Tip: Order Management requires both a ship-to and an invoice-to for each order, even though internal order lines are not invoiced. When you define a customer, either make the ship-to address both a ship-to and bill-to business purpose and set the Primary flag to Yes on the business purpose,or assign the ship-to to a bill-to location. Set Up Internal Requisition Approvals and Security You set up approval and security rules for internal requisitions just as you do for purchase requisitions. Use the Document Types,Positions,Position Hierarchies, ApprovalGroups, and Assign ApprovalGroups windows to set up approval and security options for internal requisitions. See: Setting Up Document Approvaland Security Define Purchasing Options for Internal Requisitions You need to set up these additional purchasing options to use internal requisitions: • Order Type Pick the Order Type you defined in Order Management for internal sales orders. Purchasing uses this type to create sales orders from internal requisitions. See: Defining Internal Requisition Options, • Enforce Quantity Rounding In the Purchasing Options window, specify whether you enforce lot quantity rounding or display advisory messages when you create online requisitions using the Requisitions window. See: Defining Control Options Minimum Inventory Setup for Internal Requisitions Define Internally Orderable Items When you define internally orderable items, there are a few attributes that require extra consideration. • Inventory and Order Management regions Items you use on internal requisitions must be Inventory enabled, internally orderable and stockable, shippable, and Order Management transactable for the source organizations. Under Inventory,you need to select the Inventory Item, Transactable, and Stockable options.Under Order Management, you need to select the Internal Ordered, Internal Orders Enabled, OE Transactable, and Shippable options. • Source Type - General Planning region Specify a default source type of Inventory or Supplier. You cannot create intra-organization internal requisitions for MRP planned items. When you specify sourcing information for MRP planned items, you need to ensure that you do not define an intra-organization sourcing rule for these items.
  • 264. • List Price - Purchasing region Inventory sourced requisitions use item costs for pricing. You may still want to specify a list price for items that are sourced both from suppliers or inventory. • Unit of Issue - Purchasing region You use units of issue to round order quantities,minimizing shipping, warehousing, and handling costs. Enter the unit of measure you typically use to issue the item from inventory. Purchasing uses this unit of measure as the default for internal requisition lines sourced from inventory when you create them in the Requisitions window. • Rounding Factor - Purchasing region Enter a number between 0 and 1. This factor determines how to round the quantity on an internal requisition that results from conversions between the requisition line unit of measure and the item's Unit of Issue. This factor ensures that the unit of issue resolves to an integer, rather than a fractional amount. Purchasing either performs rounding automatically or advises you of the suggested quantity,depending howyou set up your purchasing options. Set Up Item Sourcing Internal requisitions use the sourcing information you specify in Inventory. All items, subinventories,and organizations may have item sourcing information specified for them. At each level (item, subinventory,ororganization), you can choose whether items are replenished from in ventory or purchased from a supplier. • Source Type Specify Inventory as the default source type if you want to source requests from an internal stocklocation. • Source Organization and Subinventory If you specify an item to be replenished from inventory, you must specify a source organization; a source subinventory is optional. When you place an order for this item, Inventory creates an internal requisition for the item from the source location. In case of a conflict between the item, subinventory,and organization levels, internal requisitions use the following order of precedence to determine the default source type and source for the item and destination: • Sourcing information specified in the item-subinventory relationship • Sourcing information specified in the subinventory definition • Sourcing information specified in the item definition • Sourcing information specified in the organization setup options Define the Inter-Organization Shipping Network Use the Shipping Networks window to define your inter-organization network. You must enable the network between each source (shipping) and destination (receiving) organization. • Internal Order Required Select Internal Order Required if you want all transfers between these two organizations to use internal orders. • Transfer Type Specify whether you ship material directly, or use intransit inventory for shipments between these two organizations. Important: If you use Lot, Serial, or Item Revision Control in both the source and destination organization, you must use intransit if you ship from an organization with less control (i.e. Lot Control), to an organization with more control (i.e. Lot and Serial Control). • Receipt Routing For intransit transfers, you can choose from the following primary receipt routings: Standard receipt, Inspection required, or Direct delivery. • FOB Point Specify whether the destination organization takes ownership of transferred items when they are issued to intransit (Shipment), or when they are received out of intransit (Receipt). • Transfer Charge Type Specify how you want to apply transfer costs to the destination organization. Choose either a predefined or requested percentage of the transaction value or a fixed amount that represents an added value. Set Up a Customer Association To define your organization as the destination for an internal requisition, Order Management has to recognize you as a customer. See: Defining Locations, See: Creating and Updating Customers, Oracle Receivables User's Guide Online Processing Automation for Internal Requisitions Internal requisitions provide a number of options to automate processing. You can set up the following processes to run automatically as often as you like to limit online interaction and streamline p rocessing. • Reorder Point Planning Report • Min-Max Planning Report • Requisition Import • Create Internal Sales Orders • OrderImport Tip: Create a report group to run all requests back-to-back over specific time intervals when you are using internal requisitions for automatic subinventory transfers.
  • 265. Internal Requisitions Example Purchasing provides flexible internal requisitions that you can tailor to meet your needs. Review the example in this section to better understand howyou can use internal requisitions. You are not required to manage internal requisition activities exactly as described in the following example. Rather, the objective of these examples is to highlight the flexibility of internal requisitions across a variety of situations. Oracle Manufacturing recommends that you experiment and review the results of different approaches to determine the best implementation of the internal requisition functionality for your unique needs. You should use this example as a starting point to better understand how you might use internal requisitions. Example Overview Global Computers, Incorporated is a computer manufacturer with organizations in Austin,TX and Sacramento, CA. The Austin organization repetitively manufactures plastic components and uses the components,along with purchased items, to assemble base and cover assemblies in the Sacramento organization. Ownership of inter-organization transfers between Austin and Sacramento changes hands at the time of receipt (FOB Point: Receiving). The Sacramento organization uses the Austin base and cover assemblies to assemble configurations of Sentinel computers. Sacramento also has a local sales offices for customer visits and demonstrations.Your salespeople distribute sales brochures during cus tomer visits. Employees can request Sentinel Computers for their own use, as well as mouse pads and wrist pads for their offices. Define the following items at Global Computers: Item Description A54888 Sentinel Base Assembly Assembled in Austin, Sub Assembly of SentinelComputer, Internally Orderable in Austin, Default Source Typeof Inventory, Default Source Organization of Austin, Default Source Subinventory of Repetitive Assembly S86662 Sentinel Cover Assembly Sub Assembly of SentinelComputer, Assembled in Austin, Internally Orderable from Austin, Default Source Typeof Inventory, Default Source Organization of Austin, Default Source Subinventory of Repetitive Assembly S56302 Sentinel Computer Assembled in Sacramento, Internally Orderable by Employees C13139 Hard Drive Used in Sentinel Base Assembly S85773 Sales Brochure Purchased from external suppliers, Stocked at Sacramento for internal use, Limited quantities on hand at the sales office M1002 MousePad Purchased from external suppliers, Stocked at Sacramento for internal use M1002 Wrist Pad Purchased from external suppliers, Stocked at Sacramento for internal use Define the following subinventories at Global Computers: Organization Subinventory Austin AUS-FinishedGoods: Contains completed SentinelBase Assemblies, Contains completed SentinelCoverAssemblies, Tracked - asset subinventory Austin Repetitive Assembly: Contains Hard Drives for final assembly in WIP, Uses Min/Max replenishment to signal replenishment, Request from AUS-Stores subinventory Austin AUS-Stores:Contains additional supply of Hard Drives, Tracked - asset subinventory Organization Subinventory Sacramento SAC-FinishedGoods: Contains completed Sentinel Computers, Tracked - asset subinventory Sacramento SAC-Stores:Contains completed SentinelBase Assemblies shipped from Austin, Contains completed SentinelCoverAssemblies shipped from Austin, Tracked - asset subinventory Sacramento Office Supplies:Contains supply of Wrist Pads and Mouse Pads for internal use, Not tracked - expense subinventory Sacramento Storage:Central storage for excess Sales Brochures, Tracked - asset subinventory Sacramento Visit Center:Contains local supply of SalesBrochures for customer visits, Space for only 100 Sales Brochures, Not tracked - expense subinventory Inventory Replenishment Request (Manufacturing) You use one Hard Drive during the assembly of each Sentinel Base Assembly, and keep a limited supply of the Hard Drives in yourRepetitive Assembly subinventory.As you consume Hard Drives from the Repetitive Assembly, you want to automatically send inventory replenishment requests to transfer additional Hard Drives from your Stores subinventory.The material handler needs to receive the inventory request and transfer the material before you run into a shortage situation.You create a report group that submits the Min-Max Planning, Requisition Import, Create Internal Sales Orders, and OrderImport processes every two hours. As soon as the Hard Drive supply in the Repetitive Assembly subinventory drops below the minimum quantity,the next run of the Min-Max Planning process automatically creates a replenishment order for the reorder quantity. The reorder uses the item sourcing information to automatically create an intraorganization request in the Austin plant to move Hard Drives from Stores to the Repetitive Assembly subinventory.The request is automatically loaded as an internal requisition and an internal sales order, providing visibility of the request to the material handlers in the Austin plant. The material handler also runs Pick Release every two hours to identify the pull requests from the shop floor subinventory.The next run of Pick Release creates a move order line for the subinventory transferof Hard Drives. The material handler picks the
  • 266. Hard Drives out of the Stores subinventory,completes a ship confirmation and replenishes the Repetitive Assembly subinventory before a shortage occurs.At ship confirmation, the on-hand balances of the two subinventories are automatically updated. MRP Generated Inter-Organization Request (Manufacturing) You use Oracle Master Scheduling/MRP and Supply Chain Planning in Sacramento to schedule production of the final assembly of the Sentinel Computer. The Sentinel Base Assembly and Sentinel Cover Assembly are provided by the Austin organization, so you define these items as "buy" items in Sacramento. You also specify the following sourcing information for the item: • Source Type - Inventory • Source Organization - Austin • Source Subinventory - AUS-Finished Goods MasterScheduling/MRP recommends that you produce 400 Sentinel Computers to fulfill demand over the next four weeks (100 each week), and you only have 100 Sentinel Cover Assemblies and 100 Sentinel Base Assemblies on hand in Sacramento. You need five days to ship material from Austin to Sacramento, so the planner implements planned orders for 100 Sentinel Cover Assemblies and 100 Sentinel Base Assemblies for the next three weeks using the Planner Workbench. When the planner releases the planned orders for Sacramento, Master Scheduling/MRP automatically loads the Requisitions Open Interface and submits Requisition Import. Requisition Import uses the sourcing information that you set up to create a requisition line for each week sourced from the Austin AUS-Finished Goods subinventory.In the background, the Create Internal Sales Orders and OrderImport processes automatically load the internal sales order against the Austin organization. What if you have a three day production delay in Austin and you need to delay the third shipment of Sentinel Base Assemblies for a few days? Sacramento needs visibility to the delay to adjust the production schedules of the final assembly of the Sentinel Computers. In Austin, you can use the Sales Orders window to update the scheduled shipment date by three days,or choose a different freight carrier for faster delivery if you need to expedite the shipment to prevent a shortage in Sacramento. When you ship the third shipment from Austin, you can update the expected arrival date, giving the planner and MRP in Sacramento full visibility of supply changes. Each ship confirmation of the Sentinel Base Assemblies creates an intransit shipment from Austin to Sacramento. You do not require inspection of yourown inter-organization transfers,so the receiving clerk in Sacramento receives directly into the Final Assembly subinventory when the shipment arrives. The intransit inventory balance is automatically updated and the inter-organization accounting entries are created along with the receipt transaction. Inventory Replenishment Request (Office Stock Locations) In the Sacramento sales office, you use internal requisitions to replenish your stock of Requisitions 3-35 sales brochures in the Visit Center. Sales representatives use your brochures well, and most customers take brochures with them after the visit. You want easy access to brochures in the Visit Center, but only have room for 100 Sales Brochures. You typically use about 75 a week, but the number fluctuates with sales activity. Sales representatives take what they need; you do a stock count on Monday and Wednesday ofeach week and replenish whenever the stock count falls below 25. You need to define min-max information for the Sales Brochures that you stock in the Visit Center subinventory.Use the Item Subinventories window to specify a planning method of Min-max planning, a minimum quantity of 25, and a maximum quantity of 100. Requisition Import creates an approved internal requisition for subinventory transfers, and the sales order is automatically loaded. The material handler reviews the picking slip, pulls the 80 Sales Brochures from Storage Subinventory and delivers them to the Visit Center. After delivering the material the handler records the shipment using the Confirm Shipments window. The shipment, receipt, and delivery information is recorded at once, and the on-hand balance of the Storage subinventory is updated automatically. Inventory automatically creates the necessary accounting entries to reduce the overall value of Sales Brochures in the Storage subinventory and charges the accounts associated with the Visit Center subinventory. Online Request for Goods out of Inventory In Sacramento, you stocklow-cost office supplies on site to provide quick delivery to your employees. Employees can request items that are sourced from suppliers or inventory, but they do not know the source type at the time of the request. You also
  • 267. require internal requisitions to process requests for goods out of the stock locations. You have a company policy to always request items from Office Supplies whenever possible.You do not require any additional approvals, and a material handler picks the items out of inventory and delivers them directly to your office. A one day turnaround time is required for all internal requests. As a requestor, you want to order the following items to improve your comfort and productivity: • Sentinel Computer • Mouse Pad • Wrist Pad • Glare Screen (not stocked on site) Use the Requisitions window to create your request.Since company policy dictates that you request items from inventory whenever possible, the default requisition type is 3-36 Oracle Purchasing User's Guide Internal Requisition and the default source type is Inventory. When you create the four requisition lines for your items, Purchasing automatically uses the item sourcing information to source the Sentinel Computer from the SAC-Finished Goods subinventory.Since the Glare Screen can only be purchased from suppliers, Purchasing sets the source type to Supplier and uses yoursourcing rules and Approved Supplier List entries to determine the suggested supplierand document information. See: Automatic Sourcing, page 5-24. See: Approved Supplier List, page 5-35. Material handlers need immediate visibility of your requests to be able to deliver in 24 hours.The systemadministrator sets the Create Internal Sales Orders and OrderImport processes to run every hour for internal sales orders. The material handler in charge of the Office Supplies subinventory runs Pick Release twice a day to generate pick slips. The material handler reviews the picking slip, pulls the Mouse Pad and Wrist Pad from Storage and delivers them to youroffice. After getting your signature, the handler records the shipment using the Confirm Shipments window. The shipment, receipt, and delivery information is recorded at once, and the quantity delivered on the internal request is updated. Office Supplies is an expense subinventory,and the correct accounts are charged when you receive the supplies into this subinventory.Since you are sourcing from an expense subinventory,ship confirmation does not generate any accounting entries for the issue of the items from the Office Supplies subinventory to youroffice location. A separate material handler receives the Sentinel Computer request,and picks and ships it from the SAC-Finished Goods subinventory.When you complete the ship confirmation, Inventory automatically issues the Sentinel Computer out of the SAC-Finished Goods asset subinventory to the expense location listed on the requisition. Inventory and Purchasing also record the accounting transactions to credit the SAC-Finished Goods asset account and debits the appropriate charge account listed on the requisition. Finding Requisitions Use the Find Requisitions window to: • Access the Requisitions window. • Perform requisition inquiries at header, line, and distribution levels Depending on the function security assigned to your responsibility, you have varying levels of access to information. A responsibility defines an application user's current privileges while working with Oracle Applications.See: Function Security for Purchasing, page D-1. To entersearch criteria: 1. Navigate to the Find Requisitions window. Then enter as many as desired of the search criteria described in the following steps. 2. Select the Operating Unit for this search. 3. Enter the requisition number. If you enter a requisition number, you can also enter a Line number. 4. Select the requisition Type (Purchase or Internal). 5. Enter the Preparer. 6. Enter the Requestor. 7. Enter the Buyer. 8. Select Yes or No to restrict the search to Modified requisitions. 9. Enter the Reference Number. 10. Enter the Import Source. 11. Enter the Line Type. 12. Use the tabbed regions to further restrict the search: • In the Item region, you can enter the following search criteria: Item number, Revision number, Category, item Description, and Supplier Item number. • In the Status region, you can limit the search by Approval status (Approved, Incomplete, In Process, Pre-Approved, Rejected, or Returned), Control status
  • 268. (Open, Cancelled, or Finally Closed), or Reserved status (Yes or No). • In the Date Ranges region, you can enter date ranges for the following dates: Creation, Need By, and Closed. • In the Sourcing region, you can limit the search by Source (Supplier or Inventory). For Supplier sourced requisitions, you can further limit the search by Supplier, Site, and Currency. For Inventory sourced requisitions, you can further limit the search by Organization and Subinventory. If you have enabled vendored managed inventory, you can limit your search results to those items by checking the VMI box. • In the Deliver To region, you can limit the search by Destination Type (Expense, Inventory, or Shop Floor), Organization, Location, and (for Inventory destinations only) Subinventory. • In the Related Documents region, you can limit the search by Document Type, Document number and Line Number, Purchase Order number, and drop shipment Sales Order number. • In the Accounting region, you can limit the search by Period, GL Date, Charge Account,Budget Account,and whether there are Active Encumbrances (Yes or No). • In the Projects region, you can limit the search by Project or Task number. 13. Select the Results group (Headers, Lines, or Distributions) to determine which summary window to open. Depending on the search criteria you have specified, all summary windows may not be available. For example, if you specify criteria in the Accounting region, only the Distributions summary window is available. 14. Select the Find button to initiate the search and open the appropriate Summary window. To clearexisting search criteria: • Select the Clear button to clear any existing search criteria. To entera newrequisition: • Select the New button to open the Requisitions window. See: Entering Requisition Headers,
  • 269. Practice - Create Internal Requisitions Overview In order to use internal requisitions, you must have Oracle Inventory, Oracle Order Management,and Oracle Purchasing installed. Order Management is used to track internal sales orders. To enter an internal sales order, you must start with a requisition in Purchasing. Steps for this practice:  Create an internal requisition in Oracle Purchasing  Instructor will run processes in Oracle Order Management  Verify the shipment of your internal order in Oracle Purchasing R12: What Are The Steps Required To Setup An Internal Requisition In Purchasing? (Doc ID 1384716.1) Goal Solution Step 1 - Creating the Item Step 2 - Creating the Shipping Network Step 3 - Create the Internal Location Step 4 - Conduct a Miscellanies Transaction (Receipt) Step 5 - Create the Internal Customer - Assign the Location Step 6 - Item Price Information Step 7 - Creating the Requisition (PO Requisition Approval, Main Requisition Approval, PO Create Documents, Overall Document Creation/Launch Approval) Step 8 - Submitting the Create Internal Orders Concurrent Request Step 9 - Import the Internal Sales Order Step 10 - Execute Pick Release/Ship Confirm Step 11 - Conduct the Receipt in the Destination Organization Step 12 - Confirm the Quantity is Delivered SOLUTION Test case Scenario : The following setups will demonstrate the flow of an Internal Requisition between two inventory organizations. M1 - Seattle Manufacturing will represent the destination organization M2 - Boston Manufacturing will represent the source organization In this example, the item will be procured internally from the M2 - Boston Manufacturing inventory organization The following responsibilities are utilized in this example: Purchasing Super User (or equivalent) Order Management Super User, Vision Operations (USA) Inventory
  • 270. Step 1 - Creating the Item Purchasing Super User - Navigation: Items/MasterItems Enter the Item Name Ensure it is Purchased and Purchasable Enter the Item Name Ensure it is Purchased and Purchasable
  • 271. Select these attributes: Customer Ordered and Customer Orders Enabled Shippable Internal Ordered Internal Orders Enabled OE Transactable Assign the item to the inventory organizations which are involved in the Internal Requisitioning process. M1 will be the destination inventory organization and M2 will be the Source Inventory Organization.
  • 272. Step 2 - Creating the Shipping Network Inventory: Navigation: Setup/Organizations/Shipping Networks Enter the Inventory Organization that will be the Source and the scope should be From or To Organizations Choose the Transfer Type: Direct - means that when the Internal Sales Order is shipped the receipt process in the destination organization 1. is done automatically 2. Intransit - means that when the Internal Sales Order is shipped - the destination inventory organization has to manually do the receiving process in Purchasing Choose Internal Order Required checkbox - Save In this example, the setups are being done to allow the user to Enter a Receipt in SH1 after the item has been shipped from SH2 (Intransit). Please Note - If the Source and Destination Inventory Organizations are the same, then this step is conditionally not required. (Essentially the Item is being transferred between subinventories in the same Inventory Organization). Step 3 - Create the Internal Location Purchasing Super User: Setup/Organizations/Locations Enter a Location Name - for the Internal Location This is the location that is used as the Destination Location The Location will eventually be tied to a customer Choose the Other Details tab, enter the Inventory Organization for the Destination Organization. The location created will be used to tie the Destination Location in the requisition form to the Internal Customer to be used on the Sales Order form.
  • 273. Purchasing does not allow the entry of a Customer - therefore it passes the location to Order Management. During Order Import in Order Management - the systemlocates the Customer Record to which the Location is assigned.Associating the location to the customer record will be done in the later steps. Step 5 - Create the Internal Customer - Assignthe Location Order Management Super User: Navigation: Customers/Standard A web based form will open,choose the Create button in the lower left. Enter the Customer Name - in the Organization Name field. Choose the Profile Class that applies to the customer. Ex. Excellent.
  • 274. Scroll further down and enter the Address details for the Internal Customer. Move to the bottomof the form and under Business Purposes - Choose Add AnotherRow. Set the purpose for the new row as 'Ship To' Choose the Save and Add Details
  • 275. Move to the bottomof the page, and the address should be visible. Choose the Details icon The Account Site Information will appear, select the Business Purposes tab
  • 276. The Ship To and Bill To should now be visible. Select the Details icon to the right of the Ship To
  • 277. Under the Order Management section,there is a field 'Internal Location' Enter the Location that was created in Step 3 (Ex. M1-Internal Location) Apply and save the record PLEASE NOTE: The Customer must be created in the Operating Unit of the Source Inventory Organization that is used on the Internal Requisition. You can check the Operating Unit for the Source Inventory Organization by using the following sql: Select 'The Inventory Organization ' ||oo.organization_code||'has the inventory organization ID of ' ||oo.organization_id||' and is underthe Operating Unit' ||hro.name||' which has the Operating Unit ID of '||oo.operating_Unit from org_organization_definitions oo, hr_all_organization_units hro where upper(oo.organization_code) like upper('%&INV_ORG_CODE%') and hro.organization_id = oo.operating_unit; Pass in the Source Inventory Organization Code - and then ensure the Customer is created in the Operating Unit for the Source Inventory Organization. Step 6 - Item Price Information Purchasing Super User: Items/Master Items The price used on the requisition comes from the item costs section. Query back the item Choose from the top text menu - Tools/ItemCosts The screen to follow shows the item price that is used when creating the Internal Requisition. This is how purchasing derives the price when creating the Internal Requisition. It uses the price for the Cost - in the Source Inventory Organization. Whateverthe price is in the Source Inventory Organization used on the requisition - the price is derived. The reason is that the Sales Order is being created in the Source Organization, so the price in the Source Organization must be used. Step 7 - Creating the Requisition Purchasing Super User: Navigation - Requisitions/Requisitions
  • 278. In the Order Type Field - change the Order Type to Internal Click into the Lines Region on the Item field At this point - look to the Destination fields - this information is fetched from the Employee Record If the Destination Inventory Organization is not proper - move to that field and change it If the Location is not the internal location - move to that field and change it to the new Internal Location Approve the requisition. Question: Why is the Following Error message encountered : 'Destination location requires customer association.' The reason for this error is that the code is trying to match the Location that is currently entered on the form to a customer, and the customer association is not found. This was done earlier in step 5. The solution to this error is to setup the employee record to default a location that was associated with a customer (as in step 5 above) or prior to entering the item, move to the destination section of the form and enter an inventory organization and location that is properly assigned to a customer, followed with entry of the item. Question: Why is the Source Inventory Organization Not showing the inventory organization which was setup in the shipping networks? If the internal requisition is going to be for a cross operating unit scenario - then it should be noted that the HR: Security Profile is used. Both operating units for which the inventory organizations belong too must exist in the HR: Security Profile. To confirm the operating units for the inventory organizations - this sql can be used: SELECT oo.operating_Unit OU_id, hro.name Oper_Unit, oo.organization_code inv_org FROM org_organization_definitions oo, hr_all_organization_units hro WHERE oo.organization_id in (207, 204) and hro.organization_id = oo.operating_unit; Confirm that the operating units in the given output exist in the security profile that is set for the HR: Security Profile - profile. Step 8 - Submitting the Create Internal Orders Concurrent Request Purchasing Super User: Navigation - Reports/Run
  • 279. This process is responsible for inserting data into the Order Management interface Tables. One of the fields that is inserted is the location_id - and because Order Management uses Customers rather than locations - this is why it is mandatory to assign the Internal Location to the Customer. The location that is passed from purchasin g is correlated to a customer so as to allow the Order Import to run successfully. Please note that the calculate_price_flag is inserted as N into the Order Management interface tables. This means that Purchasing is going to pass the price and it will not be impacted or recalculated when imported into Order Management. This is proper functionality. We are currently tracking on Enhancement Request Bug 3095239 that would allow the use of an Int ernal Price List.
  • 280. The following sql can be used to review the data in the oe_iface tables. SELECT * FROM OE_HEADERS_IFACE_ALL WHERE order_source_id = 10 AND orig_sys_document_refIN (SELECT REQUISITION_HEADER_ID FROM PO_REQUISITION_HEADERS_ALL WHERE segment1 = '&requisition_number'); SELECT * FROM OE_LINES_IFACE_ALL WHERE order_source_id = 10 AND orig_sys_document_refIN (SELECT REQUISITION_HEADER_ID FROM PO_REQUISITION_HEADERS_ALL WHERE segment1 = '&requisition_number'); Pass in the requisition number when prompted. Question: How can the interface data for Internal Requisitions be viewed in the Order Management Module? This is possible using the Order Management Responsibility - and navigating to Orders>Import Orders>Corrections Choose an order type of Internal In Order Reference use the List of Values to locate the Requisition Number If the Requisition is not located - it has either been created into a Sales Order or not inserted into the tables by the Create Internal Orders program The records are viewable at this stage and can be deleted. PLEASE NOTE - if records are going to be deleted, it is necessary to Delete the Lines first and then the header Be sure to choose Lines first - and then choose the delete icon from the toolbar - then delete the header Deletion of the header record will NOT delete the line - it is not a cascade delete option. If the headeris deleted prior to the line - it is not possible to ever again locate the line in this form - sqlplus will have to be used to remove the line. Enhancement Bug 4966920 has been created to improve this form and add the cascade delete functionality and now is implemented with the following Patch 13702362 - AFTER HEADER IS DELETED, ORPHAN DATA IS LEAVED IN SALES ORDER INTERFACE TABLES>>
  • 281. Question: How can the Internal Requisition be resubmitted to the Order Management interface tables? In the po_requisition_headers_alland po_requisition_lines_all table there is a column 'transferred_to_o e_flag'. Setting this column to a value of 'N' followed with a run of the Create Internal Orders process will again post the requisition data into the Order Management interface tables.There are currently no options available through the Oracle Purchasing forms that allow the updating of this flag, so sqlplus would have to be used. Question (Problem): When Running the Create Internal Sales Order Process - it completes with Success But no records are inserted into the Order Management Interface Tables? When the internal requisition is created the code needs to validate that the customer was created in the Operating Unit that the Source Inventory Organization belongs too. When the Create Internal Sales Order process runs,if the Deliver to Location is not tied to a Customer Ship To Site in the Operating Unit of the Source Inventory Organization used on the requisition - then it will not insert data into the oe_headers_iface and oe_lines_iface table. Please review the previous step 5 and use the sql given to ensure that the Customer was created in the Operating Unit that be longs to the Source Inventory Organization. For this example, it would be required to check the Purchasing Options for the Operating Unit which M2 is belonging too. VERY IMPORTANT ALSO REGARDING Create Internal Orders In Release 12 you must make sure that you are choosing an Order Type in the Purchasing Options - that was created in the SAME operating unit for the Purchasing Options you are setting up. Ex. If you are in the Germany Purchasing Options - then ensure you choose a Order Management Order Type that was created in Germany Order Management. BEWARE - The list of values for Order Type is showing Transaction Types from other Operating Units. So, if you are in Germany Purchasing Options and then choose a France Created Transaction Type - no Records will be inserted during the Create Internal Orders Process.This is fixed in Release 12.1.1 and beyond. Also, remember that whatever the Source Inventory Organization that is used on the Internal Requisition - the purchasing options must be setup for that Source Organizations
  • 282. Operating Unit. So if the internal requisition has two inventory organizations from different Operating Units - ensure the Purchasing Options have been setup for both of the Inventory Organizations Operating Units - as the code is going to check the Purchasing Options from the operating unit of the Source Organization to obtain the Order Type to use - as the Sales Order is going to be created in the Source Organizations Operating Unit. Question: Does the Purchasing Create Internal Orders process pass flexfield values from the Purchase Requisition? Currently, the Create Internal Orders process does not pass any values from flexfields. If there are mandatory/required flexfields setup on the Order Lines table in Order Management, a value will have to be defaulted as a default value from some other method in order for the import process to complete successfully. Step 9 - Import the Internal Sales Order Order Management Super User: Navigation: Orders ,Returns/Import Orders/Order Import Request Enter these values: Operating Unit - Operating Unit of the Source Inventory Organization (Ex. M2) Order Source - Internal (or the order type being used Order Reference - Requisition Number Submit the request.Confirm that it completes. Navigating to Orders, Returns/Order Organizer
  • 283. Enter the requisition number in the Find form Confirm that the Internal Sales Order was created from the import
  • 284. Question: Can the price be updated adjusted during the Order Import? The calculate price flag is frozen and the price cannot be changed.This is based on the values inserted by the Create Internal Orders process from Purchasing. Question: Where is the schedule Ship Date coming from? The scheduled ship date is passed from the requisition Need By Date, it cannot be defaulted any differently. Question: How is the Order Type being chosen? This is coming from the Purchasing Options - Responsibility Purchasing Super User - Setup/Organizations/Purchasing Options. The following queries can be used to confirm that the Internal Sales Order was created. SELECT * FROM OE_ORDER_HEADERS_ALL WHERE order_source_id = 10 AND orig_sys_document_refIN (SELECT REQUISITION_HEADER_ID FROM PO_REQUISITION_HEADERS_ALL WHERE segment1 = '&requisition_number'); SELECT * FROM OE_ORDER_LINES_ALL WHERE order_source_id = 10 AND orig_sys_document_refIN (SELECT REQUISITION_HEADER_ID FROM PO_REQUISITION_HEADERS_ALL WHERE segment1 = '&requisition_number'); Pass the requisition number into the script when prompted. Step 10 - Execute Pick Release/Ship Confirm Set Shipping Role For User
  • 285. Order Management Super User: Shipping/Transactions Enter the field - From Order Number - give the Internal Sales Order Choose Find From the Actions - choose Launch Pick Release Once the Pick Release has been completed, requery the Internal Sales Order in the shipping transactions form.
  • 286. The field 'Next Step' should now be showing Ship Confirm. Choose the Delivery tab While in the Delivery form, choose actions 'Ship Confirm'
  • 287. The Ship Confirm submission form appears. Ship Entered Quantities Create Delivery for Staged quantities Close Trip The selections above were all defaulted into the ship confirm submission form. Choose OK. Requiring the record shows that the Next Step is to Run Interfaces. This represents running the Interface Trip Stop process. In this example, the Interface Trip Stop ran automatically.
  • 288. Navigation: Shipping/Interfaces/Run - Interface Trip Stop If required, run the Interface Trip Stop process for the Trip that was created. Confirm that it completes with success. The shipping process in M2 will also automatically create the receipt in M1 - if the Shipping Network was setup to have a transfer type of Direct. For this example, Intransit was used to as to be able to demonstrate the receiving process. Step 11 - Conduct the Receipt in the Destination Organization Purchasing Super User: Receiving/Receipts Upon entering the Receiving form, search based on the requisition number.
  • 289. Select the line for Receipt - and save the record. The Receiving Transaction Processor will be engaged and the item will be transacted into the M1 - Destination Inventory Organization.
  • 290. Navigating to Receiving/Receiving Transactions Summary - it is possible to search on the requisition and view the completed Receiving Transactions. Step 12 - Confirm the Quantity is Delivered Purchasing Super User: Requisitions/Requisition Summary Querying the requisition lines, it is possible to view the quantity delivered - giving confirmation that the Sales Order was shipped from the source inventory organization (M2) and receipted into the destination inventory organization (M1).
  • 291. Additional Scenario Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only The Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process is a workflow process is used for order lines that do not require shipping. The Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process is used in a situation when only a bill for the order must be generated. The process contains severalsubprocessesto ensure that the order line is properly entered, invoiced, fulfilled, and closed. When you save an order line in Oracle Order Management, the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process verifies that the order is booked before proceeding. Once booking is verified, the process continues with invoicing, fulfillment, and closing. Several of these actions are performed in the following workflow subprocesses contained in Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only: • Enter - Line • Invoice Interface • Close - Line Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only ends once the line is successfully closed.The only process is contained in the Seeded Data File oexwford.wft, page 1-6 and is associated with the OM Order Line, page 6-6 item type. Summary of the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only Process To view the properties of the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process,select the process in the navigator tree and then select Properties from the Edit menu. This process is runnable, which indicates that it can be assigned to a transaction type. The Details property page of the process activity indicates that the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process has an error item type of WFERROR. This item type is associated with the RETRY_ONLY error process.The purpose of this error handling process is to alert an administrator when an error occurs in a process and prompt the administrator to retry the process in error. This error process is initiated only when an unexpected error with Oracle Workflow is encountered in the process. When you display the Process window for the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only, you see that the process consists of2 unique activities and 3 subprocesses,which comprise the 5 nodes that appear in the workflow diagram. The following diagram depicts the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process. Each node of this process is numbered for referencing. Line Flow - Generic, Bill OnlyWorkflow The Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only workflow begins at node 1 with the Enter - Line, page 5-39 subprocess. This subprocess verifies that the order is booked before proceeding with the remainder of the workflow. The process attempts to fulfill the order at node 2. At node 3, the Invoice Interface - Line, Deferred, subprocess is initiated. This subprocess moves the invoice interface to the background engine. The process initiates the Close - Line, subprocess at node 4. After the line is successfully closed,the process ends at node 5. Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only Activities The following table provides descriptions of each activity in the Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only process. For more information about individual activities, refer to Seeded Function Activity Definitions, page 6-1. Line Flow - Generic, Bill OnlyActivities Activity Function Result Type Required Fulfill OE_FULFILL_WF.ST ART_FULFILLMENT None Yes Seeded Workflow Definitions 4-35 Activity Function Result Type Required End WF_STANDARD.NO OP None Yes Line Flow - Standard Service Line Flow - Generic, Bill Only with Payment Assurance